Vehicle Manual

_________________________________________________________________________________

Issue Date: March 2025

Last updated on: March 2025

Issued by: Mahindra Electric Automobile Limited (hereinafter appearing as “Mahindra”)

NOTE: Carefully read, understand and follow the instructions provided in this Vehicle Manual. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the use or care of your vehicle, please refer to the Vehicle Manual and / or visit your Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance or advice.

Please note that this Vehicle Manual contains a list of all the features available in the BE 6 vehicles. However, not all features are enabled in each variant of the BE 6 vehicles. Therefore, please refer to only those features which are enabled for the particular variant of the BE 6 vehicle purchased by you. For more information on the features available for the variant of BE 6 vehicle purchased by you, contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

Information provided in the Vehicle Manual is explicit at the time of publication. However, as Mahindra continues to make changes and improve products, it reserves the right to make changes in the Vehicle Manual or any product at any time, without notice and without any obligations.

The Vehicle Manual serves as a reference for the safe use and maintenance of your BE 6. It does not grant or imply any warranty or guarantee unless the vehicle is officially sold to a customer and registered as per applicable law and as per Mahindra’s policies. Therefore any mention to ‘warranties / warranty’ or the ‘Warranty & Service Information Guide (WSIG)” in the Vehicle Manual placed in BE 6 vehicles or the more detailed Vehicle Manuals does not grant any warranty rights to the recipients of the BE 6 Vehicles unless the vehicles are sold to the customers as per applicable law and as per Mahindra’s policies.

Mahindra Electric Automobile Limited., Mahindra Towers, Pandurang Budhkar Marg, Worli, Mumbai 400018, Maharashtra

www.mahindraelectricsuv.com

1 General and Safety Information

Introduction to Your Vehicle

Congratulations on choosing a BE 6, a symbol of innovation, sustainability, and the future of mobility. Unlike traditional vehicles, your BE 6 is designed from the ground up as an electric vehicle, ensuring that every aspect–from performance to efficiency–reflects the cutting-edge advancements in electric mobility.

Your Born Electric Vehicle is more than just a mode of transportation; it's a commitment to reducing your carbon footprint without compromising on driving pleasure.

Powered entirely by electricity, it offers zero-emission driving, a quieter and smoother ride, and instant torque for an exhilarating driving experience.

This vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art battery system, advanced regenerative braking, and smart connectivity features that make every drive more efficient and enjoyable.

Whether you're commuting to work or embarking on a long road trip, your BE 6 is engineered to provide a seamless and intuitive experience.

In this manual, you'll find detailed information on the features and operations of your BE 6 , as well as tips on how to maximize its range, charge efficiently, and take full advantage of its technological capabilities. Please note that this manual contains a list of all the features available in the BE 6 vehicles. However, not all features are enabled in each variant of the BE 6 vehicles. Therefore, please refer to only those features which are enabled for the particular variant of the BE 6 vehicle purchased by you. For more information on the features available for the variant of BE 6 vehicle purchased by you, contact your Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

This manual along with the Quick Reference Vehicle Manual (together the ‘Vehicle Manual’) serves as a reference for the safe use and maintenance of your BE 6. It does not grant or imply any warranty or guarantee unless the vehicle is officially sold to a customer and registered as per applicable law and as per Mahindra’s policies. Please note Mahindra, including its directors, officers or key managerial personnels, do not carry any liability arising due to any action or inaction, with respect to your vehicle, on your part that may not be in accordance with, or in contradiction of, the Vehicle Manual, WSIG and any other ancillary documents that may be provided to you with your BE 6.

We encourage you to explore the following pages to become familiar with the innovative features that make your BE 6 vehicle truly exceptional.

Warranty Disclaimer

Mahindra shall not be liable for any indirect, incidental or consequential damages arising from improper vehicle usage, unauthorised modifications, or failure to adhere to the explanations, warnings and guidelines set out in the Vehicle Manual.

Welcome to the future of driving.

1.1 Safety Symbols

To get a detailed understanding of all the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc. carefully read, understand and follow the safety symbols/ instructions given in this manual.

Legend of the Symbols: To emphasis the information and procedures regarding safety, use, maintenance, etc., the following symbols are used throughout the manual:

DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury and all occupants must evacuate the vehicle immediately.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury and/or property damage.

NOTICE indicates important information relevant to the vehicle, the vehicle's use or to sections of this manual to which particular attention must be paid for optimum use of the vehicle.

If you see this symbol, it indicates “no,” “ do not,” “do not do this,” or “never”.

1.2 INGLO Platform

INGLO is an ‘electric-origin’ Architecture. Unlike many mainstream EVs adapted from traditional combustion-engine designs, INGLO was built exclusively for electric vehicles. This difference fundamentally changes the way the vehicle performs and feels.

INGLO was designed with modularity, scalability, and versatility.

This electric-origin approach also enables us to design one of the lightest skateboard structures in the industry, paired with high-density battery technology. This foundation allows us to optimize every inch of space, enhance stability, and maximize performance, which means you, our customers, will experience a drive that is lighter, more agile, and yet incredibly spacious and comfortable.

1.3 Vehicle Power and Charging Information

Your BE 6 is equipped with a high-voltage (HV) battery pack, approximately 409 V/307 V, which powers the vehicle. The vehicle must be charged before driving, as the battery stores energy needed for operation.

Once the ignition is turned ON, the battery begins to discharge gradually. If the battery charge is depleted completely (0%), the vehicle will not be able to drive until the battery is recharged.

Charging times may vary based on the current state of charge (SOC) of the battery and environmental conditions. For detailed information on how to charge the battery, please refer to the "Charging" section.

Your vehicle features an Integrated Electronic Booster with ABS and ESP, along with regenerative braking for added efficiency.

Your vehicle is eco-friendly and produces no toxic emissions, such as carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, or nitrogen oxide.

Since the electric motor is quiet, you may hear sounds from the tires, wind, and other external sources. During charging, you might also hear noises from the fan, compressor, contactor, and relay.

Always check and ensure enough SOC is available in the HV battery before starting the journey. Verify the same with the help of "State of charge (SOC)" & "Range" values displayed in the Driver Information Display (DID).

It is recommended to let the vehicle reach a full 100% state of charge (SoC) before ending the charging session.

Pay special attention to the pedestrians since there is no engine noise. The pedestrian may not know that the vehicle is approaching or moving or about to move, and can step into the path of vehicle travel.

Virtual Engine Sound Simulators (VESS) available in the vehicle can be enabled for more safety. Refer “Virtual Engine Sound Simulators (VESS)” content for more details.

For preventing damage to the HV battery pack:

•

Never allow the HV battery to be fully discharged.

•

Discharging the HV battery to 0% may cause damage to vehicle components. Persistent deep discharges can cause permanent battery degradation.

•

Do not leave the vehicle at 100% SOC for prolonged periods, as it may reduce battery longevity.

•

Always charge in a well- ventilated area, away from flammable materials.

•

Do not use the Battery as a stationary power source. This will void the warranty.

•

Do not expose the vehicle to very high or freezing temperatures for longer duration.

•

Do not use High-Voltage (HV) battery for any other purpose, consult your Mahindra Authorised or manufacturer for help.

If you let the battery discharge to 0%, other components may be damaged or need to be replaced (Ex., Low voltage battery).

In these cases, you are liable for repair and/or transportation costs.

The warranty does not cover discharge-related expenses.

BE 6 uses high voltage and current. Failure to follow the proper handling instructions may cause serious injury or death.

BE 6 cannot be push started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause internal power train/ motor damage.

BE 6 uses high voltage systems, these systems may be hot during charging & driving, also sometimes in shut off condition. Be careful of both the high voltage and the high temperature. Obey the labels that are attached to the vehicle.

Never disassemble, remove or replace high-voltage parts and cables as well as their connectors. High voltage cables are colored orange.

Connecting unauthorized electrical accessories is not recommended.

Disassembling, removing or replacing HV components or cables can cause severe burns or electric shock that may result in serious injury or death. The vehicle high voltage system has no user serviceable parts. Take your vehicle to the Mahindra Authorized Dealer for any necessary maintenance/repair.

•

Ensure to apply the parking brake before turning off the ignition and take the key out of the vehicle before leaving.

•

Always engage the parking brake before getting out of the vehicle

•

Strictly do not allow untrained / non designated people to access EV system and appraise first responders that this vehicle is an Electric Vehicle, in case of any kind of unexpected incident/ events

•

The vehicle will not run with completely discharged battery. At low SOC avoid continuous & (frequent acceleration and deceleration) this will result in higher energy consumption. Try to maintain a steady speed with moderate acceleration for getting the maximum efficiency.

•

Driving in down gradient, when accelerator pedal is released, regenerative braking will provide some energy to recharge battery pack and simultaneously assists in deceleration.

•

You may hear some sounds and feel vibrations during the drive this is normal;

–

Traction motor makes lighter sound during its operation, also will be higher in deceleration of vehicle.

–

The HV contactor produces a ‘tak’ noise when the vehicle is switched ON or OFF.

–

AC compressor makes sound while in operation

•

If the ambient temperature is between –10 °C to 0 °C, there will be a considerable increase in charging time, also performance drop during drive

•

The Performance of battery will decrease with time and usage. This does not indicate any defect in the battery pack.

•

Once the HV battery pack has reached its end of life, its charge holding capacity reaches below specific level, it may require an inspection from Mahindra Authorised Dealer and may require battery pack replacement.

•

It is recommended and mandatory that during the process of battery or vehicle / components disposal, the owner should contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for guidance and information on recycling or proper disposal without causing any environmental pollution.

If the vehicle cannot be assessed for extent of damage, do not touch vehicle and contact nearest Authorized service center or the customer care executive for Mahindra support.

Don’t carry out any welding work on vehicle outside Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Any repair, servicing, or modification outside Mahindra-authorized service centers may void your warranty for those affected systems.

1.4 Additional Safety Precautions

In BE 6 “Drive enable” does not get activated and vehicle will not move unless charge gun is unplugged from charge port.

It is recommended to apply park brake before switching OFF the ignition and before leaving the vehicle.

The vehicle should be driven within 20 kmph speed on speed breakers and rough roads to avoid damage to the battery pack under the vehicle.

Tyres used in the vehicle are tubeless, designed for all weather conditions. They provide the best driving range with improved road grip.

In case of vehicle shutdown contact Mahindra Authorised Dealership.

1.5 End Of Life - Disposal

As this is an electric vehicle, many electric and electronic parts are used in its system. It should be disposed without causing pollution to the environment.

Your vehicle contains a sealed LFP-Blade type high voltage battery. If the battery is disposed improperly, there is a risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in serious injury or death and there is also a risk of environmental damage.

Composition

BE 6 is made from Steel, Aluminum, Lead, Copper, Wood, Other plastics, Glass, Rubber and miscellaneous components. Some of these component are reusable by recycling while others are hazardous to the environment and living beings Hence, such components are to be disposed of as per local pollution board regulations.

Disposal

•

Since batteries contain chemical compounds and solvents as electrolytes which can be harmful to the environment, they must be disposed of in accordance with local pollution control regulations. Improper disposal may result in legal consequences, environmental harm, or personal injury.

•

Similarly, ABS and other plastic panels and materials should be disposed of through accredited agencies for proper recycling.

•

Most other materials are reusable, so components should be sorted into hazardous and non-hazardous categories and disposed of through accredited recycling agencies. It is recommended to contact Mahindra Authorised Service center for proper disposal.

•

The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting from improper disposal of batteries or other vehicle components. Owners should consult Mahindra Authorised Dealers for appropriate recycling or disposal services.

The BE 6 has a sealed LFP-Blade type battery pack. Improper disposal of battery could lead to risk of severe burns and electrical shock that may result in serious injury or death and also may cause damage to environment.

1.6 General Safety Information and Instructions

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions provided in this manual could result in failure of the vehicle, an accident and/or serious personal injury for which the company assumes no liability..

Carefully read, understand and follow the warnings and instructions given in this manual. This manual is an essential part of the product. Keep it in the vehicles glove box for future reference

Never use mobile phones or Infotainment while driving. This may take your focus off the road and lead to accidents

Please be advised that many service and repair tasks require specialized knowledge, tools and experience. General mechanical skill set may not be sufficient to properly service or repair your vehicle with 350 DC volt. If you have any doubt whatsoever regarding the ability to properly service or repair your vehicle, please contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays or wear in the seat belt webbing, or loose buckles, retractors, anchors or other loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately by an authorized service centre.

Examine tyres for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread and check sidewalls for any cuts, cracks, or other signs of wear. The customer should not operate/ attempt to remove the objects but get it checked by the authorized dealer/ service centre.

Always maintain the safety labels affixed to your vehicle in a good legible condition

All signal lamps, buzzers, shields, guards and other protective safety devices must always remain in place and in good, proper working conditions

The life span of Mahindra products depends on many factors. Improper use, abuse or harsh use in general may compromise the integrity of the vehicle and significantly reduce its life span. The vehicle is also subject to wear over a period of time. Please have your vehicle regularly inspected by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer. If the inspection reveals any damage or excessive wear, immediately replace or have the component serviced

We strongly recommend that you use only genuine parts supplied by Mahindra to ensure the continued performance, safety, and reliability of your vehicle. The use of non-Mahindra parts, modifications, or non-genuine accessories is strictly discouraged, as it may compromise the vehicle's functionality and safety. Mahindra shall not be liable for any issues, damages, or consequences arising from the use of non-genuine parts, modifications, or unauthorized accessories, and such use will not be covered under warranty.

10.

Never crawl under or never place your hands, feet, be in close proximity to the vehicle or any part of your body under a raised vehicle when it is supported solely by a jack. Mahindra strongly advises against crawling under or being in close proximity to the vehicle when it is lifted off the ground, unless the vehicle is securely supported with jack stands, wheel chocks, and other appropriate safety devices. Always prioritize safety and follow proper procedures when working on or around a raised vehicle

11.

Never attempt any adjustments to any component while the vehicle is in motion. Always turn off the ignition and keep the vehicle key away before making any adjustments.

12.

The vehicle identification plates are the only legal identification reference, hence it is necessary to keep them in good condition. Never modify data on the plates or remove them. The customer is responsible for any possible tampering with the plates, which will immediately void the warranty

13.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When the vehicle is fully loaded, drive at a slow speed, especially when turning. Note that the center of gravity of the vehicle changes when the vehicle is fully loaded, and also if luggage is mounted on the roof carrier

1.7 To Users of a Mahindra Vehicle

When driving the vehicle after long periods of non-usage, you may experience a temporary drive disturbance. This is a characteristic of the tyres and there should be no reason for any concern. The condition should correct itself within 5-15 km of driving. If the disturbance persists, have the vehicle checked immediately by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

Driving and Alcohol: Your driving ability can be seriously impaired by alcohol even if the blood alcohol level is far below the legal minimum. Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents.

Never drink and drive. Drinking and driving may lead to an accident

Driving and Drugs/Medication

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired through the use of prescription or non-prescription drugs or medication (even cough syrup). If you are taking any sort of drug or medication, be sure that it will not affect your driving ability.

Mobile Phones Warning

Use of electronic devices such as mobile phones, handheld devices, computers, portable radios or other by the driver while driving is dangerous. In exceptional conditions, if use of a mobile phone is necessary, use a hands-free system to ensure that the hands are free to drive the vehicle. Even hands-free does not ensure distraction free drive. Please comply with the legal regulations in your country, concerning the use of communication equipment in vehicles .

Driving Long Distances

When you are driving over long distances, follow these tips so that you have a safe journey:

•

Take breaks at regular intervals

•

Lack of sleep or fatigue will impact your ability to drive safely

•

Exercise your eyes by shifting the focus of your eyes to different parts of the road

•

Use stimulating beverages such as coffee or tea

•

Relax and stay calm

1.8 Mahindra Genuine Parts

Mahindra uses high quality parts for building vehicles. In the event that any parts need replacement, we recommend that you use only Mahindra genuine parts.

Non-Mahindra parts may effect the vehicle performance and will not be covered under Mahindra warranty.

Any unauthorized modifications or alterations to this vehicle or failure to use appropriate specification and quality spare parts could seriously affect vehicle road worthiness and safety leading to an accident, resulting in serious injury

1.9 Mahindra Genuine Accessories

A wide selection of quality accessories is available through your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. These accessories have been specifically engineered to allow you to personalize your vehicle to suit your requirements and complement its style and aerodynamic appearance.

Each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets Mahindra's rigid engineering and safety specifications. Every Mahindra accessory installed according to the Mahindra installation provisions comes with the respective accessory warranty.

Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for detailed information about accessories available for your specific model variant.

For maximum vehicle performance and safety considerations, always keep the following information in mind:

•

The company shall not be liable / responsible for any damages / injuries, including consequential damages / injuries, resulting due to fitment of unauthorised aftermarket accessories and / or tapping / cutting wires in the wiring harness When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front and rear axle. Consult Mahindra Authorised Dealer for specific weight information

•

Bull bars and nudge guards are not recommended

•

Accessories causing any change in vehicle specifications like wheel rims, bull bars, etc., may affect the performance of safety systems

•

Mobile communication systems such as two-way radios, telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters and installed in your vehicle should comply with the local regulations and should be installed only by your Mahindra Authorised Dealer they can potentially affect the vehicle performance.

1.10 Vehicle Safety

When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:

•

Always turn OFF the ignition before parking the vehicle

•

Do not leave any valuables in your vehicle. If you must leave something in your vehicle, hide them and securely lock all the doors

•

Close all the windows completely and lock all the doors

•

Please lock and take the key fob with you

When Sleeping in Your Vehicle

•

Do not sleep in a parked vehicle with closed windows. In particular, if you stay or sleep in the parked vehicle and the air conditioner or heater turned on, you may suffocate to death

Hazardous Materials: Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode and cause a fire.

Fire Extinguisher: For safety, we strongly recommend that you have fire extinguisher in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with how to use it

Only class ‘ABC’ type fire extinguishers to be used. Only Class ‘D’ and Class ‘ABC’ type fire extinguishers to be used.

When Passing the Intersection or Railway Crossing

When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the vehicle to check the safety and drive through carefully. If the vehicle is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway crossing, get someone to help you and move the vehicle to a safe place quickly.

Do Not Modify This Vehicle: If unauthorised modifications are made on the vehicle, Mahindra is not liable for repairing the modified parts even during the term of warranty. Other part problems caused by modification are also not covered. Additionally, Mahindra shall, in no circumstance whatsoever, be liable for any damage, malfunctions, or safety risks resulting from such unauthorized modifications are not covered under warranty.

•

The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of precision parts that have passed through countless experiments and tests.

•

These parts are deeply and systematically interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered without authorization, it may underperform or cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life

•

Mahindra does not accept liability for any personal injury, death, or vehicle damage resulting from unauthorized modifications or the use of non-approved parts and accessories.

Protecting Our Environment: As responsible citizens, all of us have an important role to play in protecting our environment. Judicious vehicle usage and ensuring hazardous waste disposal (including cleaning and lubrication fluids) are important steps towards this initiative.

Body Repairs: In the event of a collision involving an electric vehicle, safety is paramount. Avoid contact with high voltage cables (orange colored), damaged battery components or leaking fluids, as these can be toxic or conductive.

Be aware that airbags may deploy even after the vehicle is stationary, and high-voltage battery is automatically disconnected in severe collisions to reduce risks. Occupants should exit the vehicle immediately if it is safe to do so and move to a safe distance, avoiding re-entry unless absolutely necessary.

After the collision, notify Roadside Assistance that an electric vehicle is involved, and do not attempt to charge the vehicle until it has been inspected by a qualified Mahindra technician.

Only a flatbed is allowed for towing to prevent further damage, and have the vehicle towed to a Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

1.11 Disclaimers

1.11.1 Event Data Recorder (EDR)

Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a intrusion, unauthorised entry, etc occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (for example, name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with person identifying data they routinely acquire during a crash investigation.

1.11.2 Vehicle Telematics

The vehicle is equipped with electronic modules that monitor and record data from various vehicle systems, including the motor, Autopilot components, Battery, braking and electrical systems.

The electronic modules record information about various driving and vehicle conditions, including braking, acceleration, trip and other related information regarding your vehicle. These modules also record information about the vehicle’s features such as charging events and status, the enabling/disabling of various systems, diagnostic trouble codes, VIN, speed, direction and location.

The data is stored by the vehicle and may be accessed, used and stored by Mahindra service technicians during vehicle servicing or periodically transmitted to Mahindra wirelessly through the vehicle’s telematics system in compliance with Mahindra’s Privacy Policy.

This data may be used by Mahindra for various purposes, including, but not limited to: providing you with Mahindra telematics services; troubleshooting; evaluation of your vehicle’s quality, functionality and performance; analysis and research by Mahindra and its partners for the improvement and design of our vehicles and systems; to defend Mahindra from legal action; and as otherwise may be required by law or any judicial authority, including any tribunals. In servicing your vehicle, Mahindra can potentially resolve issues remotely simply by reviewing your vehicle’s data log.

Mahindra’s telematics system, wirelessly transmits vehicle information to Mahindra on a periodic basis. The data is used as previously described and helps ensure the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Additional features may use your vehicle’s telematics system and the information provided, including features such as charging reminders, software updates, and remote access to, and control of, various systems of your vehicle.

Mahindra does not disclose the data recorded in your vehicle to any third party except when:

•

An agreement or consent from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained.

•

Officially requested by the police or other judicial authorities.

•

Used as a defense for Mahindra in legal proceedings.

•

Ordered by a court of law including a tribunal.

•

Used for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner or identification information.

•

Disclosed to a Mahindra affiliated company, including their successors or assigns, or our information systems and data management providers.

•

To access the Privacy Policy please visit www.mahindraelectricsuv.com.

1.11.3 Data Sharing

Note: Although BE6 GPS is associated with driving and operation, as discussed in this document, Mahindra does not record or store vehicle-specific GPS information, except the location where a crash occurred.

Consequently, Mahindra is unable to provide historical information about a vehicle's location (for example, Mahindra is unable to tell you where parked/traveling at a particular date/time).

To access the Privacy Policy please visit www.mahindraelectricsuv.com.

1.11.4 Feature Availability Statement

Note: In view of our policy of continuously improving our products, Mahindra reserves the right to make changes or modifications to specifications, designs, features, this manual, or any product at any time, including alterations to the design of the vehicle or its components, without prior notice. Such changes may be implemented without incurring any obligation or liability to incorporate them in vehicles sold prior to the changes. We recommend referring to the Variant Matrix on the official Mahindra website or contacting your nearest Authorized Mahindra Dealer for the most up-to-date list of features and specifications applicable to your vehicle.

The vehicle's software and security measures are subject to ongoing development. Similar to computers and mobile device operating systems, the software and security features of the vehicle might also receive updates from time to time.

1.12 Software Update

For the latest software download and install procedure refer Vehicle Manual

2 Overview

2.1 Front Overview

A	Turn Indicator Sequential/Position
B	Bonnet
C	Front Windshield
D	Mars Roof*
E	ORVM Side Repeater
F	Electric Flush Door Handle*
G	Rear Door Handle
H	Charge port Lid
I	Carpet Lamp*
J	Head Lamp (Low/High)
K	DRL/Position*
L	Fog/Cornering*
M	Front Tow Hook
N	Booster Lamp*
O	Front Camera*
* – If equipped as per variant

2.2 Rear Overview

A	Rear Windshield
B	Tailgate Tail Lamp
C	Rear Tow Hook
D	Reverse Lamp
E	Rear Camera
F	Rear Turn Indicator/Stop Lamp
G	Body side Tail Lamp*
H	Reverse Parking Assist Sensors*
* – If equipped as per variant

2.3 Interior Overview

A	Side Vents	K	Hood Open Lever
B	Passenger Airbag	L	Dual – Wireless Charger*
C	Center Vents	M	‘P’ Mode Switch
D	Center Information Display	N	Intelli Command Centre
E	Steering-Audio	O	Rear Vents
F	Steering Wheel	P	Center Console Storage
G	Driver Information Display	Q	Key Fob Tray
H	VisionX Projector*	R	Start/Stop Button
I	Steering - ADAS	S	Shift By Wire Lever
J	Driver Side Switch Bank	T	USB Ports
			* – If equipped as per variant

2.4 Steering Controls overview

A	Voice	I	Boost
B	Regen +	J	LCF/RESUME*
C	MODE	K	ACC SET +/-
D	ACC/CRUSIE SET*	L	Toggle - SEEK UP/DOWN
E	Regen –	M	Call Disconnect
F	Menu	N	One pedal
G	Menu Toggle up/down	O	Call Connect
H	Time Gap/ENTER*	P	Toggle-VOLUME +/- PUSH-MUTE
			* – If equipped as per variant

2.5 Driver Information Display Overview

2.6 Technical Specifications

ELECTRIC POWER TRAIN SYSTEM
Motor Type	Interior Permanent Magnet Synchronous motor (IPMSM)
Maximum Power	170 kW / 210 kW
Maximum Torque	380 Nm
HV Battery Capacity	59 Kwh & 79 kWh
Nominal Voltage	307 V (59 kWh) / 409 V (79 kWh)
Charger	EVSE : 3 kW, Air Cooled
	Wall box : 7.2 kW & 11 kW, Air Cooled
On Board Charger	11 kW, Liquid Cooled
TRANSMISSION
Type	Transmission (Single Speed)
STEERING
Type/Description	Electric Power Steering (EPS)
BRAKES
Brake Type	Hydraulic Brakes with Integrated Electronic Booster assisted with ABS and ESP
Front/Rear	Disc
Parking Brake	Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
SUSPENSION
Type	Front: Independent Suspension with I-LINK technology and Semi-active MacPherson Strut*
	Rear: Independent Suspension with 5 Link and Semi-active shock absorber*
WHEELS & TYRES
Tyre Size	245/60 R18 Opt: 245/55 R19; 245/50 R20
Temp. Spare Tyre	T135/80/R18
Wheel Rim	8Jx18 Opt: 8Jx19; 8Jx20
	Spare wheel: 3.5Jx18
Laden Tyre Pressure	Front & Rear: 36 Psi, Temp. Spare Wheel: 60 Psi -
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
System Voltage	12 V
Battery Rating	55 Ah
* - If Equipped

2.7 Dimensions

Dimensions	mm
Wheel Base	2775
Overall Length	4371
Overall Width	1907
Overall Height	1627
Track Width (Front/Rear)	1630

Front View

Rear View

Side View

2.8 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)/Motor Number

VIN Plate Location

VIN Plate Location: Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is the legal identity of your vehicle. The vehicle identification number is stamped on the VIN Table riveted on to the bottom of the B-Pillar on the driver side. It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN

VIN Punch Location: VIN number is also punched below the co–driver seat.

Never modify data on the plates or remove them. It is illegal to remove or alter the numbers in the VIN plate.

3 Convenience System

3.1 Smart Key Remote

Smart Key Remote System enables you to enter or exit your vehicle without the need to manually lock/unlock the doors.

You can start/stop, lock/unlock, tailgate open/close, remote cooling and Park IN/OUT the vehicle using key fob. To do this, you only need carry the key fob with you.

The PKE key fob is available in two configurations based on functionality:

6-Button Key Fob (With Auto Park):

•

Unlock

•

Lock

•

Tailgate Release

•

Remote Cooling

•

Forward (Auto Park)

•

Backward (Auto Park)

4-Button Key Fob (Without Auto Park):

•

Unlock

•

Lock

•

Tailgate Release

•

Remote Cooling

The key fob also includes an emergency keyblade, which allows access to a mechanical key for emergency situations, as when the PKE battery is low

•

While locking and unlocking the vehicle Passively, the distance between the Smart Key and the corresponding door handle must not be greater than 3ft (1m).

•

To prevent relay attacks, store your key fob in an RFID-blocking pouch when not in use.

•

Do not leave the key fob inside the vehicle, as it may lead to unintended unlocking or theft.

•

Do not cover the key grip with any material that cuts off RF waves

•

Do not leave the key exposed to high temperatures for a long period, such as on the dashboard or bonnet under direct sunlight

•

Do not put the key in any liquid or wash it in an ultrasonic washer

•

The key fob can malfunction if exposed to moisture or static electricity

Never leave the key fob in the vehicle when children are present.

Avoid placing key fobs on top of the wireless charger.

A child could accidentally start the vehicle, activate power windows or other controls, or even move the vehicle, potentially causing injury to bystanders or passengers.

Leaving the key fob inside the vehicle may allow unauthorized access, potentially leading to vehicle theft or unintended vehicle operation. Any damages or losses resulting from failure to secure the key fob properly will not be covered under your warranty.

Locking the vehicle - Through Flush Handle (Electrical Handle)

1. Carry the key fob

2. Close all the doors

3. Push the driver door handle to lock the vehicle

4. The hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate the locking (5 blinks and 5 chirps will occur if any of the doors is open while attempting to lock the vehicle)

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle

•

Vehicle can be locked centrally by pressing the door handle with the key fob in the proximity For E.g., locking/unlocking of the driver door is possible only if key fob is around the driver area

•

Even after pressing the outside door handle, if the doors do not lock, a chime is heard along with the hazard blinking for 5 times, then one of the following situations are possible reason:

–

Key fob is left inside the vehicle

–

One of the doors not closed properly

•

On attempting to lock by pressing the door handle, an alert will displayed in DID, if the steering is not locked

•

When the Passive (PKE) lock function is activated while the vehicle is in the IGN ON state and the key fob is outside the vehicle, the following warnings are triggered to alert the customer:

–

A chime along with hazard lights will blink for 5 times

–

If the customer transitions out of the vehicle (e.g., opens and closes the door) in ignition ON condition, while the key fob is outside, a "Key fob Not Inside" warning will appear.

•

On performing key fob remote lock with all doors closed in ignition ON state, no alert will be triggered and vehicle will remain in unlock state.

Unlocking the vehicle:

1. Carry the Key fob

2. Press the driver door handle

3. All doors would unlock and Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice.

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside driver door handle

•

Vehicle can be unlocked centrally by pressing the door handle only when the key is in same side of the driver door handle is pressed

Unlocking the Tail door alone:

1. Carry the Key Fob

2. Press the tail gate open button in the tail gate and pull the tail gate.

3. Tail door would unlock and hazard warning lights will blink 3 times

4. Tail door can be closed either by pressing the Tail door close button or by closing the tail door manually

•

Key should be in the proximity of less than 0.7 m from the outside door handle

•

Tail door can be unlocked by pressing the button in the tail door only when the key is in range from the tail door

3.1.1 Remote Key Status LED

LED present on Remote would be indicating the user about the Remote lock/unlock/Tailgate button input.

RED color led Blink Represents Key fob LOCK ,UNLOCK , TAILGATE AND REMOTE COOLING button Input

For Key fob Parking, LED representation as mentioned below for Park IN /OUT Button

Remote Ignition On	Green LED Blink One Time
Parking Progress - Button Pressed	Green LED Blink
Parking Progress - Button Not Pressed	RED LED BLINK
Parking Pause	Amber Led Blink
Parking Abort	Red LED On For Continues 2 Sec
Parking Completed	Green LED On For Continues 2 Sec

3.1.2 Park IN/OUT

The key fob Park In and Park Out features assists drivers to remotely move their vehicle in and out IN or OUT tight parking spaces without being in the car. This can be particularly useful in tight garages or narrow parking spots where it might be difficult to open the doors.

The feature is typically activated by pressing the specific buttons on the key fob.

Park IN: Pressing the Park In button on the key fob will make the vehicle move into a parking spot. The driver can stop the movement at any point by releasing the button.

Park IN Sequence: In Vehicle drive enable condition, Once park In via Key fob selected in HMI.

Upon pressing Forward / backward button with in range of 3 meters around vehicle zone, will cause the vehicle movement with Hazard feedback.

Park OUT: Similarly, pressing the park Out button will cause the vehicle to move backward out of the parking space.

Park OUT Sequence:

Step 1: To turn ON IGN : Perform RKE LOCK followed by Remote cooling button hold for 5 seconds Approx (within 10 seconds from RKE LOCK) with Key fob outside the vehicle within 1 Meter Range around vehicle zone

Step 2: To make Drive enable, Press Forward button or backward button for 3 seconds approx

Step 3 : Once Vehicle in Drive enable, Upon pressing Forward / backward button with in range of 3 meters around vehicle zone, will cause the vehicle movement with Hazard feedback

Frequent use of the key fob's auto parking feature will lead to a quicker depletion of the key fob's battery.

•

During keyfob parking process, driver must be vigilant about surroundings of the vehicle and must immediately release the forward/backward button press to stop the vehicle. It is driver's responsibility to ensure safety of own vehicle and surrounding vehicles/ obstacles.

•

Although the Auto Park Assist controls the vehicle movement during a parking manoeuvre, the driver must continually supervise the system. If the manoeuvre is not as expected, use the key Fob to take control and make any necessary adjustments.

•

The APA is not applicable in all cases and cannot completely replace the driver in driving and judgment, even if the system is running, the driver must be careful in judgment and in control of the vehicle, at all times, to avoid the risk of collision.

•

The APA system cannot detect any moving vehicles or obstacles that could come into the collision area during the system operation.

•

The APA system performance will be affected in construction sites, worn or poorly visible markings, diverging/merging roads, broken roads, near garbage filled roads/areas, steep hills and areas with poor illumination.

•

The performance of the APA system might get affected due to environmental conditions such as heavy rainfall road, heavy snowfall road, foggy conditions, icy road, wet conditions, dusty roads, etc. The detection performance of the sensors will be affected and might give false warnings.

3.1.3 To Lock and Arm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the LOCK button on the key fob for locking and arming the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash once - if all the doors in the vehicle are locked and armed successfully using keyfob.

Hazard lamps flash five times along with an alarm - if any of the doors (including bonnet) in the vehicle are open.

If alarm is in mute condition only the Hazard lamps will flash. If alarm to be activated then Press Lock & Unlock button together to unmute the alarm. Now both Hazard lamps flash and alarm will work.

3.1.4 Unlock and Disarm the Vehicle with RKE

Press the UNLOCK button on the key fob to unlock doors and disarm the vehicle.

Hazard lamps flash twice:

if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Front DRL & Tail lamps flash twice (If equipped):

if there was no theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Hazard lamps flash four times along with an alarm:

if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period.

Upon the remote lock, if any of the doors are not closed properly or left open, the hazard lamps will flash five times to indicate the same.

If the driver door unlock is enabled through CID, pressing the unlock button on the key fob once will only unlock the driver door.

To unlock all doors, press the unlock button on the key fob again.

3.1.5 Remote Cooling

Your vehicle is equipped with a remote cooling function that can be activated using the key fob. This feature allows you to cool down the interior of the vehicle remotely, which can be especially useful in hot weather.

Press the remote cooling button on the key fob. The vehicle’s cooling system will activate and begin lowering the cabin temperature.

This remote cooling system is designed for added comfort, allowing the vehicle to reach a more comfortable temperature before you enter.

3.1.6 Locking / Unlocking the Tailgate

Roof console switch – Tailgate

Keyfob – Tailagte

Press the Tailgate release button for 1 second on the key fob to unlock the tail door. The hazard lamp flash three times indicating the same.

The tailgate locks and unlocks simultaneously with the doors.

To open the tailgate, press the button located on the inner side of the tailgate door.

The tailgate is now unlocked and lifts automatically.

To close the tailgate, press the tailgate close button.

3.1.7 Tailgate Emergency Release Lever

Your vehicle is equipped with the tailgate emergency release lever located on the bottom of the tailgate. If someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, they can use the tailgate emergency release lever to open the tailgate from inside.

Open the cover.

To unlock the tailgate, push the tailgate emergency release lever inside the trim panel to right side.

Push the tailgate to open.

•

Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion

•

For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment

•

Do not allow children to play in luggage compartment. If they open the tailgate with the opening lever abruptly, it may cause a serious personal injury

•

No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time. The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash

3.1.8 Walk Away Locking (WAL) and Smart Approach Unlock (SAU)

Walk Away Locking (WAL):

It will happen when customer is having valid key fob and leaving a defined area around the vehicle.

When all doors, bonnet and tailgate are closed and latched, and user is leaving the vehicle with valid key fob within 2 - 3 meter radius of the vehicle then all the doors will get locked automatically.

User can Enable/Disable WAL function from CID, Setting / My Vehicle / Exterior / Lock

Smart Approach Unlock (SAU):

It will happen when customer is having valid key fob and approaching a defined area around the vehicle

When all doors, bonnet and tailgate are closed and lock state, and user is approaching the vehicle with valid key fob within 1 meter radius of the driver or co-driver side door, then unlock will happen automatically.

User can Enable/Disable SAU function from CID, Setting / My Vehicle / Exterior / Lock (Enable/Disable)

If vehicle is left unattended in lock state for more than week time then SAU will get disable.

If any one keyfob is left inside the vehicle, the Walk Away Lock (WAL) and Smart Approach Unlock (SAU) feature may not activate. To ensure the vehicle is securely locked, please manually lock it using the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or Passive Locking feature.

Frequent use of features like "Smart Approach Unlock" and "Walk-away Lock" can lead to faster battery drain in key fob. Battery depletion in the key fob due to normal wear and tear is not covered under the vehicle warranty. The user is responsible for maintaining and replacing the key fob battery as needed to ensure uninterrupted operation.

Once the Approach Unlock and Walk Away Lock features are enabled, ensure the keyfob is not within the 4-meter proximity zone after the vehicle is locked, as this could prevent the vehicle from locking properly or cause it to unlock unintentionally.

The SAU and WAL features are convenience feature. but may not work under all conditions. If these functions fail, customers are responsible for locking or unlocking using alternative methods such as Passive, Remote, or Master actuators.

After enabling SAU and WAL, when a key fob is within a 3-meter range after locking the vehicle via passive or RKE, the key searching mechanism (indicated by the blinking light on the key fob) will deactivate after 3 minutes to prolong battery life and disabling the feature SAU and WAL..

3.1.9 Power Operated Tailgate (POTG) (If equipped)

A power-operated tailgate is an automated system that enables the tailgate of a vehicle to open and close using various controls, including a key fob, exterior switch, interior switch, driver-side switch bank, kick sensor, and tailgate emergency release lever. This feature enhances convenience, especially when hands are full, and typically includes safety sensors to prevent damage or injury, ensuring smooth operation and added functionality.

Using Key Fob

•

Press the Tailgate release button for 3 second on the remote to open and close the tail gate.

•

Pressing the tailgate release switch during power tailgate operation stops the tailgate operation. Pressing the Tailgate release switch again will start closing the tailgate.

Using Exterior Switch

If vehicle is locked

•

Stay in a tailgate antenna area (within approx.1m) while carrying a smart key fob,

•

To open the tailgate, press the switch located on the inner side of the tailgate door, tailgate will unlocked and lift automatically.

•

Pressing the switch during power tailgate operation stops the tailgate operation. Pressing the switch again will start opening the tailgate.

If vehicle is unlocked

To open the tailgate, press the switch located on the inner side of the tailgate door, tailgate will unlocked and lift automatically.

Pressing the switch during power tailgate operation stops the tailgate operation. Pressing the exterior switch again will start opening the tailgate.

Tailgate will not open via exterior switch without key fob in vehicle locked condition.

Using Interior Close Switch

•

Pressing the tailgate interior switch with the tailgate open, closes the power tailgate

•

Pressing the tailgate interior switch during power tailgate operation stops the tailgate operation. Pressing the Tailgate interior switch again will start closing the tailgate.

Using Roof Console Switch

•

Short press the tailgate interior switch with the tailgate close, opens the power tailgate

•

Long press the tailgate interior switch with the tailgate open, closes the power tailgate

•

Short press the tailgate interior switch during power tailgate operation stops the tailgate operation. Short pressing the Tailgate interior switch again will start opening the tailgate and long pressing the Tailgate interior switch again will start closing the tailgate.

Using Hands Free (Kick Sensor)

•

Stay in a tailgate antenna area (within approx. 1 m) while carrying a smart key fob,

•

After giving the kick input with the tailgate close, opens the power tailgate

•

After giving the kick input with the tailgate open, closes the power tailgate

•

Tailgate will not open via kick input without key fob in both ignition ON/OFF condition.

The kick sensor is located beneath the rear left side of the bumper, allowing for hands-free operation of the tailgate or lift gate. The power tailgate can be conveniently opened or closed with a simple foot motion under the rear bumper, the sensor detects motion and triggers the lift gate to open, making it especially convenient when your hands are full.

Enable and Disable the Kick Sensor feature

To enable or disable the Kick Sensor feature through the Center Information Display (CID).

Steps to Enable/Disable the Kick Sensor feature

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer/ Vehicle Apps / My Vehicle / Exterior / Power Tailgate/Hand Free (Enable/Disable)

Power Tailgate features

Height levels (L1, L2, L3) selection through CID

We are having option in HMI to select height for opening tailgate

L1 – Tailgate will open 60% of total height

L2 – Tailgate will open 80% of total height

L3 – Tailgate will open 96% of total height

Custom height selection through CID

•

Select Custom height through HMI

•

The tailgate can only be programmed between 30% - 96% height.

•

To set the height limit, let the tailgate open

•

When it reaches the height you need, press and release the closing button to program the height limit you want to set

•

Press and hold the closing button for 5 seconds and you will hear 3 times buzzer beep sound

•

Press and release the closing button again to close

•

Now open the tailgate with any tailgate open switch you want, It will now stop at the height limit you programmed

Obstacle Detection

If a severe impact or constant force is applied from outside the vehicle during the power tailgate operation, the tailgate stops moving or moves up to the fully open position automatically.

However, this obstacle detection function may not work in a certain part of the tailgate path where resistance force applied is insufficient to change the movement direction or the tailgate is almost closed.

If the obstacle detection operation is repeated, open or close the tailgate manually to check if the tailgate operates normally.

POTG should not be operated manually during ignition off as this will affect the spindle performance.

Do not put objects or part of your body in the tailgate path intentionally during power tailgate operation to check the obstacle detection operation

If the power tailgate (Cinching motor) is operated 6 -7 times consecutively, the drive motor of the power tailgate (spindle part) may be under strain. The power tailgate stops operating to protect the motor from overheating. If this is the case, wait for 1 minute. or more before operating the tailgate again.

If the tailgate is opened and closed with the theft deterrent system disarmed, the door LOCK button on the smart key should be pressed to arm the theft deterrent system.

•

Do not operate the power tailgate manually if at all possible. If it needs to be operated manually because of malfunction, do not apply excessive force to the power tailgate. The power tailgate mechanism can be damaged

•

Closing the tailgate urgently within a very short time may be difficult. This is not a fault. Try to close the tailgate after a while.

•

Remove any obstacles inside or outside the vehicle around the tailgate path before closing the tailgate.

•

Do not apply excessive force to the tailgate during power tailgate operation. The power tailgate may be damaged.

•

Do not operate the power tailgate with heavy objects attached to it. The power tailgate may be damaged.

•

Never modify or attempt to repair any of the power tailgate parts.

•

If you carry the key in your pocket, be careful that the key may be pressed unintentionally, which causes the power trunk to be open.

•

The power tailgate cannot be opened automatically with ignition switch ON and the vehicle speed of 5 km/h or more.

•

If the power tailgate does not function properly even after the resetting procedures, contact a Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.

•

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate open and cargo sticking out the back of the vehicle. This may endanger other road users behind your vehicle or can damage the vehicle body or components related to the tailgate.

•

If the tailgate is opened with the vehicle parked on a hill, cargo may fall out of the vehicle causing serious personal injury.

•

Be careful not to let any part of your body such as your hand get caught by accident when closing the tailgate.

•

Close the tailgate as carefully as possible to avoid injury because the tailgate can be closed abruptly by its own weight.

3.1.10 Remote Function

•

Auto Locking – All doors will get locked automatically when;

•

All doors are closed properly

•

Vehicle speed is greater than 20 kmph

Auto Locking on Door Open – Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the autolock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph

Auto Locking on Master Actuator Unlock – Once the auto lock has been activated, if any door is opened, then the autolock will reactivate only if all doors are closed, the vehicle speed goes below 5 kmph and further crosses 20 kmph

•

Auto Unlocking –Auto Unlock of all doors will happen in the following conditions ;

•

When Ignition is switched from ON to OFF, OR

•

In the event of a crash (only on Airbag Variants)

•

Auto Re-locking – Auto Re-lock of all doors will happen when;

•

No door status change for 45 sec after unlocking the vehicle using RKE/PKE

•

Search Function

Press the Tailgate button on the RKE 2 times within 2 sec to locate the vehicle in a parking lot.

Search alarm can also bring attention to the vehicle and surrounding area, warning about an intruder or seek for help.

When the SEARCH function is ON, the hazard lamps flash along with an alarm for 30 sec. In this mode;

•

Pressing any button on the RKE again switches OFF the alarm

•

Pressing the UNLOCK button switches OFF the alarm and disarms/unlocks all doors

The search function works both during the Locked/Unlocked conditions of the vehicle.

3.1.11 Mute/Un-mute Function

The chirps can be muted / un-muted. Press the LOCK & UNLOCK buttons together for 3 sec. to toggle between MUTE/UN-MUTE mode.

Hazard lamps will flash once to indicate un-mute to mute condition. Hazard lamp & chrip will flash once to indicate Mute to un-mute.

In the un-muted condition, alarm chirps can be heard during Auto Re-lock (1 Chirp), RKE Lock when door open (5 Chirps) and RKE Unlock if there was a theft attempt during the lock (armed) period (4 Chirps).

In the mute condition, only hazard would flash and alarm chirps would not be audible.

3.1.12 Theft Detent Warning System

Arming of Vehicle:

Once all the doors are closed and locked with remote by pressing lock button, Theft Detent warning system would get activated.

Theft Detent Trigger:

If any one tries to manipulate the Ignition or manually opens the doors or manually unlocks the doors, Theft Detent warning system alarm is activated by blinking the turn lamps and blowing Burglar horn for 27 secs. Once the alarm is triggered, it can be disabled by pressing unlock button on remote or switching on the Ignition by using valid key.

3.1.13 Remote Key Operating Range

Using Remote, you can lock/arm or unlock/disarm the vehicle from distances approx. 20 m.

If there is reduction in Remote range, please follow the steps below:

Check the distance: The Remote key may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer to the vehicle during rain or bad weather

Check the location: Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signals. Take a few steps to the left or right, hold the Remote key higher, and try again. Moreover, closeness to a radio transmitter such as radio station tower, airport transmitter, mobile or CB radios may lead to reduction in range of Remote key

Check the Remote key battery: See battery replacement procedure, given later in this section

If the Remote key is still not working correctly, contact an Authorised Mahindra Service Center

3.1.14 If Key fob is Lost

If you have lost the programmed Key fob , contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for procuring a new Smart Key.

While programming a new key set, you will have to submit all the keys available with you, to an Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

Please note that there is a limitation (max. 2 keys at a time) to the number of keys that can be ordered. The minimum timeframe required to supply the duplicate keys is 10 days after all the formalities are completed. Please contact the Mahindra Authorised Service Center to understand the formalities involved.

If you make your own duplicate key fob, you will not be able to deactivate the anti-theft devices or start the vehicle.

If the key is stolen or lost, communicate to an Mahindra Authorised Service Center for de-activating the function of the lost or stolen key. This is essential to avoid unauthorised access using the misplaced key.

Only Keyfob transmitters programmed to your vehicle electronics can be used for remote locking and unlocking of your vehicle.

3.1.15 Key Fob Limitations

When the vehicle key fob is not working properly, It may be due to Radio Frequency (RF) interference caused by an external source like transformer, Amateur Radio, etc.. which emits power levels that is higher than the vehicle Key Fob. This interference may be resulting in RF signal not being received by system controller.

Customer may not get Panic due to this non-function of key fob. After moving from the interference Zone, Key Fob may start working properly.

If still key fob not working then contact Mahindra Authorised service center for assistance.

3.2 Immobiliser System

An immobilizer system is a security feature that prevents a vehicle from being operated by anyone who does not have the correct vehicle key. The immobilizer stops the ignition from turning on or the drive from being enabled unless it recognizes signals from the correct vehicle key. This system is automatically activated when the vehicle is locked using the key fob after the ignition is turned off.

If the immobiliser lamp flashes or remains continuously illuminated after the ignition being switched ON, there is a system malfunction. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately.

When the correct coded key is inside the vehicle and the SSB (Start/Stop Button) is pressed, the system automatically recognizes and authenticates the key. This allows the vehicle ignition to turn on.

Do not modify, remove or disassemble the immobiliser system. Any unauthorised changes or modifications can affect proper operation of the system and will void your warranty.

After the ignition is turned off, the security system will activate when the vehicle is locked using the key fob. If the vehicle is locked and armed with the key fob, and the driver door is opened using the key blade, the system will treat any door switch status change as unauthorized. This will trigger the alarm. To turn off the alarm, press the unlock button on the key fob.

Tampering with or attempting to bypass the immobiliser system using third-party components or unauthorized software may render the vehicle inoperable and could void claims under your warranty. Only Mahindra Authorized Service Center should service or replace immobiliser components.

3.3 Doors

Doors can be unlocked using the following methods

•

Using key fob

•

Using Mechanical Key

Using Keyfob - Press the unlock button on the key fob to activate the central door locking system and unlock the doors.

Using Mechanical Blade – If the key fob battery fails the door can be locked/unlocked manually using key blade.

Refer the keyblade removal procedure from key fob to access the keyblade.

Accessing driver door key hole

For vehicles equipped with mechanical flush door handle, Press the handle once as shown in the figure. Driver door handle pops out.

For vehicles equipped with electric flush door handle, Push the handle slightly, allowing it to popup.

Once it does, pull it firmly outward, drip it and continue pulling to gain access to the key.

Key barrel for manual door locking/unlocking is available only on the driver door.

For unlocking insert the key blade and rotate it in clockwise gently (don’t apply abusive load).

Take out the key to return the handle to nominal position and pull back the handle to open the door.

For locking, Pull the handle and same time press the door with knee so that door is not getting unlatched (as handle goes to release mode) insert the key blade and rotate the key anti-clockwise gently.

Take out the key blade and leave the handle to nominal position.

Pull the handle once to ensure locking happen properly.

A keyhole is provided in the driver door, to lock/unlock the doors manually from outside.

Locking the driver door from outside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle.

Opening the Front Door

•

BE 6 comes with the flush outer door handle for front doors, which can be operated either electrically or manually, depending on the variant.

•

For Manual: After unlocking the doors using key fob (RKE), Push the flush handle once as shown the image, Door handle will pop out

Door handle will return to the original position automatically when the handle is released after opening the door.

•

For Electrical: After unlocking the doors using key fob (RKE), Door handle will popup automatically as shown without touching the handle

•

Pull the handle firmly outwards and open the door

•

Door handle will return to its original position when the vehicle is locked by key fob or the vehicle speed exceeds 7 kmph

Opening the Rear Door

BE 6 comes with the integrated flap handle for rear doors, which can be operated manually.

•

To unlock the rear doors, insert your four fingers behind the handle and press it inward, as shown in the image.

Closing the Door from Inside

Pull the door arm from inside as shown in the image.

Opening the Door from Inside

Pull the door strap away from the door and push the door outward to open.

Individual doors can be unlocked from inside by the respective door lock tabs. Lift the lock tab outwards to unlock the door or press the tab inwards to lock that particular door.

Locking the driver door from inside activates the central locking system, thereby locking ALL the doors of the vehicle. Refer to Central Locking section for further details.

3.3.1 Central Locking System

All doors of the vehicle can be simultaneously locked or unlocked from the driver door.

Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Outside

By using the mechanical key blade:

To manually lock/unlock all the doors from outside using the mechanical key blade, turn the key anti-clockwise /clockwise respectively in the driver door keyhole.

By using the key fob:

Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.

If any door was unlocked or not closed completely when central locking activated. It will only get locked when the door is completely closed.

Central locking ALL the doors in the vehicle can also be done using the key fob. Refer the relevant sections in this chapter for more details.

Central Locking/Unlocking All Doors from Inside

•

Driver Door Switch Bank

Driver can simultaneously lock/unlock all the doors by pressing CDL button in driver door switch bank.

•

Driver Door Lock Tab

Anti-Lock Out

Master Actuator Lock at Door open (Except Driver Door) — If any door is opened and driver door is in closed condition:

•

Vehicle speed is below 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, master actuator will get lock & unlock immediately for the first time. On actuating master actuator lock again, vehicle will get locked.

•

Vehicle speed above 7 kmph - On actuating master actuator lock manually, vehicle will get locked for the first time itself.

If the driver’s door is open, the master actuator lock will not lock the vehicle, even if activated

3.3.2 Child Safety Rear Door lock

Your vehicle is equipped with left and right-side child safety rear door locks. When the lock mechanism is engaged, the rear door(s) cannot be opened from the inside. The door(s) can only be opened from the outside.

To activate the child safety right rear door lock, push the lever down (A) till you hear a distinct click indicating the activation of the child lock.

To de-activate the child safety right rear door lock, pull the lever up (B) till you hear a distinct click indicating the deactivation of the child lock.

A:De-activate/Unlock

B: Activate/Lock

If the rear doors are not operable from inside, ensure that the child safety locks have been disabled.

Mahindra strongly recommends that the child safety rear door locks be used whenever there are children travelling in the rear seat.

3.3.3 Vehicle locking/Unlocking in an Emergency Situation

If the Key Fob does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the doors by using the mechanical key:

Refer to the Vehicle Manual Locking/Unlocking Doors from Outside (Mechanical/Electrical Handle) section for more details.

It is strictly not advisable to leave the key fobs in the vehicle. Vehicle can be started by any unauthorised person.

A maximum of 2 Keys can be registered to a vehicle. If you lose a key, we strictly recommend to contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately to block the lost key and to get a new key.

The Key Fob may not work if any of the following occurs:

•

If the vehicle is close to a radio station, airport, or an area where there is a possibility of large radio transmissions which can interfere with the normal operation of the keyfob

•

The Key Fob is near a mobile or a cellular phone or some electronic gadgets like Laptop/Tablets. The signal from the keyfob could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smartphone. Avoid placing the keyfob and your electronic gadgets in the same trouser or jacket pocket or in the bag and maintain adequate distance between the two devices

•

Another vehicle key fob is being operated close to your vehicle

•

Key Fob kept inside the glove box or top bin in the instrument panel may not be detected sometimes. Keep the Key Fob in the visible zone or in your pocket for getting it detected

•

Keep the key fob away from the water or any liquid. If the keyless entry system is inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer’s vehicle warranty. Any damage caused due to mishandling of the key fob, including exposure to excessive heat, magnetic interference, or impact-related breakage, may void your warranty. It is advised to store the key fob in a secure and dry location to prevent unintended failures.

Make sure the vehicle ignition is in OFF state, whenever leaving the vehicle even with the key. By keeping the vehicle ignition in ON will hamper the vehicle security.

Do not hand over the Key Fob to any unauthorized person or service provider. Your vehicle security system may be compromised in doing so.

3.3.4 Remote Battery/Key Blade Removal

Key Blade Removal

To access the key blade follow the below steps:

Use a small flat head screwdriver to open the battery cover

Once the battery cover is opened, the key blade is available in the back case of the battery cover

Take out the key blade in the back case.

Battery Specification

Battery Voltage	3 V
Battery Capacity	225 mAh
Battery Model Name	CR 2032

Remote Battery Replacement

If the Remote operation is inconsistent when any of the buttons are pressed, then it indicates that the Remote battery is weak.

To replace the battery follow the below steps:

Use a small flat head screwdriver to open the battery cover

Insert a small flat head screwdriver into the battery secure cover and rotate it anti-clockwise to open.

Gently pullout the battery out and discard it.

Insert new batteries of 3V type (Battery No. CR 2032). While fitting the new battery, ensure the positive side of the batteries face up.

After inserting the new battery, reverse the opening procedure to close the battery cover

•

After closing the battery cover, check the remote's functionality.

Ensure keyblade inside battery cover is placed correctly in its position.

While prying the Remote case, take care not to damage the battery.

Do not use sharp objects like screw driver, knife or conductive material for battery removal

Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing and the printed circuit board.

This product contains a lithium button cell. If the button cell is swallowed, severe internal burns can occur within a mere two hours and lead to death.

Keep new or removed batteries away from children. If the battery compartment does not close securely, discontinue use and keep away from children.

If you think that batteries have been swallowed or are stuck in any part of the body, seek medical help immediately.

3.4 Control Switches

The driver door switch bank is located on the driver door armrest/handle and controls and the various functions:

A	Right ORVM Select Switch
B	ORVM Fold/Unfold
C	Driver Door Window Switch
D	Rear Right Window Switch
E	Door Center Locking Switch
F	Power Window Locking Switch
G	Rear Left Window Switch
H	Co–driver Door Window Switch
I	ORVM Adjustment Switch
J	Left ORVM Select Switch

3.4.1 Driver Door Power Window Switch

Power windows can be operated when the ignition is in “ON” position.

The driver can operate all the power windows in the vehicle through the Driver door window switch on the driver door armrest/handle.

Other passengers in the vehicle can raise or lower their respective window glasses individually by using the separate switches provided on each of the door trim pads/armrests.

To lower/raise the window glass, press/lift the respective power window switch accordingly

Do not operate the power windows frequently when the ignition is OFF. This will drain the vehicle battery.

If you operate the switches often during a short period of time, the system might become inoperable for a certain duration to prevent damage due to overheating. The system will return to normal functioning shortly. In such scenario, customer should wait for 1-2 minute & should not operate the switch during this period. After 2 minute operate the switch.

It is recommended to operate one window switch at a time.

Make sure heads, hands, arms or any other body parts or objects are out of the way before operating the Power window. Body parts or objects may get caught causing injuries or vehicle damage.

Never use your body parts deliberately to test the anti pinch function. The power window may reverse the direction but there is a risk of injury

3.4.2 Power Window Lock Switch

The power window lock switch to enable or disable operation of rear passenger window switches.

To disable the rear passenger power windows, press the window lock switch down.

To revert to normal operation, press the window lock switch again.

3.4.3 Door Center Locking Switch

The driver can lock/unlock all the doors by pressing this switch as shown in the image.

3.4.4 Smart Power Window with Anti-Pinch

This is applicable for driver door only (if equipped)

Smart power window is one of the significant safety features with the anti-pinch function, which automatically reverses the direction of glass if an obstruction is detected during the auto up mode.

This feature consists of three functions:

•

Auto UP

•

Auto DOWN

•

Anti-Pinch during Auto UP

Auto UP:

Pull the power window switch up for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way up automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass closes.

Auto DOWN:

Press the power window switch down for a moment and release. The glass moves all the way down automatically. You do not need to hold the switch till the glass comes down.

Anti-Pinch during Auto UP (If equipped):

During auto UP if any obstacle is detected with the force value more than 100 N, The controller senses the load and reverses the direction of the glass from the point of pinch detection.

Driver door power window can be opened or closed through Remote also (If equipped). Press Key fob lock button more than 1 seconds to close the power window. Press key fob unlock button more than 1 sec to open the power window.

Thermal Protection is active for all modes of operation, and once activated up movements are not allowed for 30s, and down movements are allowed if the window is not stalled in either of the stall positions (top stall/bottom stall).

Thermal Protection is tuned for 16 Cycles before 1st activation and inhibition duration is 30 Seconds.

After 30s thermal protection is de-activated, and the number of cycles available after inhibition is dependent on the idle duration. Right after thermal protection inhibition duration of 30 seconds 2 cycles are available.

Do not disconnect the vehicle battery while the power window is in penetration.

•

Extended Power Window

After turning OFF the ignition, all the doors power windows can be operate for up to 3 minutes.

3.5 Hood Opening and Closing

To open the Hood:

Ensure the vehicle is in Park mode.

Locate the lever below the steering wheel, on the right side of the driver's seat.

Pull the lever twice to release the hood.

4. Lift up the hood to fully open.

To Close the Hood:

Step 1:

•

Energetically close the hood down from approximately 50 cm above the closed position using both hands.

•

Maintain continuous pressure with both hands during the closing process to ensure the hood engages on both sides.

•

Verify that the hood is flush with the front bumper grille and fenders if both sides are completely latched.

Step 2:

•

If both latches do not lock in Step 1, lift the hood to reopen it and repeat Step 1 with slightly more force until it locks completely.

Step 3:

•

If any one side of the hood is not locked after Step 1, press firmly on the green-marked area (as shown) of the unlatched side until it locks completely.

Avoid applying pressure on the red-marked areas, as this may cause dents or paint damage to the hood or fender.

Confirm that the hood is fully latched by checking the following:

The hood is flush with the surrounding parts, such as the front spoiler, bumper grille, and side fenders.

The DID does not indicate that the hood is open.

Before opening or closing the hood, ensure the surrounding area is completely clear of people and objects. Failing to do so may result in damage or serious injury.

3.6 Front Frunk Luggage Compartment

The front frunk is designed to carry luggage or goods.

Front Frunk Loading Instructions:

•

The front frunk can carry a maximum load of 45 kg.

•

Ensure the weight is evenly distributed across the entire frunk area.

•

Proper weight distribution is essential to maintaining the vehicle stability and handling.

Never exceed the specified weight limit. Avoid placing items that can shift or move during transit, as this may affect stability and safety.

3.7 Rear Luggage Compartment

The rear trunk can be opened for use as a luggage compartment. For additional storage, the second-row seats can be folded to create more space. To accommodate large objects, fold the second-row seats by pulling the hook located in the middle, accessible from outside the vehicle.

Load limit :

The rear trunk of a vehicle can typically be loaded with minimum amount of weighing goods .

Ensure the weight of the goods is uniformly distributed across the entire trunk area. Proper weight distribution is essential to maintaining the vehicle stability and handling,

Never load the rear trunk beyond the specified weight limit. Exceeding this limit can compromise vehicle handling, stability, and safety.

Avoid overloading the luggage compartment. Ensure all items are securely fastened to prevent shifting during transit. Unstable or improperly secured luggage may pose risks to both the driver and passengers, potentially causing injury or affecting vehicle safety. Additionally, Ensure that luggage does not obstruct rearview mirrors, as clear visibility is essential for safe driving and maneuvering.

For Seat Folding, Refer the Seats and Safety chapter for more details.

3.8 Charging - Lid Opening and Closing

To open the charging lid:

•

Press the unlock button on the Key fob/Mobile App/Central Door Lock (CDL) to unlock the vehicle.

•

Gently press the hatch marking on the charging lid as shown in the image to release and open it.

•

After completion of charging, push on the hatch marking on the charging port lid to close.

Do’s

Push on the hatch marking on the charging port lid to open or close.

Incase of dust accumulated on the charge port, wipe it with normal soft cloth.

Pull the release cable in case of electronic failure. After pulling the release cable, Gently press the marked line on the charging lid to release and open it.

Dont’s

Do not press the charging lid other than the hatch marking area to open the lid.

Do not wash with water or any chemical in the charger port.

Do not try to open force fully the charging lid, if actuator is not functioning.

3.8.1 Charging lid Manual Override

Manual override cable is located on the left-hand side of the rear trim. If unable to Open the Charging lid, follow these steps to open the Charging lid door.

Remove the safety cover.

To release the charging lid door when the electrical actuator is not functioning, pull the release cable. By pulling the cable, you can unlock the door to access the charging port without relying on the electrical system.

Gently press the hatch marking on the charging lid as shown in the image to release and open it.

Do not pull the release cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.

3.9 Power Seat with Memory Functions

Power Seat with Memory (Driver Side only) (if equipped): The power seat switches are provided on RHS below the driver seat.

The Power seat provides advanced 6-way electrical adjustments for the driver seat.

It is equipped with electrically-operated power slider, power recliner and power height adjustment mechanisms. The shape of the switches guide you to the function it has been assigned. During vehicle running, power seat movement is allowed only for a period of 3 seconds due to safety consideration. If you need the seat movement more than 3 seconds, release and press the desired switch again.

Memory Functions

The driver seat is equipped with a memory function, which allows you to save and recall seat and rearview mirror settings for up to three different drivers. The memory function is operated by a button located on the driver’s side door.

Seat Adjustment

ORVM Adjustment

Driver Seat and ORVM Memory Setting (If equipped)

1. Turn Ignition ON

2. Adjust the Seat to your desired position

3. Adjust the ORVM to your desired position

4. Short Press the M button followed by desired memory button assigning (1, 2 or 3)

5. Your preferred Seating and ORVM position is stored to memory, and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from the DID .

If ORVM adjustment is skipped and memory switches are pressed ORVM position at that instance of time will be saved. The ORVM can be positioned by the user and stored in the same switch.

•

The driver seat always moves to half of its remaining rearward travel.

•

The final seat position will may not be the same when using easy access function. There will be some differences within the acceptable range depending on the occupant's weight and vehicle power supply status. This is completely normal and not a fault

•

Make sure the vehicle is in ‘P’mode before adjusting the seat position or operating easy access function so that the vehicle cannot move

•

Do not operate seat memory switch or other switch while the easy access function is activated as doing so may cause the easy access function to malfunction.

•

If the outside rearview mirror control switch is operated while setting up the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position, the memory setting will be cancelled.

•

If you do not press any memory switch i.e. 1, 2, 3 within 3 seconds after pressing M button, the desired position will not be stores.

Restoring Seat and ORVM Position

In Ignition ON condition, user needs to press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat and ORVM to previously stored memory location and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from DID .

In Ignition OFF condition, user needs to short pressing/press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat to previously stored memory location. During memory restore operation, pressing any seat switch shall stop ongoing seat movement.

During memory restore operation, pressing any Seat/ORVM switch shall stop ongoing Seat/ORVM movement.

The ORVM cannot be independently recalled while the seat is in its stored position.

The ORVM can be recalled only when the ignition is ON.

3.10 Lamps and Controls

3.10.1 Interior Lamps

Interior lamps comprises of Reading lamps, Map Reading Lamp, Ambient Lamp.

These lamps can be used for an illuminated entry.

In auto mode, the roof lamps (courtesy lamps) illuminate when any of the doors are opened. Once all doors are closed, the interior lamps gets switched OFF.

Switches on Roof Console (if equipped)

A	Roof Lamp (LH)	C	Door Auto Mode
B	Roof Lamp (RH)	D	Hazard Lamp

Roof Lamp : The roof console lamps can be Switch ON/OFF with a simple touch.

Also, the lamp goes off once the Lock button in Key fob is pressed and the same will be ON again when unlock button on Key fob is pressed

For Auto mode - Auto Mode will be active when Switch ‘C' is in pressed position. In Auto Mode, the roof lamps will turn ON automatically when any of the doors are opened. The roof lamps will also turn OFF automatically after preset time once the doors are closed.

Map Reading Lamp (if equipped):

Map reading lamps are located on the both sides of the roof near the grab handle above the second-row seats.

Do not leave the roof/map reading lamp in permanent ON mode. This will drain your vehicle battery.

SOS calling

The eCall system automatically notifies the emergency services if your vehicle is involved in an accident. You can also call the emergency services manually by pressing the SOS button.

This button should only be used in a real emergency.

3.10.2 Exterior Lamps

Lighting Control Stalk: The lighting control stalk is located on the right-hand side of the steering wheel and is a part of the combination switch.

It controls operations of parking lamps, head lamps, head lamp beam selection, high beam flashing, rear fog lamps and turn signals when the ignition switch is ON.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to Position “OFF” to switch OFF all lamps.

When selecting each operation, indication will appear in the DID for driver’s information

i) Turn Signals

A: Turn Signal - Left xxxxx B: Turn Signal - Right

Taking a Right Turn:

•

Push the lighting control stalk clockwise to indicate a right turn. The DID arrow lamp pointing towards the right flashes along with the right side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards right

After you have completed your right turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

Taking a Left Turn :

•

Push the lighting control stalk anti-clockwise to indicate a left turn. The DID arrow lamp pointing towards the left flashes along with the left side turn signal lamps (front, rear & ORVM) with chime indicating your intention of turning towards left

•

After you have completed your left turn, the stalk will automatically return to the neutral position switching OFF turn indicator lamp.

If the turn signal lamps on the instrument panel flash faster than normal, there may be a possibility that one or more of the turn signal lamp bulbs have blown. Replace the blown bulb immediately.

Changing Lanes:

The system is equipped with One Touch Lane Indicator function which can be used to signal a lane change

To signal a lane change, move the light control stalk clockwise or anti-clockwise to the limit point of free movement of the lever and release. The turn signals will flash 3 times and stop.

The turn signals will continue flashing as long as the lighting control stalk is held in the limit point of free movement.

ii) Parking Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk 2nd position from the top position to switch ON the parking lamps.

The tail lamp, license plate lamp, instrument panel illumination lamps and all interior switches are also activated when the parking lamp is switched ON.

The Park lamps will be switched OFF automatically after opening the driver door. If a user still wants a park lamp they must turn OFF & turn ON manually.

Park Lamp Warning Buzzer

A warning buzzer sound will be provided if the park lamp is left ON with ignition OFF, as soon as driver door is opened.

iii) Head Lamp “AUTO” Function

Auto head lamp switches ON the head lamp based on the outside ambient light sensed by the RLS sensor. This is useful when travelling through tunnels or low light areas.

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise/upward aligning the “arrow” on the stalk to the 3rd position from top to switch ON Auto head lamp function

•

Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax

•

On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the weather, season, or circumstances

•

Any aftermarket sunfilm or spray may cause the lighting system to malfunction

•

When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, tail, and head lights might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognising the automatic setting

•

There may be a difference between ambient light intensity sensed by the RLS sensor and the human eye. Hence it is possible that during low light conditions, the head lamp is activated early as the RLS sensor senses it as low intensity. This is a normal behaviour.

iv) Head Lamp ON

Rotate the outer rotary switch on the lighting control stalk clockwise aligning the “arrow” on 1st position from the top to switch ON the head lamps.

v) Head Lamp Low/High Beam

Switch ON the head lamp, and push the lighting control stalk down (away) from steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp high beam & lift/pull the lighting control stalk up again towards the steering wheel to switch ON the head lamp low beam. In head lamp high beam, the high beam tell-tale lamp in the DID illuminates indicating high beam option selected.

A	Low Beam
B	High Beam

Your vehicle head lamps are vented and moisture may be collected on the inside of the head lamp lens under certain climatic and geographical conditions. This moisture will evaporate once the head lamps have been switched ON for a few minutes.

vi) Head Lamp Flash

Pull the lighting control stalk towards the steering wheel to instantaneously flash the head lamp high beam and Low beam.

Head Lamp Levelling System

When the vehicle is either fully or partially loaded, it may have an upward inclination disturbing the head lamp aiming. A correct head lamp setting provides good visibility to the driver with minimum inconvenience to other road users.

To properly aim the head lamp beam, use the head lamp levelling switch. This switch is located on the driver side switch bank. This switch has four positions marked as 0, 1, 2 & 3.

Switch Position	Vehicle Loading Condition
0	Driver/Driver with Front Passenger
1	Driver + Front passenger + Second row occupied
2	All seats occupied
3	All seats occupied with luggage OR Driver with luggage at extreme rear side

Select the suitable switch position depending on the pay loading condition as advised in the table.

The headlights can only be adjusted when the low beam is switched ON.

3.10.3 Auto Head Lamp Booster (If equipped)

When the switch is in the Auto mode and high beam. Then when the vehicle speed crosses 80 Kmph the high beam intensity and reach increases. The higher reach of the beam is helpful to have vision for the higher speed

The booster will turn OFF automatically when vehicle speed comes below 75 kmph

3.10.4 Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) / Rear Park Lamp (if equipped)

To enable DRL/Rear Park Lamp: In daytime whenever the vehicle is in running condition and park lamp switch is in OFF position, DRL / Rear Park Lamp is enabled.

To disable DRL: Whenever the vehicle is in running condition and park lamp is ON, DRL will get switch to park mode

If customer doesn’t want the DRL/Rear Park Lamp to be ON, he can disable through infotainment settings.

3.10.5 Cornering Lamp (if equipped)

Cornering lamps are available in the Head lamps.

Respective side Cornering lamps turn ON when a sharp turn is taken.

They help in illuminating the road in the direction of turn.

The following conditions are to be met for the lamps to switch ON:

•

Ignition ON

•

Head lamp is ON

•

Sharp turn taken

3.10.6 Fog Lamps

Fog lamps (if equipped) are to be used along with head lamp low beam, to improve the vision during foggy and misty conditions.

Front Fog Lamps ON

To turn off the fog lamps, press the switch side of the lighting control stalk to the ‘ON’ position.

The front fog lamp indicator in the DID indicates the operation status.

Fog lamps will turn ON only if parking lamp is ON due to Park light input or Auto light input.

Fog Lamps OFF

To turn off the fog lamps, press the switch side of the lighting control stalk to the ‘OFF’ position.

3.10.7 Puddle Lamp (if equipped)

Puddle lamps are provided at the bottom of the front doors. They are switched ON automatically when the front doors are opened. This illuminates the ground below the respective door thereby assisting in a safe entry and exit.

3.10.8 Hazard Warning Lamp

The hazard warning lamp switch is located on the roof console switch.

Press this switch to turn ON the Hazard Warning Lamp. All the Turn Signal Lamps will start flashing. TheDID turn indicator lamps also flash indicating the same. To turn OFF, push the switch again.

Use the hazard warning lamp when your vehicle is stationary or to warn other road users to be cautious while passing your vehicle.

The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps in operational.

3.10.9 Auto Hazard Warning Lamp

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are deployed.

In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (OFF to ON) or Ignition reset (Ignition OFF and ON)

3.10.10 Follow-Me Home (FMH) with Rain Light Sensor (RLS)

This feature helps to navigate safely from the vehicle to the doorstep or unfamiliar surroundings during poor lighting condition. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds, assisting the passengers to find their way unless cancelled by the UNLOCK signal from the Key fob.

To enable FMH;

•

Ignition transition from ON to OFF

•

Park lamp is OFF

•

Ignition key is out

•

Driver door open within 3 mins from KEY OUT

•

Head lamp would turn ON only if the ambience light is found dark by the light sensor

To extend FMH;

•

The first RKE/PKE LOCK command will be used for locking all doors

•

Successive RKE/PKE LOCK commands will be used for toggling the current status of the head lamp low beam

•

Each time FMH is extended the head lamp low beam will be kept/turned on for the next 20 seconds

To disable FMH

•

Park lamp transition from OFF to ON

•

Ignition off to any other state

•

FMH ON 20 seconds expires

•

FMH Max time is 3 minutes expires

With FMH mode ON, if the UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked and vehicle is disarmed.

3.10.11 Follow-Me Home Lamp (FMH) Non RLS (if equipped)

This feature helps to navigate safely from the vehicle to the doorstep or unfamiliar surroundings during poor lighting condition. The head lamp low beam is turned ON for about 20 seconds assisting the passengers to find their way. It will only work if prior to switching off the ignition, the head lamp were ON for a predefined time

To activate FMH:

•

Switch OFF the parking lamps

•

Remove the ignition key

•

FMH can be activated by pressing lock button in key fob twice. First press locks the vehicle & second press enables head lamp low beam for 20 seconds.

•

Pressing unlock button in key fob disables FMH feature & unlocks the vehicle.

To extend the FMH feature further for 20 secs., press RKE LOCK button once. This FMH extension can be availed for maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.

With FMH mode ON; First LOCK signal received from RKE will lock the doors and subsequent LOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

To deactivate FMH:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position

•

Press the RKE unlock/lock button once

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically

With FMH mode ON, if UNLOCK signal is received twice from RKE; the feature gets deactivated and cannot be extended further. Also, the doors are unlocked, and vehicle disarmed.

3.10.12 Lead Me to Vehicle Lamp(LMV) (if equipped)

LMV is the feature that will switch ON the head lamp for 20 secs. helping the passengers to reach the parked vehicle safely and comfortably at night.

LMV is activated:

•

Pressing the unlock button on the RKE two times

LMV is de-activated:

•

Switch ON the parking lamps

•

Switch the ignition key to either ACC or ON in position

•

Press the RKE lock/unlock button once

•

Head lamp switches ON for 20 secs. and switched OFF automatically

To extend the LMV feature further for 20 secs., press RKE UNLOCK button once. This LMV extension can be availed for maximum 3 minutes from the first activation.

With LMV mode ON; First UNLOCK signal received from RKE will unlock the doors and subsequent UNLOCK signal is used to toggle the head lamp ON and OFF.

3.10.13 Auto High Beam

Auto High Beam function is intended to reduce the glare produced by the High Beam lamp which in turn aids the drivers of oncoming vehicles maneuver safely.

Auto High Beam feature automatically turns high beam ON or OFF depending on the vehicle speed, intensity of the light, source of preceding and oncoming vehicles and the surrounding light condition

Steps to Activate AHB System:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps /My Vehicle / Exterior/ Lights/Auto High Beam (Enable/Disable)

HBA enabling conditions:

•

High beam Assist is enabled in CID

•

Head Lamp “Auto mode” is selected in the Combination Switch

•

Head Lamp switch should be in “High Beam” position

•

Vehicle speed is above 20 kmph

When HBA feature is activated, “Head Lamp Auto” Telltale will be ON in Driver Information Display (DID).

Once HBA is activated:

HBA feature will Turn OFF High Beam when any of the light sources from oncoming / Preceding vehicle is detected in front of vehicle.

HBA feature will Turn ON High Beam when no light source is detected by the camera from oncoming/Preceding vehicle or from other light sources(depends on intensity) for few seconds.

High Beam Assist is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights through manual ON/OFF depending on visibility requirements

The High Beam Assist system changes Low Beam to High Beam after Switch Delay Time (1sec)

HBA System Limitations

The High Beam Assist (HBA) system is subject to certain limitations, which may prevent the high beam from activating or deactivating under specific conditions:

•

When the light from an oncoming or preceding vehicle is not detected due to damaged or obscured lamps.

•

When the headlights or taillights of other vehicles have non-standard color, brightness, or shape.

•

When the lamps of oncoming or preceding vehicles are covered by dust, mud, snow, or water.

•

During poor visibility caused by fog, heavy rain, or snow.

•

When the headlamp alignment is improperly adjusted.

•

While driving on narrow, curved, or rough roads.

•

When driving uphill or downhill.

•

When near bright streetlights, reflective signs, mirrors, or flashing signs.

•

When the vehicle is tilted, such as due to a flat tire or being towed.

•

When a bicycle’s light is weak or far away.

•

When the light from oncoming or preceding vehicles is too small, weak, too low, or too high.

•

When the windshield is dirty or something blocks the camera sensor.

•

In construction areas with temporary reflectors.

•

Near traffic lights, building signs, lightning rods, reflective centerline markers, variable speed signs, or when vehicle lights reflect off buildings or road surfaces.

3.10.14 Carpet Lamp (if equipped)

The carpet lamp is designed to illuminate the vehicle’s under the floor area, enhancing visibility and convenience, especially in low light conditions. To Activate: The carpet lamp typically turns on automatically when vehicle locked /unlocked or doors are opened or when the cabin light is manually switched on. To Deactivate: The lamp turns off when the doors are closed, or the cabin light is switched off, depending on the settings. The carpet lamp can display in Static and Dynamic patterns to enhance the vehicle's aesthetics and user experience:
Static Pattern
Good Bye	The Goodbye Pattern is a feature designed to provide a visually appealing send-off experience when exiting the vehicle. The pattern is triggered when the vehicle is turned off, the doors are closed, or the vehicle is locked.
Caution	The Caution Pattern is a lighting feature designed to alert occupants or passersby to a potential issue or warning state. This will activate when the Doors not fully closed, Hazard lights activated or Parking in low visibility or emergency situations.
Low Battery	The Low Battery Pattern is a visual alert designed to notify the user of a low vehicle or auxiliary battery charge. This will automatically triggers when the vehicle's HV Battery or auxiliary battery charge falls below a predefined threshold.
Dynamic Pattern
Welcome	Activates when the vehicle is unlocked or a door is opened. Provides a welcoming ambiance with soft lighting.
Note: More Patterns can be availed based on subscriptions

Carpet lamp pattern may appear blur or distorted on one or both sides. Attempt to clean the dust from the carpet lamp lens using a wet lint free cloth and low-pressure water hose or spray bottle. Replace the light carpet module only if the lens cannot be sufficiently cleaned.

3.11 Windshield Wipers

3.11.1 Wiper Control Stalk

A: Flick- Wipe (MIST)	D: Low Speed (LO)
B: Off	E: High Speed (HI)
C: Intermittent (INT)/AUTO	F: Rotary Switch

Wiper Off: The wipe function is OFF when the wiper control stalk is in neutral position (B).

Flick-Wipe (Mist): Push the wipe control stalk to position (A) for a flick-wipe, hold to operate the wipe continuously (simultaneously lift the wiper stalk towards the steering wheel to operate the wash). The stalk automatically comes back to position (B) when released.

Intermittent (INT) (If equipped):Intermittent (INT) mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position (C). In the INT mode, the wiper operates on preset intervals. The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

Auto Mode (if equipped): Auto mode wiping is selected when the wipe control stalk is pushed down to position C. In the AUTO mode, the wiper operates based on rain intensity.

The delay between each wipe can be varied by rotating the wiper speed intensity rotary switch (F).

When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will automatically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF” to the “AUTO” position.

Low Speed Wiping: Push the wipe control stalk down to the position (D) to operate the wiper at a fixed low speed.

High Speed Wiping: Push the wiper control stalk down to position (E) to operate the wiper at a fixed high speed.

3.11.2 Wipe/Wash

Pull/Lift the wiper control stalk towards the steering wheel from any position to activate wipe/wash function. Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield. The wipers wipe the windshield 3 times after the washer spray is stopped. Hold the stalk in position for continuous spray of washer fluid.

When wiper is in OFF or Intermittent mode:

After completion of the wipe/wash cycle, wipers return to their bottom position.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode and DWELL delay is less than or equal to 5 secs., then the wiper will continue in the Intermittent mode.

If the wipers are in Intermittent mode, and DWELL delay is more than 5 secs., then a further single wipe will be performed 5 secs. after the wash/wipe cycle. After the drip wipe (last wipe), wiper returns to normal Intermittent wipe.

The wipe/wash function can be activated only when the ignition is in “ON” position.

3.11.3 AUTO Wash

When Auto Washer switch is pressed once, Washer fluid from front washer reservoir is pumped and sprayed onto the windshield for 2 seconds. The wipers wipe the windshield 4 times

After that, again Washer fluid from front washer motor will turn ON for 1.5 seconds and the wipers wipe the windshield 3 times

AUTO wash function will work only when the wiper switch is in OFF mode.

3.11.4 Windshield Washer Jet

There are two nozzles are located in the hood inner panel .

Always direct the washer jet to hit the middle of the windshield. This will enable the wiper blade to wipe the complete width of the windshield.

3.12 Mirrors

3.12.1 Interior Rear-view Mirror and Auto Dimming

Manual Type (if equipped): The interior rear view mirror provides the rear view information to the driver through the rear windshield. It also assists during reversing.

You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pulling its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other vehicles behind you

When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.

Auto Dimming (If equipped)

IRVM	Front Sensor

The auto-dimming inside rearview mirror (IRVM) is a great feature for reducing glare from the headlights of vehicles behind the driver. It's making night driving safer and more comfortable. The auto-dimming can be enabled/disabled in the CID screen.

Auto Dimming setting path in the below:

App Drawer–> Vehicle apps–>My Vehicle–>Exterior–>Mirrors–>Auto dimming IRVM (enable/Disable)

•

Under the following conditions, auto dimming function may not operate properly

•

When the rear vehicle’s head lamp is not beamed directly to the inside rearview mirror’s sensor

•

When the rear window has a dark tinted glass

•

When the gear selector lever is in the R position, auto dimming function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview

•

For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion

•

The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush with water and see your doctor

•

For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle

•

If front sensor is blocked /hide by sticker or object, auto dimming may enable in day time and visibility will be poor.

3.12.2 Manual ORVM (if equipped)

Exterior Rear view mirror on both left and right sides provides the maximum side rear view information to the driver.

Both the ORVMs are hinged and can be manually folded or unfolded. This avoids hindrances in narrow areas and parking slots. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support, while folding or unfolding.

Objects seen in convex mirrors are much closer than they appear. Do not overestimate the distance of the objects that you see in the mirrors.

3.12.3 Electric Adjustable ORVM (If equipped)

The electric exterior mirror adjustment switch is located on the driver door trim/handle. The switches on it can be used to select the left/right mirror and also to adjust the respective mirror.

ORVM Folding/Unfolding

Fold Function: To fold ORVM assembly, When the ignition is on, press the button once to fold the mirrors and press it again to unfold them

ORVM folds automatically when:

•

The mirror is already unfold condition and the doors locked with the remote from outside the vehicle.

Unfold Function: To unfold the ORVM assembly, select the respective side switch (R or L) , then press mirror fold switch to fold ORVM when ignition is in ON condition.

ORVM unfolds automatically when:

•

Mirror is already in folded condition and IGN is turned ON

ORVM memory functions and settings are connected with seat chapter.

3.13 Horn

The horn is integrated into the driver airbag section of the steering wheel. Use it appropriately when necessary.

Press the pad on the steering wheel to blow/sound the horn. The horn functions even when the ignition has been switched OFF.

Horn will get activated when horn switch/pad is pressed.

It will get deactivated when horn switch/pad is released or after 10 sec of continuously pressing.

If Horn Switch Input is ON for more than 10 sec, Horn will get deactivate after 10 sec.

The horn may activate if the haptic switches or control wing buttons on the driver airbag module are pressed with excessive force beyond the recommended level. Use gentle pressure to operate these switches to avoid unintentional horn activation.

3.14 Storage Compartments

3.14.1 Glove Box/Tab Holder

Glove Box : The glove box is located on the Left side of Instrument panel. To open the lid gently press the push button.

To close the glove box, raise the lid all the way up and gently press to lock the lid.

It is suggested to keep copies of all vehicle documents along with the Vehicle’s Manual Kit in the glove box for reference when needed.

To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or a sudden stop, glove box Lid should be kept closed when the vehicle is in motion.

Glove Box Lamp (if equipped): This lamp is located inside the Glove box below the TAB Holder. It will get switched ON when Glove box is opened and switch OFF when it is closed.

Do not use excessive force while closing the glove box

Always shut the glove box door after use, as an open glove box can pose a serious risk there by potentially injuring a passenger in a crash even if they're wearing a seat belt

Digital video recorder (DVR)

A DVR port is a connection interface on a digital video recorder (DVR) that allows users to connect devices and access video streams efficiently. It is located inside the glove box.

3.14.2 Console Storage

You can use the console storage below the arm rest in between driver and the passenger.

To open the console storage press the knob in the front and lift up the lid. Devices with upto 10-inch screen size can be stored inside console storage.

Cooler - Air vents (If equipped)

Cooler (air vents) is provided in the Console Storage. You can cool cans, small bottles, etc. by opening the air vents. Turn the cooler clockwise to open the air vents, or anti-clockwise to close the air vents.

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment.

Do not store items that are damageable or cause noises since they can move around in the compartment while driving.

Do not store any flammable materials such as cigarette lighter in the console box or other space. In hot weather, they may explode and cause a fire.

Only sealed cans/bottles to be stored in the cooler. Any spilled beverage can damage the interior trim and electrical components/cooler.

3.14.3 Cup Holder and Armrest

The cup holder located in the floor console between the front seats, It can be used for small cups or cans that are closed or have a lid.

Only sealed cups/cans with lid to be used in the cup holders.

Be cautious while using the cup holders. A spilled beverage that is very hot can injure driver or passengers. Spilled liquids can also damage interior trim and electrical components. Any spilled beverage can also startle the driver and cause a loss of control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

3.14.4 Bottle and Umbrella Holder

Bottle and Umbrella holders are located on both the front door lower trims. You can use them to store umbrella, maps, papers, small books, bottles, etc.

Only sealed/closed bottles are to be used in the bottle holders.

3.14.5 Seat Back/Magazine Pocket

The seat back pockets are located on the back of the front seats for holding lightweight papers/books/magazines, etc.

To avoid injury, do not place large or hard objects in the seat back pockets. Do not put more than 1 kg weight in seat back pockets.

3.15 Sun Visor

Use the sun visor to shield the direct sunlight through the front or side windows. It is available on both driver and co– driver side
To shield the sunlight through the windshield, pull it downward.
To shield the sunlight through the side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket and swing it to the side.

Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror on the sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your attention away or blocking your view
Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in moving

3.15.1 Vanity Mirror and Lamp (if equipped)

Vanity mirror is in the Sun visor.

Swing the sun visor down and slide the cover to open and close the vanity mirror.

Lamp above the sun visor will be ON once you slide and open the vanity mirror.

Lamp will not illuminate if arm is not correctly locked in the sun visor.

Do not adjust the sun visor while the vehicle is in motion.

3.16 Grab Handle and Coat Hook

Grab Handle: Foldable grab handles are provided above the front (passenger only) and second row outboard seats.

Coat Hook: The second-row outboard passenger seats grab handles features a coat hook for hanging your coat, shirts, etc.

Hanging excess/bulky weight/items may cause breakage of the hook and inconvenience to the passengers. Hang light weight articles only.

3.17 Roof Console Switches

A	Roof Lamp Door Auto Mode	E	360 deg Camera
B	Tailgate Open/Close Switch	F	SOS calling
C	Hazard Switch	G	Mars Roof Switch (If equipped)
D	Auto Park Assist (If equipped)

When Passenger Air Bag is enabled/activated through the DID , then the 'PAB OFF' indicator light will turn off.

3.18 Microphone (as applicable)

The microphone is located on the roof above driver side as shown in the image.

The microphone is used when talking on the phone. The person you are speaking to can be heard from the front speakers.

To use the hands-free system, you must pair your Bluetooth® phone to the system.

3.19 Driver Side Switch Bank

Driver side switch bank is located on the instrument panel below the right-side AC air vents.

The following switches are available in the driver door switch bank:

A	Charge Port Disconnect	D	HDC ON
B	VisionX*	E	AUTO HOLD
C	ESC OFF	F	FPAS
*-if equipped

3.20 Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC)

Intelli Command Center Switch (ICC) is located on the centre console near the gear shift lever.

It is used to control the infotainment screen.

A	Climate Control	D	My Vehicle
B	Rotary Knob	E	Enter/OK
C	Home/Back	F	Volume Control

Climate Control: Press the climate control button and use the knob to modify the climate setting

Volume: Press the volume control button to adjust the volume using the ICC Knob clockwise or anti clockwise

My vehicle : Press the my vehicle button to open the my vehicle apps, to use the knob to select the required functions.

Home/Back: Press the Home/Back Button to navigate to the home screen

Rotary Knob: A rotary knob can indeed rotate clockwise and counterclockwise. Also, it can move in other directions, such as up/down and left/right

Enter/OK: Can select and enter the required options.

3.21 MARS Roof (If equipped)

To enhance the driving experience and make it more enjoyable, slide open the power sunshade to let natural light and sunshine fill the cabin through the MARS Roof, creating a bright and uplifting atmosphere inside the vehicle.

3.21.1 Controls and functions

MARS Roof control switch is located on the roof console.

Switch Position	Switch Press	Operation
1	Short Press	Power Sunshade Express Close
1	Long Press	Power Sunshade Manual Close
2	Short Press	Power Sunshade Express Open
2	Long Press	Power Sunshade Manual Open
0	—	Switch Home/Neutral Position

Home/Neutral position of the Switch is Switch position 0. To operate the Sunshade, Pull or Push the switch as shown in image, after every operation switch goes to Home position automatically

You must switch ON the ignition to operate the Power sunshade.

3.21.2 Power Sunshade Open

Push the switch to position (2) for Power Sunshade Express (one touch) open. Manual (long press) open to stop at desired position.

3.21.3 Power Sunshade Close

Pull the switch to position (1) for Power Sunshade Express (one touch) Close to close Power Sunshade completely. Manual (long press) Close to stop at desired position.

3.21.4 Anti Pinch Function

If the power sunshade senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse the direction and stop at a certain position.

The anti-pinch function may not work if any thin or soft object is caught between the power sunshade sliding

Make sure heads, hands, arms or any other body parts or objects are out of the way before operating the Power sunshade. Body parts or objects may get caught causing injuries or vehicle damage.

Never use your body parts deliberately to test the anti pinch function. The power sunshade may reverse the direction but there is a risk of injury.

Do not continue to push/hold the switch after the power sunshade is fully open or closed. Doing this could damage the motor.

Do not Push or Pull the power sunshade by hand, doing this could damage the sunshade or resulting in malfunction.

Wrinkles formed on the power sunshade are normal due to material characteristics.

3.22 Steering

Your vehicle is equipped with electric power steering (EPS). EPS system provides an external assist, so that the driver can easily rotate the steering wheel without much effort. The power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

Continued operation with reduced power steering performance could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Have the vehicle serviced at specified intervals or whenever a power steering problem is noticed.

Keep both hands especially your thumbs on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Do not hold the steering wheel spokes.

If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:

•

Under inflated tyre(s) on any wheel(s)

•

Uneven vehicle loading

•

High crown in the centre of the road

•

High crosswinds

•

Wheels out of alignment

•

Wheels out of balance

•

Loose or worn suspension components

Tilt Steering

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both rake and reach as required using the lever in the steering shroud under the steering wheel.

To tilt/adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the tilt lever down to unlock.

2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the desired position.

3. Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

4. Push the tilt lever back up to its original position to lock the steering.

Improperly locked steering wheel could cause loss of control and lead to accidents. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving.

3.23 Steering Controls overview

A	Toggle-VOLUME +/- PUSH-MUTE
B	Voice
C	MODE
D	Call Connect
E	Toggle - SEEK UP/DOWN
F	Call Disconnect

Mode: Press Mode button to toggle between FM, AM, Hard Drive, Alexa, USB, Bluetooth, Ganna, and Amazon Music

•

USB MODE - Press the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video Playing

•

TUNER MODE - Press the seek 'UP' / 'DOWN' button briefly: Manual Search, moves to selected channel. Press and hold the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' for 2 seconds to AUTO Search

VOLUME CONTROL: Press ‘+’ and ‘- button to increase or decrease the volume.

MUTE: Press MUTE button to mute audio while in TUNER mode and pause the song while in USB mode.

Call Connect: Press to accept incoming call to the paired BT phone.

Call Dis Connect:

•

Press to reject or end active call to the paired BT phone.

•

Press to activate Alexa or OK Google or Siri voice assistant.

Voice: Press to activate the Voice recognition.

3.24 Cruise Control (if equipped)

Cruise control is a feature, that allows you to maintain a set speed without the need to keep your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. Never use it for city driving, inclines, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain or in bad weather conditions.

A	CRUISE ON/OFF	D	DID MENU
B	CRUISE SET +/-	E	TOGGLE UP/DOWN
C	RESUME	F	ENTER

Cruise control enhances your comfort while driving and allows you to effortlessly maintain the desired lane speed limit. Improper use of the cruise control can lead to an accident.

Cruise control is designed to operate above a vehicle speed of 20 kmph in ‘D’ mode . The cruise lamp turns ON once cruise control is active.

Cruise control will function only all the following conditions are met:

•

The vehicle speed is cruising above 20 kmph

•

Brake pedal released

•

Cruise main switch is turned on by ON/OFF switch followed by pressing Set + button

•

Shift lever is in D

•

No EV warning / Service tell tale

•

Power saving mode is not active

Maximum speed for cruise control operation applicable for the different drive modes are :

Range mode – 130 kmph

Everyday mode – 160 kmph

Race mode – 170 kmph

Cruise control will be deactivated if any of the following conditions are met:

•

CRUISE ON/OFF button is pressed

•

Brake pedal depressed

•

Hand brake is engaged

•

Power saver mode is engaged

•

Cruise switch is pressed for more than 30 sec

•

Vehicle speed is greater or lesser than the set speed by 10 kmph for more than 30 seconds

•

Vehicle speed is greater or lesser than the set speed by 30 kmph

•

Hand brake engaged

•

Shift lever changed from D or L to N/R/P

•

Safe mode is active

•

ESC is active

•

EV warning / Service Tell Tale

•

Drive disabled

•

Vehicle speed has exceeded the permitted cruise speed in the active drive mode

3.24.1 Cruise Control Activation

Enable Cruise control by pressing the CRUISE ON/OFF button. Once enabled, Cruise control will mode to Standby. Drive the vehicle to the desired cruising speed (any value greater than 20 kmph), press the SET+ button to activate Cruise.

If cruise is deactivated (e.g. by depressing brake to handle an intervention in the road etc.) in current driving cycle, reactivate the Cruise to the last active Cruise Speed by pressing the RESUME button. If cruise control fails to engage or disengage as expected, avoid continued operation and contact a Mahindra-authorized service provider immediately. Unauthorized modifications to the vehicle’s cruise control system may impair functionality and void the vehicle warranty.

Cruise control is a comfort function and it is the responsibility of the driver to safely and attentively drive the vehicle

It is suggested not to use cruise control in high traffic conditions involving frequent braking

It is suggested not to use cruise control in hilly and winding road conditions

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up or down hills, and the vehicle may come out of cruise control. This is indicated by the cruise lamp going OFF in the Driver Information Display (DID).

3.24.2 SET + Button

SET + Button is used to activate cruise control and also to increase the cruise set speed.

To increase the speed in very small amounts, press the SET + Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed increases by about 2 kmph.

To increase the speed in very big amounts (20 kmph) , press the SET + Button for longer time.

3.24.3 SET - Button

To decrease the speed in small amounts, press the SET - Button. Each time you press, the cruise set speed decreases by about 2 kmph.

To decrease the speed in very big amounts (20 kmph) , press the SET - Button for longer time.

If any of the cruise switch is pressed for more than 30 secs., the switch is assumed to be malfunctioning and the cruise functionality will be deactivated. To activate/resume cruise functionality, ensure all cruise switches are in not pressed state and switch off the ignition. Once ignition is turned ON, cruise can be engaged as per the conditions in the “Cruise control Activation” section.

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver must at all times remain alert of road / traffic conditions and responsible for the vehicle brake operation / steering control.

Never activate cruise control in traffic or when driven in adverse road conditions (heavy rains, windy, slippery etc.)

3.24.4 RESUME Button

With the help of RESUME, you can opt for the previous set cruising speed of the vehicle in the same ignition cycle. This is best explained with the following example:

Assume, you have activated cruise mode and set the vehicle speed at 50 kmph.

Due to an obstacle or a sharp turn, you have deactivated the cruise mode by pressing the brake pedal.

Vehicle comes out of the cruise mode.

When the road condition is suitable to switch over back to cruise control mode, press RESUME button once. The system activates the cruise control mode to the previous cruising speed of 50 kmph.

The vehicle will accelerate / decelerate gradually to the set speed from the vehicle speed

To resume the previous cruise set speed, the vehicle speed should be above 20 kmph.

Resume button function will not work if the CRUISE OFF button was pressed to deactivate cruise in the same cycle.

3.24.5 Override Function

This function enables user to ramp up the cruising speed to overtake front vehicle.

The cruising speed can be increased by using accelerator pedal. User has to complete this action within 30 secs, to maintain the cruise mode. If user exceeds the 30 secs. limit, cruise mode will be deactivated.

3.24.6 Standby Mode

If the brake pedal is pressed while cruise control is active, the DID will display "Cruise Standby", the driver can resume cruise control by simply pressing the RESUME button at any point during the current driving cycle.

4 Seats and Safety

4.1 Important Safety Precautions

Always wear your seat belt

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. Failure to wear a seat belt significantly increases the risk of serious injury or fatality in an accident.

In an accident, an unbelted passenger be projectiled, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.

Pregnant women must also wear seat belts after consultation with the doctor for specific recommendations.

Airbag Hazards

Airbags are critical safety devices, but they can pose hazards if mishandled or improperly used. Airbags are supplementary safety systems and are not a substitute for seat belts. Rapid deployment with significant force can cause injuries, especially to occupants seated too close, unbelted, or improperly positioned, including children and shorter adults.

Chemical exposure from deployment residues can irritate the skin, eyes, and respiratory system. To minimize hazards, always use seat belts, maintain proper seating positions, deactivate airbags during servicing, and follow safety protocols. Never place a rear-facing child seat in the front passenger seat unless the airbag is deactivated. Doing so can result in serious injury or death if the airbag deploys.

Driver distraction

Driver distraction occurs when a driver’s attention is diverted from the primary task of operating a vehicle, compromising safety. It can stem from visual distractions like looking at a phone, manual distractions such as adjusting controls, or cognitive distractions like daydreaming or conversing.

Common sources include mobile devices, infotainment systems, eating, and external events. Driver distraction can lead to loss of vehicle control, collisions, serious injury, or death. Distracted driving increases the risk of accidents, as reaction times slow and situational awareness diminishes. To mitigate this risk, drivers should minimize in-vehicle distractions, use hands-free devices sparingly, and maintain focus on the road to ensure their safety and that of others.

Mahindra is shall not be held liable for accidents resulting from driver distraction or failure to follow safe driving practices.

Control your speed

Controlling your speed is essential for safe driving, as excessive speed reduces reaction time, increases stopping distance, and magnifies the severity of collisions. Adhering to speed limits ensures better vehicle control, especially in adverse weather, heavy traffic, or around curves and intersections. Driving at a safe and appropriate speed helps accommodate unexpected hazards, such as pedestrians or sudden stops, and improves fuel efficiency. Always adjust your speed based on road conditions, visibility, and traffic flow to protect yourself, passengers, and others on the road.

Unauthorized modifications to seats, seat belts, airbags, or child restraint systems may compromise safety. Mahindra shall not be held liable for injuries or damages resulting from improper alterations or misuse. Always follow this Owner’s Manual and consult Mahindra authorized service centers before modifying safety components. Carefully review the terms of your warranty for exclusions as contained in the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

The images in this Owner’s Manual are representative and may vary depending on the vehicle model, software version, and specifications.

Always take into account the road conditions, weather conditions, vehicles’ speed in order to prevent accidents.

Turn ‘ON’ the side indicators at least 30 meters before taking a turn or changing the lane.

Decelerate to a safe speed before taking turn. Do not apply brakes during cornering.

When overtaking other vehicles, watch out for the oncoming vehicle.

Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.

If your vehicle is equipped with infotainment/ navigation system, set and make changes to your travel route only when the vehicle is parked.

If your car gets flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you should not try to start the vehicle, we recommend to kindly contact M&M authorized service centre.

Even with the presence of airbags, it is essential for the driver and passengers to wear seat belts at all times to reduce the risk and severity of injuries in the event of a collision.

Safe Driving depends on a combination of attentive driving habits, following traffic rules & signals, properly maintaining vehicle condition, and being aware of your surrounding situations based on the traffic, weather and road conditions.

4.2 Seats

Vehicle seats are designed to provide comfort, support, and safety for occupants during travel.

Modern seats are ergonomically engineered to reduce fatigue and include adjustable features like seat height, lumbar support, and reclining angles to accommodate various body types and preferences.

Seats have integrate safety systems such as seat belts and airbags, with headrests positioned to reduce the risk of whiplash in collisions.

It also have advanced features like Seat ventilation, USB charging and BYOD docking

4.2.1 Sitting in Correct Position

Follow the tips below for a comfortable and safe journey:

•

Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine pressed against the seat back

•

The driver and front passenger seat head restraint has 4 positions. Adjust it as close as possible to the above specified position, with the top of the head restraint even with the top of your head

•

Maintain sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. Maintain at least a Ten inch (10") distance from the centre of the steering wheel to your chest

•

The top curve of the steering wheel should align with your chin for ideal road visibility

•

Adjust your seat and seat back angle such that your wrists rest on the steering wheel

•

Ensure your legs are in bent position while fully depressing the brake and accelerator pedals.

The seat should be adjusted while still maintaining control of the foot pedals (able to fully depress the brake and accelerator pedals), steering wheel (rest the wrists on the steering wheel) and your view of the instrument panel controls.

Never adjust the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. The seat movement may be more than expected and can cause the driver to unintentionally operate the accelerator or brake, or turn the steering wheel, causing loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stationary.

Never put objects under the seats. They may interfere with the seat-lock mechanism or unexpectedly activate the seat position adjusting lever, causing the seat to suddenly move, resulting in loss of control of the vehicle, an accident or serious personal injury.

While adjusting the seat, do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts. This may lead to injuries.

4.2.2 Front Seat

Front Seat Slide

To adjust the seat position, locate the seat slide lever beneath the seat. Pull and hold the lever upward to unlock the seat. Slide the seat forward or backward to your desired position while keeping the lever engaged. Once positioned, release the lever to lock the seat securely in place. Always ensure the seat is properly locked before driving.

While adjusting the seat, ensure the latch fully engages on both sides of the fore-aft adjustment track rails and that the seat is firmly locked in the desired position. Failure to properly secure the seat could result in unintended movement during a sudden stop or collision, potentially causing injury. After adjusting, push and pull the seat to confirm it is securely locked before driving.

Front Seat Recline

To adjust the seatback angle, lean forward slightly and lift the seatback adjustment lever. While holding the lever, lean back to set the seatback to your desired angle. Once adjusted, release the lever and ensure it returns to its original position, locking the seatback securely in place. Always confirm the seatback is locked before driving to ensure safety.

Seat belts offer maximum protection during frontal or rear collisions when occupants are seated upright and positioned well back in their seats.

If you are reclined while wearing a seat belt, the lap belt may slide past your hips and exert restraint forces on the abdomen, increasing the risk of internal injuries in a collision. Additionally, the shoulder strap may press against your neck, causing discomfort or injury.

The more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of serious injury in a collision.

The front seat-back should never be fully reclined while the vehicle is in motion, as doing so may increase the risk of injuries.

When returning the rear-reclined seat back to its upright position, make sure you support the seat back while operating the lever.

Front Seat Height Adjustment (if equipped)

The driver’s seat height can be adjusted using the height adjust handle.

To raise the seat, lift the handle repeatedly until the desired height is reached.

To lower the seat, push the handle downward in a similar manner.

Do not adjust the seat height while the vehicle is moving.

Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment (if equipped)

The driver’s seat features lumbar adjustment to provide additional support for the lower back. The lumbar contour can be adjusted using the adjusting knob located on the outer side of the seat cushion. Turn the knob to increase or decrease the amount of support, allowing you to find a comfortable position for your lower back while driving.

Properly adjusted lumbar support is essential for providing adequate back support, especially during long journeys.

Do not apply force or rotate the lumbar adjustment knob beyond its extreme stop positions in either direction. Forcing the knob may damage the adjustment mechanism or affect its functionality.

Driver and Co-driver Ventilated Seats (if equipped)

Seat ventilation is a special feature designed to enhance comfort by providing additional air circulation in the driver and co-driver seats.
Seat ventilation helps regulate the seat temperature, ensuring a more comfortable driving experience

The active ventilation system uses small fans to blow air into the occupant contact areas, such as the seat cushions and seat backs, through small vent holes on the surface. This airflow helps maintain a comfortable temperature by promoting air circulation, reducing heat buildup, and enhancing overall comfort, especially during long drives or in warm weather.
You can use the seat ventilation whenever you experience excessive heat or sweating in the contact surfaces between the occupant and the seat.

•

The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation, helping to cool the seat and improve comfort. For optimal performance, it is recommended to use the ventilated seat in conjunction with the air conditioner.

•

The ventilated seat is not a cooling or heating seat that blows out cold or hot air directly.

•

Do not place your hand at the bottom of the seat cushion while the ventilated seat is in operation. The running ventilation fan may cause unexpected movement or airflow, which could startle you or result in injury.

•

If you experience any issues with the seat ventilation system, Please contact Mahindra Authorised service center for further assistance.

•

Do not place any sharp or heavy object on the passenger seat, as this could damage the ventilation system by cracking the seat upholstery.

•

If any liquid spills on the seat, clean it up immediately. Allow the seat to dry completely before using the air ventilation feature. Liquid contact can affect the performance of the seat ventilation system, so it's important to ensure the seat is dry to maintain proper function.

•

Do not use the ventilated seat in the following situations:

–

If the seat is not occupied.

–

If there are objects on the seat, such as a child seat, newspapers, or plastic bags, they may obstruct the proper functioning of the seat ventilation system.

•

Never use solvents such as petrol, paint thinner, benzene, alcohol, or alcohol-based products to clean the seats.

•

If the small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks become clogged with dust and dirt, the airflow from the ventilated seat may be reduced. In such cases, clean the seat surface using a vacuum cleaner to remove dirt and ensure proper airflow.

Seat Ventilation Button:

To turn on the seat ventilation, simply press the button. It is located on the driver’s side seat valence cover.

Seat Ventilation Control:

The Seat Ventilation setting is accessible through CID climate application or by using ICC console.

Once the application is launched, the ICC console selection will result in NO ACTION.

Through Center Information Display (CID) Screen

•

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Climate

•

Click on the icon shown below to access seat ventilation control.

•

Enable the Driver and Co-driver seat ventilation feature based on the requirement.

•

Once the seat ventilation is turned ON ,the user will be able to modify the airflow with three different levels. The default level will be OFF.

For every short press on the seat ventilation icon, the levels keep changing in the following sequence:

OFF → Level 3 →Level 2 → Level 1 → OFF

Power Seat with Memory (Driver Side only) (if equipped): The power seat switches are provided on the driver door panel.

The Power seat provides advanced 6-way electrical adjustments for the driver seat.

Memory Functions: The driver seat is equipped with a memory function, which allows you to save and recall seat and rearview mirror settings for up to three different drivers. The memory function is operated by a button located on the driver’s side seat valence cover.

This system ensures convenient entry and exit by automatically sliding the driver’s seat backward to provide additional space.

Driver Seat and ORVM Memory Setting (If equipped)

1. Turn Ignition ON

2. Adjust the Seat to your desired position

3. Adjust the ORVM to your desired position

4. Short Press the M button followed by desired memory button assigning (1, 2 or 3)

5. Your preferred Seating and ORVM position is stored to memory, and you will get acoustic confirmation (chime) from the DID(Driver Information Display).

If ORVM adjustment is skipped and the memory switches are pressed, the ORVM position at that instance of time will be saved. The ORVM can be positioned by the user and stored in the same switch.

•

If the outside rearview mirror control switch is operated while setting up the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position, the memory setting will be cancelled.

•

If you do not press any memory switch i.e. 1, 2, 3 within 3 seconds after pressing M button, the desired position will not be stored.

Restoring Seat and ORVM Position

In Ignition ON condition, user needs to press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat and ORVM to previously stored memory positions, you will receive an acoustic confirmation (chime) from the DID to indicate that the memory settings have been successfully restored.

In Ignition OFF condition, user needs to short press/press and hold any restore button (1, 2 or 3) shall take the Seat to previously stored memory position. During the memory restore operation, pressing any seat switch will immediately stop the ongoing seat movement.

During memory restore operation, pressing any Seat/ORVM switch will stop the ongoing movement of the Seat/ORVM.

The ORVM cannot be independently recalled while the seat is in its stored position.

The ORVM can be recalled only when the ignition is ON.

Easy Entry and Easy Exit

The driver seat is equipped with an easy entry and exit function, which automatically moves the seat backward and downward when the ignition is OFF and the driver door is open. This feature makes it easier for the user to enter and exit the vehicle. It can be enabled or disabled through CID screen according to the user's preference.

In the Easy Entry and Easy Exit function, when the door is closed, the seat will automatically return to the position it was in before the door was opened.

•

The driver seat always moves to half of its remaining rearward travel.

•

The final seat position may not be exactly the same when using the easy access function. Differences within an acceptable range can occur, depending on factors such as the occupant's weight and the vehicle's power supply status. This is completely normal and does not indicate a fault with the system.

•

Ensure the vehicle is in "P" (Park) mode before adjusting the seat position or operating the easy access function. This prevents the vehicle from moving and ensures safety while making adjustments to the seat.

•

Do not operate the seat memory switch or any other switches while the easy access function is activated, as doing so may cause the easy access function to malfunction.

Activation and deactivation:

To enable or disable the Easy Entry and Easy Exit feature, go to App drawer–> My Vehicle –> Interior –> Convenience –> Easy Entry and Exit (Enable/Disable) in the CID. Enter the Access tab and then toggle the sliding bar to either enable or disable the feature according to your preference.

•

The driver-side electric seat can be adjusted even when the ignition is OFF. However, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle, as there is a risk of injury, especially with moving seat adjustments and other vehicle features.

•

Children should always be closely supervised near a vehicle, regardless of whether it is being reversed, parked, or driven under normal circumstances.

•

Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the seat comes in contact with any other object and cannot be adjusted further.

•

If the power seats are not operational, they should be inspected and repaired before driving.

•

Once the Easy Entry/Exit function is enabled, it remains active until manually disabled. Be cautious during this operation, as the automatic seat movement could pose a risk of injury to rear seat passengers or anyone near the seat.

•

Do not put any luggage/water bottles below driver seat as they can obstruct power seat movement or potentially damage the seat mechanism and motor.

•

Do not remove vehicle battery while seat is in operational

Front Row Seats with BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) (If equipped)

The front row seats are equipped with a BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) docking station, designed for ultimate convenience. With the included USB Type-C port, you can securely dock your mobile phone or tablet, allowing you to charge your device while enjoying your own content, ensuring a seamless and enjoyable experience.

For your safety, please avoid using the BYOD feature with the gripper while the vehicle is in motion.

The BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) is an accessory part and is not provided as a standard feature with the vehicle.

4.2.3 Second Row Seats

To fold down the rear seat back:

•

To fold the second row 60:40 seat, Pull the seat folding strap to fold the backrest.

Loading luggage on the seats is dangerous, as it can become a projectile during a sudden stop or collision, potentially injuring passengers. Always store luggage on the floor, ensuring it is securely placed to minimize the risk of injury in the event of an accident.

To avoid serious injury, do not sit on or place objects on a folded seat back while the vehicle is moving.

Second Row Armrest

The Second Row 60P seat back features armrest with cup holder.

•

To open the armrest, pull the strap located at the top of the armrest, as shown in the illustration.

•

When the armrest is not needed, push it back into the 60P backrest until it locks in place.

4.3 Head Restraint

The head restraint comprises the padded portion which contacts your head and is inserted/locked in receptacles on the top of the seat back. Vehicle seats are equipped with head restraints which are vertically adjustable. The purpose of these head restraints is to help limit head motion in the event of rear collision.

Always align top of the head restraint with the top of your head or as close to it as possible. To raise the head restraint, pull the restraint up.

To lower the head restraint, press the lock knob and push the head restraint down. The head restraint can be pulled out completely by depressing the locking button while pulling the restraint out. Align the head restraint shafts over the holes on the seat top and push the restraint straight down till you hear the lock click. Keep the seat back as upright as possible so the headrest is behind, not beneath, and almost touching your head.

Never drive with the head restraints not properly adjusted, head restraints removed or inserted in a flipped condition. With no support behind your head, your neck could be seriously injured in a collision.

Head restraints are provided for the front row and second row outboards and center occupant.

4.4 Seat Belt

4.4.1 General Warnings and Instructions

At least once each month, inspect the seat belt webbing for any cuts, tears, or other signs of wear (such as fraying along the edges). Also inspect the anchors, retractors, and buckles to be sure they are tight and operational.

•

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belt no matter how short the trip in order to minimize the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash. In an accident, an un-belted passenger becomes a projectile, and can cause serious injury to himself or another passenger.

•

In a rollover crash, an un-belted person is significantly more likely prone to serious and / or fatal’ injury than a person wearing a seat belt

•

In order to be properly buckled, you must always sit up straight and keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part must be worn low and tight across your hips, just touching the top of your thighs. While fastening the seat belt, the shoulder strap of the seat belt must pass over your chest and top of your shoulder. It must never touch your neck, face, the side of your shoulder, arm, or pass under your arm. The belt must always be flat against your body and not twisted in any way. Nothing, such as an arm rest, a pocketbook, or any external objects should be between you and the seat belt. An improperly worn seat belt will reduce the protection in an accident.

•

Seat belts should be adjusted as tightly as possible, consistent with comfort to properly secure the wearer in the seat.

•

The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for adults must be properly used and maintained.

•

For usage of adult seat belt to secure children, refer to section of manual for child seat positions and use a child restraint systems

•

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.

•

Do not use any accessories on seat belts or modify in any way the seat belt system. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash

•

An accident or emergency stop, can damage your seat belt system, even if the accident is “minor”. Please have your Mahindra Authorised Dealer inspect the seat belt system after an accident

•

Please be aware that any unsecured item in your vehicle, such as your pet, unsecured child restraint system, a laptop or mobile phones, can become a projectile in the event of an accident or sudden stop, causing injuries to occupants in the vehicle

•

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is in motion. Passenger who does not wear the seat belts will be under a high risk of thrown against the vehicle inside hard parts fitted inside the passenger compartment like grab handles, coat hooks, screens and other fitments, against other occupants or out of the vehicle during emergency stop or collision.

Never use a damaged seat belt system. A damaged seat belt will not provide protection in an accident, resulting in serious injury.

•

Seat belt systems are prone to abuse. They are not indestructible. They must be handled with care to avoid damage and periodic inspection for seat belt functionality to be ensured

•

Keep the belts clean and dry. Belt retraction may become difficult if the belts and webbings are soiled. If they need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners. These chemicals will severely weaken the belts

•

Retractors in 3-point type seat belts retract the seat belts when not in use. The inertia lock and coil spring allow the belts to remain comfortable on users during normal driving. During accidents or abrupt stops, inertia locks restrict the sudden forward movement of the wearer

Prevention of seat belt Slow retraction:

1. Check if there any twist on in-board or out-board side of safety belt.

2. Check if dust accumulated on outer parts such as Webbing , D-Loop, Tongue stopper and Tongue.

3. Remove the dust from D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper by compressed air or air blower.

4. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt parts D-Loop, Webbing, Tongue & Tongue stopper. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids which might damage the seat belt assembly.

5. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance. Safety belt assembly cleaning required if seat belt retraction becomes very slow due to dust and soil accumulation on safety belt assembly, then below cleaning procedure to be followed:

Steps to be followed for removal Seat belt for cleaning

1. Appropriate Procedure of disassembly of all pyrotechnic devices to be followed for pretensioner seat belt. The battery negative terminal to be removed before disassembly of pretensioner, otherwise there will be error codes registered in Airbag ECU and Airbag ECU will show malfunction.

2. Open Pillar trims and take out Seat belt assembly on bench by carefully disassembly of connector and Lap Pretensioner/ Anchor wire assembly (if equipped). Kindly follow correct safety belt pretensioner handling procedure in case of pretensioner safety belts. Use clean and lint free cloth and hand gloves for cleaning safety belt assembly. Do not use any chemicals and cleaning fluids which might damage the Seat belt webbing and other parts.

3. If seat belt movement is sticky due to dust accumulation. Then please contact the dealer for help in cleaning.

4. In case of soiling on the belt, use a mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of normal soap powder to 1 liter of lukewarm water.

5. Care to be taken to prevent contact of soap water with Pretensioner.

6. Clean dust accumulated on D-Loop, Webbing and overall assembly by close inspection of D-Loop and Webbing using lint free cloth.

7. After cleaning safety belt they should be dried by lint free dry cloth.

8. After cleaning kindly inspect Webbing movement through D-Loop slot for any sticky movement of webbing .

9. Assemble the safety belt using correct torque. Re-assemble all trim parts.

10. Inspect the Webbing for retraction performance.

Seat Belts use for Patients: Persons with serious medical conditions should also wear a seat belt. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations before travel.

Seat Belts use for Pregnant Women: Pregnant women must also wear seat belts in the below illustrated manner. Consult your doctor for specific recommendations.

The lap belt should be worn snugly and as low as possible over the hips. The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder, but never across the stomach area. When worn properly, the seat belt will protect both the mother and the foetus in an accident or emergency stop.

A pregnant woman should never wear the seat belt across the stomach area. This could lead to serious injuries to the foetus and/or the pregnant mother.

Never wear twisted seat belts. Excessive forces will be transferred from the belt to the wearer in a collision, resulting in serious personal injury.

Each seat belt is meant for use by one person only. Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. The seat belt will not be able to absorb the impact forces properly leading to serious injuries.

Never wear a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. This could lead to serious injuries.

Seat Belt Usage is Necessary to:

•

Reduce the possibility of being thrown out from your vehicle during an accident.

•

Reduce the possibility of injuries to upper body, lower body and legs during an accident

•

Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle

Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the vehicle seat belts. The lap portion should be snug fastened on the hips and as low as possible and the shoulder belt should be route across the child's shoulder, not across neck or face. If you are unable to position the belt across the child's shoulder, the child should be seated in a booster seat. Frequently check the seat belt to be sure it remains snug and in position. A squirming child could cause the seat belt to come out of position.

4.4.2 Seat Belt Configuration

To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by all occupants inside of your vehicle.

Seat Belt Types with respect to Location
Seat Location	Seat Belt Type
Driver Seat	Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL), & Anchor Pretensioner
Co-Driver Seat	Seat belt with Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL)
2nd Row LH (40P)	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR)
2nd Row RH (60P)	Seat belt with Emergency Lock Retractor (ELR) for outboard and center occupant

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR): The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) allows the driver seat belt to freely extend and retract with occupant movement, yet locks the belt during a sudden stop or upon impact.

Retractor Pretensioner & load limiter (RPLL): A pretensioner is designed to retract some of the webbing of a seat belt the instant a collision occurs, tightening the seat belt to restrain occupants quickly and reducing the amount they are thrown forward in a moderate or severe frontal crash.

Load limiters help protect occupants from seat belt-inflicted injury. In the event of a crash, the pretensioner restrains the occupant until certain amount of force is applied. At this point the load limiter releases the webbing gradually so as not to exert too much force on the chest of the occupant.

4.4.3 Seat Belt Pretensioner

In the event of a crash being detected, the belt pretensioner locks the seat belt by drawing back the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown forward. The seat belt pretensioner combined with the seat belt and airbag further increases safety.

This vehicle is provided with a anchor pretensioner for driver seat (in the sill board area) and is used to help to protect occupant in the sever crash events .

Its activation through Airbag ECU is signalled by pulling down of the metallic cable and removes slack in in seat belt.

To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt on shoulder keeping it firmly close to the chest and bottom part of the seat belt on pelvis.

In case of side impact collisions, front air bags are not inflated, but seat belt pretensioners located in the same position with impact direction will be deployed together with side air bag. Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Get the deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an Authorised dealer.

Operation of pretensioner

When a severe frontal impact occurs, seat belt pretensioners pull back the seat belts immediately to restrain the occupants to their seats.

Operation of load limiter

After frontal collision, the load limiter releases the seat belt to prevent the occupant from being injured due to belt force.

Fastening the seat belt

Even if seat belts are not worn, the air bag will deploy in case of impact, collision triggered. In addition, airbags can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their seat belts. Airbags may cause injuries to occupants if they do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.

•

Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not, the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden manoeuvring of the vehicle

•

Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing out of the retract

•

Each seat belt and each seating position should be used by only one occupant at a time.

•

Seat belts and airbags can significantly minimise possible injury to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from fatal collisions or injury

•

Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts should be checked and repaired by only a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service centre

•

An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant or child restraint

4.4.4 Fastening the Seat Belt

Adjust the seat as needed, sit up straight and well back in the seat. To fasten your seat belt, pull the webbing out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. An audible “click” would be heard when the tab locks into the buckle. Pull up on the shoulder strap to tighten the lap belt across your hips. The seat belt retractor will pull in any slack in the shoulder strap. A slow and easy motion will allow the belt to extend and let you move your body around freely.

Periodically check the seat belt as you ride to be sure it remains snug and in position. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock (restrict) if you try to lean forward too quickly.

If the driver or co-driver seat belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON, the seat belt warning lamp illuminates and chimes beat will turn till seat belt fastened. Refer “Warning Lamps” in the “DID Features” chapter for further details.

4.4.5 Seat Belt Release

To release the belt, press the buckle release button and allow the belt to retract. If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Never insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this may prevent from properly latching the tongue and may cause damage to the buckle mechanism, thereby making the seat belt ineffective in an accident, resulting in serious personal injury.

4.4.6 Second Row Seat Belt Fastening

The word “CENTER” is marked on the seat belt buckle positioned on LH side for the rear center seat occupant to wear seat belt correctly. The buckles are designed so that an outboard seat belt tongue cannot be inserted into the wrong buckle.

To unfasten the seat belt, push the red colour button engraved with “PRESS” on the buckle and retract the seat belt slowly while holding the belt or/and the belt tongue.

4.4.7 Seat Belt Height Adjuster

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor for maximum comfort and safety of both front seats. If the height of the seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection.

The shoulder portion of the belt should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest to the door and not your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster to an appropriate position while pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position.

Adjust the shoulder belt height sitting well back in the seat. Do not adjust the seat belt height while vehicle is in motion.

Check that the seat belt is positioned over the centre of outward shoulder, and it is ensuring belt is away from your neck and face, but not slipping off from your shoulder. Improper adjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt during the accident/collision

4.4.8 Driver and Passenger Seat Belt Reminder Indication

The driver, front passenger and rear passenger seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will be continuous ON in Driver Information Display (DID) if driver or passenger doesn’t wear the seat belt and will be continuous until belt is buckled.

Chime will be activated when vehicle speed is more than 25 Kmph of speed while vehicle is in motion which will be ON for 95 seconds for front seat belt and 35 seconds for rear seat belt.

4.4.9 Passenger Occupant Detection System (PODS) & Seat Belt Reminder Indication

PODS detects the presence of occupant in the front passenger and on all rear seating locations.

Front passenger

Rear passenger

If Occupant is present on front passenger and rear passenger seats and not wearing the seat belt, Seat belt reminder warning symbol lamp will glow on the vehicle instrument cluster panel and will be continuous until the seat belt is buckled.

It should be noted that the PODS require a minimum weight hence children may not be detected by PODS. Along with this warning symbol, a Chime in Cluster will be ON for 95 seconds for front seat belt reminder and 35 seconds for rear passenger seat belt reminder.

Do keep in mind that after market seat covers also may deteriorate the occupant detection sensor performance, don’t use the non recommended/non authorized seat covers.

Seat belt reminder warning lamp for passenger seat may glow in case of child is present in passenger seat.

Strong advice not to carry children in front seat without child restraint seat. Also do not use adult seat belt which is designed to harness person taller than 140cm. Always ensure Passenger Airbag is turn OFF before you carry child on passenger seat. We strongly urge that children should be in middle row using the child seats with the ISOFIX

4.4.10 Rear outboard seat belt usage

It is strongly recommended to use the rear outboard seat belts properly routed through the seat belt guide provided on the rear seat back. Else, neck cutting and uncomfortable circumstances may arise with improper use of seat belt.

Improper routing of rear outboard seat belt may cause severe injuries in case of collision.

4.5 Child Restraint System (CRS)

How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor/ISOFIX Rods

ISOFIX Marking

Latch anchor/ISOFIX rod

•

The ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) are located in rear seats bottom position. Their locations are shown in the illustration

•

Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower latch anchors (rods) until it clicks. Refer Child seat installation manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.

•

Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child restraint

ISOFIX system is a standardized method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult Seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.

•

When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system (rod), all unused vehicle rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of un-retracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates or tabs may allow the child to reach the un-retracted seat belts which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to the child in the child restraint.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle

How to use the Top Tether/Rear Anchor

There are two top tether rods/rear anchors on the seat base back side of the rear row front facing seats.

Remove the headrest from the rear row seat

Place the child restraint on the rear row seat

Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the top tether rod/ rear anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the webbing of the child restraint system (CRS) tether connector. Follow the clear instructions provide in the CRS manual provided by the equipment manufacturer.

Each Child Restraint System (CRS) should be designated for the use of one child only.

•

The top-tether/ rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer for installation

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are Firmly latched to the ISOFIX rod/lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound/ latch indications provided on seat.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury. Additionally, a loose or improperly fitted child seat may not provide adequate protection.

•

Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints and must never be used to secure other objects, equipment, or adult passengers. Misuse may cause serious injury or death.

•

The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct top tether rod/rear anchor provided on seat back.

•

Don’t put the top tether strap over the head restraint of rear row seat which is not the correct method and may cause risk.

•

Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Refer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

•

Do not install the child restraint of such size if it hinders the operations of the front seat and causes problems to the front occupants.

•

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat unless the airbag is deactivated. Airbag deployment can cause serious injury or death to a child.

Table of Information on Child Restraint Systems (CRS) Using The Seat Belt

Table of vehicle handbook information on child restraint systems installation suitability for various seating positions

Mass Group	Front Passenger (with ON/OFF Switch)		Rear Outboard	Rear Center	Mounting method of Child seat in vehicle
Mass Group	With PAB ON	With PAB OFF	Rear Outboard	Rear Center	Mounting method of Child seat in vehicle
Group 0: Up to 10 kg (0 to 9 months)	X	U	U	U	Rear facing seat using 3-point belt
Group 0+: Up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)	X	U	U	U	Rear facing seat using 3-point belt
Group I: 9 to 18 kg (9 months to 4 years)	X	U/UF	U	U	Rear facing / forward facing seat using 3-point belt
Group II: 15 to 25 kg (4 years to 6 years)	UF	UF	U	U	Forward facing seat / Booster seat using 3-point belt
Group III: 22 to 36 kg (6 years to 12 years)	UF	UF	U	U	Forward facing seat / Booster seat using 3-point belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group. UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group. L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories. X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.

Table of Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various ISOFIX Positions

Mass group	Size Class	Fixture	Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass group	Size Class	Fixture	Front Passenger	Rear outboard	Rear Center
Carrycot	F	ISO/L1	X	X	X
Carrycot	G	ISO/L2	X	X	X
Group 0: up to 10 kg	E	ISO/R1	X	IL	X
Group 0+: up to 13 kg	E	ISO/R1	X	IL	X
	D	ISO/R2	X	IL	X
	C	ISO/R3	X	IL	X
Group I (9 to 18 kg)	D	ISO/R2	X	IL	X
	C	ISO/R3	X	IL	X
	B	ISO/F2	X	IUF/IL	X
	B1	ISO/F2X	X	IUF/IL	X
	A	ISO/F3	X	IUF/IL	X
Group II (15 to 25 kg)			X	IL	X
Group III (22 to 36 kg)			X	IL	X

Key of letters be inserted in the above table

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group

IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS). These CRS may be are those of the ‘specific vehicle’, ‘restricted’ or ‘semi-universal’ categories

IU: Suitable for using rearward facing child restraint system with ISOFIX & Top-tether (or) ISOFIX Base with Support leg

X: Seat position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class

A - ISO/F3: Full-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 720mm)

B - ISO/F2: Reduced-Height Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)

B1 - ISO/F2X: Reduced-Height Second Version Back Surface Shape Forward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System (height 650mm)

C - ISO/R3: Full-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

D - ISO/R2: Reduced-Size Rearward-Facing toddler Child Restraint System

E - ISO/R1: Infant-Size Rearward-Facing Child Restraint System

F -ISO/L1: Left Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)

G - ISO/L2: Right Lateral Facing position Child Restraint System (carry-cot)

Use the manufacturer recommended Child Restraint System (CRS) and locations to fit in vehicle. Please read the installation instructions provided in manual carefully before use.

Table of Vehicle Handbook Information i-Size Child Restraint Systems for Installation in Various seating Positions

Restraint device figure	Front Passenger (With ON/OFF Switch)		Rear out board	Rear Center
	With PAB ON	With PAB OFF
i-Size Child Restraint System	X	X	i-U	X

i-U: Suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System forward and rearward facing.

i-UF: Suitable for forward-facing i-Size “universal” Child Restraint System only.

X: Seating position not suitable for i-Size “universal” Child Restraint systems.

Recommended Child Seat to Use in Vehicle:

Mahindra & Mahindra recommends Britax DUALFIX PRO M i-Size child seats for up to 18 Kg children. These seats are available at Mahindra dealerships.
Mass Group	CRS Manufacturer	Model	Type	Installation in Vehicle	Attachment Method
Group 0 : up to 10 kg (0 to 9 months)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group 0+ : up to 13 kg (0 to 2 years)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg
Group I : 9 to 18 kg (9 months to 4 years)	Britax Römer	DUALFIX PRO M	i-Size	Rearward facing	ISOFIX base frame with support leg

Anchorage Location : Child restraint anchor fittings are installed at the points as shown in the figure.

Unrestrained infants and small children could be injured

•

Never transport them unless they are properly restrained

•

Use restrained system which meet safety standard

•

Follow directions provided by the manufacturer

Warning for Child Restraint

•

Use only the approved Child Restraint System (CRS) for better safety of your child.

•

Mahindra is not responsible for the personal injury and property damage due to the defect of child restraint system.

•

Use the proper type of child restraint system suitable for the weight and size for your baby.

•

Use the child restraint system at recommended seating location only and follow the instructions.

•

The Child Restraint System (CRS) must remain unaltered and should not be tampered with under any circumstances.

•

After a collision, it is crucial to have the seat belts, seats, ISOFIX, and top-tether anchorages thoroughly inspected and repaired exclusively at an authorized service center to ensure safety and reliability.

•

Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as below:

1	GROUP 0 : 0 ~ 10 KG	4	GROUP II : 15 ~ 25 KG
2	GROUP 0+ : 0 ~ 13 KG	5	GROUP III : 22 ~ 36 KG
3	GROUP I : 9 ~ 18 KG

•

Group 0 & 0+ : Rear-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX with Base & Support Leg is recommended).

•

Group I: Forward-facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat (use of ISOFIX & Top Tether is recommended).

•

Group II & III: Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened. Always follow the installation procedure and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat.

Cautions for ISOFIX Seat usage

•

The anchor provided on rear seat base back is the supplemental device to secure the child restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore, do not secure the child restraint system only with the seat back anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors to break, causing serious injury or death.

•

Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound and color indications.

•

The child restraint seat strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct seat back anchor provided on the rear seat base back side behind the seat carpet. Follow the instructions provided on the seat back for the details of anchor location.

•

Make sure that the child restraint system is firmly secured by rocking it in different directions.

•

Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unexpected personal injury.

•

User is sole responsible for injuries or damage resulting from improper installation, incorrect seat selection, or disregard of the instructions given in this Vehicle Manual

4.6 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) includes airbags, pre-tensioners and ECU. The airbags are designed to provide further protection to the vehicle occupants in addition to the primary protection provided by the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioners.

The primary components of the system are the sensors which measure the crash severity. In the event of a significant frontal impact, the SRS airbags inflate to work in conjunction with the seat belts and seat belt pre-tensioner system and help reduce injuries mainly to the driver's or front passenger's head/chest.

Any attempt to modify the SRS can lead to serious malfunctions or disabled safety systems. Mahindra is not liable for injuries, death, or property damage caused by such unauthorized changes, and any resulting harm shall be the sole responsibility of the user.

Any tampering of the SRS components (Airbags, crash sensors, Airbag ECU software and wiring harness etc) can lead to serious malfunctions and may cause unintended deployment which can lead sever injury or inhibits safety restraint systems functionality. Mahindra is not liable for injuries, death, or property damage caused by such unauthorized changes, and any resulting harm shall be the sole responsibility of the user.

Seat belts are the primary restraint system in the vehicle. An airbag provides supplemental protection in addition to the seat belts.

All occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts irrespective of presence of airbag to minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash.

Airbags are more effective in reducing injuries when the seat belts are worn.

Airbags

Your vehicle has the following airbags:

A: Curtain Airbag

B: Side Airbag

C: Passenger Airbag

D: Driver Airbag

E: Knee Airbag

4.6.1 Driver and Front Passenger Airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint System (Airbag) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and front passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's presence are the letters “AIRBAG” embossed on the airbag pad cover in the steering wheel and the passenger's side Demister cover above the glove box.

The SRS is designed to deploy the front airbag only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than ± 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

Driver Airbag

Deployment

Horn may activate while operating the haptic switches and control wing buttons present on Driver airbag module when switches are operated with higher force than recommended.

Front Passenger Airbag

Deployment

Front airbag are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front airbag will not deploy in frontal crashes which are below the prescribed deployment threshold where risk of serious injuries is low.

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. It cause injuries.

4.6.2 Knee Airbag (If equipped)

The driver’s knee airbag is located on the dashboard under the steering wheel

If the driver’s posture is improper while driving, the knee air bag might not protect the driver’s knee area when the airbag deployed.

4.6.3 Side Impact Airbag

Your vehicle is equipped with side impact airbag in both the front seats. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection during side impacts or collisions.

The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. To minimise the risk of severe injury in the event of a crash, every passenger must always wear their seat belt (see the chapter on Seat Belts in this manual). The airbags inflate very quickly with great force. Do not position any part of your body too close to airbag, you or especially children could be seriously injured/killed by a deploying airbag.

•

In the case of a side collision, the curtain airbag may be deployed together with the relevant side airbag on the side the collision occurs

•

The side impact airbag is supplementary to the seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants

•

For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, all seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passengers arms and hands should be placed on their laps

•

Do not use any accessory seat covers. Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system

•

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag

•

Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the air bag and yourself

•

Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door and the seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplementary side impact airbag inflates

Do not cover the front seats with anything. It hinders the air bag inflation

It is strictly non recommendable to use retrofitted seat covers on the driver and front passenger seats equipped with airbags.

An airbag is not designed to deploy in every type of crash. Depending on the type of collision and severity of impact, the front protection airbags and side protection airbags are may independently deployed thereby protecting the occupants. It is not necessary that ALL the airbags deploy during an collision.

Incase of low sever collisions there may not be any airbag deployed and proper wearing of seat belts can provide maximum protection to occupant.

4.6.4 Side Curtain Airbag

The side curtain air bags are contained between right above the front and rear doors and the end of the vehicle roof.

The Side Curtain air bags are located along sides of the roof rails on the A & B pillars. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain airbag are designed to deploy depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and impact. The curtain airbag are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations, collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations.

•

In the case of a side collision, the side airbag may be deployed together with the relevant curtain airbag on the side the collision occurs

•

In order for side and curtain airbag to provide the best protection, both front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Importantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat

•

When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position

•

Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or curtain airbag

4.6.5 Passenger Airbag Activation/Deactivation

The passenger air bag activation/deactivation option is available in the CID screen present on the vehicle display unit.

Steps to Activate and Deactivate the Passenger Airbag

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App drawer/ Vehicle Apps / My Vehicle / Interior / Safety / Passenger Airbag (ON/OFF)

If your select Airbag ON/OFF the following indicator will appear.

Passenger Airbag OFF Indicator

This Warning indicator glows on center fascia switch on IP when passenger airbag “OFF” position.

Passenger Airbag ON Indicator

This Warning indicator symbol glows on center fascia switch on IP when selecting the passenger airbag “ON” option to enable the passenger airbag.

4.6.6 Airbag System Malfunction Lamp

Airbags do not require any regular maintenance or service. The airbag system malfunction lamp illuminates when the ignition is ON, and it turns OFF after about two seconds as self check confirming normal operations of airbag system and malfunction lamp.

This lamp monitors airbag sensor assembly, airbag sensors, indicator lamp, seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.

If either of the following conditions occur, there is a malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pre-tensioner. Immediately contact your Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

•

The lamp does not glow when the ignition is switched ON or glows beyond six (6) seconds after switching the ignition ON

•

The lamp comes ON at any other time, even briefly

•

The lamp comes ON intermittently

Never make any modifications to your vehicle which could affect the performance of airbag system. In particular, changes to the vehicle frame, bumpers, bull bar, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trim, seats or steering wheel (especially covers, pads or other trim), could prevent proper deployment of the airbag. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your Mahindra Authorised Service center.

Never try to open or strike the airbag cover. If the airbag cover is cracked or damaged in any way, the airbag may not function as intended. Take the vehicle to a Mahindra Authorised Service center.

Even if the airbags do not deploy during an accident, take your vehicle to a Mahindra Authorised Service center for a thorough inspection of the airbag and seat belt systems, no matter how minor the accident. The airbag system could have been damaged, and may not work as intended in the future, resulting in serious injury.

4.6.7 Airbag Inflation/Deployment

The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system triggers the airbag inflators. This initiates a chemical reaction which quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas.

Upon deployment, tear seams moulded directly into the pad covers separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the airbags. A fully inflated airbag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to manoeuvre or operate other controls.

Deployment of the airbags happen in a milliseconds, producing a loud noise releasing a ‘white smoke’ and residue along with a non-toxic gas. This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue with soap and water as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation. Exit the vehicle as soon as possible after the accident.

Airbag components will be very hot once it deployed incase of any accident. Touching or holding of those parts during/immediately after the collision may cause severe burns/injuries. Ensure of proper driving posture and sitting positions inside the vehicle during in motion.

Airbag deployment may cause windshield to break.

•

Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent them from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or disable the system, which could result in serious injury

•

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment. The airbags inflate only once

•

After airbag deployment, it is not recommended to drive the vehicle, as the airbags will not deploy or provide protection in the event of another collision.

•

Do not cover the steering wheel, instrument panel, seats with any object (e.g. dash panel covers, seat covers) which may prevent the airbags from inflating properly

•

The airbags inflate with considerable force. While the system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force of a deploying airbag can also cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant's hands, arms, chest or head is in close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment. Sit straight and well back into the seat. Move your seat as far back as practical to allow room for airbag inflation, while still allowing you to properly operate/drive the vehicle

•

Users breaching/violating the cautions and warnings provided in this manual are solely liable for the consequences. Mahindra directors, officers, designers and managers are not responsible.

The front passenger should never sit on the edge of the seat, stand near the glove compartment, rest feet or other parts of the body on the dashboard when the vehicle is moving.

The driver or front passenger who is too close to the steering wheel or dashboard can be seriously injured during airbag deployment.

•

The driver must sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while still maintaining control of the vehicle

•

The front passenger must sit as far back as possible from the dashboard

•

Sitting improperly or out of position can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying airbag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle resulting in serious injury

•

Always sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, on the seat cushion centre with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor

•

All vehicle occupants must be properly restrained using the seat belts

•

Retrofitted seats with modified cushions should not be used, as this may result in serious or fatal injury in the event of accident.

•

All infants and children must be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle in a child restraint seat and be properly restrained by seat belts

•

Front airbags can injure occupants who are improperly positioned in the front seats

•

Even with airbags, improperly belted and un-belted occupants can be severely injured when the airbag inflates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, airbags and occupant safety contained in this vehicle manual

•

Do not modify the front seats. Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system or side impact airbags

•

Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses

If your SRS malfunctions, the Airbag may not inflate properly during a collision thereby increasing risk of serious injury or death. If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:

1. The SRS warning lamp does not turn ‘ON’ when the ignition switch is placed in the ‘ON’ position for few seconds.

a. The SRS warning lamp stays ‘ON’ after illuminating.

b. The SRS warning lamp comes ‘ON’/stays ‘ON’ while the vehicle is in motion.

c. The SRS warning lamp blinks when the vehicle is running.

2. We recommend the customer to immediately visit M&M Authorized Service Centre and get the SRS system inspected if any of the above conditions occur.

3. Never make any modifications to your vehicle. The modifications carried out, but not limited to the vehicle frame, bumpers, front fenders, ride height, suspension, seat belts, interior trims, steering wheel (especially holders), are not acceptable. This will affect the intended performance of SRS.

4. Fitment of bull bars, seat covers on seats with airbags etc, is strictly prohibited. If you need to make any modifications to accommodate any disability you may have, please contact your M&M Authorized service centre for necessary guidance.

5. Do not tamper with SRS in any way. This will lead to unexpected performance of system and may cause serious injury or death.

4.6.8 Child Restraint and Airbag

Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it

Do not put the safety seat belt under your child’s arm or behind its back.

Do not use pillows, books or towels to boost your child’s height.

Do not allow children to stand up or kneel on either the rear or the front seats.

An unrestrained child could suffer serious or fatal injuries during a collision.

Do not install a booster seat or a booster cushion with a seat belt that is slack or twisted.

If the front passenger airbag inflates, while a child is seated using a rearward child restraint it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

In addition, do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger’s seat either. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child.

This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following position. On the front passenger’s sun visor

Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it!

Never put a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat. If the front passenger airbag inflates, it can cause serious or fatal injuries.

Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seriously injured in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in appropriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.

Instal the child restraint system on the rear outboard seats, and securely lock the child restraint system in position with the help of ISOFIX.

Always Buckle Children (ABC) in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride.

4.6.9 Airbag Deployment

The images shown in this section are for illustrative purpose only. They may not look like your model/variant or vehicle.

Front Airbag

Front airbag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the intensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision. The system that senses the collision and the mechanism of deployment of airbags is triggered when there is a collision severe enough to trigger airbag deployment.

In case of frontal impact, side and curtain airbag of either side or both side may deploy depends on the type & severity of impact.

In case of low severity frontal collision, Seat-belts, If fastened properly, alone are effective to reduce the severity of injury to occupants, seat belt pretensioners may trigger to further reduce the severity of injury in such accidents and airbags are may not intended to deploy

4.6.10 Airbag Non-deployment

Impacts below a pre-determined threshold level may not cause the airbag to deploy in the following cases:

The airbags are triggered only when there is a collision severe enough to trigger the airbags. The extent of vehicle damage is not always the correct indicator for airbag deployment. In some extreme/rare conditions of rough road driving, running into a curb or hitting other fixed objects, the airbags may deploy depending upon the severity of collision. In some of these conditions, damage to the vehicle may be minor or not be readily visible.

The airbags are triggered only when there is a collision severe enough to trigger the airbags. The amount of visible vehicle damage is not always the correct indicator for airbag deployment. Some collisions can result in visible damage but with no airbag deployment, because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed. Seat belts, if worn, offer adequate occupant protection in such cases.), damage to the vehicle may be minor or not be readily visible.

where there may be visible damage but the airbags did not deploy since such deployment was either not needed (according to the system) or would not have offered protection. In such cases, seat belts, if worn, offer adequate protection.

Collision with Narrow objects – Utility poles or Trees etc

Airbags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees or any other narrow objects such as the point of impact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not delivered to the sensors.

Frontal Impact : Frontal impact beyond 30º range from head-on to the vehicle.

Frontal Side Swipe Impact: Frontal offset impact to the vehicle may not provide the deceleration force necessary for airbag deployment.

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any airbags.

Under-ride Situations :

Running under a heavy vehicle's rear, side or front as shown in the exemplar image below may not provide the decelerations necessary for airbag deployment.

Airbags will not inflate in this “under-ride” situation where deceleration forces that are detected by sensors are significantly low.

Rear-end Collisions :

Frontal airbags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions. In rear collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in direction where the airbags would not be able to provide any additional benefit. Side airbags can deploy based on the severity of the rear impact. High voltage cutoff happen, depends on the severity and location of impact.

The head restraint should be properly positioned to provide adequate support to the occupant's head and the back of the head. Proper adjustment of the head restraint is essential to minimize head movement in the event of a rear collision.

Potholes or Stepped Surfaces :

Driving into a big pothole, stepped surface or hitting the far side of a hole/incline will not inflate the airbag.

Other collision scenarios where airbags may not deploy:

Impact With Animal (Cow, Horse, Deer, etc.,)

Vehicle Impacting Rear of Another Car

Rollover: Wearing seat belts offers effective protection in the event of a rollover collision.

Airbags will not inflate in rollover accidents where airbag deployment would not provide protection to the occupants. However, side impact and curtain airbags may inflate only when severe side impact causes rollover.

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate in a strong impact.

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may inflate even in a frontal collision, if there is a strong impact to the lateral direction.

A frontal collision occurs when the front ends of two vehicles collide

When a vehicle hits a curb or bump

When a vehicle falls into a deep hole or ditch

When a vehicle experiences a hard landing or fall

Side airbags and side curtain airbags may not inflate

In the event of a side impact to the vehicle body, excluding the passenger compartment, several areas of the vehicle are typically affected.

When a vehicle is impacted from the side at an oblique angle

When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a high-hood vehicle

When a vehicle is impacted from the side by a motorcycle or bicycle

Possible scenarios in which high voltage may cutoff:

•

Frontal collision, Side collision, Rear collision and Under strike collision

4.6.11 Airbag Service

Airbag Replacement: Self-servicing or tampering with the airbag system is dangerous. An airbag could accidentally deploy causing serious injuries, or will not deploy when there is a need. Always take your vehicle to a Mahindra Authorised Service Center for inspection and repairs.

In case the customer either tries to self-service the airbag systems or tamper with the air bag systems. Mahindra, including its directors, officers or key managerial personnels, do not carry any liability arising due to such actions of the customers.

Removing SRS Related Parts: We do not recommend removing the instrument panel, steering wheel, seats or airbag related parts or sensors by any individual or garages. Airbags could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries, or they may not deploy when there is a need. Visit an Mahindra Authorised Service Center if these parts must be service and repair of the parts.

Airbag Disposal: Improper disposal of an airbag or a vehicle with live airbags can be extremely dangerous. Approach an Mahindra Authorised Service Center to do these jobs.

Airbag Repair: If the front airbag cover or instrument panel airbag cover shows signs of damage or having been removed, the vehicle should be towed to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center for repair. Do not attempt to self repair or reinstall the cover.

Airbag Maintenance: For cleaning the airbag covers/areas, use only a soft dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system.

5 Driver Information Display (DID)

The DID system is not a substitute of the driver and are only to assist the driver. The driver should not solely rely on them and remain in control of the vehicle at all times. These systems do not offer a substitute to the driver’s alertness and judgement.

5.1 DID Overview

A	Time	G	ODO Meter
B	Gear Indicator	H	Current Drive Mode
C	Digital Speedo Meter	I	SOC Gauge
D	Outside Ambient Temperature	J	Range
E	Power and Regen gauge	K	Digital SOC
F	Recuperation Level

The Driver Information Display (DID) theme changes according to the selected drive mode.

5.2 Power and Regen Gauge

Power gauge indicates the % of power being used to drive the vehicle at that instance.

If the display indicates 'Power' in the lower right corner, the system is using HV battery power.

A	Power level	C	Critical Power
B	Max Power	D	Power Boost

If the filler of gauge position is less than zero (Regen Zone), it represents that the regeneration is in progress

Power Mid Level – It indicates that the HV battery power utilization from the HV battery.

Max Power – It indicates that the HV battery power utilization from the HV battery is 100%.

Critical Power – Critical Power indicates that the HV battery power is approaching its minimum limit, and immediate action may be required to prevent complete depletion. Operating the vehicle continuously in Critical Power mode may result in sudden loss of power. Users should take immediate action to recharge the battery to avoid potential system shutdown, which may not be covered under your warranty.

During charging, Gauge position stays in zero position.

Boost – It indicates that the BOOST mode is activated.

5.3 State of Charge (SOC)

The SOC indicates the status of charge available in the HV Battery.

This varies with changes in weather, load on battery and driving pattern.

The SOC will be displayed on a graph ranging from 0% to 100%, likely indicating the remaining battery charge.

If the SOC reaches 20%, the range gauge and SOC will turn into red color to warn the driver of low battery level. Additionally an alert will be shown on the center of cluster display which will time out in 5 seconds.

If the SOC reaches 10%, an alert will appear on the DID (Flashing in Red color) indicating that the SOC is at 10%. Based on user input, it will disappear after 5 seconds.

When the SOC reaches 1%, an alert will appear on the DID indicating that the SOC is at 1%. This alert will appear continuously until the charger is connected,

Small fluctuations in the SOC observed when the vehicle starts to move from stop condition is normal.

SOC bar changes in dynamic, level changes from 0 - 100 % and the same is displayed digitally.

The vehicle should not be driven with low SOC.

5.4 Outside Ambient Temperature

This screen shows the outside ambient temperature, and we can change units based on the units settings in the Center Information Display (CID).

5.5 Speedometer

The speedometer indicates actual vehicle speed in kmph.

The vehicle speedometer is affected by size of the tyres used.
If customer uses non-genuine/ modified parts, they will not be covered under vehicles warranty and Manufacturer will not be liable for any damages arising out of use of such non-genuine/ modified parts.
If the size of the tyres are changed from those fitted at the factory, the speedometer might not display the correct speed and distance travelled.

Overspeed Alert Buzzer

•

Primary level: Buzzer will trigger single chime in every 2 minutes when the vehicle speed reaches 80 kmph. once primary level chime is triggered, it will continue playing until speed is reduced to 76 kmph or goes beyond 120 kmph.

•

Secondary level: Buzzer will trigger periodic chime when the vehicle speed reaches 120 kmph and chime will continue playing until vehicle speed is reduced to 114 kmph. Below this speed primary level chime will be triggered and will continue till 76 kmph.

5.6 Gear Information

Gear indication shows the selected gear position (P/N/D/R) in the vehicle.

Incase of a fault or failure, the owner should take the vehicle to an authorised service

For reference of different gear position “Refer Starting and Driving chapter

5.7 Recuperation Levels (Multiple Regen modes)

Recuperation means regaining of energy. The Recuperation levels will be Indication range as ‘OFF, L1, L2 to L3, one Pedal drive, Auto Regen mode’. Refer “Driving” chapter for more details

In case of failure, DID will show ERROR/ – –’

Incase of a fault or failure, the owner should take the vehicle to an authorised service

5.8 Predicted Range

Predicted Range indicates the remaining driving range that can be covered by the vehicle. This is calculated by the vehicle’s onboard computer using the following information.

•

Available battery SOC

•

Past driving behavior

•

Accessories usage pattern (For Example. Cabin AC)

This predicted range may get reset automatically to a nominal value whenever the vehicle is under charging and when the SOC is above 80%.

5.9 Clock

The time on the clock & date is in sync with the CID. Any change in CID will reflect on the DID. Refer time settings in CID for changing the clock format

5.10 Odometer

The odometer records and displays the total distance travelled in km. Odometer cannot be reset.

5.11 Drive mode status

•

The vehicle has selectable drive modes like Default, Range, Everyday and Race which have their own distinct pre-set configurations. The selection of drive mode can be done through Center information Display (CID) / Intelli Command Center (ICC). Drive selection menu is the part of CID, and DID will only display the current drive mode. Refer “Driving” chapter for more details.

Everyday Mode	Race Mode

Range Mode	Default Mode

5.12 DID Control Switches

The right side steering wheel switches are used to control the DID menus.

Type 1 (if equipped)

Type 2(if equipped)

MENU:

Press menu to toggle among cluster menus.

Enter:

Press Enter to select the respective menu/option.

UP:

Press UP to navigate up within the selected menu.

DOWN:

Press DOWN to navigate down within the selected menu.

5.13 Driver Information Display telltale Overview

5.14 Warning Tell-Tale lamps in DID

•

Battery Charge / LV Charge

The battery charging system warning lamp illuminates when the battery is in a low charge state and not being charged. This lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes out as soon as the vehicle drive is enabled.

Abnormal Operation:

If the lamp continues to remain ON even after enabling the vehicle, it is an indication that the battery is not being charged or there is a malfunction in the LV charging system.

Actions recommended:

Vehicle battery may not charge, contact a Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately for assistance.

Driving further in this condition will cause battery to discharge and vehicle may switch off. Once the ignition is switched off, vehicle may not start again.

•

Front Seat Belt Warning Lamp

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds. Lamp remains on when driver seat belt is not worn when vehicle is running. Chime will also be on reminding driver to wear the seat belt.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp remains off when driver seat belt is not worn indicates malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

Buckle the seat belt and check whether the lamp is turned OFF. If not so, contact a Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance.

•

Airbag Warning Lamp

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuos on during motor running indicates malfunction in airbag system

Actions recommended:

Airbag may not deploy contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance.

•

Immobilizer

Immobiliser Lamp flashes intermittently (few secs. frequency) once the ignition is switched OFF indicating that the vehicle security system is armed (when locked using the Keyfob).

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on/ Fast blinking indicates a malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

Contact a Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately.

•

Door Ajar Warning Lamp

Lamp turns on if any door/hood is open and goes off once it is closed. The buzzer chimes when the vehicle speeds more than 2 kmph. The lamp and chime go OFF when all the doors are closed properly.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp off when any doors/hood is open or lamp on when all the doors/hood is closed indicates malfunction.

Actions recommended:

Open and close all the doors/hood and check whether the warning lamp is working as intended. If not, then contact a Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance.

•

Electronic Power Steering System (EPS) Warning Lamp

The EPS warning lamp illuminates when the ignition is switched ON and goes OFF after about 3 secs.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on Indicates malfunction in Electric Power steering system which may result in hard power steering system.

Actions recommended:

Steering may be hard to steer, drive the vehicle to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

When EPS fails. vehicle can still be driven with increased steering effort.

The customer should avoid driving and should contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center since driving in such a situation can be dangerous.

•

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning on/off when ESC OFF switch is operated indicates malfunction in the ESC system.

Actions recommended:

ESC function may not work contact the Mahindra Authorised Service Center .

Drive the vehicle slowly for nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance.

•

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Malfunction Warning Lamp

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

While driving, if the ESC system warning lamp blinks, it indicates that ESC has taken control of the vehicle stability. If the lamp remains ON, it indicates the malfunction in the ESC System.

Actions recommended:

If ESP function doesn't work Then Contact the Mahindra Authorised Service Center .

•

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) Warning Lamp

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

If the lamp remains ON while driving indicates the malfunction in the System.

Actions recommended:

Then Contact the Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

The brake system still works conventionally. In this condition, the wheels can lock during severe braking. Have the vehicle checked by an Authorised Mahindra Dealer as soon as possible. However, if ABS malfunction lamp and brake warning lamp are simultaneously glowing, there is a severe malfunction in the ABS. Operate the vehicle with extreme care dangerous and have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an Mahindra Authorised Service Center .

•

Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) / Brake Malfunction/Park Brake

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds or when parking brake is disengaged.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on indicates Brake fluid level might be low/ malfunction in parking brake system/Front Brake Pad worn out.

Actions recommended:

Either one of the below conditions:

Park Brake is engaged.

Brake fluid level is low. Check & top up if required. If issue still persists, contact an authorised Mahindra Dealer.

There is some concern in EBD. Please contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

Integrated Electronic Booster Malfunction/Error. Please contact Mahindra Service Center

ABS system may not work in this condition , vehicle can be driven slowly for the nearest dealer. If ABS warning lamp and park brake lamp is simultaneously on, there may be a severe malfunction in the braking system. Then Contact the Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

•

High Beam Lamp

Lamp on when the head lamps are switched ON to high beam or when the head lamp flash is used and goes off when High beam lamp is turned off

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not working on/off when head lamp high beam is on/off indicates malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

Parking Lamp

The Park lamp indicator illuminates whenever park lamp is switched ON through Combination switch. During ignition OFF, if park lamp is already ON with driver door open, alert will be displayed.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning ON/OFF when park lamp is on/off indicates malfunction in the system

Actions recommended:

Park lamp need to be checked, In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

Front Fog Lamp Indicator

Lamp on/off when both the front fog lamp and the parking lamps are turned on/off

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning on/off when the front fog lamp turned on/off indicates the malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

Fog lamp may not work, In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

Fog lamp will turn ON, if fitted in the vehicle.

•

Left Turn Indicator

Lamp blinks whenever left turn indicator is turned ON or hazard lamp is ON.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp blinks /flashing in higher rate indicates failure in one or more of the lamp bulbs.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

Right Turn Indicator

Lamp blinks whenever right turn indicator is turned on or hazard lamp is on.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp blinks /flashing in higher rate indicates failure in one or more of the lamp bulbs.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

Tiretronics

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on indicates the Tire pressure falls below the low pressure or raises above high pressure/ air leakage/high temperature Lamp blinks for 90 seconds and then continuously on indicates tiretronics system malfunction.

Actions recommended:

Inspect and adjust the tire pressure and check for the lamp, if still ON then contact the Mahindra authorized Service Center for assistance.

System malfunction: System fails to function normally due to system failure/Sensor failure. System Warning: Indicated Low/High Tire pressure, High Temperature, Air Leakage.

•

Hill Hold Control (HHC) Malfunction

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on indicates malfunction in HHC system.

Actions recommended:

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorized Mahindra Service center.

There are chances of vehicles rolling down when starting on a hill. No assistance will be available from ESC system.

The driver should not solely rely on the system and should remain in control of the vehicle at all times. Mahindra will not be liable for any damages arising out of such situations.

•

Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)

Lamp on when ignition is turned on

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on indicates malfunction in the AEB system.

Actions recommended:

Check whether the front camera module is covered by any foreign particles. Clean using soft cloth if required. contact dealer if lamp is still ON.

AEB function may not be available when lamp is on.

•

Advanced Emergency Braking System (AEBS) OFF

It indicates the Vehicle running in AEBS OFF (Autonomous Emergency Braking system) condition

Abnormal Operation:

If the warning light remains ON when the AEB is activated, indicates malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre

•

High Beam Assist (HBA)

Lamp off during ignition is on. Lamp on when high beam is on in AUTO mode and high beam assist function is enabled in cluster.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp not turning on/off when head lamp high beam is on/off in AUTO mode and high beam assist in enabled state indicates malfunction in the system.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre

•

Adaptive Cruise Control White

Lamp on when ACC function is enabled through steering wheel switches. ACC system indicates inactive state in white color.

For more detailed information on and limitations/ precautions of the systems, please refer to the Advanced Driver Assistance System chapter.

•

Adaptive Cruise Control Green

Lamp on when ACC function is enabled through steering wheel switches. ACC system indicates Active state in green color.

•

Adaptive Cruise Control Yellow

Abnormal Operation:

ACC system in yellow color indicates temporarily ACC not available due to abnormal condition

Actions recommended:

In yellow lane, check the front camera/front radar module is covered by any foreign particles and if required clean using the soft cloth and still in yellow color contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance..

•

Adaptive Cruise Control Red

Abnormal Operation:

ACC system in red color indicates ACC Not Working/Fail State. Do not rely solely on Adaptive Cruise Control to operate your vehicle. You remain responsible for maintaining safe control of the vehicle at all times.

Actions recommended:

In Red lane, check the front camera/front radar module is covered by any foreign particles and if required clean using the soft cloth and still in red color contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance.

•

Auto Vehicle Hold Yellow

Abnormal Operation:

Yellow light Indicates some fault in AVH, because of which AVH not available.

Actions recommended:

For yellow light on contact an Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Authorized Service Centre

•

Auto Vehicle Hold White

White colour: Lamp on when AVH is enabled through AUTO HOLD switch in centre console. AVH is available in white color indicates standby mode.

•

Auto Vehicle Hold Green

Green colour: Lamp on when SPA is enabled through AUTO HOLD switch in centre console. AVH is available in green color indicates Active mode. Lamp blinks in green indicates steering assistance is provided to maintain the vehicle in center of the lanes.

•

Auto Vehicle Hold Red

Abnormal Operation:

Auto Hold system in red color indicates Auto Hold Not Working/Fail State.

Actions recommended:

For red light on contact an Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

•

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on indicates malfunction in EPB system.

Actions recommended:

EPB doesn't work Contact the authorized dealer immediately for assistance.

•

EV Warning Lamp

EV warning tell tale is used to indicate all system level/component level EPT faults.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on indicates malfunction in EPT system.

Actions recommended:

Contact your nearest Authorized Mahindra Service Center immediately.

•

HV (High Voltage) Battery Failure

Abnormal Operation:

If it is continuously ON indicates that HV Battery Fail.

Do not continue driving the vehicle with this lamp ON. This may result in damage to the components and will not be covered under warranty. The owner should take the vehicle to the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

HV (High Voltage) Battery Charge Lamp

If it is Continuously ON Indicates that HV battery charging is in progress.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp is still ON when Vehicle is not in charging .

Actions recommended:

HV Battery Charge Lamp doesn’t work Contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for Assistance

•

Regeneration Lamp

If it is continuously ON it Indicates that vehicle is in regeneration state due to braking regeneration/coasting regeneration.

Abnormal Operation:

If it is in ON though braking is not happening

Actions recommended:

Regeneration Lamp doesn't work Contact the authorized dealer immediately for assistance.

If lamp is not ON even though braking then please contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for Assistance

•

Ready to Drive

When the vehicle Ignition is turned ON & drive is enabled, after successful security authentication. This lamp illuminates indicating user that the vehicle is ready to drive.

Actions recommended:

While Vehicle is moving it is not shown then Contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for Assistance

•

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) malfunction

Lamp on when ignition is turned on and goes off in few seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

Lamp continuously on indicates malfunction in EPB system.

Actions recommended:

Indicates malfunction of Electric Parking Brake. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Service Center immediately.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Authorised Mahindra Service Centre If you must park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever to the P position

•

Service Lamp

Indicates vehicle need to go for an Service

Abnormal Operation:

If it is Continuously ON then Indicates that there is a fault related to Non-EPT components.

Actions recommended:

Contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance

•

Lane Follow Assist Yellow

Abnormal Operation:

Yellow lamp on/blinks indicates the malfunction in the system and LFA function may not be available.

Actions recommended:

In yellow lane, check the front camera module is covered by any foreign particles and if required clean using the soft cloth and still in yellow color contact dealer.

LFA function may not be available in yellow color lamp on.

•

Lane Follow Assist White

Lamp turns on when LFA fuction is enabled through cluster. lamp remains on in white color represents the system in the stand by mode

•

Lane Follow Assist Green

Lamp turns on when LFA function is enabled through cluster. Lamp remains on in green color represents the system in the Active mode. lamp blinks in green colour when steering assistance is provided to avoid the lane follow.

•

Lane Depature Warning Yellow

Abnormal Operation:

Yellow lamp on/blinks indicates the malfunction in the system and LDW function may not be available.

Actions recommended:

In yellow lane, check the front camera module is covered by any foreign particles and if required clean using the soft cloth and still in yellow color contact dealer.

LDW function may not be available in yellow color lamp on.

•

Lane Depature Warning White

Lamp turns on when LDW function is enabled through cluster. Lamp remains on in white color represents the LDW system in the stand by mode.

•

Lane Depature Warning Green

Lamp turns on when LDW fuction is enabled through cluster. lamp remains on in green color represents the system in the Active mode. lamp blinks in green colour indicates lane departure is detected by LDW system

•

Lane Keep Assist Yellow

Abnormal Operation:

Yellow lamp on/blinks indicates the malfunction in the system and LKA function may not be available.

Actions recommended:

In yellow lane, check the front camera module is covered by any foreign particles and if required clean using the soft cloth and still in yellow color contact dealer.

LKA function may not be available in yellow color lamp on.

•

Lane Keep Assist White

Lamp turns on when LKA function is enabled through cluster. Lamp remains on in white color represents the system in the stand by mode.

•

Lane Keep Assist Green

Lamp turns on when LKA function is enabled through cluster. Lamp remains on in green color represents the system in the Active mode. lamp blinks in green colour when steering assistance is provided to avoid the lane departure.

•

Temperature High

The temperature warning lamp indicates the high & low temperature condition of EPT components which may lead to malfunction of EPT components Blinking indicates extreme temperature condition & continuous ON indicates very extreme temperature condition.

Abnormal Operation:

Blinking indicates extreme temperature condition & continuous ON indicates very extreme temperature condition

Actions recommended:

Do not continue driving the vehicle with this lamp ON. This may result in damage to the components and will not be covered under warranty. The user must immediately visit the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

HDC (Hill Descent Control) Malfunction Telltale

The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and goes off after about 4 seconds.

Abnormal Operation:

If Lamp Continuous ON malfunction warning lamp indicates malfunction in HDC system.

Actions recommended:

Contact the nearest Mahindra Authorized Dealer.

•

Cruise Control Indicator

The white cruise control indicator illuminates on the dashboard when the cruise control system is in standby mode, meaning it is ready to be activated but not currently maintaining a set speed. It indicates that the system is operational and can be engaged by the driver.

Actions recommended:

Always be prepared to disengage the cruise control system by pressing the brake pedal, clutch (for manual transmission), or the cancel button in challenging driving conditions. If the white indicator does not turn on or behave as expected, consult an authorized service center to check the cruise control system.

Do Not Rely Prematurely: The vehicle's speed is not being maintained; driver control is still required. Road Awareness: Ensure safe driving conditions before engaging cruise control. Avoid using it in heavy traffic, steep inclines, declines, or slippery surfaces. System Compatibility: If the tell-tale does not function as expected, there may be an issue with the cruise control system requiring inspection.

•

Cruise Control Indicator Green

The green cruise control indicator illuminates on the dashboard when the cruise control system is actively maintaining the set speed of the vehicle. It signifies that the system is engaged and operational.

Actions recommended:

If the tell-tale flashes or remains illuminated after turning off cruise control, consult an authorized service center to diagnose and resolve potential issues.

Maintain Awareness: Although the system controls the vehicle's speed, the driver remains responsible for steering and responding to changing traffic conditions. Avoid Unsafe Conditions: Do not use cruise control on slippery roads, steep inclines/declines, or in heavy traffic. Overriding Cruise Control: Always be prepared to override the system by braking, accelerating, or turning off cruise control if necessary. Malfunction Risks: If the green indicator behaves abnormally or flashes, it may indicate a malfunction in the system that requires immediate attention.

•

Cruise Control Indicator Yellow

The yellow cruise control indicator illuminates when there is an issue or limitation with the cruise control system, rendering it unavailable or partially functional. It serves as a warning that the system requires attention before it can be safely used.

Actions recommended:

Schedule a check-up with an authorized service technician to diagnose and resolve the issue causing the yellow indicator.

System Unavailable: Do not attempt to engage cruise control when the yellow indicator is on, as the system may not function as intended. Potential Malfunction: The yellow indicator may signify a fault within the cruise control system. Prolonged usage without addressing the issue could cause further damage. Limited Functionality: If the system is partially operational, driving behavior may not align with expectations, posing a risk in traffic.

•

ACC distance/LANE 3

The ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) Distance Lane 3 tell-tale indicates that the longest following distance is selected for the adaptive cruise control system. It represents the highest level of gap setting, ensuring the maximum distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

Actions recommended:

If conditions improve or traffic becomes lighter, you may consider reducing the following distance by adjusting the ACC settings to a shorter gap (Lane 1 or Lane 2) for smoother traffic flow.

Increased Following Distance: While this setting offers enhanced safety, it may allow other vehicles to merge into your lane more frequently, requiring additional driver attentiveness. Traffic Conditions: Using the maximum distance setting in dense traffic may cause the system to brake or decelerate more frequently, potentially frustrating drivers behind you.

•

ACC distance/LANE 2

The ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) Distance Lane 2 tell-tale indicates that a medium following distance is selected for the adaptive cruise control system. This setting balances safety and efficiency, maintaining a moderate gap between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

Actions recommended:

For adverse weather, heavy traffic, or high speeds, consider increasing the following distance to Lane 3 for enhanced safety. In lighter traffic, you may reduce the distance to Lane 1 for improved traffic efficiency.

Moderate Following Distance: While suitable for most driving conditions, this setting may not provide enough space in adverse weather or heavy traffic, increasing the risk of abrupt braking. Driver Awareness: Drivers must remain vigilant as medium distance settings may not accommodate sudden stops by the vehicle ahead in certain scenarios.

•

ACC distance/LANE 1

The ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) Distance Lane 1 tell-tale indicates that the shortest following distance has been selected for the adaptive cruise control system. This setting minimizes the gap between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead, prioritizing efficiency in light traffic conditions.

Actions recommended:

If driving conditions worsen or traffic becomes heavier, increase the following distance to Lane 2 or Lane 3 for improved safety margins.

Minimal Following Distance: This setting may not provide sufficient reaction time in the event of sudden braking or unexpected maneuvers by the vehicle ahead. Increased Risk in Adverse Conditions: Using this setting during bad weather, heavy traffic, or high-speed driving may increase the risk of a collision. Driver Vigilance: Shorter distances require heightened driver attention as the system might not account for every scenario.

•

Virtual Sound Programme (VSP)

The VSP tell-tale illuminates when there is a fault in the sound system.

Actions recommended:

In case of any malfunction, immediately contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

Compromised Safety: If the tell-tale is illuminated continuously, the stability control system may not function, increasing the risk of losing control, especially on slippery roads or during sharp turns. Avoid Aggressive Driving: Without VSP, the vehicle's handling and stability are entirely reliant on the driver.

•

Press Brake

The "Press Brake" tell-tale illuminates as a prompt to depress the brake pedal. This is typically required in specific scenarios, such as: Starting the Vehicle: In vehicles with automatic transmissions or push-button start systems. Shifting Gears: To move the gear selector from "Park" or "Neutral".

Actions recommended:

Firmly press and hold the brake pedal when the tell-tale illuminates. If the light remains on despite following the prompts, consult the Vehicle's Manual or contact a Mahindra authorised service centre for assistance.

Do Not Ignore: Ignoring the prompt may prevent the vehicle from starting or shifting gears, potentially causing delays or unsafe conditions. Check System Behavior: If the tell-tale remains illuminated after pressing the brake, it may indicate a problem with the brake pedal sensor or system.

•

Reduced Power

When the battery charge is critically low, the system enters Reduced Power Mode to conserve energy and prolong the vehicle's range. A reduced power telltale will be displayed on the cluster to notify the driver that power output is limited to extend the remaining range. When the vehicle reaches a very low SOC (State of Charge), the Limp Home Mode will activate. This mode allows the vehicle to operate at minimal power, just enough to reach a nearby charging station.

Actions recommended:

If the SOC is greater than 20% and the tell tale appears then contact nearest dealer.

•

Rear Seat Belt Warning Lamp

The Rear seat belt warning lamp illuminates and the buzzer chimes reminding the any one of the Passenger (if occupied) to fasten the seat belt when the ignition is ON. The lamp will continue to illuminate till all the Passengers (if occupied) fastens the seat belt properly.

Abnormal Operation:

If the passenger is not present or fastened the seat belt and lamp is present indicates malfunction in system

Actions recommended:

Contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre for assistance.

•

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

Pedestrian Crossing		Give Way
Speed bump ahead		Men at Work
Stop Sign		Narrow Bridge ahead
No Entry		Slippery road
One Way		Overtake Not Allowed
No Parking		Overtake Allowed
School Zone

These are the 13 Different types of telltales can identified.

It’s displaying even when featuring not enabled or identify by the system are available on the road contact the Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Normal operation:

When detected on the road any traffic signs are available on the road, DID will displayed the telltales for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds its will be greyed out.

Abnormal Operation:

Even when the traffic sign is not available on the road, if it is displaying reach out the Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Actions recommended:

Pay attention to the traffic sign information displayed on your dashboard and adjust your driving accordingly. If the system frequently misinterprets or fails to detect signs, consult the vehicle manual or Contact the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre to recalibrate the TSR system

Verify Displayed Information: Ensure the detected traffic sign matches the actual road conditions; occasional misreads can occur due to weather, poor sign visibility, or system limitations. Do Not Solely Rely on the System: Always stay alert to road conditions and signs, as the system may not detect every sign or might misinterpret them.

•

Steering Wheel Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) White

It Indicates the position of steering with in the Lane The Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) icon in a car is usually white in the instrument cluster when the system is activated.

•

Steering Wheel Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Green

It Indicates the position of steering with in the Lane. When the system is fully engaged, the LKAS icon and lane lines will turn green. LKAS is a driver-assist feature that helps keep a vehicle centred in a lane by providing steering input and alerts if the vehicle starts to drift. It uses a windshield-mounted camera to detect road markings. The camera must be operational and any dirt or object must be cleaned or removed.

•

Front Brake Pad Wear

Abnormal Operation:

The front brake pad wear tell-tale is a warning indicator on the vehicle dashboard that illuminates when the front brake pads are nearing the end of their service life. This system is designed to alert the driver to the need for brake pad replacement, ensuring the braking system continues to operate effectively.

Actions recommended:

Minimize aggressive braking to prevent further damage to the braking system Visit an authorized service center to replace the brake pads with manufacturer-recommended parts.

Driving with worn brake pads can severely compromise braking performance, increasing stopping distances and the risk of accidents. Ignoring the tell-tale may lead to damage to the brake rotors, increasing repair costs. Consistent use of worn brake pads can result in complete brake failure in extreme cases.

•

Thermal warning

The Thermal Warning Tell-Tale illuminates when the vehicle's temperature exceeds the recommended operating range. This typically indicates overheating in the motor, battery, transmission, or another critical system. The warning can be caused by insufficient coolant, blocked airflow, or malfunctioning cooling components.

Actions recommended:

Check the coolant level in the reservoir. Add coolant if it's low, but only after the vehicle has cooled. Look for visible leaks under the vehicle or obstructions near the radiator or cooling vents. If the warning persists after topping off coolant or clearing blockages, contact a service center immediately.

Do Not Ignore: Operating the vehicle with an illuminated thermal warning can lead to severe damage to the motor or other critical systems. Avoid Strain: Do not continue driving aggressively or towing heavy loads, as it may worsen the issue. Be Alert to Smoke or Steam: If you notice steam or a burning smell, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and immediately contact Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

Rear brake pad wear

Abnormal Operation:

The rear brake pad wear tell-tale is a dashboard warning light or alert that activates when the rear brake pads are close to their minimum thickness. This system ensures the driver is notified to replace the pads before they compromise the vehicle's braking performance.

Actions recommended:

Minimize aggressive braking to prevent further damage to the braking system Visit an authorized service center to replace the brake pads with manufacturer-recommended parts.

•

Low Brake Fluid

During Low Brake Fluid warning, vehicle speed will be limited to 25kmph.

This Message comes when brake fluid level is low while driving

Actions recommended:

This telltale is continuos ON, Immediately visit the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.

•

Automatic Emergency Steering Malfunction

The Automatic Emergency Steering Malfunction Tell-Tale illuminates when there is an issue with the Automatic Emergency Steering (AES) system. This system assists in steering the vehicle to avoid collisions or obstacles in critical situations. A malfunction may reduce or disable this safety feature

Actions recommended:

Ensure that sensors or cameras related to the AES system are clean and unobstructed. If the issue persists, have the vehicle inspected and repaired by an authorized service center as soon as possible.

Reduced Safety: The vehicle may not automatically steer to avoid hazards, increasing the risk of collisions.
Manual Control Required: Be prepared to take full control of the steering and braking in emergency situations.
System Check: Continued use without addressing the malfunction may affect other connected safety systems.

•

Blind spot detection Telltale

It indicates the Vehicle running in AEBS OFF (Autonomous Emergency Braking system) condition. Blind-spot monitoring uses sensors on the outside of the car to keep an eye on your blind spot. If these sensors detect a car in your blind spot where it might not be visible in your mirrors, a little light will turn on to let you know. The blind spot detection system reduces the risk of accidents during lane changes by monitoring the dangerous blind spot area

Abnormal Operation:

If no vehicle passes and lamp is ON and ADAS System is not working

Actions recommended:

Contact Nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.

•

Driver initiated lane change White

The Driver-Initiated Lane Change White Tell-Tale indicates that the system has detected the driver’s request to change lanes, and it is preparing to assist or monitor the process. This light is typically illuminated when the lane change assist system is active but not yet fully engaged.

Actions recommended:

Use the turn signal to confirm your intention to change lanes. The system will respond accordingly if it detects a clear path.

Readiness State Only: The white tell-tale does not guarantee that the lane change can be executed safely; it only indicates system readiness. Monitor Surroundings: Always check mirrors, blind spots, and surrounding traffic before initiating a lane change. Weather and Road Conditions: The system's functionality may be limited in adverse weather conditions or poorly marked roads.

•

Driver initiated lane change Green

The Driver-Initiated Lane Change Green Tell-Tale indicates that the lane change assist system has detected safe conditions and is actively assisting or monitoring the execution of the lane change. This light confirms that the system is engaged and the lane change is in progress.

Actions recommended:

Be ready to manually adjust or abort the lane change if the system fails to execute the maneuver correctly. If the tell-tale switches back to white or another color (e.g., yellow), reassess traffic conditions and proceed with manual intervention if required.

Stay Alert: While the system assists, the driver remains responsible for monitoring the lane change and ensuring safety. System Limitations: The system may not detect all obstacles or unexpected movements from other vehicles. Weather and Road Conditions: The system’s accuracy may be reduced in adverse weather, low visibility, or on poorly marked roads.

•

Driver initiated lane change Yellow

The Driver-Initiated Lane Change Yellow Tell-Tale indicates that the lane change assist system has encountered an issue or cannot proceed safely with the lane change. This warning signals that the system requires driver intervention to complete or abort the maneuver.

Actions recommended:

Abort or manually complete the lane change as required.

Safety Alert: The system has detected unsafe conditions such as obstacles, insufficient clearance, or system malfunction. Environmental Limitations: Factors such as poor road markings, adverse weather, or heavy traffic may impair system performance. Driver Responsibility: Do not rely solely on the system. Immediate manual control may be necessary.

•

Control Cruise Nav White

The Control Cruise Navigation White Tell-Tale indicates that the cruise control system is powered on and in standby mode, ready to be activated. This tell-tale confirms that the system is operational but not actively controlling the vehicle's speed.

Actions recommended:

Turn off cruise control when navigating through heavy traffic, adverse weather, or on curvy or hilly roads.

Inactive State: The vehicle's speed is not being controlled automatically; manual acceleration and braking are required. Unexpected Activation: Be cautious when activating cruise control to ensure safe road conditions and avoid sudden changes in vehicle behavior. Familiarization Needed: Understand the cruise control features and functions before using the system.

•

Control Cruise Nav Green

The Control Cruise Navigation Green Tell-Tale indicates that the cruise control system is actively engaged and is controlling the vehicle's speed. This tell-tale signifies that the vehicle is currently operating in cruise control mode, allowing the driver to maintain a constant speed without needing to press the accelerator pedal.

Actions recommended:

Turn off cruise control if road conditions become unsafe or if you need to make frequent speed adjustments. Keep your hands on the steering wheel and be ready to intervene if road conditions change.

Attention Required: While cruise control is active, remain attentive to road conditions and traffic. Manual Override: Be prepared to take manual control of the vehicle by braking or accelerating if necessary. Not for All Conditions: Avoid using cruise control in heavy traffic, on winding roads, or during adverse weather conditions where speed adjustments are frequent.

•

Control Cruise Nav Yellow

The Control Cruise Navigation Yellow Tell-Tale serves as a warning that the cruise control system is experiencing an issue or is not functioning as intended. This tell-tale may indicate that while the system is engaged, there are conditions that require the driver’s attention or intervention.

Actions recommended:

If the yellow tell-tale remains illuminated or if you experience difficulties with the cruise control system, contact a qualified technician for diagnosis and repair

Issue Detected: A yellow tell-tale indicates that there may be a malfunction or limitation in the cruise control system that could affect performance. Safety First: Ensure that you are attentive to the road and vehicle behavior. Possible Limitations: Be aware that cruise control might not operate correctly, requiring manual speed management.

•

Smart Parking Assist White

The Smart Parking Assist White Tell-Tale indicates that the Smart Parking Assist system is active and ready for operation. This feature assists the driver with parking maneuvers by using sensors and automated steering controls to guide the vehicle into a parking space.

Actions recommended:

Continuously check mirrors and surroundings for unexpected obstacles or hazards that the system might not detect.

•

Smart Parking Assist Green

The Smart Parking Assist Green Tell-Tale indicates that the Smart Parking Assist system is actively engaged and currently maneuvering the vehicle into a parking spot. This means the system is in control of steering, and in some cases, throttle and braking, depending on the vehicle's features.

Actions recommended:

Even though the system is engaged, remain attentive and monitor the surroundings to ensure safety

•

Smart Parking Assist Yellow

The Smart Parking Assist Yellow Tell-Tale indicates that the Smart Parking Assist system has encountered an issue or is temporarily unavailable due to specific conditions. This warning suggests the system may not function as expected.

Actions recommended:

Inspect the surroundings of the vehicle to ensure no debris or obstacles are blocking the sensors or cameras.

Adverse weather, dirt on sensors, or obstructions around the vehicle may cause the system to malfunction.

If required, the driver should manually intervene and take control of the vehicle

•

Suspension

The Suspension System Tell-Tale illuminates when there is an issue with the vehicle's suspension system, such as a malfunction in the adaptive suspension, air suspension, or shock absorbers. It may appear as a yellow or red warning light, depending on the severity of the issue.

Actions recommended:

Drive slowly and carefully to prevent further damage to the suspension system Check for any obvious signs of damage, such as a low ride height or uneven suspension and Contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center for assistance.

Handling and Stability Impact: A malfunctioning suspension system can reduce vehicle stability, handling, and comfort. Exercise caution while driving. Avoid Harsh Conditions: Avoid driving over rough terrain or at high speeds until the issue is resolved, as it could worsen the condition. Safety Risk: Continuing to drive with a suspension issue may lead to uneven tire wear or damage to other components, increasing repair costs and safety risks.

•

LKAS OFF

The Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) can be turned off by pressing the MAIN or LKAS button on the steering wheel. You can also change the LKAS setting to turn the suspended beep on or off

•

ACC Speed UP

Indicates the Vehicle ACC Speed is Increases

•

ACC Speed Down

Increases the Vehicle ACC Speed is decreases

5.15 DID Screen Flow

DID Screen layouts can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

Use Enter button to select the required screen layout. DID will change into the selected layout.

5.15.1 Focus Info Screen

Focus can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switches.

Use OK button to enter focus page.

Focus screen provides a driver focused screen comprising of Speedometer and Alert telltales.

5.15.2 Driver Assistance (ADAS) (If equipped)

Driver Assistance can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel switches.

Use OK button to enter Drive Assist page.

Drive assistance provides an ADAS oriented informative screen with Realtime vehicle navigation.

5.15.3 Navigation

Navigation can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

Use the OK button to enter Navigation page.

Full Screen Navigation

DID will display the full screen Navigation with input from center information display(CID).

5.15.4 Analytics Menu

In Analytics, Trip Distance, Trip Time and Average Speed and Average Consumption will get displayed in screen.

Analytics can be accessed by pressing MENU button in Steering wheel.

Use OK button to enter Analytics page.

Energy Consumption

Energy consumption provides a graphical representation of energy usage, including details such as average and instantaneous energy consumption.

Energy consumption is calculated on an average basis and may vary significantly based upon driving conditions, driving habits and condition of the vehicle.

Power Flow

Power flow provides a visual representation of the movement of energy, indicating whether power is flowing to or from the battery pack.

The electric vehicle system provides drivers with information about the power flow in various operating modes

Incase of failure, Power flow animation will not move.

The driver must remain vigilant and in control of the vehicle at all times and should be ready to manually intervene in case of need.

Current Trip

•

Trip meter contains 3 trips namely Current trip, Trip A, Trip B.

•

Trip Timer: Measures the total elapsed time from the beginning of the trip. It starts counting as soon as the trip cycle begins and continues until the cycle ends.

•

Average Speed: Represents the average vehicle speed of travel over the duration of the trip.

•

Trip Distance: Tracks the cumulative distance traveled from the start of the trip cycle to the current point.

•

Average Power Consumption refers to the distance the vehicle has travelled using 1 kWh (kilowatt-hour) of energy. It is a measure of the vehicle's energy efficiency, indicating how far it can go on a single unit of energy.

Range is the approximate distance that can be covered with the available charge.

Select TRIP A / TRIP B in screen by pressing Up/Down switch in steering wheel switch. Long press of OK switch will reset trip information, average speed and driving time

Beyond the maximum value of the trip meter, it will reset to zero.

Trip A		Trip B
Min	Max	Min	Max
0	9999.9	0	9999.9

It is recommended to reset the trip meter when battery is disconnected and reconnected.

5.16 General Cluster Alerts

Display

Operating Conditions

The low brake fluid alert notifies the driver when the brake fluid level in the vehicle is too low.

Park Lamp alert notifies the driver when the vehicle's parking lights are left ON, after the vehicle is turned OFF.

Passenger airbag off alert is displayed when passenger airbag is turned OFF from Center information display (CID).

Service Reminder alert notifies the driver when the vehicle is due for routine maintenance or servicing.

•

Seatbelt not Fastened alert notifies the driver or passenger when their seatbelt is not properly fastened.

•

The pictorial representation of the unfastened seatbelt will be highlighted in red color.

Overspeed alert is displayed when vehicle is driven more than 120 Kmph.

Engage Park Brake instructs the driver to activate the parking brake, securing the vehicle in place to prevent movement while stationary.

ABS Malfunction alert notifies the driver when there is a problem with the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), which may affect braking performance.

Periodic service completed alert notifies the driver that scheduled or preliminary maintenance has been completed on the vehicle.

Hill hold Control error alert is displayed when the Hill hold Control function is not available due to malfunction in the system.

Hill Descent Control Error alert notifies the driver when there is a malfunction or issue with the hill descent control system.

Electric Park Brake Engaged indicates that the vehicle's electronic parking brake is activated, preventing the car from moving while stationary.

Park Brake Engaged alert indicates that the vehicle's parking brake is activated.

EBD Malfunction indicates there's a problem with the brake force distribution system, which could potentially affect braking performance.

Brake Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with one or more of your vehicle's brake lights.

Kick Sensor Malfunction alert is displayed when there is a failure in the rear bumper kick sensor system.

•

System will monitor some of the internal parameters and if any malfunction is detected it will display the “Contact Dealer” alert.

•

Contact a Mahindra authorized dealer immediately when “Contact Dealer” alert is displayed in cluster.

Electronic Horn Malfunction indicates a problem with the vehicle's electronic horn system.

Front Brake Pad Worn Out indicates that the brake pads on the front wheels have worn down and may need replacement.

Rear Brake Pad Worn Out indicates that the brake pads on the rear wheels have worn down and may need replacement.

ESP system OFF alert is displayed when user turns OFF the ESP from driver side switch bank.

Check ESP alert notifies the driver when the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system detects a loss of traction or instability, or if there’s a malfunction in the system.

Pull the lever twice to unlatch hood alert is displayed when hood unlatch lever is pulled only once to unlock the hood.

Power Window Not Learnt indicates that the vehicle’s power window system has not been properly calibrated, potentially causing issues with window operation.

Press Brake to Engage Park alert prompts the driver to press the brake pedal in order to shift the vehicle into Park mode.

Boost mode not available" alert means that the system cannot activate the Boost mode.

Hill Descent Control Passive alert typically indicates that the Hill Descent Control (HDC) system is not actively engaged or available at the moment.

Hill Descent Control Active alert indicates that the Hill Descent Control (HDC) system is currently engaged and actively controlling the vehicle's speed while descending a steep incline.

When any critical malfunction shown in DID, Contact Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

5.17 Alerts (If equipped)

Display

Conditions

This alert is displayed when preset charge SOC defined by user is reached or 100% SOC is reached.

This alert is displayed when charging process is stopped by any of the below means:

Manual charge cutoff switch on the driver side switch bank is pressed

Stop charging option is selected in CID

This alert is displayed when vehicle has observed internal limitations and performance is reduced. If driving is possible, Drive the vehicle slowly to nearest dealership

Limp Mode alert indicates that the vehicle's system has detected a serious issue, and to protect the motor and HV battery, the vehicle is limiting performance, usually reducing speed and power.

This alert is displayed when malfunction is observed in vehicle's electric power train system. Contact Authorized Mahindra Service center for assistance

This alert is displayed when user is trying to enable drive with charger gun connected in the charge port.

This alert comes, when charging gun is connected to vehicle and the main power is not turned ON

It's Time to Charge alert notifies the user that the vehicle’s battery is low and needs to be charged soon. Time to charge alert is displayed thrice when vehicle battery SOC reaches 20, 10, 1 % respectively.

Press Start/Stop Switch to Start instructs the driver to press the start/stop button to turn on the vehicle.

This alert comes, when user is trying to shift gear in ignition ON without pressing brake pedal or while driving, gear shift is tried without brake press (Refer “Shift Lever” section for more details)

This alert is displayed when critical failure is observed in the high voltage system. Please leave the vehicle and contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance.

Wireless Charging Device Forgotten alert notifies the user that the device intended for wireless charging has been left behind in the front wireless charging pad.

Rear Fog Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the vehicle's rear fog lights.

Rear Left Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the left rear turn signal light on your vehicle.

Rear Park Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the rear parking lights on your vehicle.

Brake Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with one or more of your vehicle's brake lights.

Rear right Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the right rear turn signal light on your vehicle.

Left high Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left-side high beam headlight.

Left Low Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left-side low beam headlight.

Left Daytime Running Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left-side daytime running light (DRL).

Right Low Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right-side low beam headlight.

Right high Beam Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right-side high beam headlight.

Right Daytime Running Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right-side daytime running light (DRL).

Front Fog Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the vehicle's front fog lights.

Front left Corner Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the left front cornering lamp.

Front Left Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the left front turn signal light on your vehicle.

Front Right Corner Lamp Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the right front cornering lamp.

Front right Turn Lamp Malfunction alert indicates an issue with the right front turn signal light on your vehicle.

This alert is displayed to suggest that vehicle is to be charged to 100 % SOC for better efficiency.

This alert is displayed when power saving mode is activated by one of the below conditions,

Power Saving Mode is activated in CID.

Vehicle SOC is less than 15 % .

1-Pedal Drive On alert indicates that the 1-pedal driving mode has been activated, allowing the vehicle to accelerate and decelerate using only the accelerator pedal.

This alert is displayed when 1-pedal drive is requested but conditions to activate is not met.

This alert is displayed when 1-pedal drive is deactivated.

This alert is displayed when HV battery temperature is very low.

This alert is displayed when LV battery is disconnect.

This indicates that LV battery energy is consumed in ignition OFF condition. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance.

This alert is observed when LV battery is not charged by the system. Ignition may not turn ON if vehicle is used with this alert. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance.

This message is displayed when vehicle is ready for drive. Shift gear lever out of park & release brake pedal or press accelerator to drive away.

This alert is displayed when electric powertrain related components are overheating. Please slow down & park the vehicle. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance

This alert is displayed when coolant level is low in the vehicle. Driving with this alert ON may lead to critical components damage. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance

This alert is displayed when critical failure is observed within the HV battery. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance.

This alert is displayed when HV battery is overheating. Please slow down & park the vehicle. Contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance

This alert is displayed when critical failure is observed in the vehicle system and drive is no more possible. Please park the vehicle & contact Authorized Mahindra Dealer for assistance

This alert is displayed when auto regeneration is being activated but conditions are not met.

This alert is displayed when regeneration is being activated but function is not available due to system limitations.

This alert is displayed when auto regeneration level change is requested but conditions are not met.

5.18 Smart Key Alerts

Display	Conditions
	Key Inside the Vehicle alert notifies the driver that the key has been left inside the car.
	Key Fob Not in Vehicle alert notifies the driver that the key fob is not detected inside the vehicle.
	Start/Stop Switch Malfunction indicates a problem with the vehicle's start/stop button, which may prevent the vehicle from starting or stopping as intended.
	Key Fob Battery Low alert notifies the driver that the battery in the key fob is running low and may need to be replaced soon to ensure proper functionality.
	Key Reminder alert notifies the driver if the key fob has been left inside the vehicle.
	To start the vehicle, place the key fob in its tray alert instructs the user to place the key fob in the key fob tray to start the vehicle.
	Press brake while pressing Start/Stop switch to start instructs the driver to press the brake pedal while also pressing the Start/Stop button to start the vehicle.

5.19 Steering Lock Alerts

Display	Conditions
	Turn Steering Wheel While Pressing Start/Stop Switch alert appears when the vehicle's steering lock mechanism is engaged and needs to be disengaged before starting the vehicle.
	The warning will be triggered when start/stop switch is stuck START for more than 60 seconds.
	The warning will be triggered when key fob battery is low and user need to keep the key fob in the armrest pocket and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.
	Steering Wheel Not Locked alert indicates that the vehicle's steering wheel is not properly locked in place when the when the vehicle is turned off.
	Electric Power Steering ECU Flash Failure alert indicates that an update of the ECU's software has failed.
	Electric Power Steering Malfunction alert indicates a problem with the vehicle's electric power steering (EPS) system.

5.20 Gear Shift Alerts

Display

Conditions

This alert comes when,

Vehicle is moving in the reverse direction (speed > 2 kmph) and if the driver presses “P” button to engage the “Park” mode with brake pedal pressed.

Vehicle is moving in the forward direction (speed > 2 kmph) and if the driver presses “P” button to engage the “Park” mode with brake pedal pressed.

This alert comes, when the gear shifting is not possible as brake pedal press precondition is not met. Refer “Shift Lever” section for more details.

This alert comes when the park switch is depressed for more than 30 seconds.

Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start alert instructs the driver to move the gear selector to either "Park" (P) or "Neutral" (N) in order to start the vehicle.

Shift to 'P' to Turn OFF alert prompts the driver to shift the vehicle's gear selector to "Park" (P) in order to turn off the vehicle.

This alert is displayed when gear shift is not possible with the gear shifter. Contact Authorized Mahindra Service center for assistance

This alert is displayed when user is trying to shift gear out of Park while charger is connected

A gear shift error message usually displayed a problem with the transmission or shifting mechanism.

A “shift not possible” message indicates an issue preventing the vehicle from changing gears.

5.21 Door Open Alerts

If the doors are open in the vehicle, the corresponding warning message will appear with animation.

For example in the below image

Operating Conditions

Doors Not Closed alert is displayed when one or more vehicle doors are not fully closed.

5.22 Tyre Direction Monitoring System (TDMS)

Tyre direction monitoring system or TDMS assists you when vehicle is just started, and you are about to move the vehicle. It displays the current direction in which tyres are aligned to assist in maneuvering the vehicle. TDMS is displayed only when vehicle speed is zero and parking brake engaged or when vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in neutral, or park and brake pedal is pressed.

<Level 5>

<Level 0>

Operating Conditions: Tyre alignment is displayed in 6 levels (level 0 to level 5) depending on the alignment degree

Working conditions:

When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in parking position. (or)

When vehicle speed is zero and vehicle is in parking position and brake pedal is pressed.

5.23 Alerts

In Warning History, all alerts registered in memory will get displayed. If anything is going abnormal in the driving cycle is displayed in DID.

6 Center Information Display

Display Maintenance

Display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.

Abuse loads should not be applied to the top or sides of the display for holding or any other purpose.

Cleaning the display area:

•

It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.

•

Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.

•

Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.

•

Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.

•

Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.

•

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

•

The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, vehicle keys etc…

•

When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.

•

Display surface is not so strong for chemical agent. Glass cleaner including alkali or acid, sunscreen must not be used. Alcoholic thinner, petrol, abrading agent must not be used. This may cause discoloration or strain.

•

Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.

Display care: Your BE 6 has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.

Continued usage of display with dust or dirt can create micro-scratches do not wipe dust or dirt with dry rough cloth or by hand

Display Overview

A	Volume	G	SET Temperature – Driver
B	E-SIM Network Signal	H	Home
C	AQI Indicator	I	App Drawer
D	Time	J	Blower
E	Notification	K	SET Temperature – Passenger
F	User Profile Name	L	Tiles

•

Once the home button is selected, the home screen will appear on the CID.

Center Information Display (CID) Applications

The Center Information Display (CID) has many applications (apps) that will be helpful for your convenience

All apps are categorized under the Vehicle apps, Media and Entertainment and Communication

Applications in CID
360 Degree camera	Groove me
Alexa	Hard Drive
Ambient Light	Live Your Mood
Android Auto	Media
Apple Carplay	My Vehicle
Auto Park	Navigation
Calender	Notification
Documents	Phone
Climate	Secure 360
Drive Assist	Selfie
ECOSence	Setting
Energy	User Profile
Fun and Work	Vision X
Gallery	Weather

The apps can be selected by referring the below image.

6.1 User Controls – Intelli Command Center (ICC)

ICC is combination of Joystick & switches for easy ergonomic access for the driver & co driver.

It has 4 shortcut keys and a central rotary knob.

A	Climate Control	D	My Vehicle
B	Rotary Knob	E	Enter/OK
C	Home/Back	F	Volume Control

Climate Control: Press the climate control button and use the knob to modify the climate setting

Volume: Press the volume control button to adjust the volume using the ICC Knob clockwise or anti clockwise

My vehicle : Press the my vehicle button to open the my vehicle apps, to use the knob to select the required functions.

Home/Back: Press the Home/Back Button to navigate to the home screen

Rotary Knob: A rotary knob can indeed rotate clockwise and counterclockwise. Also, it can move in other directions, such as up/down and left/right

Enter/OK: Can select and enter the required options.

6.2 Steering Wheel Controls – LH Side

A: Enter

B: Mode (Audio Sources)

C: navigate any list by pressing up/down

Enter: Press the ‘Enter’ on the steering wheel to select options

Mode: To change the mode, Press the button repeatedly (FM, AM, Hard Drive, Alexa*, USB, Bluetooth, Ganna*, and Amazon Music*)

UP/DOWN: Press the seek button 'UP' / 'DOWN' moves to next / previous track of MP3 and video Playing

6.3 Home Screen

Home Screen Details

Home Screen is displayed when user press the Home icon

This screen allows the user to have 15 customizable widgets with various applications

The tiles can be rearranged and edited based on the user preference

The Tiles in home screen are as follow

Media Tile

Navigation Tile

Energy Tile

Clock Tile

Phone Tile

Ambient Light Tile

Fun and Work Tile

Calender Tile

Weather Tile

10.

Parking Tile

•

Features which are available in CID is known as Tile.

•

For e.g., Energy, Clock, Navigation, Fun & work, Ambient Light, Weather, Media, Phone, Parking and Calender can be accessed through Home screen tile

6.3.1 Energy Tile

The Energy Tile displays the progress of charging and discharging of the Vehicle. On a single touch of the tile it will launch Energy application.

6.3.2 Media Tile

The Media tile have the quick access to media player with various audio inputs.

On a single touch of the media tile it launches media player in full screen

Media Player offers various audio sources like Radio, USB, Hard Disk, Android Auto, Apple CarPlay, Ganna, Amazon Music

Media tile displays details of the media Audio such as Source, Progress bar, Previous and Next, Play, Pause icons

Change to Previous	Change to Next

Pause/Play

6.3.3 Clock Tile

Clock tiles displays the current time and date

The clock style and format can be altered from settings menu

6.3.4 Weather Tile

Weather application is powered by Accuweather.

User can check weather condition in their vehicle location by using weather application

It also shows hourly weather prediction.

We can also add different locations in Places tab and can get weather updates of those locations.

6.3.5 Navigation Tile

It displays a map based on the vehicle's GPS location.

Clicking on the navigation tile opens the home screen of the navigation app.

6.3.6 Fun and Work Tile

The Fun and Work tile allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications.

On a single touch the Fun and Work tile to open Video, Audio, Games, and Shop apps and user can choose any and use it

6.3.7 Phone Tile

If no phone is paired, On a single touch to this tile it will says no phone connected and settings menu for Bluetooth connection

When phone is connected to the CID via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth name will be available in the Phone tile.

Available options in the Phone Tile are

Favorites

Contacts

Settings menu

Favourites

Contacts

6.3.8 Ambient Lights Tile

Ambient light tile provides a quick overview of the ambient light settings and allows user to change the lighting preferences.

On a single touch of the Ambient light tile it will launch Ambient light

Mood

Custom

6.3.9 Calender Tile

Calendar Tile provides a quick overview of Calendar events.

On a single touch of the tile, Calendar application will be opened.

Phone which is configured with Me4U application Remainders, Events which are present in the Phone will be present in the Calendar app of the CID

6.3.10 Home screen Edit

Widgets on the home screen can be added, removed, and reorganized according to the user's preference.

To do this, long-press any widget on the home screen to enter the "Edit Home Screen" menu.

A list of available widgets that can be added to the home screen will be displayed.

You can drag and drop them into empty slots to create a new widget or drop them into an existing slot to replace the current widget.

Widgets can be resized by tapping the widget resizer icon located at the top of the widget.

Tap the "Done" tab to exit and return to the home screen.

6.3.11 Parking Tile

On a single touch to the Parking tile it will launch parking application.

Direct access to the Park assist and Voice recorder

6.4 Quick Access Drawer Functionality

The Quick Access Drawer can be opened by swiping the screen from up to down.

Quick Access Drawer gives the user a swift way to access handy features like User profile, Valet Mode, SOS Call, Ask Mahindra, Roadside Assistance, notifications, Display OFF, Bluetooth, Hotspot, WIFI, Device List, Brightness, Power Saving and Settings.

6.5 User Profile

User can switch between various user profile saved in the vehicle.

User can also create and delete a user profile through this function.

Using this app individual profile will be created for every member who drives the car and personalised settings will remain in every profile such as climate setting, preferred audio source, audio settings, Driver seat adjustments.

Refer “User Profile application “ for more details

PIN can be set for security purposes

6.5.1 Valet Mode (If equipped)

To access the Valet, Select the current user profile, As shown in the image

Once you select Valet, the image below will be displayed. If you need to enable Valet, you can confirm the option

Enter the PIN code if it has already been created; otherwise, you can create a new PIN code and enter it

Allows the user to park the vehicle in a predefined location while giving the vehicle to valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234.

Once the Valet Mode is enabled,

•

Screen feature will be restricted

•

media control will be disabled

•

Speed limiter will be enforced.

•

Geofence will be activated

•

Above conditions are not applicable, if user disables the valet mode.

•

Don’t activate the valet mode during vehicle service

•

In the event of any security breach, theft, or unauthorized access while using Valet Mode, the manufacturer bears no liability for loss or damage. Users are responsible for safeguarding their PIN codes and ensuring that the valet function is activated only in secure environments

6.6 SOS

SOS is available in the quick access drawer. It can be accessed by swiping down the CID.

Click on the SOS icon.

After clicking on the icon, a call is triggered from the vehicle to the 108 Emergency service via E-SIM.

The call is connected to a centralized emergency response center in your area.

Based on the information provided by the user, an appropriate emergency vehicle (ambulance, fire truck, or police) will be dispatched to your location.

Some CID features may not work while the SOS call is in progress.

6.7 Ask Mahindra (if equipped)

Ask Mahindra is available in the quick access drawer. It can be accessed by swiping down the CID.

Click on the Ask Mahindra icon.

After clicking on the icon, a call is triggered from the vehicle to the dedicated Mahindra Support Center via E-SIM.

A customer care agent will be assigned to the Ask Mahindra call.

User can use Ask Mahindra for guidance or assistance on using the features available in the vehicle, nearby workshops, roadside assistance, etc.

Some CID features may not work while the Ask Mahindra call is in progress.

6.8 Roadside Assistance (RSA)

Roadside Assistance is available in the quick access drawer and can be accessed by swiping down the CID.

Click on the Roadside Assistance icon.

After clicking on the icon, a call is triggered to the Roadside Assistance provider’s helpline via E-SIM.

The Roadside Assistance call will be directed to a customer care agent(e.g., the vehicle manufacturer, an insurance company, or an independent service provider).

Based on the problem and location, a technician or towing service will be dispatched to assist you.

The SOS feature operates via an E-SIM connection and depends on network availability. The manufacturer does not guarantee emergency call connectivity in areas with weak or no signal. Users should have alternative emergency contact methods available in case of network unavailability.

Some CID features may not work while the Roadside Assistance Mahindra call is in progress.

6.9 Notification

On single touch of Notification all it will display General Notifications, Warnings and Settings.

Clear All Options is provided to clear the Notifications in the screen

6.10 Shortcuts – ON/OFF

Display OFF: If not required, the user can turn off the display (CID).

Bluetooth: The user can enable or disable the Bluetooth connection according to their needs.

On a short press of the Bluetooth icon in the Quick Access Drawer (QAD), it will turn ON/OFF the Bluetooth.

On a long press of the Bluetooth icon in the QAD, it will open the Bluetooth Settings screen

Hotspot: The user can turn on the hotspot to connect other devices.

On a short press of the Hotspot icon in the QAD, it will turn ON/OFF the Hotspot.

On a long press of the Hotspot icon in the QAD, it will open the Hotspot Settings screen

WI-FI: The user can turn on/off the WIFI

On a short press of the Wifi icon in the QAD, it will turn ON/OFF the Wifi.

On a long press of the Wifi icon in the QAD, it will open the Wifi Settings screen.

Device List: User can view the list of devices, already connected to CID.

On a single touch to the Device list it will launch connectivity tab of settings screen

Brightness: The user can adjust the display brightness by selecting the brightness icon.

On a single touch to the Brightness it will launch Display tab of settings screen for adjusting brightness

Power Saving: The user can activate/Deactivate the Power saving Mode.

On a short press of the Power Saving icon in the QAD, it will turn ON/OFF the Power saving mode.

On a long press of the Power Saving icon in the QAD, it will open the battery tab of Energy screen.

Setting: The user can easy access the setting options.

On a single touch Setting icon it will launch settings screen.

6.11 App Drawer

6.11.1 360° Camera

360-degree Camera View System assists the user during parking and during low speed maneuvering. 360 Degree Camera is provided with the help of 4 cameras located in the front grille, in the tailgate applique and on both exterior mirrors.

It provides access to the live feed from the 4 cameras mounted on the vehicle.

The 360 Camera automatically opens in 'R' mode.

When click on the 360° Camera icon, the below screen will appear.

Refer “Parking Assist System” chapter for more details.

6.11.2 Alexa

Alexa can be accessed through a single touch of Alexa Application in Appllication Drawer.

Alexa is a virtual assistant AI, designed to perform tasks such as answering questions, playing music, and providing information through voice commands.

Users must have an Amazon account to access Alexa.

To enable Alexa, the user must have an Amazon account.

Visit amazon.com/us/code in mobile device to login your amazon account and enter the code into the dialogue box.

Click on allow in both the screen to complete the login process.

On successful pairing Alexa screen changes to below.

User must visit amazon.com/code on their mobile device.

Enter the displayed code into the dialog box and click the ‘Continue’ button.

Follow the on-screen guide to finish the configuration.

Alexa has been successfully configured on your vehicle.

6.11.3 Ambient Lights

Ambient Light feature can be accessed from the application drawer.

It allows the user to control and customize the ambient lighting provided in the doors, dashboard and mars roof.

The ambient light can be turned ON or OFF using the power icon within the application.

Mood

The ambient light settings offer various themes under the "Mood" option, allowing users to select preset themes or customize colors based on their preferences for a personalized experience.

The ambient light features six preset light settings: Drive mode, Spring, Summer, Monsoon, Autumn, and Winter.

The ambient light intensity can be adjusted manually using the slider.

Tap on the Auto Intensity icon to automatically adjust the ambient light intensity based on the surrounding brightness.

Custom

In custom mode user can customize ambient light available in the vehicle based upon 4 sections namely Inﬁnity roof, Rear door, Front door, Dashboard.

Mars roofs color, and illumination pattern can be customized based upon 4 predeﬁned patterns.

Static

Glow

Impulse

Wave

Using this option user can apply custom color and light intensity setting to rear door ambient light.

Using this option user can apply custom color and light intensity setting to front door ambient light.

Using this option user can apply custom color and light intensity setting to front lighting group ambient light.

Using ‘Sync All’ all ambient light color can be synced to single color or dual color based on user preference.

Refer “Connectivity and Entertainment” chapter for more details.

If the ambient lighting feature has the potential to trigger light-induced epileptic or other seizures in susceptible individuals, it should be used with caution.

6.11.4 Android Auto

Android Auto - Wired

Android auto can be connected via USB cable using the USB port located on the centre console.

A pop up asking for the Android Auto connection To Launch and Not Now options.

On clicking Launch Android Auto is launched successfully.

Android Auto - Wireless

Both Bluetooth and Wi-Fi must be turned ON to connect wireless Android Auto.

Android Auto can be connected to your vehicle using Android’s Bluetooth and Wi-Fi in wireless mode.

Open the app drawer.

Select Android Auto.

Click on Add devices.

Select ‘Pair New Device’ then choose your Android device.

Select ‘Pair’ on both your Android device and the CID.

Select ‘Launch’ to enable Android Auto.

Android auto has successfully paired with BE 6 wirelessly.

Click on the ‘Add Devices’ tab.

It will open the Bluetooth connectivity screen, click on the ‘pair new device’.

List of nearby available Bluetooth devices will be displayed, click and select your required device.

Passkey will be displayed in CID and selected Android device, tap pair on both the screens.

Click on the launch, to enable Android Auto.

Android auto supported applications, installed in paired device can only be accessed through this function.

•

Manual Android Auto pairing is required for the first time pairing only.

•

Already paired Android devices, auto connect with CarPlay if the devices is in vehicles Bluetooth proximity, when the CID is on ON condition.

•

Android Auto supported applications installed in paired device can only be accessed through this function.

6.11.5 App Store

App Store feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

App store allows user to update and install all 3rd party applications and system applications.

6.11.6 Apple Carplay

Apple CarPlay can be connected to your vehicle using a USB cable in wired mode.

CarPlay is a smarter, safer way to use your iPhone.

You can get directions, make calls, send and receive messages.

Apple Carplay - Wired

Apple CarPlay can be launched via a USB cable using the data transfer USB port located at the centre console.

The CID display updating to the Apple screen indicates the successful pairing of Apple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay supported applications, installed in paired iPhone can only be accessed through this function.

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto rely on third-party updates and device compatibility. The manufacturer is not responsible for connectivity issues or feature limitations.

Apple Carplay - Wireless

Both Bluetooth and Wi-FI must be turned ON to connect wireless Apple CarPlay.

Click on the Apple CarPlay icon from the app drawer.

Click on the ‘Add Devices’ tab.

It will open the Bluetooth connectivity screen, click on the ‘pair new device’.

Select the vehicle Bluetooth name appearing in iPhone Bluetooth screen.

Passkey will be displayed in CID and iPhone screen, tap pair on both the screens.

Click on the ‘Yes’ tab in the CID screen.

Click on the ’Start Apple CarPlay’, to enable Apple CarPlay.

Click on the ’Start Apple CarPlay’, to enable Apple CarPlay.

•

Manual Apple CarPlay pairing is required for the first time pairing only.

•

Already paired iPhone devices, auto connect with CarPlay if the device is in vehicles Bluetooth proximity, when the CID is in ON condition.

•

Apple CarPlay supported applications installed in paired device can only be accessed through this function.

6.11.7 Auto Park

Auto Park feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

When select the auto park icon the below screen will appear on the CID.

Refer “Parking Assist System ” chapter for more detail.

6.11.8 Calender

Calender

Calendar can be accessed through application drawer

User can create the Events, Journey Planner, Checklist, Schedule Destination & Pickup Remainder by using calendar for their daily activities.

On clicking an event, its summary, location, contact number will be displayed.

Users can tap on the location icon to obtain a route map to that location.

Users can tap on the call icon to initiate a call from the connected mobile device.

Custom notes can be added to each event by tapping on the edit notes icon.

When an event or reminder time is imminent, a notiﬁcation is displayed on the home screen to inform the user about it.

Clicking the details tab will display a short summary.

Phone which is configured with Me4U application Remainders, Events which are present in the Phone will be present in the Calendar app of the CID

6.11.9 Climate

Climate feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

User can use Climate application to control the Dual automatic temperature control in BE 6.

Climate Control ON/OFF:

Users can use it to completely turn the vehicle's climate control system ON/OFF.

Classic

A/C ON/OFF:

Users can use it to turn the vehicle's HVAC system ON/OFF.

Rear defogger:

User can select Rear Defogger to clear the frost/mist, which is formed on rear windshield.

Front defogger:

The user can select the Front Defogger to clear frost or mist formed on the front windshield by directing air through the front and side instrument panel air vents.

Auto defogger:

The user can select the Auto Defogger to clear frost or mist formed on the front or rear windshields automatically.

Recirculation mode:

User can turn ON Re-circulation mode by pressing the Recirculation mode icon.

In recirculation mode, cabin air is re-circulated within the passenger compartment. If it is turned OFF, fresh air is supplied into the passenger compartment.

Rear A/C:

The air circulation in the rear A/C vents can be turned ON or OFF using this option.

Seat Ventilation:

Driver and Co-driver seat ventilation can be turned ON/OFF and controlled individually through 3 levels using this icon.

The three speed modes can be adjusted sequentially by a single tap on the respective seat ventilation icons.

Sync Mode:

Using this option both driver and co-driver side HVAC temperature can be synced.

Driver Only Mode:

Using this option, all air vents except the driver’s side will be turned OFF.

Blower Speed Control:

The blower fan speed can be controlled by pressing the '+' or '-' icons.

The blower speed can be adjusted across 8 levels.

Smart Climate Control:

Smart Climate control contains Clear view, A/C Max, ECON.

Clear View:

Clear view clears the frost and mist in the windscreen quickly without manual enabling of defroster.

Max A/C:

"Max A/C will rapidly cool the cabin to the default temperature of 19°C with active recirculation, seat ventilation at the highest level, and maximum blower speed."

ECON:

ECON mode reduces the eﬃciency of the cooling unit, resulting in a longer time to reach the targeted temperature in the cabin than expected.

Temperature increase and decrease:

The driver and co-driver side temperatures can be controlled individually using the respective ‘+’ or ‘-’ icons on either side.

Refer “Climate Control System” chapter for more detail.

6.11.10 Drive Assist

The ADAS system gives enormous benefits to driver, however the driver shall remain solely responsible for the safe maneuvering of the vehicle. He must remain vigilant throughout the drive.

Drive Assist feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

It offers so many features like Collision warning, speed limit, cruise control, Lane Assistant, Parking and Driver Attention, Advance warning Volume.

Assistants

Response

Refer “Advance Drive Assist System” chapter for more detail.

6.11.11 ECO Sence

Score

Ecosense provides an Eco score based on users driving habit categorized under 2 main criteria namely Acceleration and brake press.

Eco Coach:

Eco Coach can be turned on, which in turn provides a notiﬁcation in the DID whenever the user provides abrupt brake or accelerator input.

Trips

Trips provide a detailed summary of previous trips, including distance, time, average speed, CO2 saved, eﬃciency, top speed, etc.

Users can tap on the share icon to send a short recap of the trip to their mobile phone or save it as an image in the vehicle's MyDrive.

Analytics

Analytics provide a detailed comparison of various trips taken by the user, comparing data such as distance, time taken, average speed, top speed, energy regeneration, CO2 saved, energy consumed, cruise utilization, harsh braking, harsh acceleration, and overspeed, to achieve more eﬃcient usage of their vehicle.

6.11.12 Energy

Charge

You can check the reachable range, battery power, and expected charging time for each charge type.

•

The distance to empty is calculated based on the real-time electric energy efficiency while driving. The distance may change if the driving pattern changes.

•

Battery performance and range estimation depend on various factors such as driving habits and weather conditions. The company does not guarantee specific battery performance levels under all conditions. Any attempts to modify or tamper with battery management systems may void the warranty and pose safety risks.

Battery preconditioning:

Battery preconditioning adjusts the temperature of a vehicle's battery to optimize performance and eﬃciency, typically before charging or during extreme weather conditions.

Battery preconditioning can be turned ON/OFF for each charging cycle.

Charge Current:

The amount of input current during the charging process can be controlled at three levels: Low, Mid, and High.

Charge Percentage Limiter:

The percentage to which the vehicle can be charged in each charging cycle can be controlled using the slider provided.

If the vehicle reaches the set charge limit, the charging process will be turned oﬀ automatically by the vehicle itself.

The charge can't be limited below 30%.

If the user tries to reduce it below this value, an alert saying, 'Charge limit below 30% not possible' will be displayed.

Stop Charging:

When vehicle charging is in progress, it can be turned oﬀ by clicking the 'Stop Charging' button provided within the Energy app.

Battery:

The Battery section provides a detailed bar chart of energy consumed for functions such as driving, climate control, battery preconditioning, and other dependent functions across each trip and overall runtime.

Accumulated Battery:

It shows detailed values of charge cycles and charged kWh with respect to the share of two diﬀerent types of charging: AC and DC current.

Power saving mode:

Power saving mode provides setting to disable climate control and ambient lights when the vehicle's SOC reaches below 15%.

Manual enabling/disabling of power saving mode:

Power saving mode can be enabled manually by enabling the toggle button.

‘Power saving mode activated’ notiﬁcation will be displayed on successful enabling.

Power saving mode can be disabled manually by using the toggle button.

‘Power saving mode deactivated’ notiﬁcation will be displayed on successful disabling.

6.11.13 Fun and Work

Fun and Work app can be accessed through the application drawer

Fun and work consists of all 3rd party entertainment and communication applications.

User must have a valid account of respective applications to access the contents.

Data network from inbuilt E-sim will be used for the content streaming function.

The apps provided in it as subjected to changes without prior announcements.

The Fun and Work application allows the user to open all available 3rd party applications Such as Video, Audio, Games, and Shop apps.

All Apps

6.11.14 Gallery

Gallery app can be accessed through the application drawer.

The gallery application allows the user to view photos and videos stored on the hard drive and connected USB devices.

User can be able to browse photos/videos or recently added photos, videos and favorites.

The 'Select Source' option provided in the top right corner helps to switch between diﬀerent storage sources.

How to play video through Gallery.

The user can play video ﬁles on the CID screen when the vehicle is in Park Mode.

Select the 'Videos' tab from the library.

A list of available video ﬁles in the selected storage space will be displayed.

Click on the required video ﬁle, and it will open in the media player with controls.

When the user tries to play a video while the vehicle is out of Park Mode, the following warning will be displayed, prompting the user to shift the viewing to another screen in the vehicle (BYOD).

6.11.15 Groove Me (If equipped)

The "Groove Me" application enhances the driving experience by synchronizing ambient lighting with the rhythm of the music being played in the vehicle.

The lights change dynamically in response to the beat, creating an immersive and entertaining atmosphere for passengers.

Groove Me feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

Users should ensure that dynamic lighting does not cause distraction while driving. The manufacturer is not responsible for any incidents caused by improper use of the feature.

When the user clicks on 'Start Show,' the exterior and interior light show begins, with preset music playing through the speakers.

The user can click on 'Stop Show' to manually stop the GrooveMe function before the stipulated time.

Starting GrooveMe function from Media player:

The user can directly start the GrooveMe function along with their customized song through the media player.

Click on the GrooveMe icon provided in the top right corner inside the media player.

The exterior and interior light show begins, with the speakers playing the customized music selected through the media player.

Refer “Connectivity and Entertainment” chapter for more details.

6.11.16 Hard Drive

Hard Drive is the type of storage app that can be accessed through the application drawer.

Storage overview provides the ﬁle size occupancy of various types of ﬁles.

The hard drive displays ﬁles under their respective ﬁle type subfolders, namely Audio, Photos, Documents, and Videos.

The source selector provided at the top right can be used to switch between various storage sources.

To connect USB devices, users can use the DVR USB port provided inside the glove box storage.

How to copy ﬁles into Hard Drive:

Users can copy ﬁles to the hard drive from connected USB devices and vice versa.

Select the ﬁle type which you intend to copy into the drive.

Long press on the required ﬁles name and select them.

The 'Select All' option can also be used to select all the ﬁles in that folder.

Tap on the copy icon to initiate the ﬁle transfer.

File transfer progress based upon the progress percentage will be displayed as notiﬁcation.

After the completion of the ﬁle transfer, an 'Items successfully copied' notiﬁcation will be displayed.

How to delete ﬁles from Hard Drive:

Use the source selector option to select hard drive.

Select the ﬁle type which you intend to delete from the drive.

Long press on the required ﬁles name and select them.

The 'Select All' option can also be used to select all the ﬁles in that folder.

Tap on the Delete tab to initiate ﬁle deletion.

Tap 'Conﬁrm' to proceed with the deletion.

File deletion progress based upon the progress percentage will be displayed as notiﬁcation.

After the completion of the ﬁle deletion, an ‘successfully deleted’ notiﬁcation will be displayed.

6.11.17 Horoscope

Horoscope is an add-on application that can be installed from the App Store based on the user's convenience.

Horoscope provides daily predictions for the 12 zodiac signs.

All 12 zodiac signs with their symbols and corresponding dates will be displayed in cyclic order.

Users can click on any zodiac sign to view the detailed daily prediction for that sign.

Using settings, users can turn oﬀ any sign from being displayed on the app's home screen.

6.11.18 Just Dial

Just Dial is an add-on application that can be installed from the App Store based on the user's convenience.

Just Dial is a service that provides users with contact details of businesses, services, and vendors in their area.

Users can tap on various types of services they seek.

A list of services based on the selected category around the user's location will be displayed, along with location and contact details.

Clicking the location icon will initiate a route map to that location from the user's current location.

Using the settings option, users can customize the location and sorting order in which the services are displayed for them.

6.11.19 Live Your Mood

Live your Mood can be accessed through the application drawer.

Creating a relaxation mood inside a vehicle can significantly enhance the driving experience, making it more comfortable and stress-free, whether you're on a long trip or simply commuting.

Your vehicle is equipped with various features designed to promote relaxation and well-being. Here's how the relaxation mood can be achieved in your vehicle.

Three different modes are available in live your mood feature:

Club Mode

Cozy Mode

Calm Mode

Club Mode

Club Mode creates a lively, energetic atmosphere, similar to what you would experience in a club. Seats will be reclined for extreme comfort and audio tuned by A.R Rahman will be played.

When the user needs to exit the pre-set mood, they can use the return icon provided in the top right corner, power seats will be returned to previous position automatically after exiting a mood.

Cozy Mode

Cozy mode creates a comfortable, warm, and inviting environment. Seats will be reclined for extreme comfort and audio tuned by A.R Rahman will be played.

When the user needs to exit the pre-set mood, they can use the return icon provided in the top right corner, power seats will be returned to previous position automatically after exiting a mood.

Calm Mode

Calm mode provides a pleasant and soothing environment. Seats will be reclined for extreme comfort and audio tuned by A.R Rahman will be played.

When the user needs to exit the pre-set mood, they can use the return icon provided in the top right corner, power seats will be returned to previous position automatically after exiting a mood.

vehicles automatically adjust various features like ambient lighting, driver seat settings, music, and climate control to complement the mode you've chosen. These adjustments are designed to optimize your comfort and driver experience based on the selected mode

The vehicle must be in park mode to access the 'Live Your Mood' feature.

6.11.20 Media

Media can be accessed through the application drawer.

Media

Shortcuts in the media player:

Volume Control:

The volume slider can be revealed by tapping on the volume icon provided in the top left corner.

The slider can be used to adjust the volume of the speakers

Audio Settings:

The settings icon in the media application directs to the vehicle's audio settings.

Audio controls:

The media can be started or paused using the pause/play button.

Using the previous and next buttons, audio tracks can be changed.

GrooveMe from Media player:

Click on the GrooveMe icon provided in the top right corner inside the media player.

The exterior and interior light show begins, with the speakers playing the customized music selected through the media player.

Library:

The media player displays media ﬁles organized into sections based on Recently Added, Playlists, Genres, Artists, Albums, and Songs.

Click on any section to view the ﬁles organized in that speciﬁc order.

Songs can be played by clicking directly on them from the list.

Select Audio Source:

The media player oﬀers various audio source options, namely FM, AM, Bluetooth, Alexa, hard drive, USB, Amazon Music, and Gaana.

Users must have valid accounts to play music from Amazon music and Ganna.

FM/AM player:

FM/AM radio can be accessed from the audio source selection.

Now playing shows the current active FM station which is playing.

All stations contain a list of stations available for the user based on his Geo location.

The Favorites list consists of the stations that the user has marked as favorites for easy access.

6.11.21 My Vehicle

6.11.21.1 Drive Modes

The system is incredibly easy to use, simply choose your choice of "Drive Mode" and experience 5 different vehicles in one.

•

Default Mode

•

Range Mode

•

Everyday Mode

•

Race Mode

•

Snow Mode

Default Mode

The vehicle will be by default in Default mode every time the vehicle Ignition is turned ON.

Everyday mode

In Everyday mode the vehicle speed is limited to 165 Kmph. This mode is ideal for the normal day to day city and highway drives

Range Mode

Range Mode offers regular everyday city drive & is optimized for day-to-day use. We do not recommend overtaking maneuver at high speed in this mode (For that it is better to be in Everyday or Race mode).

Race Mode

The Race mode is when you want the adrenaline rush. We would urge to use this mode only in open roads and use it responsibly.

Snow Mode

Snow mode in vehicles helps improve traction and control on snowy or icy roads by adjusting throttle response, transmission settings, and torque distribution

Refer “Drive Modes in Starting and Driving” chapter for more details.

6.11.21.2 Exterior

Tailgate (if equipped)

Tailgate-related controls and functions can be turned ON or OFF in this section.

Tailgate Height Adjustment:

Level 1: The user can set the tailgate opening height to level 1, which opens the tailgate up to 60% of its maximum height.

Level 2: The user can set the tailgate opening height to level 2, which opens the tailgate up to 80% of its maximum height.

Level 3: The user can set the tailgate opening height to level 3, which opens the tailgate up to 96% of its maximum height.

Custom: The user can set the tailgate opening height to a custom level based on their preferences.

To do this, select 'Custom' in Settings, then press and hold the tailgate open switch for 3 seconds at the desired position until you hear a beep.

Refer “Convenience” chapter for more details.

Tyres

TPMS-related functions and operations can be turned ON or OFF in the Tyre section.

Tyre Fill Assist:

When Tire Fill Assist is enabled, an audible chime will sound once the desired tire pressure is reached during inﬂation.

Auto Learn:

The Auto Learn function automatically learns the signals from the TPMS sensors whenever the user swaps or changes one or more tires on the vehicle.

TPMS Manual Learning:

TPMS manual learning can be activated using this option, and a chime will sound to prompt the user to begin the manual TPMS learning procedure.

Locks

Controls and functions related to the vehicle's locking system can be turned ON or OFF in the Locks section.

Walk-away door lock:

When this function is enabled, the vehicle automatically locks as the user walks away with the key fob in their possession.

Approach door unlock:

When this function is enabled, the vehicle automatically unlocks the doors and tailgate as the user approaches it with the key fob.

Driver door unlock:

When this function is enabled, a single press of the unlock button on the key fob will unlock only the driver’s door. The remaining doors will unlock with a second press.

Lock Charger:

The charger can be locked in two modes:

•

Always.

•

While charging.

Mirrors

Controls and functions related to the Outer rear-view mirror (ORVM) and Interior rear-view mirror (IRVM) can be managed in the Mirrors section.

Blind view monitor:

When the Blind View Monitor is enabled, the video feed from the respective 360-degree side camera is displayed on the Driver Information Display when the right or left turn indicator is activated.

Auto unfold on approach door unlock:

When this function is enabled, the ORVM mirrors will automatically unfold when the user unlocks the vehicle.

Auto unfold on approach door unlock:

When this function is enabled, the ORVM adjuster will automatically tilt the mirror to cover the blind spot area when the vehicle is shifted into Reverse gear.

Auto dimming IRVM:

This option allows the auto-dimming function of the IRVM to be turned ON or OFF.

When enabled, it automatically dims the mirror to reduce the glare from oncoming traﬃc.

Security

Settings and controls related to vehicle security can be conﬁgured in the Security section.

Live feed:

The live feed shows the Secure360 view from all surrounding cameras as well as the interior cabin camera.

Secure360:

Secure360 is a safety feature that monitors your vehicle when you're not around, automatically starting camera recording if any abnormal activity is detected in the surrounding area. It can be turned ON or OFF using this option.

Format Drive:

The MicroSD card used for 360 camera recording can be formatted through this option.

The Secure360 videos recorded in the vehicle can be viewed by clicking on the 'View' tab.

The recorded videos will be stored in the Secure360 folder.

Lights

Functions and features related to the vehicle's lighting system can be accessed in the Lights section.

Auto high beam:

The Auto high beam function activates the high beam booster in the vehicle, but it will only operate if the required conditions are met.

Exterior light delay (Follow Me Home):

Follow Me Home allows the user to keep the vehicle’s lights on for 30 seconds after leaving the vehicle.

This duration can be extended up to 2 minutes by pressing the lock button again after the initial 30 seconds.

The function can be canceled by pressing the unlock button.

Welcome and Goodbye animation:

The exterior carpet lamps in the vehicle display a welcome animation upon successful unlocking and a goodbye animation upon successful locking.

DRL:

The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can be manually turned ON or OFF using this option.

Carpet lamps:

The function of the carpet lamps provided in the vehicle exterior can be turned OFF and ON using this option.

The carpet lamp in the vehicle can be conﬁgured to project diﬀerent patterns.

The user can switch between the two default patterns provided. Additionally, more patterns can be accessed through the Software Deﬁned Vehicle (SDV) function.

Service

Settings related to vehicle maintenance and service can be accessed in the Service section.

Service Mode:

Service mode should be enabled when the vehicle is being serviced. It disables all remote functions available in the vehicle.

6.11.21.3 Interior

Eyedentity

Functions and features related to the internal camera can be controlled through the EyeDentity section.

Driver and occupant monitoring system:

The DOMS functions of the interior view camera can be fully turned ON or OFF using this toggle button.

Safety

Functions and features related to user safety can be enabled or disabled in the Safety section.

Passenger airbag ON:

The front passenger airbag deployment can be turned ON based on the occupancy of the passenger seat.

A prompt conﬁrming the activation of the passenger airbag will be displayed. Click on "Conﬁrm" to enable the passenger airbag.

The passenger airbag turned-on indicator light will glow on the center console.

Passenger airbag ON:

The front passenger airbag deployment can be turned OFF based on the occupancy of the passenger seat.

A prompt conﬁrming the deactivation of the passenger airbag will be displayed. Click on "Conﬁrm" to disable the passenger airbag.

The passenger airbag turned-oﬀ indicator light will glow on the center console.

Convenience

Features and functions related to user convenience can be accessed in the Convenience section.

Easy entry and exit:

The Easy Entry and Exit function will automatically move the power seat to a relaxed position whenever the user enters or exits the vehicle.

Wireless charging system:

Control and settings related to AR-HUD can be accessed under VisionX settings.

VisionX

Control and settings related to AR-HUD can be accessed under VisionX settings.

Such as VisionX to enable and disable, Brightness and position, Adaptive Brightness etc.

For more details on VisionX refer VisionX chapter.

Ambient Lights

Ambient light provided in the vehicle can be controlled under Ambient light section.

For more details on Ambient light refer Ambient light topic under CID chapter.

6.11.22 Navigation

Navigation

The navigation system in the BE 6 is powered by Mappls Auto.

Mappls Auto will only function when internet connectivity is available.

How to initiate a route map:

The user can search for their desired location using the search bar.

Select the desired location from the search results. The current location will be determined using the vehicle's GPS.

A summary of the searched location will be displayed. By clicking the direction button, a route map with live traﬃc details will be shown.

Click on the 'Start' tab to access the Navigation screen.

If the user wishes to exit the current navigation, they can click the exit button.

Toll cost:

The toll cost section displays a list of tolls along the current navigation route, including the toll fee and the estimated arrival time at each toll.

Send Navigation to vehicle:

Tapping on "Send Navigation to Vehicle" will transfer the current navigation route to the Driver Information Display (DID).

Send Navigation to mobile:

Tapping on "Send Navigation to Mobile" will transfer the current navigation route to the registered Me4U device.

Save Routes:

The "Save Route" option allows you to save the current navigation route.

Traﬃc OFF:

Tapping on this option will disable live traﬃc details on the currently active navigation.

Direction List:

The direction list will show the turn-by-turn navigation of the current route in sequential order.

EV Charging station:

Tapping on the EV charging station will display all available EV chargers along the current route.

Restaurants:

Tapping the Restaurants icon will display all available restaurants along the current route.

Toilets:

Tapping the toilet icon will display all public restrooms along the current route.

GPS:

Tapping the GPS icon will display the current satellite connectivity status, along with the vehicle's latitude and longitude co-ordinates.

Saved Places:

Saved places and routes can be viewed under this option.

Navigation Settings:

Navigation Settings allow users to personalize and adjust preferences for route planning, map displays, and other navigation features.

When the battery percentage feature is enabled, the system will account for the range, excluding the battery state of charge (SOC) at the user-deﬁned thresholds of 30%, 50%, and 70%, by the time the destination is reached.

It will also display available chargers along the route once the set threshold is reached.

Navigation Settings:

When enabled, only fast chargers available along the route will be shown.

Range bound:

When enabled, destinations can only be set within the vehicle's available battery range.

Display nearby charging station:

When enabled, charging stations that are nearby but not along the navigation route will also be displayed.

Avoid in navigation route:

These settings allow users to exclude tolls, highways, and ferries from the navigation route.

Lane guidance:

Lane guidance provides a clear view of upcoming complex intersections, helping users anticipate lane changes.

Junction View:

This feature displays a realistic 3D representation of a highway intersection, highlighting lanes and exits for a clearer view ahead.

Navigation Voice:

The turn-by-turn navigation voice language can be switched between English and Hindi.

Visual Alerts:

The visual alert provides on-screen notiﬁcations for traﬃc, safety, and real-time road condition updates.

Units:

Users can switch the unit from kilometers per hour (Kms/hr) to miles per hour (Miles/Hr).

Manage Maps:

These options allow user to manage and update the maps.

Search Nearby Option:

By selecting "Search Near," users can view nearby locations such as post oﬃces, banks, spas, toilets, hospitals, EV charging stations, transportation facilities, and more.

6.11.23 News Update

The news update in the BE 6 is powered by India Today.

News will be displayed in various categories. Click on the desired category to view the latest news.

Using the settings, various news categories can be turned on or oﬀ from the app's home screen.

6.11.24 Notification

Notiﬁcation feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

The Notification Centre displays alerts, updates, and notifications from apps, messages, and system events in one centralized location, allowing users to quickly view and manage notifications.

The notification drawer can be accessed by swiping down on the CID screen.

Tap on the notification count to access the Notification Centre.

General notifications related to the vehicle will be displayed under the notifications tab.

The "Clear All" option can be used to reset the notification list.

Notifications related to alerts and warnings will be displayed under the "Warnings" tab. Tapping on such a notification will show the details of the warning received.

Notification settings, such as notification chime, showing new notifications in the status bar, and displaying incoming notifications, can be turned on or off.

6.11.25 Performance App

The vehicle's acceleration and adventure-related functions can be tracked and monitored through the Performance application.

It has two sections: Racing and Oﬀroad.

Racing:

Racing focuses on displaying the vehicle's acceleration and track-oriented data.

G-Meter:

The G-Meter displays the real-time G-force experienced while driving the vehicle.

TPMS:

The TPMS indicator displays the live values of tire pressure and temperature.

Acceleration time for 0-60 km/h and 0-100 km/h can be measured using this option.

The user can select the track they are driving on to record lap times and other functions.

Outdoor:

The Oﬀroad section mainly focuses on aspects of the vehicle other than its performance.

Compass:

The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle is currently traveling.

Power ﬂow:

The Power Flow display shows the live power usage of the HV battery.

TDMS:

The Tyre Direction Monitoring System informs the driver about the current position of the front tires in relation to the steering position.

Altimeter:

The altimeter displays the vehicle's current traveling altitude.

The PAS sensor shows obstacles in the vehicle's proximity.

6.11.26 Phone

Phone feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

Phone app displays contacts, SMS, recants, favourite, contacts, keypad from the connected mobile device.

When no mobile device is connected to the vehicle, the Phone application will prompt the user to connect a mobile device.

When phone is connected to the CID via Bluetooth, the Bluetooth name will be available.

Available Options are,

Favorites

Contacts

Settings Menu

Recents

Keypad

SMS

Recents

It displays the recent call list from the user's mobile device.

Favourites

It displays the contacts that are marked as favorites on the user's mobile device.

Contacts

Contacts displays a list of available contacts from the user's mobile device.

Keypad

The keypad can be used to manually dial phone numbers.

SMS

SMS messages received on the user's mobile device will be displayed under the SMS tab.

6.11.27 Secure 360

Secure 360 feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

Secure360 is a safety feature that displays a live feed from the 360-degree surround camera and the internal camera.

In case of any abnormal activity, it automatically records the surroundings and stores the footage in the vehicle.

For more details, refer to the Secure360 chapter.

The Secure 360 system employs cameras to capture video footage of the vehicle's exterior using a 360° camera. Users can view both the live feed and recorded videos

Refer “Parking Assist System ” chapter for more detail.

6.11.28 Selfie

Selfie feature can be accessed through the application drawer.

The Selﬁe application is an entertainment feature that allows users to take selﬁe images using the interior camera, with various ﬁlter options.

Clicking on the video tab allows the user to record a short video clip of the cabin.

This feature typically allows to take selfies using the camera provided inside the vehicle. Also saved to the vehicle's system or your connected device.

Users should exercise caution while using this feature to avoid distractions while driving. The manufacturer is not responsible for any accidents, distractions, or privacy concerns arising from the use of the Selfie feature. Any unauthorized storage or distribution of images taken with this feature is the responsibility of the use

6.11.29 Tickertape

The Tickertape provides up-to-date information on various stock market items.

The user can click on the edit option to remove any unwanted stocks from the list.

6.11.30 Travel Explorer

Travel explorer in BE 6 is powered by Thrillophilia.

It displays various places categorized by attractions, activities, hotels, tours, and events based on the vehicle's location.

Clicking the location icon will initiate a route map from the vehicle's current location.

6.11.31 Setting

Settings are categorized into four distinct types, such as

General Setting

Display Setting

Audio Setting

Connectivity Setting

6.11.31.1 General Settings

System language:

Using system language settings user can change CID interface language.

Apps setting:

Apps provide a list of installed applications in the vehicle along with version details.

Units Setting

The user can choose between Metric, Imperial, and Custom units to calculate various values like speed, distance, etc.

In custom mode, the user can set an individual unit system for each value, such as speed, distance, etc.

Time and date Setting

Set time Automatically:

If users have enabled 'Set time automatically,' the time and date will be adjusted automatically based on the vehicle's GPS location.

Set time and date manually:

Users can set the date and time manually according to their preferences.

Set time zone:

Users can manually select a diﬀerent time zone to adjust the time accordingly.

Date Format:

User can fix the Date format either in DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY format.

24 Hours clock Format:

The user can switch between 24-hour and 12-hour clock formats.

Clock theme

The user can select from 3 predefined clock themes based on 3 different drive modes.

Factory Reset

Factory reset can be used to revert all the CID settings to their default values.

Once factory reset starts it can't be recalled or stopped.

Factory reset is not possible when the vehicle is in running condition

System Updates

Users can access system updates for their vehicle in this section.

Auto Download updates:

Auto Download Updates allows automatically download the latest software or system updates without requiring manual intervention from the user.

Auto Download is possible when the vehicle is not in Driving state.

Auto install minor updates:

Updates that don't hinder vehicle functionality will be automatically installed, even when the vehicle is in running condition, using this option

6.11.31.2 Display Settings

Display theme can be set either as day, night or auto based on users' preference.

The Driver Information Display (DID) brightness can be adjusted individually based on the user's preference.

The Center information display (CID) brightness can be adjusted individually based on the user's preference.

The brightness for backlit buttons and switches can be adjusted individually based on the user's preference.

6.11.32 Audio settings

Sound and Volume

Volume of media, warning, phone, notiﬁcation, speech, navigation can be altered and controlled individually.

Media

Through the slider we can increase and decrease the volume

On a single touch of “+” the media volume will be increased by 1 and on a single touch of “_” the media volume will be decreased by 1.

Warning

Through the slider we can increase and decrease the volume

On a single touch of “+” the warning volume will be increased by 1 and on a single touch of “_” the warning volume will be decreased by 1.

Phone

Through the slider we can increase and decrease the volume

On a single touch of “+” the phone volume will be increased by 1 and on a single touch of “_” the phone volume will be decreased by 1.

Notifications

Through the slider we can increase and decrease the volume

On a single touch of “+” the notifications volume will be increased by 1 and on a single touch of “_” the notifications volume will be decreased by 1.

Speech

Through the slider we can increase and decrease the volume

On a single touch of “+” the speech volume will be increased by 1 and on a single touch of “_” the speech volume will be decreased by 1.

Navigation

Through the slider we can increase and decrease the volume

On a single touch of “+” the navigation volume will be increased by 1 and on a single touch of “_” the navigation volume will be decreased by 1.

Vehicle noise compensation (VNC+)

Vehicle Noise Compensation (VNC) automatically adjusts the audio volume in response to road noise, ensuring optimal listening comfort by maintaining consistent sound levels inside the vehicle.

VNC can be adjusted in 3 levels namely low, mid, high.

3D Alerts

Feedback on touch:

Users can enable Feedback on touch to receive touch feedback when interacting with CID screens, such as visual changes, sounds, or vibrations, to conﬁrm an action.

6.11.33 Sound Experience

3D Immersive:

Quantum Logic Immersion (QLI) delivers a 3D audio experience with added height and space, improving in-car sound.

It keeps the original recording intact, without adding artiﬁcial eﬀects like reverb.

We can increase or decrease the intensity of the QLI using the slider ( - to +).

Studio:

Studio mode provides an audio experience as if the audience is in a recording studio.

In this mode, the front high speakers are disabled to achieve a studio experience.

VenueScapes:

VenueScapes is an immersive sound technology or audio system designed to simulate the acoustics and ambiance of a speciﬁc venue or environment.

It creates a dynamic, spatial audio experience that replicates the feeling of being in a particular place, such as a concert hall, theater, or stadium, enhancing the listener's sense of presence and realism.

BE 6 has 3 Venuescape locations namely, Boston Symphony Hall.

Royal Opera House, Mumbai.

Wembley Stadium – London.

Sound Field Position:

User can adjust the sound balance of speakers according to their preferences.

Full Cabin mode can be enabled to evenly balance the audio throughout the entire cabin.

Driver mode can be enabled to direct the audio speciﬁcally to the driver’s seat.

The sound ﬁeld position can be manually adjusted to focus on any desired place inside the cabin. The center button can be used to reset it to the default position.

Equalizer:

Equalizer allows the user to balance Bass, Mid, Treble settings.

In addition to this, the subwoofer volume can also be controlled using it.

VESS:

On turning VESS interior, interior speakers will produce sound similar to IC engines cabin noise to provide a satisﬁed driving experience.

On turning VESS Exterior , exterior mounted VESS speakers will produce sound like IC engines noise to alert the travelers around the BE 6 that a vehicle is nearby.

Connectivity settings

Bluetooth Settings:

The vehicle's Bluetooth function can be easily toggled on or oﬀ using this setting.

Pairing devices with vehicle Bluetooth:

Turn ON Bluetooth on your smartphone or device and ensure it is in pairing mode.

Click on the "Pair New Device" option to scan for nearby Bluetooth devices.

Choose your device from the list of available Bluetooth devices.

Click "Pair" on both the CID and your device to complete the pairing process.

The paired device will be listed under the connected devices.

Wi-Fi Settings:

The vehicle's Wi-Fi function can be easily toggled on or oﬀ using this setting.

Available networks:

The list of available Wi-Fi networks near the vehicle will be displayed.

Enter the Wi-Fi password to connect to the selected network.

Click on the settings icon to disconnect and forget the network.

Add networks:

Users can also Wi-Fi network using the SSID.

Add networks:

The list of all the saved Wi-Fi network can be accessed here.

WIFI Hotspot:

Users can enable the hotspot to share the internet from the vehicle's e-SIM with passengers.

A username and password can be set for the created hotspot and shared in the form of a QR code.

Data Limit:

The user can also enable a data limiter for the created hotspot and monitor network usage.

6.11.34 User Profile

The user proﬁle allows you to conﬁgure and manage various user proﬁles in the vehicle.

Click on the proﬁle option in the top left corner.

The BE 6 can be conﬁgured with up to 3 user proﬁles, in addition to Guest and Valet modes.

Click on "Add Proﬁle" and tap on the "Start Setup" tab.

The setup will prompt the user to register a face for the user proﬁle.

The system will display a pop-up to accept the privacy policy for facial recognition purposes. Click on "Conﬁrm" to proceed.

Follow the on-screen instructions to record your face for the user proﬁle.

After successfully registering your face, click on "Conﬁrm".

The system will prompt the user to enter the master PIN from the owner’s manual.

The master PIN is 1234.

After successful veriﬁcation of the master PIN, click on the "Create New PIN" tab.

Create a 4-digit new PIN for the current proﬁle and conﬁrm it.

Enter the desired proﬁle name and set a proﬁle picture.

Click on "Conﬁrm" to complete the proﬁle setup process.

The newly created proﬁle will be activated with the default settings for seats, lighting, climate control, and music.

Re-enter the newly created proﬁle PIN to access the proﬁle.

6.11.35 VisionX (If equipped)

The VisionX system available in the vehicle can be controlled and conﬁgured using the VisionX application.

VisionX can be completely turned ON and OFF using this toggle bar.

Brightness and position:

Adaptive Brightness:

The brightness of the VisionX projection is automatically adjusted based on the environmental conditions.

Manual Brightness:

The brightness of the VisionX projection can be manually adjusted using the provided slider.

Auto height assist:

It adjusts the position of the VisionX projection based on the driver's side power seat height.

Manual height assist:

Using the adjust option provided, the user can manually conﬁgure the position of the VisionX projection.

VisionX content:

Navigation:

Static navigation displays turn-by-turn navigation instructions and the estimated time of arrival from the navigation application.

AR navigation displays a 3D wayﬁnder in the dynamic area of VisionX.

Point of Interest (POI) displays place markers for locations such as ATMs, hotels, shopping malls, and must-visit places in the VisionX dynamic area.

Driver Assistant:

Static Drive Assistant displays ADAS-related telltales and details in the static region of the VisionX.

AR Drive Assistant displays ADAS-related telltales and details in the dynamic region of the VisionX.

Call Info:

Call info displays the caller ID or phone number in the lower left corner of the VisionX area.

Media:

Media displays the current media ﬁle name and its duration in the lower left corner of the VisionX area.

6.11.36 Weather

Weather application is powered by Accuweather.

The weather application provides a detailed weather report of the location based on the vehicle's GPS.

Places other than the vehicle's GPS location can be added to or deleted from the list.

7 Starting and Driving

7.1 General Driving Precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of accidents leading to serious personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

•

Please read this manual carefully, before driving your vehicle.

•

Before you each driving cycle, check proper operation of the brakes and steering system

•

While driving, if you hear any strange noise or feel unusual vibration, or if you observe any concerns, or if any warning lamps illuminate or buzzers sound, park/stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Identify the cause and take any necessary remedial action. If unable to identify the cause, vacate the vehicle premises & Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance

•

Never overload or improperly load your vehicle

•

Always be attentive while driving and follow safe driving practices

•

Always maintain the recommended inflation pressure in tyres

•

Always drive at a safe speed appropriate for given driving conditions. You must follow the speed limits

•

While moving backwards, keep a constant lookout for people, particularly children, or other obstructions or hazardous material that might be present behind the vehicle

•

Your vehicle if equipped with Mars Roof. is not recommended for loading on the roof. For variants with normal roof, loading on roof raises the vehicle's center of gravity, making it unstable.

•

When driving off-road or on rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover causing serious injury or cause expensive damage to battery pack & suspension.

•

Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially on rough terrains. Sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel motion. Make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not grip the spokes

•

If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another
(e.g. from concrete to gravel/sand/mud/snow) there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds, especially the way it responds to steering, braking and accelerating inputs

•

Be extremely careful when driving on slippery pavements such as by loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice

•

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, and avoid severe brake or steering application. Ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed and controlled steering. Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly while returning to the road surface, you may lose control.

•

In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made, turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or personal injury. Use all available road surfaces to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel

Driving for extended periods in heavy rain without braking can result in delayed reaction times when brakes are finally applied.

While Parking and leaving the vehicle for extended period of time in extreme cold or hot environment the high voltage and low voltage battery may experience noticeable energy loss.

So it is responsibility of the user to ensure sufficient battery charge according to the duration of parking. During the such situations it is always recommended to leave the vehicle with minimum 80 % charge.

7.2 Safety Tips - Before Driving your Vehicle

Simple steps to get your vehicle started & ready to drive:

Before entering your vehicle:

•

Inspect the interior and exterior of the vehicle for any signs of damage, leaks, loose parts, or debris.

•

Ensure all windows, mirrors, lights, and tyres are in good condition.

•

Check the area under vehicle after an overnight parking for brake fluid or other fluid leaks

Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer if required.

Before Starting your vehicle:

•

Check energy level on SOC bar and digital SOC display. Ensure that there is enough charge for your planned journey

•

If vehicle is parked for charging, turn off the power supply. Remove charging gun from vehicle and the plug from the wall socket. Roll the cable and keep it in the dedicated slot of the vehicle.

•

Ensure all doors are securely closed, latched, and locked from both inside and outside

•

Adjust the seat headrest, steering wheel and fasten the seat belt as described in this manual. Never perform any seat/ steering adjustments when the vehicle is in motion.

•

Ensure that the rear view mirror and both the ORVM’s are adjusted for an unobstructed view of the road behind.

•

Have someone observe and confirm normal operation of all exterior lamps while you work on the controls from the driver seat..

•

Check for tyres, air pressure before starting the vehicle. Also, check functioning of all lamps in the instrument panel

Do not ignore the EV warning lamp & service warning lamp. Ignoring the warning lamp may damage the electrical power train components.

Visit the Authorized Mahindra service centre at the earliest.

•

Start the vehicle (Drive enable) only when seated and belted in the driver's seat.

•

Press the Start/Stop switch once to turn the ignition ON and then press the brake pedal and Start/Stop button simultaneously to drive enable the vehicle.

•

Engage D/R mode by referring “shift by wire lever” section.

•

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) will be released once gear shifter is changed from park mode to R/N/D mode. Use only your right leg for applying accelerator & brake pedal.

•

Without any actuation of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle will move slowly, when the brake pedal is released, if the selector lever is in any position other than 'P' or 'N''. This is called the creep function.

Creep function will not work in D/R mode, if EPB is engaged.

•

Before shifting to reverse, ensure your vehicle is stationary. Then, move the shifter lever to reverse [R] mode, gently press the accelerator, and drive backward.

When SOC level of your battery pack reduces to less than 15% SOC, system activates “Power Save Mode” and the vehicle performance is reduced

Operate brake pedal and accelerator pedal with your right foot only.

While driving, if you remove your foot from accelerator pedal without pressing brake pedal, you will feel partial regenerative braking. This is normal and is attributed to vehicle’s regenerative braking that will re-charge the battery pack for an extra drive range.

Always ensure SOC level is sufficient for desired travel distance. Avoid driving below 15% State of Charge as vehicle might stop at any point. Find nearest charging station to charge your vehicle.

Adapt your driving style to avoid excessive energy consumption. High speeds will reduce your vehicle’s range.

On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep function. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal.

7.3 START/STOP Button

The Start/Stop button activates or deactivates the vehicle's electrical systems. Pressing the button powers up the vehicle's drivetrain and dashboard systems.

Start/Stop button positions: To operate the start/stop switch to its intended function, smart key should be placed in the key slot.

If any fault identified by the system in the start/stop switch, an alert would be provided in the DID. Please visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately to rectify the problem.

If the switch failure in the start/stop switch occurs while driving, that driving cycle can be completed, depending on the severity of the failure. Please visit the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer to rectify the problem immediately.

•

Ignition ON: To switch ON the ignition, press the start/stop button when the switch position is in OFF without depressing the brake pedal and with the Smart Key inside the vehicle.

Status LED in the start/stop button will turn Red to indicate the IGN ON position and the vehicle is ready for drive enabling.

Smart Key Warning

If the steering wheel doesn’t unlock properly, press the start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right/left to release the tension on the lock.

Still, if you are not able to turn ON the IGN, please contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Service Centre.

If the electronics Steering Wheel not getting lock even all locking conditions are satisfy then ESCL will display this warning

This warning will be displayed in the DID, if ESCL unit has system learning failure. Pease contact your Mahindra dealership to have the system checked.

A warning would be displayed in the DID, if the steering wheel lock unit has system failure. in this case please contact Mahindra dealership to check system failure.

Avoid trying to forcibly unlock the steering wheel.

In ignition ON or Drive enabled condition this alert would be displayed in the DID, If the key is not detected inside the vehicle or far away from the driver which is not in detectable position

When this alert is displayed in DID, Chirp sound is heard 5 times along with 5 times hazard blink.

In ignition OFF condition this alert would be displayed in the DID, when Key fob is not getting detected by the system. Users need to keep the key in the dedicated Key fob slot and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the vehicle.

When this alert is displayed in DID, SSB LED blinks in red color for 5 times.

The warning will be triggered when Key Fob battery is Low.

•

Drive enable the vehicle: After ignition ON, Press brake pedal. SSB LED illumination changes from Red to green colour. Now press SSB to drive enable the vehicle.

If start/stop button is pressed without pressing the brake pedal, Drive will not enable and the ignition turns OFF

If the start/stop button is pressed from the OFF position directly, along with the brake in depressed position, there may be a small delay in the drive enable. This is normal and not to be taken as a fault.

Never press the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the vehicle turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of direction control and braking function, leading to an accident.

Once the drive enabled, it would not stop even if the key is not inside the vehicle. Before leaving the driver seat, always ensure start/stop button is in OFF position and always take the Smart Key with you. Vehicle safety and security would be affected if these precautions are not followed.

•

Ignition OFF: To turn off the ignition stop the vehicle and press the start/stop button once. LED in the start/stop button illuminates in white color for few seconds and turns OFF to indicate the OFF position.

If the vehicle or drive enable is not switching off by pressing the start/stop button (one press), press and hold the start/stop button for more than 3 seconds or rapidly press and release the start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle’s ignition will turn off. Contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer at the earliest.

•

Emergency stop: To turn the ignition OFF in an emergency, press and hold the start/stop button for more than 3 seconds or rapidly press and release the start/stop button 3 times within 3 seconds. On doing so, the vehicle ignition off will happen.

Repeatedly using the emergency stop may cause the switch or other components to malfunction. Please contact a Mahindra Authorized Dealer for assistance.

7.3.1 Back Up Start

When SSB Button is pressed in a key fob battery low condition, the key fob may not be detected. then system will display the below error messages in DID (Even with key fob inside the vehicle) and SSB LED blinks in red colour for 5 times.

Keep the key fob in the dedicated slot and then press the start/stop switch to turn ON the IGN & LED will changes to permanent Red .

•

Incase of Key fob battery low alert, change the key fob battery by following the procedure as mentioned in the section for battery replacement.

•

If vehicle is parked near to electric charging stations /Transformers /High-tension lines, key fob may malfunction like key not detecting warning even key is inside and user unable to start the vehicle due to Radio Frequency interface

•

Do not keep the key fob on wireless charger

7.4 Electronic Steering column lock module (ESCL)

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic anti-theft steering column lock.

The steering wheel locks when the start/stop button is in OFF position to protect against the theft. The steering wheel locks automatically when the driver door is opened or vehicle locking or 30 seconds after start/stop button changes to OFF position.

If the steering wheel is not locked properly when you close the driver door and on attempting to lock the vehicle, a warning chirp along with the hazard blinks thrice. Try locking the steering wheel again (by toggling Start/Stop button).

If the problem is not solved, we recommend to take the vehicle to nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer immediately

7.5 Shift by Wire Lever

Shift lever enables you to choose your desired drive direction. Shift pattern is printed on the top finisher next to the shift lever.

To change the gear, press the brake pedal and shift the lever to the desired position.

A gear indicator is integrated in the gear shifter and selected gear is illuminated.

Park Mode (‘P’ Mode) :

•

Always bring the vehicle to a complete stop before shifting into Park mode.

•

To Shift the gear to P mode, press the P button while depressing the brake pedal

•

The vehicle will automatically go to ‘P’ mode from R or D or N modes, once the ignition is turned off.

Do not press the park button when the vehicle is in motion unless it is a emergency situations. This can cause serious mechanical failures.

After the vehicle is stopped, always ensure the vehicle is in Park mode, and turn the vehicle OFF

Park Mode Auto shift :

The Gear is shifted to P Mode for safety reasons under the following conditions:

•

When the vehicle is turned OFF with the Gear in R or D or N modes.

•

When the driver door is open with the Gear in Neutral mode and the vehicle is turned OFF.

•

Vehicle standstill, ignition ON, drive enabled/disabled, Gear is out of P position and driver door open

•

Vehicle standstill, ignition ON, drive enabled/disabled, Gear is out of P position and bonnet open

Reverse Mode (‘R’ Mode):

This mode is to enable the vehicle to move in the reverse direction.

To engage the reverse mode directly from D mode, press the brake and then push the lever forward twice.

When the vehicle is stopped in R mode, if the driver door is open the gear will automatically shift to P mode.

However, if the vehicle is in motion, the gear will not automatically shift to P mode to prevent gear damage.

Always come to the standstill condition before engaging the R mode.

Regeneration won’t happen in ‘R’ mode.

Neutral Mode (‘N’ Mode):

To engage the Neutral mode directly from D mode, push the lever forward once

Always press the brake pedal, when you are shifting from N mode to other modes

When the vehicle is stopped in N mode, the gear will automatically shift to P mode.

In this mode, accelerator pedal won’t respond.

Refer Emergency chapter for the procedure and precautions to be taken, if the vehicle has to be manually pushed in Neutral.

Pushing the vehicle in N mode may permanently damage the electric motor.

In neutral mode, always engage park mode before leaving the vehicle to prevent any vehicle movement leading to possible injury to a bystander or damage to vehicle.

Drive Mode (‘D’ Mode) :

This position enables you to drive in forward direction.

To engage the D mode from P mode, press the brake and then push the lever twice backward direction

When the vehicle is stopped in D mode, if the driver door is open the gear will automatically shift to P mode.

However, if the vehicle is in motion, the gear will not automatically shift to P mode for safety reasons.

In gradients, when the vehicle brake is released and accelerator not pressed, there might be a slight roll back before the creep is able to push front.

Always press accelerator pedal in gradients for moving the vehicle, usage of creep function in gradients is not recommended.

When the drive is enabled and "R"/"D" gear is engaged, be sure to keep the brake pedal pressed, otherwise the vehicle will move.

It is not recommended to drive down slopes in "N" or "P" gear, even if the motor is not running.

To prevent the vehicle from inadvertently moving, engage the parking brake and press the "P" button after the vehicle has stopped.

Abusing the gear shift lever will result in the warranty being voided.

Parking the Vehicle :

After stopping the vehicle, select Park (P) position (confirm by checking the gear indicator in the DID) while depressing the brake pedal.

Turn the ignition OFF.

Check any warning message / chime while moving out of the vehicle.

Gear Shift Pattern
Current Gear	Target Gear	Action	Drive Enable Status	Other Pre-conditions
P	N	Pull once or Push once	Yes/No	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 5 kmph
R	P	Press Park Switch	Yes	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 2 kmph
	N	Pull once	Yes	Brake pedal pressed
	D	Pull twice	Yes	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 2 kmph
N	P	Press Park Switch	Yes/No	Brake pedal pressed Vehicle speed < 2 kmph
	R	Push once	Yes	If vehicle speed < 5 kmph, Brake pedal pressed If vehicle speed > 5 Kmph, Previously Vehicle in R (brake pedal pressing not required)
	D	Pull once	Yes	If vehicle speed < 5 kmph, Brake pedal pressed If vehicle speed > 5 Kmph, Previously Vehicle in D (brake pedal pressing not required)
D	P	Press Park Switch	Yes	Brake pedal pressed, Vehicle speed < 2 kmph
	N	Push once	Yes	-
	R	Pull twice	Yes	If vehicle speed < 5 kmph, Brake pedal pressed
Shifting from D to R or R to D modes is not recommended when the vehicle is in motion. If the gear lever is moved from D to R or R to D when the vehicle is in motion, Neutral mode will be enabled, which is normal.

Do's and Don'ts :

Do’s	Don’ts
Moving from Static to R or D mode
When moving out of “N” position, press brake pedal and then gently move the shift forward or backward	Please avoid placing your body weight on the shifter lever
Operating Shifter Lever
The shifter lever should be gently operated for drive mode change	The shifter lever should not be operated with excessive force, unlike in conventional vehicles.
The shifter lever should only be pulled or pushed in forward or backward direction to change the drive modes	Do not push or pull the shifter lever towards left or right
	Do not press the park button and shift to any other modes simultaneously
Operating Park Switch
Press the park button only when the vehicle is in complete stop & brake pedal pressed	Do not press the park button when the vehicle is motion
	Do not allow children to operate the shifter
	Don’t keep liquid items near shifter. Liquid spillage may result in shift lever malfunction or damage.

7.6 Creep Function

Creep function helps in easy movement of the vehicle in heavy traffic, when the following conditions are met :

1. Vehicle in stand still condition and drive enabled

2. Gear mode is in either Drive (D) or Reverse (R).

3. Parking brake released.

4. All doors & bonnet closed.

Vehicle starts moving as soon as the driver release foot from the brake pedal without any accelerator input.

On a steep gradient, your vehicle may move in the opposite direction of the intended direction despite the creep function. When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal.

Creep function won’t work if EPB is turned ON

Creep function won't work if:

Any doors are open

Bonnet open

Electronic Parking brake engaged

Gear shifter is in N/P mode

To re-enable creep

In D/R mode turn OFF EPB by pressing the switch

Tap and release the accelerator pedal

Press and release the brake pedal.

7.7 Extending Your Driving Range

Always drive vehicle using right foot only

Select appropriate drive mode depending on the traffic condition

In bumper-to-bumper traffic, we suggest to use one-pedal drive to enhance convenience and reduce fatigue. However, avoid using one-pedal drive in situations requiring higher speeds or sudden acceleration, as it may not provide the responsiveness needed for safe driving

Suggest to use Autoregen mode. It helps in optimizing the regen level based on the traffic ahead and also keep a safe distance

To achieve optimal range from your battery, always drive in Range mode.

Use Everyday or Race mode only when you require an additional boost for enhanced performance.

Pre-cool your vehicle cabin remotely (If equipped) by turning on air condition when still plugged in for charge. This will ensure that battery will be 100% charge with cabin temperature preconditioned

Use air-condition with desired level of cooling set during drive. This will help in consuming less energy for cooling

If driving alone, its recommend using the 'Driver Only' AC setting. This helps conserve energy by focusing climate control on the driver, improving overall efficiency

10.

If the weather is not too hot or during long drives, its recommend using ECO mode in the AC. This setting reduces energy consumption while maintaining a comfortable cabin environment, enhancing overall efficiency

11.

One technique which should be used only if required. Enable the Power Saving Mode manually. Please note that this will limit the vehicle speed to 80 Kmph. Have reduced overtaking capability. Also AC performance is reduced.

12.

By anticipating and applying gradual braking you will ensure vehicle battery is recharged for extra range. Vehicle is assisted with electrical regenerative braking, also a motor assisted hydraulic brake for complete stop

13.

Always maintain the tyre pressure to the recommended value. A lower tyre pressure will increase the rolling resistance and impact the range

14.

Do not add any additional accessories. This may lead to drop in the range

7.8 Do’s and Don’ts

Driving Condition

Do’s

•

If the “Stop and Leave the Vehicle” alert comes , leave the vehicle immediately. keep a safe distance (opposite direction of the wind) and alert the fire brigade.

Don’ts

•

Avoid driving the vehicle below 10% SOC

•

Avoid driving the vehicle through stagnated water

Breakdown Vehicle

Do’s

•

Call the breakdown assistance. This vehicle is having a High voltage system.

•

Only trained breakdown technician should work in the electric vehicle

•

This vehicle should be towed only in flat bed towing

•

In case of an accident, call RSA / Mahindra authorised dealer immediately

Don’ts

•

Do not allow any local electrician to work in the breakdown vehicle

•

Don’t switch ON the ignition, if the vehicle is stuck in floods

•

Don’t do any underbody treatments

7.8.1 Good driving practices

•

Never shift the gear from 'P' (Park) or 'N' (Neutral) to any other position while the accelerator pedal is pressed.

•

Never shift the gear into 'P' (Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Ensure the vehicle is completely stopped before shifting into 'R' (Reverse) or 'D' (Drive).

•

Do not shift the gear into 'N' (Neutral) while driving, as it may increase the risk of an accident.

•

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. Even light, continuous pressure can cause the brakes to overheat, wear out prematurely, and potentially lead to brake failure.

•

Always ensure the parking mode is engaged when leaving the vehicle.

•

Exercise extreme caution when driving on slippery surfaces. Be particularly careful when braking, accelerating, or shifting gears. Abrupt changes in speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction, leading to a loss of control and increasing the risk of an accident.

•

Optimal vehicle performance and maximum range are achieved by smoothly pressing and releasing the accelerator.

To reduce the risk of Serious injury or death:

•

Always wear your seat belt. In the event of a collision, an unbelted occupant is far more likely to be seriously injured or killed than one who is properly secured.

•

Avoid driving at high speeds when cornering or turning.

•

Do not make sudden steering movements, such as abrupt lane changes or sharp, fast turns.

•

The risk of rollover is significantly higher if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

•

Loss of control often occurs when two or more wheels drop off the roadway, and the driver oversteers while attempting to return to the road.

•

If your vehicle leaves the roadway, avoid steering sharply. Instead, slow down first, then gently steer back into the travel lanes.

•

Mahindra recommends that you always adhere to posted speed limits.

7.9 Best Practices for Maximizing EV Range

Range (DTE Distance to Empty) – The Range indicated is an estimate of how far the vehicle can travel before the battery is completely drained. Range is estimated based on a combination of various factors, including but not limited to vehicle’s battery capacity, energy consumption and driving habits. Several factors can significantly impact the range including Battery State of Charge, Driving pattern, Terrain & Elevation, Usage of Air Condition/ Heater, Vehicle load, Temperature and weather conditions.

Below is an indicative list of the best practices that can be implemented by the customer to get a good range. For further information, the customer may contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer.

Further, please note that the points mentioned in this document are the more critical points affecting range. For a comprehensive understanding of all points that can affect range and the best practices to operate the vehicle, please refer to the Owner’s Manual and the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

Driving Techniques:

•

Avoid frequent and rapid acceleration, as this drains the battery faster which would ultimately impact the range.

•

The recommended Drive Modes for better range are Default or Range mode.

•

Regeneration level settings to Level 1 or Level 2 for optimum range.

•

Use “Power Saving Mode” in low SoC i.e. less than 20% State of Charge.

•

Maintain a steady speed (Adaptive cruise control can help) and max speed limited to less than 100 kmph especially on highways for best range.

AC (Air Condition) settings:

•

Cabin setting: Recommended AC temperature settings are 24° C with Auto mode 1 or 2.

•

Avoid very low cabin temperatures; keep ‘Economy’ setting for AC when the vehicle is idle for best range

•

Driver Only mode to be enabled in the Climate, when only the driver seat is occupied.

•

It is recommended to use AC in SYNC mode and avoid different temperature settings between Driver & Co- driver.

•

If Dual AC settings are necessary, avoid keeping more than 3° C temperature difference between Driver & Co-driver.

•

Avoid parking vehicle under hot sun directly. It is recommended to use covered parking as much as possible.

•

If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the AC filter checked which needs replacement every 10000 kms at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.

Error state:

•

When either of the ‘EV Warning, Service or Electronic Stability Control telltales are active, visit the Mahindra Authorized Service Dealer and get the problems fixed. Range gets affected during such error states.

Battery charging:

•

Do not drain the Battery to less than 5% state of charge frequently, as deep discharges can harm to the Battery health.

•

Do not expose the vehicle to contact with a direct flame.

•

Avoid vehicle charging and parking in extreme ambient temperatures (hot or cold).

•

Use normal charging (Home) even when vehicle is driven less to 100% state of charge for long term benefits on battery life and range.

•

Allow Normal charging up to 100 % SOC once after 4 fast charge cycles. Use of Fast Charging can accelerate battery degradation must be minimized to help prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

•

Always charge to greater than 50% before leaving the vehicle for long resting period.

•

Ensure that the Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment i.e. charger, charging cable (“EVSE”) is always stored in a safe place. Do not expose the EVSE to rain or wet conditions. Avoid pouring or dripping water or other liquids over the EVSE.

Maintenance:

Please note that the points mentioned in this Section are the critical points affecting range. For a comprehensive understanding of all Maintenance related requirements, please refer to the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Maintain recommended vehicle tire pressure, refer the TPMS indication.

•

Check tire health periodically and replace them as per Warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Check wheel alignment & wheel balancing periodically. If necessary, adjust with help of Authorized Mahindra Dealer.

•

Follow the tire rotation every 10,000 km as per Warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Wash your wheels regularly to remove road salt, grime and brake dust.

Awareness points:

•

BE 6 is powerful SUVs, they accelerate much quicker than what is felt. To ensure best range, the driver should gradually accelerate the pedal and for consistent drive, the pedal should be operated with a light foot.

•

Avoid driving on bumpy, rough and slippery roads to improve range.

•

Remove unnecessary loads or roof racks when they are not in use.

•

Extreme ambient conditions (<15° C or > 35° C) can have impact the range adversely.

•

Short distance trips with long stop times or long idling with Air Condition switched ON can have negative impact on range. This is due to increased energy use from climate control (AC consumption) and other onboard systems.

•

Use of fast charging should be minimized in order to help prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

General Guidelines for Range Reference Under Standard Conditions

Parameter	Value
Load	D+1
Vehicle Drive Mode	Default Mode / Range Mode
Recuperation Level Setting	Level 1 / Level 2
AC Setting	23 to 24 deg C
AC Blower Setting	Auto
City Profile	Up to 45 kmph (Typical Average Speed 20 - 25 kmph)
City Range*	450 – 500 km
General Highway Profile	Up to max speed of 110 kmph (Typical Average Speed up to 70 kmph)
General Highway Range*	350 – 400 km
Extra Highway Profile	Speed >120 kmph for a significant portion (10% or more duration)
Extra Highway Range*	< 300 km

*subject to driving pattern, environmental conditions

Factors Impacting Range:

•

Vehicle Load - Typically, D+4 conditions can reduce the range by 10 – 15%

•

Temperature impact

•

> 35° C – Range impact up to 25% in city & upto 15% in Highway

•

< 15° C – Range impact up to 15%

•

Terrain

•

Uphill driving increases energy consumption significantly. Impact of 20 – 25% depending on the grade and duration.

•

Rain & Snow - Rain & snow conditions can have negative effect on the range due to regeneration interruption.

7.10 Regenerative Braking System

A regenerative braking system is an energy recovery mechanism used in your electric origin vehicles. It converts the kinetic energy produced during braking into electrical energy, which is stored in the vehicle's battery for future use.

•

When the driver applies the brakes, the system engages an electric motor in reverse mode. Instead of consuming energy, the motor acts as a generator.

•

The kinetic energy of the vehicle, which would otherwise be lost as heat in traditional braking systems, is converted into electrical energy.

•

The generated electricity is stored in the vehicle's battery pack, increasing its overall efficiency and range.

Advantages:

•

Improved Efficiency: Increases vehicle range by reusing energy.

•

Reduced Wear and Tear: Minimizes the reliance on traditional friction brakes, extending their lifespan.

•

Environmentally Friendly: Reduces energy waste and enhances energy recovery.

7.10.1 Regenerative braking (Paddle shifter)

A regenerative braking system is an energy recovery mechanism used in your electric origin vehicles. It captures and converts the kinetic energy produced during braking into electrical energy, which is stored in the vehicle's battery for future use.

The paddle shifter allows you to adjust the regenerative braking level from 0 to 3 while decelerating.

•

Left side (Regen +): Increases regenerative braking and enhances deceleration.

•

Right side (Regen – ): Decreases regenerative braking and reduces deceleration.

•

Press and hold the left paddle shifter for more than 0.5 seconds to activate the brake via paddle function, which increases regenerative braking. In this mode, you can stop the vehicle by continuing to press the paddle shifter.

Refer the following pages on "brake via paddle".

•

Press and hold the right paddle shifter for more than 1 second to toggle the AUTO Recuperation system ON or OFF.

For more details, refer the following pages on "AUTO Recuperation System".

The paddle shifter does not operate when:

•

The (Regen +) and (Regen – ) paddle shifters are pushed the same time.

•

The vehicle is decelerating when the brake pedal is depressed.

The selected regenerative braking level is shown on the DID.

7.10.2 Brake Via Paddle

The driver can stop the vehicle by pressing the left paddle shifter Regen +.

To operate:

•

Press and hold the left paddle shifter while coasting to maximize regenerative braking.

•

Release the paddle shifter to return to the preset regenerative braking level.

•

If the vehicle is brought to a complete stop using brake via paddle then the vehicle would continue to be stationary even after releasing the regen + button.

Limitations

The vehicle may still move even when Brake Via Paddle Driving is functioning normally. Therefore, the driver should exercise caution when using this function in the following circumstances:

•

Driving on icy, snowy, wet, sandy, or muddy roads, or on manhole covers/pothole surfaces.

•

When the wheels are not properly aligned.

•

Conditions where wheel slip or spin occurs.

•

When the vehicle is heavily loaded.

•

When the vehicle is leaning to the left or right.

•

In the case of uneven or worn-out tires.

•

When driving uphill or downhill.

•

When driving on areas where the slope begins or ends.

•

When repeatedly stopping and starting on a ramp.

Stopping the vehicle may not be possible depending on the vehicle and road conditions. Be attentive to the road ahead and apply the brakes if necessary.

Please refrain from using the Brake Via Paddle function when road conditions are poor, such as wet, icy, or snow-covered surfaces.

When the vehicle is stopped or parked on steep hills using One-Pedal Driving, be sure to depress the brake pedal.

7.10.3 One Pedal Drive

One Pedal Drive is controlled by the accelerator pedal, allowing you to control the vehicle's speed (acceleration, deceleration, and stopping) without the need to manually operate the paddle shifter.

Releasing the accelerator pedal will result in strong deceleration. We recommend using One Pedal Drive in bumper-to-bumper traffic. Once the traffic clears, switch back to the desired mode by pressing the One Pedal Drive switch again.

This is not a replacement for the brake pedal. Application of brake pedal might still be required for emergency stopping.

To operate:

•

Press the one pedal shifter in steering wheel to activate the one pedal drive function.

•

During ‘one pedal drive’ activation, the vehicle will come to a stop when the accelerator pedal is released, even if the brake pedal is not pressed.

When the vehicle is stopped or parked using ‘one pedal drive’ on steep hills, be sure to press the brake pedal.

To deactivate

•

To come out of one pedal drive press the one pedal drive button or Regen – button, then regen will set to level 3

•

The ‘one pedal drive’ is deactivated when the vehicle is turned OFF. Upon restarting the vehicle, the regenerative braking is automatically set to level 1.

•

When the gear is shifted to 'R' (Reverse), One Pedal Drive is turned off and regenerative braking is set to level 3.

•

Creep will not function in one pedal drive.

Limitations

Even when One-Pedal Driving is functioning normally, the vehicle may still move. Therefore, the driver should exercise caution when using this function in the following circumstances:

•

Driving on icy, snowy, wet, sandy, or muddy roads, or on manhole covers/potholes.

•

When the wheels are not properly aligned.

•

Conditions where wheel slip or spin occurs.

•

When the vehicle is heavily loaded.

•

When the vehicle is leaning to the left or right.

•

In the case of uneven or worn-out tires.

•

When driving uphill or downhill.

•

When driving on areas where the slope begins or ends.

•

When repeatedly stopping and starting on a ramp.

7.11 Auto Regen mode

The Auto Regen mode automatically adjusts regenerative braking based on the road gradient and the driving conditions of the vehicle ahead. By minimizing unnecessary brake and acceleration pedal inputs, the system enhances energy efficiency and assists the driver.

The Auto Regen mode automatically adjusts the regenerative braking level while coasting, but it is only a supplemental feature designed for the driver’s convenience.

The system cannot fully stop the vehicle or prevent collisions. Brake control may be insufficient in certain situations, such as when the vehicle ahead is traveling at high speed, suddenly stops, or when a vehicle cuts in unexpectedly, or when driving on a steep slope.

Always remain vigilant and maintain a safe distance to prevent unforeseen and sudden situations.

7.11.1 To activate Auto Regen mode

How to operate –

Push and hold the paddle shifter (Regen –) for 1 second or more to activate the Auto Regen mode. The regenerative braking indicator will switch from the current level to 'AUTO'

When the Auto Regen mode is enabled, 'A' will be displayed for the regenerative braking level on the DID.

The system automatically controls the regenerative braking when one of the following conditions is met:

•

The road gradient changes. (Ex. Uphill or Downhill drive)

•

The distance to the vehicle ahead increases or decreases.

•

The speed of the vehicle ahead increases or decreases.

The Auto Regen mode relies on the front-view camera in the vehicle. Any obstruction or foreign substances on the camera lens may impair the system’s function. Ensure the front-view camera remains clear for optimal performance.

The Auto Regen mode will not operate if the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) warning light is illuminated on the DID. In such cases, the driver must manually adjust the vehicle speed using the accelerator or brake pedal, depending on the road and driving conditions ahead.

7.11.2 To de-activate Auto Regen mode

The Auto Regen mode will be temporarily disabled in the following situations,

Manually Cancelled: Push and hold the right-side paddle shifter for more than 1 second to toggle ON/OFF auto regen.

The 'AUTO' indicator will be replaced with the regenerative braking level indicator

Automatically Cancelled:

The Auto Regen mode will be automatically disabled when –

•

The Cruise Control system (including the Smart Cruise Control system) is active.

•

The Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) warning light is illuminated on the DID.

When the Auto Regen mode is automatically deactivated, manually adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal, depending on the road and driving conditions ahead.

7.11.3 Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance Sensing Sensor (Front radar)

Front Radar For the sensor's exact location, please refer to the image above.

To ensure proper operation of the Smart Recuperation System, always keep the bumper/radar clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris. Foreign metal substances on the bumper can interfere with the radar’s performance, potentially causing the system to temporarily stop or function improperly.

•

Do not place license plate frames or attach foreign objects, such as bumper stickers or bumper guards, near the radar sensor. These items can interfere with the sensor's performance and affect its ability to function properly.

•

Regularly clean the radar sensor and lens cover to ensure they remain free of dirt and debris.

•

Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Avoid spraying pressurized water directly onto the sensor or its cover.

•

Avoid applying unnecessary force to the radar sensor or its cover. Misalignment of the sensor may cause the Smart Recuperation System to malfunction, and a warning message may not be displayed. In such cases, we recommend that the vehicle be inspected by an authorized Mahindra dealer.

•

If the front bumper is damaged near the radar sensor, the Auto Recuperation System may not function correctly. In such cases, we recommend having the vehicle inspected by an authorized Mahindra dealer.

•

Use only genuine parts or equivalent parts specified for your vehicle to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

7.11.4 System malfunction

Check Auto recuperation system

The above message will appear if the system is not functioning properly. The system will be deactivated, and the 'AUTO' indicator on the DID will disappear, replaced by the regenerative braking level.

Check the front radar for any foreign substances, such as dirt, snow, or debris, that could obstruct the radar sensors.

If the system continues to malfunction, we recommend taking your vehicle to an authorized Mahindra dealer for further inspection.

7.11.5 Limitations of the system

The Auto Recuperation System may not function properly in certain situations where the driving conditions exceed the capabilities of the front radar sensor.

On Curves: When coasting on a curve, the system may not detect the vehicle in your lane, causing the regenerative braking level to reduce automatically. As a result, you may feel as though the vehicle is not decelerating.

Similarly, if the system suddenly detects the vehicle ahead, the regenerative braking level will increase automatically, making you feel as though the vehicle is decelerating more.

The driver must maintain a safe braking distance and, if necessary, press the brake pedal to reduce speed and ensure a safe distance is kept.

Your vehicle speed may decrease due to the presence of a vehicle in the adjacent lane.

On inclines: When coasting uphill or downhill, the system may fail to detect the vehicle in your lane, causing the regenerative braking level to reduce automatically. This may give the sensation that the vehicle is accelerating.

Similarly, if the system suddenly detects the vehicle ahead, the regenerative braking level will increase automatically, creating the sensation that the vehicle is decelerating.

The driver must maintain a safe following distance and, if necessary, apply the brake pedal to reduce speed and ensure a safe distance is maintained.

Lane changing

•

A vehicle moving into your lane from an adjacent lane will not be detected by the sensor until it enters the sensor's detection range.

•

The radar may not immediately detect a vehicle that cuts in suddenly. Always remain attentive to traffic, road, and driving conditions.

Vehicle recognition

Some vehicles in your lane may not be detected by the sensor, including

•

Narrow vehicles, like motorcycles or bicycles, may not be detected.

•

Vehicles that are offset to one side may not be detected.

•

Slow-moving vehicles or vehicles that decelerate suddenly may not be detected.

•

Stopped vehicles (The system may not detect a stopped vehicle until the vehicle ahead begins to move.)

•

Vehicles with a small rear profile, such as unladen trailers, may not be detected

A vehicle ahead may not be recognized correctly by the sensor if any of the following occur:

•

When the vehicle is tilted upwards due to overloading in the luggage compartment.

•

While the steering wheel is being turned.

•

When driving toward the edge of the lane.

•

When driving on narrow lanes or around curves.

•

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal as needed.

When using the Auto Recuperation System, please observe the following precautions:

•

If an emergency stop is required, you must apply the brakes manually.

•

Maintain a safe distance based on road conditions and vehicle speed. If the distance between vehicles is too short at high speeds, a serious collision may occur.

•

Always maintain a sufficient braking distance and apply the brakes to decelerate if necessary.

•

The Auto Recuperation System cannot detect stopped vehicles, pedestrians, or oncoming vehicles. Always remain vigilant and look ahead to avoid unexpected or sudden situations.

•

Vehicles frequently changing lanes in front of you may cause a delay in the system's response or may lead the system to react to a vehicle in an adjacent lane. Always drive cautiously to avoid unexpected or sudden situations.

•

The Auto Recuperation System may not recognize complex driving situations, so always stay alert to road conditions and control your vehicle speed accordingly.

•

In unfavorable conditions Auto recuperation systems may not function properly and the driver is required to always use their own judgment while driving and never fully rely on vehicle systems.

The Auto Recuperation System may be temporarily disabled due to:

•

Electrical interference.

•

Modification of the suspension.

•

Differences in tire wear or tire pressure.

•

Installing tires of a different type.

7.12 Brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with hydraulic brakes with Integrated Electronic Booster assisted with ABS and ESP in the front and rear wheels.

Disc brakes offer good braking capability and reduce stopping distance. Wet brake discs result in reduced braking efficiency. After a veihicle wash or driving the vehicle through water, apply and release brake pedal mildly while driving to remove the film of water from the brake disc.

Front brake Pad : The Front brake pads are equipped with Electronic Pad Wear Indicator Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, the brake warning lamp on DID(Driver Information Display) will turn ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible

Rear Brake Pad : The rear brake pads are equipped with Electronic Pad Wear Indicator Sensors, thus when the brake pads are worn out, the brake warning lamp on DID will turn ON. Replace the brake pads as soon as possible

If the IGN is turned off while running, the power assist for the brakes may not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes.

Driving with wet brakes is dangerous and it can lead to accident on the road. Stopping distance increases considerably while braking.

Brake squeal occurs as a high frequency whistling noise usually at the end of the stop while pressing the brake pedal, squeal can occur from rear end. This is a normal condition caused by environmental factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc and vehicle usage pattern

Brake Creep-Groan occurs as a low-frequency (Kar-Kar) noise D/R mode is selected and the brake pedal is released slowly to move the vehicle

Above conditions are normal phenomenon and does not affect braking performance

7.12.1 Parking on a Hill/Incline

If you have to park the vehicle with the front side facing downhill, select Reverse (R) mode and turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

Always ensure that the vehicle is in Parking (P) mode before leaving the vehicle.

A – When parking on an uphill, turn the front wheels away from the Kerb/Pavement

B – When parking on a downhill, turn the front wheels towards the Kerb/Pavement.

7.12.2 Electric Parking Brake_EPB

The EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is a safety feature with enhanced comfort, the parking brakes are applied/released by simple switch operation.

The EPB system replaces the conventional manual parking brake which requires high effort to apply & release.

In addition to the switch based Apply, EPB also provides additional safety/comfort features like EPB auto apply, auto release, Auto vehicle hold, Controlled deceleration for parking, rear wheel un-locker and roll away re-clamp.

To apply EPB: Park the vehicle in a safe place and press the ‘P’ button in SBW.

To Release EPB: Press the ‘P’ button in SBW with the brake pedal depressed.

Applying EPB	Releasing EPB

The parking brake warning lamp on the DID and the red Illumination on the EPB switch is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.

7.12.3 AUTO Apply EPB

For added comfort and for safety reasons the EPB will get automatically applied in the following conditions.

Ignition is turned Off.

Park mode engaged

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is Active state and Driver seat belt unbuckled.

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is active state continuously for more than 10 minutes in less than 20% gradient

Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is active state continuously for more than 5 sec in greater than 20% gradient

In any mode if Driver door opened, EPB will get automatically engaged

Whenever possible, refrain from using for forced braking. Use the emergency braking function only in extreme cases, for example, when the brake pedal fails or is blocked.

In case of any Switch related failure when vehicle in standstill, the EPB Auto release feature must be used to release EPB, if EPB Auto release feature doesn’t work, contact Service center in such cases to release the EPB

7.12.4 AUTO Releasing EPB/Drive Away

Close the driver door and fasten the driver seat belt.

Shift the TGS selector lever to the D/ R/N position

Release the brake pedal slowly to move the vehicle. (Creep function available in L1, L2 & L3 Regen levels)

When vehicle is In One pedal drive press accelerator pedal slowly to move the vehicle

The red Illumination on the ‘P' button and the brake tell-tale on DID is turned off, indicating that the parking brake is released.

The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated if driver door is not closed or if the driver seat belt is not fastened. The driver will get message on DID to ensure the same.

If the EPB is being released using the accelerator pedal, be cautious if the vehicle is parked uphill. In this scenario if an aggressive accelerator pedal input is given, it can also result in wheel spin. The wheel spin will cause ESC to intervene.

7.12.5 EPB Warning Lamp / Parking Brake Warning Lamp

	This tell-tale is turned ON in the DID when EPB is applied properly.
	This tell-tale is turned ON in the DID when there is a malfunction in the EPB system.

If the warning lamp is turned on, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorized Service Centre

Do’s

Driving Conditions

•

For EPB Auto release and Drive Away always wear driver seat belt and ensure that the driver door is closed

Don’ts

Driving Conditions

•

If the EPB Malfunction lamp is ON and the brake is engaged. Do not drive.

•

Avoid using EPB after doing water wading. Please get the vehicle checked in workshop.

Servicing: Avoid getting your vehicle serviced at unauthorized service centers to prevent potential hazards or part failures.

•

The EPB can also be used in cases of emergency braking. Release the accelerator and Pull and hold the EPB button until your vehicle comes to standstill and EPB gets applied. This should be done only in emergency condition and not as a regular action.

•

The braking process is interrupted when the EPB button is released or the accelerator pedal is actuated in dynamic condition

•

The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the driver door is Open or the seat belt is not fastened.

•

Motor noise can be heard during the EPB operation, this is normal behavior.

•

If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.

•

Do not let children or other people who are not familiar with the EPB system operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accidents depending on the parking/stationary state of the vehicle.

•

If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related components after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle checked and serviced

7.12.6 Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH)

The AVH is a comfort feature offered with Electric parking brake.

The function of AVH is to hold the vehicle in standstill with the applied driver brake pressure

Once AVH switch is pressed, it remains in memory and thus driver doesn’t have to press AVH switch every time

The AVH feature can exist in 4 states in the vehicle, which are as follows.

AVH Off – AVH switch is not pressed, thus AVH is not available.

	AVH Standby – AVH is available but is in standby mode.
	AVH Active – AVH is available and is controlling/holding the vehicle in standstill.
	AVH Faulty – Indicates some fault in AVH, because of which AVH not available

For the AUTO HOLD to function, the following conditions should be met.

•

Ignition ON

•

Driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled.

When AVH is active, and Driver door is opened/Driver seat belt is unbuckled, the EPB gets automatically applied for safety reasons.

For AVH to be activated, the conditions of the automatic parking function must be met at the same time.

Do not rely solely on AVH to keep the vehicle stationary on steep slopes, inclines, slippery roads, or uneven surfaces.

Never exit the vehicle without confirming that the AVH and parking brake are fully engaged.

Activation of AVH

Ensure driver door closed and Driver seat belt buckled

Turn on the ignition and enable drive mode then press the AUTO HOLD switch. Auto Hold tell-tale in DID goes to standby.

Deactivation of AVH

Press the AUTO HOLD switch & AUTO HOLD is activated, to deactivate depress the AUTO HOLD Switch.

Operating Auto hold

Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO HOLD indicator on DID (white)

Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the vehicle

The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the DID is changed from white to green and the brake is applied

Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off

The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the DID is changed from green to white and the brake is released

If the Auto Vehicle Hold (AVH) is active state continuously for more than 10 minutes in less than 20% gradient or for more than 5 sec in greater than 20% gradient or if the driver door is opened/seat belt is unbuckled the EPB applies automatically and AVH is disabled.

•

When driving off on a downhill by depressing the accelerator pedal, be careful as the vehicle can accelerate suddenly and on uphill sufficient accelerator pedal input to be provided for overcoming the gradient.

•

Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the AUTO HOLD function is activated. Otherwise, the parking brake is released, and the vehicle can accelerate suddenly

•

If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in the EPB system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Mahindra Dealer or Mahindra Authorised Service Centre. If parking the vehicle is required in an emergency, pull over the vehicle on a flat surface and chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector lever to the P position

Controlled Deceleration for Parking (CDP)

•

The Controlled Deceleration for parking is a safety feature.

•

The CDP functions can be made used in any case such as Brake pedal/Integrated Electronic motor/Boost failure because of which sufficient brake force can’t be achieved through the brake pedal.

•

In such conditions, pressing the park mode switch triggers the ESC Control unit to generate a pressure build up in the brake system which produces the braking force at individual wheels to bring the vehicle to an emergency stop.

•

At the end of vehicle stop, Parking brake will engage. Move the shifter to D/R/N to release the EPB.

•

For unintentional application, if the codriver or any other person press the EPB switch without driver’s notice in dynamic condition, The CDP function can be overridden by the driver by pressing Accelerator pedal.

•

The CDP functionality having a high rate of deceleration, anyone other than the driver must be advised not to press the EPB switch in any case while driving.

•

The CDP function is a safety feature and must be used in the cases of emergency only.

EPB Roll Away Re-clamp

•

If the EPB system detects any rolling after EPB is applied, the motor on caliper re-clamps the disc to avoid any rolling.

•

As an added feature, to avoid roll away due the reduction in clamp force due to decrease in temperature, the EPB motor on caliper re-clamps the disc multiple times based on the temperature.

Servicing and Repairing

The EPB is a complex system involving electrical and hydraulics, it is strictly advised to get it repaired or serviced in a Mahindra Authorized service Centre.

7.12.7 Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Alert

Display	Operating Conditions
	This message is displayed on the DID when the EPB switch is released without depressing the brake pedal to deactivate EPB.
	This message is displayed on the DID in the following conditions: 1. When the accelerator pedal is depressed to auto release EPB, with EPB Applied and driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled. 2. When the AVH switch is depressed to activate AVH, with driver door open/driver seat belt unbuckled.

7.12.8 Hazard on Panic Braking

Hazard lamps are turned ON during panic braking for 5 seconds when the following conditions are met:

•

Ignition is ON

•

Vehicle speed is greater than 60 kmph

•

Panic/sudden brake is applied and high deceleration rate is sensed

7.13 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-lock Brake System (also called as ABS) is designed to help prevent lock-up of the wheels and stable stopping of vehicle during a sudden, panic emergency braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. The ABS system takes input from wheel speed sensors and brake pedal switch to control the brake fluid pressures at the wheels to avoid wheel lock-up. It allows vehicle to be steered during braking.

ABS is activated only during wheel lock conditions where ABS takes over and prevents wheel lock.

You may also hear motor noise from the motor compartment. It is recommended to hold the brake pedal firmly while the ABS is active rather than pumping the brake pedal.

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, a joint in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day, tends to activate the anti-lock brake system.

The ABS warning lamp lights up when you switch ON the ignition and should go out after a few seconds. If the ABS warning lamp does not go out or if it comes ON while driving, it means there is a fault in the ABS system. In both cases, the normal braking system remains efficient, exactly as on a vehicle without ABS. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

The ABS is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. The stopping distance may be longer in the following cases:

•

Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads

•

Driving with tyre chains installed

•

Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road

•

Driving on roads where the road surface is potholes or large differences in surface height

Do not overestimate the Anti-lock Brake System: Although the Anti-lock Brake System assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. There are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness of steering wheel operation even with ABS active.

If tyre grip performance exceeds its capability, or if hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the rain, the Anti-lock Brake System will not be able to completely avoid wheel lock-up

7.14 Electric Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

EBD is a subsystem of the ABS system, It prevents least loaded wheel from locking on application of brakes, thus allows the wheel to maintain tractive contact with the road surface. The system monitors the wheel speed and when it identifies any slip, the pressure in the wheel cylinders is dumped thus preventing the wheels from locking.

A fault with EBD is indicated by illumination of the parking brake as well as ABS warning lamps. The vehicle should be examined as soon as possible by an Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

7.15 Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering behavior of the vehicle by applying the brake on the appropriate wheel automatically.

ESC uses inbuilt sensors to determine the path that the driver intends to steer the vehicle , compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the condition of over-steer or under-steer.

Over-steer - When the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

Under-steer - When the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The ESC cannot overrule the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction due to the prevailing road conditions. The ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skilful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle can not compensate for reckless or dangerous driving that could endanger the user’s safety or the safety of others on road or passerby.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ON:

Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be default active mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions.

When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator lamp will blink in the DID.

When the ESC is operating, You may also hear motor noise from the motor compartment.

When moving out of the mud or slippery road, accelerator response may be different because ESC system controls the RPM to come out of this slippery road condition. This is normal.

ESC OFF:

In some driving conditions, to maximize traction, it may be beneficial to de-activate ESC.

Such conditions are:

•

To start in deep snow or on a loose surface

•

Driving in deep sand

•

Driving through deep mud etc.

To de-activate ESC, press ESC OFF button on the driver side switch bank. Once ESC is selected, the ESC function will remain deactivated. A warning indicator will be illuminated in the Driver Information Display.

Press ESC OFF button to activate ESC function.

For safety reasons, ESC will be automatically re-activated once the vehicle speed crosses 65 kmph

Mahindra recommends that ESC be operational in all normal driving conditions.

When ESC is in OFF mode, other functions like HHC (Hill Hold Control), HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist), HDC (Hill Descent Control), DTC (Drag Torque Control), ROM (Roll Over Mitigation) will be available

ESC, by default, will be in ON condition for every ignition cycle.

If the ESC indicator blinks while driving, it indicates that ESC is working. However If this lamp is blinking continuously or remains ON, it indicates a malfunction in the ESC system. During that time vehicle speed will be limited to 25kmph. Drive carefully to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer and get the ESC system checked.

7.16 Hill Descent Control (HDC)

This System assists the driver to descend a steep slope by means of brake intervention limiting the vehicle speed without driver's input on brakes. This does not replace cruise control

During HDC, if the wheel slip becomes excessive, ABS will be activated automatically.

HDC is a user-intended function. To activate, press HDC button on the driver control switch bank. The LED on the button illuminates indicating the status. Press the button again to deactivate HDC.

The HDC feature can control the vehicle speed from 4 kmph to 40 kmph, Above 40 kmph the HDC feature will go to ready mode. The HDC feature will be deactivated automatically if vehicle speed is more than 60 kmph. (For Activating the HDC feature again, the driver needs to press the HDC button once again within the specified speed limits)

The HDC should be enabled only on steep gradient in OFF road condition. It is not recommended to be ON in plain road- to avoid accidental intervention

While HDC is controlling the vehicle speed, descent speeds can be varied by cruise buttons, accelerator pedal & brake pedal.

To Set the desired descending speed, follow the steps listed below:

•

SET Speed — This is the driver desired speed at which vehicle should descent. This can be set using HDC switch or brake/accelerator pedals. (example: when the driver activates HDC at a speed of 30 kmph, then set speed will be 30 kmph). HDC will limit vehicle descent speed to set value).

•

If driver presses the accelerator pedal and increases the speed from 30 kmph to 34 kmph and then releases the accelerator pedal. Now the new SET speed will be 34 kmph

•

Similarly, if the driver applies brake and reduces the speed from 30 kmph to 10 kmph and then releases the brake pedal, now the new SET speed will be 10 kmph

•

If the vehicle cruise speed is with in the HDC active region, similarly the set speed can be modified using cruise +/- buttons (by tapping the “SET —” or “SET +” buttons. Each press of the button will adjust the speed by approximately 0.5 kmph)

The descent speed increases only if the gradient is sufficiently steep to cause the vehicle to accelerate as the braking effect is reduced. On a shallow slope, pressing the “SET +” button may result in no speed increase.

7.17 Hill Hold Control (HHC)

Imagine a situation where your vehicle is stopped on an uphill incline. If you release the brake while moving off, there are chances that your vehicle may roll back. HHC helps in such situations by holding the vehicle from rolling back.

Hill Hold Control function uses the inbuilt acceleration sensor to identify the gradient and holds the vehicle for 2 seconds after the brake pedals are released. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal

For the Hill Hold Control (HHC) system to activate, the following conditions must be met:

The Vehicle must be equipped with HHC

The vehicle must be on sufficient gradient

The Parking brake must not be applied

HHC is designed to function for both uphill and downhill scenarios, as long as the correct gears are selected. This feature enhances control and stability when starting on an incline or descending a slope.

•

Vehicle Facing Uphill – Drive (D) Mode is engaged for Forward movement

•

Vehicle Facing Downhill – Reverse (R) Mode should be selected to facilitate controlled descent

•

In some situations, when the conditions are not met, the HHC may not get activated. In such cases slight rolling may occur.

•

The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HHC system to prevent rolling.

7.18 Hydraulic Fade Compensation (HFC)

Due to continuous brake operations, the temperature of the brake disc may get raised, due to which the friction between the brake pads and the brake disc may get reduced alarmingly, this is known as Brake Fading.

HFC provides an additional braking-force boost to the driver, based on the pad temperature model, brake pressure and deceleration rate, to reduce the braking distances in such cases.

The HFC will activate only during high brake pedal force application.

•

The HFC system cannot prevent collisions, the capabilities of an HFC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety.

•

The Safety of the vehicles always lies in the hands of the driver, never rely on the HFC feature to prevent road accidents.

7.19 Roll Over Mitigation (ROM)

Roll Over Mitigation system is a safety function which anticipates the wheel lift due to lateral forces. The ROM function analyses the rate of change of steering wheel angle and the wheel speed to determine any possible wheel lift, the system then applies appropriate brake and may also reduce the motor power to reduce the chances of wheel lift.

Minimum Vehicle speed for ROM = 25 kmph

Maximum Vehicle speed for ROM = 120 kmph

•

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur.

•

The ROM system cannot prevent all roll overs; thus ROM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

7.20 Brake Disc Wiping (BDW)

When a vehicle is driven in a wet condition; the accumulated wetness on the brake disks leads to an elongated brake response time.

The BDW function actuates the brakes with a low pressure, such that; the brake pads comes in contact with the rotating brake disks, creating a wiping action; thereby removing the moisture from the brake disks.

For the Brake Disc Wiping function to get activated, the following conditions must be met.

Vehicle speed above 70 kmph.

Accelerator Pedal must be pressed.

The Wipers must be in ON condition (Low/High Speed)

BDW may not get activated while driving through sharp corners

The Pressure generated in the BDW function is very small and this is not felt by the driver during normal driving conditions.

•

The system will not be able to sense water splashed on disc from situations such as water wash or water puddles.

•

It is suggested that the driver dry the brakes in the above said conditions by driving at very slow speed and applying the brakes lightly until the brake performance becomes normal.

7.21 Electric Brake Prefill - EBP

EBP is a value-added feature in ESC, the target of the function is to reduce the air gap of the wheel brake by putting low brake pressure to the brake pads such that the brake pads come in close proximity to the brake disc.
The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the rate of release of the acceleration pedal. A sudden release of accelerator pedal signifies an upcoming sudden braking.
By actively pre-filling the brake-system, the brake response time is reduced for an upcoming braking and full vehicle deceleration is achieved earlier. This results in a shorter stopping distance.

7.22 Secondary Collision Mitigation System (SCM)

The SCM feature in the ESC system is an autonomous braking system which decreases the speed of the vehicle after the first collision by means of autonomous braking interventions. This reduces the risk of a subsequent crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.

For the Secondary Collision Mitigation feature to get activated, the following conditions must be met.

There must be a collision detected with a certain severity, where airbags gets deployed

The impact speed must be greater than approx. 10 km/h.

The brakes and ESC system should remain functional after impact.

The accelerator pedal must not be actuated.

The SCM system is designed to reduce secondary impact severity but does not replace safe driving practices. Vehicle damage resulting from excessive speeds or negligent driving will not be covered under warranty

7.23 Cooperative Regeneration

Cooperative Regeneration is an advanced feature designed to enhance energy efficiency in electric vehicles. This system works in tandem with the vehicle's regenerative braking system, it maximizes energy recovery during driving and braking phases. It helps to extend the vehicle’s driving range and improve overall performance, providing a smoother and more sustainable driving experience.

Below are the working procedures, feedback on co-operative regeneration:

Regenerative Braking

•

When you apply the brakes or release the accelerator pedal, the Cooperative Regeneration system engages, seamlessly activating regenerative braking.

•

This process converts the vehicle’s kinetic energy into electrical energy, which is stored directly in the battery.

•

By capturing and reusing this energy, the system helps recharge the battery, extending driving range and enhancing overall energy efficiency

•

The system intelligently adapts the level of regenerative braking based on real-time driving conditions, vehicle speed, and battery charge level.

•

This dynamic adjustment maximizes energy recovery, ensuring that the system captures the optimal amount of energy while maintaining a smooth and responsive driving experience

Driver Feedback :

•

As you drive, the Cooperative Regeneration system provides feedback on how efficiently you are using energy. This may be displayed through visual message encouraging smoother driving to maximize regeneration.

•

Adopting smooth acceleration and deceleration habits significantly enhances the effectiveness of the Cooperative Regeneration system.

Cooperative Features :

•

The Cooperative Regeneration system can also integrate with other vehicle systems, like Adaptive Cruise Control and navigation, to anticipate and adapt to upcoming traffic conditions and terrain. For instance, when nearing a downhill stretch, the system can pro actively increase regenerative braking to capture additional energy. This predictive adjustment allows for smarter energy recovery, enhancing efficiency by aligning regeneration with real-time driving conditions.

Driver Awareness

•

Although Cooperative Regeneration enhances energy efficiency, it’s crucial to remain attentive to road conditions and traffic. This system supports energy recovery but does not replace the need for careful, responsible driving. Staying focused on the road ensures both safety and optimal performance, allowing the system to assist effectively within safe driving practices.

Environmental Factors

•

Regenerative braking performance can vary with external conditions, such as weather or road surfaces. On wet or slippery roads, traditional braking may be needed to ensure safe and reliable stopping. Staying prepared to use conventional brakes when necessary ensures safety and maintains consistent performance in all driving conditions.

System Alerts

•

Pay attention to any alerts or notifications on the vehicle’s display regarding the regenerative braking system or battery status, as these can indicate important updates on system performance. Regular vehicle maintenance is key to keeping all systems running optimally, ensuring maximum efficiency, safety, and the full benefits of regenerative technology.

•

If you notice a decrease in regenerative braking performance, check the vehicle’s display for any warnings or alerts. These notifications can help identify potential issues and guide you toward any necessary adjustments or maintenance to restore optimal function.

•

Make sure the battery is adequately charged and that there are no obstructions affecting the vehicle’s braking system. This ensures that regenerative braking can operate effectively and maintain optimal performance during your drive.

•

For ongoing issues, refer to the vehicle's service manual or contact your authorized dealership for further assistance. They can provide expert guidance and support to address any concerns related to the regenerative braking system or overall vehicle performance.

Cooperative Regeneration is a driver-assistance feature designed to enhance your vehicle's efficiency and overall driving experience. However, it’s essential to prioritize safe driving practices and remain fully attentive to road conditions at all times. This ensures both safety and optimal performance, allowing the system to support you effectively without compromising control.

7.24 Drive Modes

Drive Mode is a quick and easy way to change driving style of your vehicle. With Drive mode settings, you can instantly adjust driving dynamics and feel of your vehicle, all on the go.

The drive modes can be selected through Centre Information Display (CID) in the below path:

App Drawer/ Vehicle Apps /My Vehicle/Drive Modes

Shortcut: Press drive mode button in ICC

You can select from multiple drive modes options any time during your Drive, meaning you can switch to the perfect mode when the situation calls for it. Whether you're looking for an relaxed commute or a sporty back roads adventure, Drive Mode allows you to perfectly tailor your vehicle for your unique driving style.

The system is incredibly easy to use, simply choose you choice of "Drive Mode" and experience 4 different vehicles in one.

•

Default Mode

•

Range Mode

•

Everyday Mode

•

Race Mode

Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the DID.

ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in DEFAULT mode

Default Mode

The vehicle will be by default in Default mode every time the vehicle Ignition is turned ON.

In this mode vehicle will drive like a Ice vehicle and hence We do not recommend overtaking maneuver at high speed in this mode (For that it is better to be in Everyday or Race mode).

•

In Default mode the vehicle speed is limited to 140 Kmph. This is ideal for the normal city drives and normal highway.

•

Accelerator pedal response is modified to have comfortable and easy control in fast moving traffic and highway condition.

•

It is designed for default driving on typical road conditions to deliver a comfortable ride while ensuring stability and control, making it ideal for urban commutes and suburban journeys.

Range Mode

•

In Range mode the acceleration response may be slightly reduced if the accelerator pedal is depressed moderately

•

The vehicle speed is limited to 135 Kmph. This mode is ideal for city traffic and better driving.

•

Range Mode enhances passenger comfort by softening the suspension to provide a smoother and more relaxed ride.

•

Range Mode reduces the damping force, making the suspension more compliant. This adjustment allows the system to absorb road irregularities more effectively, resulting in a smoother and more comfortable ride for passengers, particularly on uneven or rough surfaces.

•

It is ideal for long-distance highway cruising or driving on uneven roads. By reducing the damping force and making the suspension more compliant, it ensures a smoother, more relaxing ride while minimizing passenger fatigue over extended journeys.

Everyday mode

•

In Everyday mode the vehicle speed is limited to 165 Kmph. This mode is ideal for the normal day to day city and highway drives

•

Accelerator pedal response is modified and regeneration is made passive so as to have comfortable and easy control in fast moving traffic and highway condition.

•

Everyday Mode offers a balanced setup that optimally blends comfort and handling. It ensures a smooth ride for daily commutes while maintaining responsive suspension dynamics for confident control and stability in various driving conditions.

•

Everyday Mode adjusts the damping characteristics to an intermediate level, providing a mix of stability and comfort.

•

It is designed for everyday driving on typical road conditions. By balancing damping characteristics, it delivers a comfortable ride while ensuring stability and control, making it ideal for urban commutes and suburban journeys.

Race Mode

The Race mode is when you want the adrenaline rush. We would urge to use this mode only in open roads and use it responsibly.

This mode is for a more spirited driving and when you want the adrenaline rush. In this mode, accelerator will become more responsive, i. e. the vehicle accelerates more readily. The steering efforts and response is tuned for better handling.

•

In Race mode there is no vehicle speed is limit.

•

Race Mode enhances handling and cornering stability, optimizing the suspension for spirited and dynamic driving.

•

Race Mode increases the damping force, stiffening the suspension to enhance performance. This setup minimizes body roll and maximizes road feedback, providing precise control and confidence for spirited driving or track use.

•

Race Mode is ideal for dynamic driving on smooth roads or during high-performance maneuvers. By stiffening the suspension and minimizing body roll, it delivers precise control, enhanced stability, and maximum responsiveness for an exhilarating driving experience.

In race mode the maximum performance of the power train is released and the vehicle becomes super responsive to the accelerator and brake inputs, hence we would urge to use this mode only in open roads and use it responsibly. Please also be always mindful of traffic regulations.

Snow Mode

Snow mode in vehicles helps improve traction and control on snowy or icy roads by adjusting throttle response, transmission settings, and torque distribution

This snow mode can be activated along with any of the drive modes (Default, Range, Race, Everyday mode)

Driving modes alerts:

Sensitivity of Accelerator pedal along with motor power delivery

It also changes the steering efforts.

Suspension travel also may vary to give more stability and comfort for semi active suspension

Once any of the modes is selected, we would have an ALERT message in DID. Based on the mode selected the Alert message would vary for

RANGE MODE ACTIVATED	EVERYDAY MODE ACTIVATED

RACE MODE ACTIVATED	SNOW MODE ACTIVATED

Once selected we would have a permanent indication in the DID

For each mode the theme in the DID and CID changes accordingly.

ON every IGNITION Cycle, vehicle will always start in Default mode

Boost Option

When boost switch is pressed additional maximum power will be available for next 10 secs.

This option should be used during over taking another vehicle when you are in Range or Everyday modes.

Boost mode can’t be used continuously ON.

Boost mode can’t be activated continuously, Since there is a specified time gap to reactivate.

Boost mode will not get activated when you are in race mode or power saving mode.

In boost mode temporarily the maximum performance of the power train is released and the vehicle becomes super responsive to the accelerator and brake inputs, hence we would urge to use this mode only in open roads and use it responsibly. Please also be always mindful of traffic regulations.

Power Save Mode

Auto Activation:

When the vehicle's State of Charge (SOC) reaches 15%, the power-saving mode is automatically activated to maximize the remaining driving range. Alert (A) will be displayed on the Driver Information Display (DID) to inform the driver that the mode is active, ensuring efficient use of battery power.

Also PSM (B) will be displayed the bottom of the DID which will be permanently ON. Until vehicle is charged above 15% or PSM mode deactivated manually.

Manual Activation:

when charging options are not available nearby or if they have some range concerns, you can manually enable Power Saving Mode.

Enable/Disable the Power Saving Mode:

App Drawer –> Vehicle Apps –> energy–> Battery–> Power saving Mode (Enable/Disable)

Certain features of the vehicle get disabled/get into an ECO state to conserve energy.

Key changes when Power Saving Mode is on

•

Climate Control in Eco mode

•

PID screen turns off

•

Changes to Range Drive mode

7.25 Virtual Engine Sound Simulators (VESS)

Virtual engine sound simulators (VESS) in BE 6 is designed to enhance the driving experience and improve safety by generating artificial engine sounds. These sounds help pedestrians and other road users become aware of the otherwise silent EVs.

The sound will be audible from interior and exterior of the vehicle.

The user can activate VESS using either the hard switch in ICC panel or the HMI.

The VESS interior offers an immersive experience with 5 distinct modes (Range, Race, Everyday, V8 Tribute and Technosynth) designed to cater to various driving preferences and styles. Exterior offers 3 modes (Range, Race and V8 Tribute).

On the interior page, activating the VESS interior sound can be done by either pressing the "Sound On" button or selecting any of the available VESS interior modes.

When Drive mode is selected on the VESS interior screen, the interior audio seamlessly adapts to changes in drive modes made through the MY Vehicle app.

The VESS Exterior page includes a "Sound On" option, which, when activated by the user, turns on the VESS exterior sound.

The VESS hard switch exclusively activates the interior sound, while the HMI allows you to enable both interior and exterior sounds.

Steps to Activate VESS:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Settings / Audio/ Sonicsuite / Interior or Exterior / Sound ON or Sound OFF

These systems not only make driving more enjoyable but also enhance safety by making EVs more audible to pedestrians and other drivers.

The VESS hard switch exclusively activates the VESS interior. When the user presses the hard switch, it turns on the VESS interior sound corresponding to the mode selected on the VESS page.

7.26 Semi Active Suspension

A semi-active suspension system is a type of automotive suspension that dynamically adjusts the damping characteristics of the shock absorbers to respond to changing road conditions, vehicle dynamics, and driver inputs.

There are three different damping modes are available as standard equipment, which can be selected via the HMI,

Default - by default

Range

Everyday

Race

If the semi-active suspension warning light appears on the DID it indicates a potential issue with the suspension system. It is recommended to contact Authorized Mahindra to resolve the issue.

The semi-active suspension system operates according to the selected drive mode, optimizing performance and comfort based on the driving conditions. Refer “Drive Mode” section for more details.

7.27 Special driving conditions

Driving Through Water:

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are several precautions that must be considered before entering the water.

Never attempt to start the vehicle

•

Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line

•

The water surface should not be higher than the lower edge of the underbody

•

High voltage battery and electrical/electronics components will get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water

•

Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient of friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tap the brake pedal while driving to remove the moisture in brake disc surface

•

You must slow down while driving through shallow water. Speeding may cause water to splash onto the windshield, obstructing your vision. In extreme conditions, you may get a water wedge formation between the road and tyre causing loss of control in the vehicle.

•

The ground under the water might not be firm which could result the vehicle to move further down while driving the vehicle through it.

•

It may also enter the transaxle reducing the oil's lubricating qualities. If these are submerged in water, contact Mahindra authorised service center or RSA

•

Sand, mud/sludge that has accumulated in around brake drums/discs may affect braking efficiency. This may also damage brake system components. Wet brakes cannot stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Dryness of brakes can be improved by driving the vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal

•

When driving through water, traction or brake capability may be limited. Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has taken you through water

•

Do not stop the vehicle while in the water

If any orange-colored cables (High voltage Cables) on the vehicle are visible, in order to prevent electric shock or even death, do not make any contact with any cable.

If water enters inside the vehicle or fully submerged in water, do not drive the vehicle. Contact RSA / Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. Never touch the orange-colored cables because an electric shock may occur, causing injury or death.

If your vehicle is submerged:

If Your stationary Vehicle is Submerged up to OR Lower edge of underbody:

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow water, there are several precautions that must be considered before entering the water.

Contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately. Have the vehicle towed to nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer to check any entry of water into any electrical/electronics components

All fluids including transaxle fluids required to be changed in case of water ingress and contamination

Driving Through Flowing Water:

If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. The flowing water can erode the streambed causing your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine the exit point(s) that are downstream of your entry point to compensate for drifting.

Driving at night:

Night driving indeed poses more risks than daytime driving due to reduced visibility, increased glare, and the higher likelihood of encountering drowsy or impaired drivers. Here are some important tips to remember:

•

Reduce your speed and increase the distance between your vehicle and others, as nighttime visibility is often limited—especially in areas without street lighting.

•

Adjust your mirrors to minimize glare from other vehicle’s headlights.

•

Ensure your head lamps are clean and correctly aligned. Dirty or misaligned headlights can significantly reduce your visibility and make it harder to see obstacles, road signs, and other vehicles at night.

•

Avoid staring directly at oncoming headlights, as the glare can temporarily impair your night vision and make it harder to see the road.

Driving in the rain

Driving in rain and on wet roads can be hazardous due to reduced traction and limited visibility. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement:

•

Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop your vehicle.

•

Turn OFF your Cruise Control.

•

Replace your windshield wiper blades as soon as they show signs of streaking or leave sections of the windshield unswept.

•

Ensure your tires have sufficient tread depth. Worn tires with inadequate tread can reduce traction on wet pavement, increasing the risk of skidding, making it difficult to stop quickly and possibly lead to an accident.

•

Turn on your headlights to increase your visibility to other drivers, especially in rain, fog, or low-light conditions.

•

Driving too quickly through large puddles can wet your brakes, reducing their effectiveness. If you need to drive through puddles, do so slowly to avoid splashing water onto the braking components and maintain better control of your vehicle.

If you suspect your brakes are wet, gently apply them while driving to help dry them out and restore normal braking function.

7.27.1 Winter Driving

Winter’s harsh weather condition can accelerate tire wear and lead to various vehicle issues. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:

Snow or icy conditions

Enable the snow mode in the right side of the page in Drive modes

Keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the one ahead to ensure you have enough time to react to sudden stops or obstacles.

Brake gently to stay in control, particularly on snowy or icy roads. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking, and sharp turns are especially hazardous in winter conditions. Sudden braking on slippery surfaces can lead to skidding, so maintain a smooth, steady approach to all movements for safer driving.

Always carry emergency equipment in your vehicle to be prepared for unexpected situations. Essential items to include are tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand or kitty litter for traction, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, a ground cloth, coveralls, and a blanket. These supplies can help you manage emergencies, especially in harsh weather conditions, and ensure your safety while on the road.

Snow tires should be the same size and type as your vehicle's standard tires to ensure proper safety and handling. Using mismatched tires can compromise traction, stability, and control, especially in winter conditions, potentially affecting your vehicle's performance and safety.

When installing snow tires, ensure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as your vehicle’s original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to maintain balanced handling in all weather conditions. Keep in mind that snow tires may provide less traction on dry roads compared to your vehicle’s standard tires. Always consult with your tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations to ensure safe driving.

Before installing studded tires, be sure to check local and municipal regulations, as some areas may have restrictions on their use

8 Advanced Driver Assistance System (If equipped)

The BE 6 is equipped with Advance Driver Assist System (ADAS) Level2 +featuring 5 radars and one camera. to provide alerts and controls to improve safety and increase driver comfort. It should be noted that ADAS only provides assistance to the driver, it neither replaces the driver nor is a substitute. ADAS may fail to detect vehicles, pedestrians, or road hazards under certain conditions. The driver is fully responsible for maintaining control and must always be prepared to intervene.

The ADAS system gives enormous benefits to driver, however the driver shall remain solely responsible for the safe maneuvering of the vehicle. He/She must remain vigilant throughout the drive and in active control of the vehicle.

ADAS provides below features (If equipped):

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Speed Limit Assist (SLA)

Collision mitigation System (AEBS/FCW)

Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

Lane Keep Assist System (LKA/LDW)

Lane Centering Function (LCF)

Smart Pilot Assist (SPA)

High Beam Assist (HBA)

Front Vehicle Start Alert (FVSA)

ADAS can provide the following list of additional features with the help of four corner radars (If equipped):

10.

Blind spot detection (BSD)

11.

Rear cross traffic alert (RCTA)

12.

Door open alert (DOA)

13.

Highway assist (HWA)

14.

Emergency lane keep assist (ELK)

15.

Automatic emergency steering (AES)

16.

Emergency steering assist (ESA)

17.

Rear Collision Warning (RCW)

In view of the policy of continuously improving our products, we reserve the right to alter specifications or designs without prior notice and without liability/obligation. Illustrations do not show the vehicle in the standard form. Please be aware that this manual may apply to various models/variants. As a result you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle. All the information, illustration, and specifications in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication.

We recommend you to contact the nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer for latest features applicable to your vehicle.

8.1 Maintenance and Limitations

Camera Troubleshooting:If any of the below telltales or popups are displayed in the DID, then please follow the checklist provided in the Camera maintenance section.

Camera Maintenance: To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Camera sensor failure, following points to be taken care of.

•

The outer area of the windshield must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water drops etc.

•

If there is condensation in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, use the de-mister to clear it.

•

If there is any other dirt in the inner side of windshield in front of Camera, contact Mahindra Service Centre for cleaning.

•

Stickers, window tinting, electronic toll devices or similar objects should not be attached on the windshield in front of camera.

•

If the Camera needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre only.

•

If the windshield portion in front of camera has any cracks/scratches/stone chips, it should be taken to Mahindra Service Centre for complete windshield replacement.

•

If the vehicle met with any accident or impact, particularly for the front side, contact Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage / calibration errors in the Camera.

•

In case any modification to be done for Camera, beauty cover, Inside Rear View Mirror or Ceiling, contact Mahindra Service Centre.

•

Any external object/accessories should not be installed on the hood area as it may affect the Camera’s field of view.

•

Ensure that flag post on the bonnet is not blocking the camera view.

•

The head lamp aimed should not be modified and in case of an head lamp replacement, head lamp aiming should be done by Authorised Mahindra Service Centre only

•

If the Windshield or Camera is replaced, the Camera must be recalibrated at Authorised Mahindra Service Centre only.

Front Radar/Corner Radar Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Front / Corner Radar Troubleshooting

If any of the below tell tales or pop ups are displayed in the DID , then please follow the checklist provided in the Front Radar/Corner Radar maintenance section.

Front / Corner Radar Maintenance :

To avoid incorrect, partial or disabled ADAS functionality due to Front/Rear Radar sensor failure, following points to be taken care of.

•

The Radar surface and bumper area in front of radar must be cleaned regularly and to be kept free of dirt, oil, ice, water etc.

•

Any external object should not be installed on the front grill or front bumper area as it may affect front radar’s performance.

•

Ensure that the number plate is not blocking the front radar sensor.

•

Avoid any kind of customization to the front/rear bumper area infront of the front/corner radars. such as attaching stickers, installing flags or any metallic objects, carriers, painting etc.

•

If the vehicle has met with an accident or impact, particularly an impact from the front or side, then contact the Authorised Mahindra Service Centre to check for any damage to the front/corner radar units.

•

If the front/corner sensor needs to be removed or replaced, contact Mahindra Service Centre.

•

If any rework need to be done on front or rear bumper or any of the front or corner radars, the respective radar must be recalibrated by the Authorised Mahindra Service Center.

Any damage or defect due to improper maintenance or maintenance by an unauthorised dealer will void the warranty for Camera, Front Radar and Corner radars.

8.1.1 General System Limitations

ADAS feature functionalities may get affected due to the detection limitations of Camera & Radar in below conditions.

General Limitations: Camera

•

Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms etc.)

•

Poor visibility owing to night conditions

•

Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves

•

Driving on a bumpy road surface or on an uneven dirt road

•

Strong light (such as, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) entering the front camera lens.

General limitations : Front / Corner Radar

•

If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area

•

Inclement weather conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms etc.

•

Interference by other radar sources.

8.1.1.1 Drive Assist

Drive Assist is a feature where all detected road traffic and lanes by Camera & Radars are displayed in DID for driver's visualization purpose.

This feature is only for visualization purpose and has no influence on the individual feature performance.

Steps to enable Drive Assist:

Press the menu button in steering wheel, scroll down and select "Drive Assist"

Drive Assist limitations

Drive Assist visualization has below known limitations and this would not affect the ADAS features' working performance in any manner.

•

All four wheelers except large trucks will be displayed as Car

•

Two wheelers might get displayed as bicyclists and vice versa

•

Two wheelers might get displayed as bicyclists and vice versa

•

Truck may get displayed as Box-Unclassified object

•

Vehicles in blind spot will be displayed as Box- Unclassified object

•

Vehicles which are at a longitudinal distance of above 40 m from your vehicle are not displayed

•

Vehicles which are laterally far from your vehicle are not displayed

•

Vehicles which are positioned in adjacent lanes are not displayed when the adjacent lane markings are not clear.

•

During rare occasions due to reflection from the environment, false object detections could be possible.

•

There might be a slight delay for objects to get updated in the drive assist screen with respect to real time.

8.2 Collision Warning

8.2.1 Auto Emergency Braking and Forward Collision Warning (AEB & FCW)

Collision warning system alerts the driver by providing audio and visual warning when there is a possibility of collision with rear end of the preceding vehicles, cyclists, standing cattle or pedestrians detected ahead. if driver fails to take actions within a rational time, system will apply braking in certain situations to mitigate the collision.

Disclaimer

•

System can detect vehicles, cyclists, standing cattle and pedestrians but not in all situations. System's capacity to assess certain traffic situations is a supplemental aid to the driver and does not function in all driving/traffic situations or weather/road conditions. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Refer system limitation section for more information about system limitation. Read the manual carefully in detail before using the system.

•

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the system could result in serious injury or death.

•

The Collision Mitigation System is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver. It is driver's responsibility to monitor traffic conditions and drive the vehicle safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.

•

System does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.

•

System does not detect all kinds of vehicles, bicyclists, cattle and pedestrians.

•

System does not detect small animals like dog, monkey, calves etc.

•

System may sometimes provide warning and braking for obstacles on road like barricade, sitting cows etc.

•

System is designed to intervene as late as possible i.e. in emergency to help avoid unnecessary activation.

•

Vehicles, Pedestrians, cattle or cyclists at an offset may not be detected by FCW/AEBS system.

•

Collision Mitigation System works on prediction of possible collision with the objects in front of vehicle by assuming the objects movements in certain directions. Sometimes the objects movement direction may not match to the prediction and the system may react early and provide warning or perform braking even though the object may not be in the host vehicle path.

•

Only rear end of the preceding vehicles are identified by the system and warning or braking as needed will be provided by the system. System may not react or providing warning or braking for a crossing or oncoming vehicle. System may not react to a stationary vehicle if the vehicle is stationed in crossing or oncoming pose.

Collision Warning comprises of the following functions:

Forward Collision Warning (FCW): When enabled, alerts the driver in case of a possible collision detected by the system.

Auto Emergency Braking (AEBS) When enabled, can provide a braking assist to mitigate the collision detected by the system.

There are situations where the system may not detect a possible collision, driver has to take control of the vehicle always.

System Operation

Prerequisite for activation:

AEBS or FCW gets ready to be activated when turned ON from DID settings and when the following prerequisites are satisfied

- The braking system is ready.

- Vehicle speed is within system operating limit

- No other system failures or degradation of functions related to Collision mitigation systems like Braking system, Electric Power train management system, Steering system etc.

Steps to Activate AEBS/FCW System:

Perform the following steps to turn the AEBS/FCW system ON or OFF:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Collision Warning / Auto Emergency Braking

•

Select “Assist” to turn the AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Braking) and FCW (Forward Collision Warning)

•

Select “Warning” to turn on Forward collision warning (FCW)

•

Select “Off” to turn the AEBS/FCW system off

When the AEBS is turned off, the AEBS OFF telltale will be ON in DID

Forward collision Warning Timing

The driver can select the level 1 warning activation time in the Center Information display for driver assistance.

The options for the level 1 Warning include the following:

Early - When this option is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Normal" setting. if you are experiencing frequent warning, you can change setting to "Normal" or "Late"

Normal - When this option is selected, warning is provided at higher time to collision than "Late" setting.

Late - When this option is selected, warning is provided at shorter time to collision.

There is a minimum time interval of 60 seconds required for system to provide successive AEBS.

•

No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations. We recommend that the driver shall remain in active control at all times and use the feature as an assistive feature rather than a replacement for the driver.

•

Never test Collision Mitigation System by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death.

•

To help make Collision Mitigation System as effective as possible, it is recommended to always use the setting "Early"

8.2.2 AEBS/FCW for Vehicles

To enable the system to detect rear end of preceding vehicles ahead, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph

Below 10 kmph FCW/AEBS will not work.

System detects types of vehicles that are either stationary or moving in the same direction as your vehicle. In order to detect a vehicle in darkness, its headlights and taillights must be ON and clearly visible.

Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a front preceding four wheel vehicle. Minimum overlap with the bumper should be 50% for system to detect a motorbike/two wheeler

When there is a possibility of collision with crossing vehicles (except two wheeler), AEBS provides warning & full braking if the vehicle speed is in between 20 - 30 kmph and the speed of crossing vehicle is in between 20 - 30 kmph. At speed combinations other than mentioned above, collision braking is subject to the system's detection ability.

Level 1 Warning:

The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning

Level 2 Warning:

If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.

Level 3 Warning:

After second level warning, If the driver does not take action or driver braking force is not enough and risk of a collision is imminent, the system applies harder braking along with third level of visual and audible warning.

System applying AEBS braking can only mitigate a possible collision and does not guarantee in avoiding the collision. Driver has to take necessary braking or steering actions to avoid the collision.

During harder braking, there are possibilities that the occupants may experience a high amount of physical shock due to the braking force which may cause uncomfortable feeling or injury. Take necessary health checkups and precautions when experienced.

All the occupants should wear seat belts, as the system braking may lead to high level of motional inertia, where unbelted occupants are in a risk of getting injured.

Vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEBS.

If driver applies hard brake during drive , dynamic braking system activates to boost braking force.

When “Warning” option for collision warning is selected in CID settings, the driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by visual and audible warnings. Automatic Braking will not be provided in this setting.

When system has applied the brakes, a pop-up message will be displayed as "Automatic Emergency Braking Completed".

If the vehicle driving speed is above 85 kmph, AEBS third level warning won’t come and system won’t apply full braking. In this case first and second level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or Collision Mitigation System to take action.

The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if AEBS is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the brakes will be released. Driver has to always take control of the vehicle.

If AEBS operation results in vehicle stopping completely, the vehicle will remain at standstill until the driver input is provided.

8.2.3 AEBS/FCW for Pedestrian

To enable the system to detect a pedestrian, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.

For pedestrian detection clear information about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a person's normal pattern of movement are required. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a contrast to the background. If there is little contrast, the person may not be detected.

If major parts of the pedestrian's body are not visible to the camera, person may not be detected.

In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire body and the person must be at least 80 cm tall.

Level 1 Warning:

The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning

Level 2 Warning:

If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.

Level 3 Warning:

Fast moving pedestrians and pedestrians not in their walking pose are not detected by the system and hence there will not be any warning or braking provided by the system.

Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to detect a pedestrian.

System may not detect pedestrians in sitting, bent, crawling or lying poses.

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEBS second and third level warning won’t come for pedestrian. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.

The maximum level of braking is limited to 50 kmph of speed drop. E.g. if the AEBS is initiated at 70 kmph, then by reaching 20 kmph, the brakes will be released. Driver has to be in control of the vehicle always.

8.2.4 AEBS/FCW for Cyclists

For cyclist detection, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.

For cyclist detection, clear information about the cycle itself and the rider's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement is required

If major parts of the cyclist's body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the cyclist.

The cyclist should be of height greater than 3 feet and should be driving an adult cycle.

Level 1 Warning:

The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning

Level 2 Warning:

If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.

Level 3 Warning:

Fast moving cyclists are not detected by the system. Hence the system may not react by providing warning or braking for the fast moving cyclists.

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEBS second and third level warning won’t come for cyclist. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.

8.2.5 AEBS/FCW for Cow

For the cow detection, the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph and the height & width of cow shall be above 1 m and 0.5 m respectively.

In order for the system to detect cow, clear information about the cow itself and the cow’s head, forelegs, hindlegs and cow's normal pattern of movement is required.

If major parts of the cow’s body is not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect properly.

Level 1 Warning:

The driver is alerted to the risk of an imminent collision by first level of visual and audible warning

Level 2 Warning:

If the driver does not take action or the driver braking force is not enough to mitigate collision, system issues the second level of visual and audible warning and applies partial braking.

Level 3 Warning:

Group of cows and Fast moving cows may not be detected by the system. Hence the system may not react by providing warning or braking for fast moving cows

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEBS second and third level warning won’t come for cow. Hence system won’t apply full braking. If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph and below 85 kmph, then first level warning alone will be provided. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.

Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to react to a cow

8.2.6 AEBS/FCW for any General Object

For General object detecting, the size of the object which present a collision risk shall be above 30 cm x 30 cm and the vehicle driving speed must be at least 10 kmph.

The detection of the general object (for example, barricade, sitting animals, calves, cones etc) are subject to the clear visibility of the object in contrast to the back ground

Any moving general object other than the listed categories of vehicles, pedestrian, motorbike, cyclist and cow are not detected by the system and hence there will not be any warning or braking provided by the system.

Minimum overlap should be 25% for system to react to a general object.

If the vehicle driving speed is above 65 kmph, AEBS second and third level warning won’t come for general object. Hence system won’t apply full braking. Never wait for a warning or for Collision Mitigation System to take action.

8.2.7 AEBS for Vehicles - Junction Turning

For detection of an approaching vehicle in junction turning scenarios the vehicle driving speed must be between 10-30 kmph and oncoming vehicle should be clearly visible and moving in the speed range of 30 kmph to 70 kmph.

To detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a collision, that approaching vehicle must be within detection range and your vehicle must be in left lane making a right turn with the right turn indicator ON.

In junction turning scenarios, system applies braking and there is no warning.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the target ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help mitigate the consequences of a collision and cannot completely avoid the collision. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed. Never wait for a warning or AEBS to take action.

The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:

•

When steering is applied to avoid a collision

•

When the accelerator pedal is depressed

•

When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.

•

When driver presses and releases brake pedal.

8.2.8 Collision Warning Troubleshooting

If any of below mentioned messages is displayed in the DID means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off.

However, message will not be displayed in all situations in which the camera/radar sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the camera and area on the bumper in front of front radar and front corner radar sensors are always kept clean.

1. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to camera sensor, AEBS warning lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in DID .

The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:

Cause	Action
The area of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow	Clean the windshield or remove the ice/snow
Thick fog or heavy rain /snow blocks reduce the camera sensor’s range of visibility	No action. The driver should be extra alert in this condition.
There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera sensor.	Have the area of the windshield cleaned by Mahindra Authorised service.

•

If the warning lamp continues to illuminate after above action and running the vehicle for few minutes, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit an authorised Mahindra Service Center for this service.

2. In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to radar sensor, AEBS warning lamp/corner radar malfunction lamp will be ON in yellow color and a pop up message will appear in DID.

The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:

Cause	Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice	Clean/clear the bumper in front of the radar.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.	No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar.
Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.	No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar.
The bumper in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.	Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.

3. If system malfunctions, AEBS warning lamp will be continuously ON in yellow color.

Any one or both of the below pop up messages will appear in DID. Contact an authorised Mahindra Service Center immediately.

If Corner radar malfunction lamp is ON due to blockage or failure of corner radars, AEB for crossing vehicles will not work

Collision warning Limitations

Collision warning is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

•

Collision warning cannot detect all vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians, animals or general objects under all conditions.

•

System cannot guarantee the detection of following objects:

–

Small pedestrians (including small children)

–

Sitting or bent pedestrians .

–

Pedestrians other than in walking or standing poses .

–

Pedestrians in wheelchairs or using mobile transport such as scooters, child-operated toys, or skateboards

–

Pedestrians who are seated or otherwise not in a full upright standing or walking position

–

Pedestrian who are partially obscured, wearing clothing that prevents a clear view of the person's body contours.

–

Oncoming vehicles

–

Crossing vehicles which are at higher speeds above 30 kmph

–

Merging Vehicles

–

Cutting in Vehicles

–

Specialized vehicles

–

Obstacles on the roadside

–

Vehicles that are irregular in shapes like hand carts, cycle carts, motorized carts, animal carts

–

Vehicles that look irregular when loaded.

–

Vehicles that have long trailers above.

–

Two wheeler or bicycles without a rider.

–

Two wheeler carrying baggage extended beyond regular shape of two wheeler.

–

Obscured vehicles.

–

Barricades of special types

–

Large animals other than cows

–

Animals which are small in size- Calf, Dogs, goats, Monkeys etc

•

If the pedestrians/cows/general objects has limited contrast to their immediate background, warning or braking may be delayed or not come at all.

•

System may not react for fast moving vehicles, pedestrians and cows.

•

System may not react for group of cows

•

System cannot detect all cyclists in all situations, such as:

–

a partially obscured cyclist.

–

a cyclist whose clothing is in such a way that prevents clear view of the person's body contours

–

a cyclist transporting a large object

•

System may not function in junction turning scenario under below conditions:

–

If the oncoming vehicle is detected at a late stage

–

If the oncoming vehicle is partially obscured by another vehicle

–

If the oncoming vehicle changes lane at a late stage

•

System may not function if speed difference between the two vehicles is too small or too high

•

System may not function properly or detect a target ahead in the following conditions:

–

Poor visibility (conditions such as rain, fog, snow, dust storms, sandstorms etc.)

–

Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

–

Poor visibility owing to night/low beam conditions

–

Driving on a bumpy road surface, such as an uneven dirt road

–

If dirt, ice, snow or other material is covering the radar sensor area

–

Interference by other radar sources.

–

The camera area of windshield is fogged up or covered with dirt, water drops, ice, snow, etc.

–

Strong light (such as, sunlight or high beams from oncoming vehicles) enters the front camera

–

A sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or a shaded area or lightning flashes.)

•

In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage of any RADARs, AEBS will get disabled. Get the vehicle serviced as early as possible from a Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

•

AEBS will be disabled when trailer is connected

When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.

8.2.9 Collision Warning may not function in below scenarios:

False decelerations or no decelerations:

•

If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, Collision warning may produce frequent false warning or deceleration or no warning/ no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest Mahindra service center for radar alignment.

When any vehicle moves greater than +/- 20 deg. to host vehicle direction:

If any vehicle moves at heading angle greater than +/- 20 deg. to the host vehicle system may not consider it. Driver must be alert and take control.

When it is difficult to obtain view by the camera:

Due to poor visibility by camera like sunlight or any other source of light on camera. System may not function as intended Driver must be alert and take control of the vehicle

When the tail light of the front preceding vehicle is asymmetrical at night:

At night, if the preceding vehicle's tail lamps are not in symmetry or mounting positions are unusual, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.

Pedestrian/cow suddenly jumping in to the host vehicle lane too closer to host vehicle:

System may not consider if a pedestrian suddenly jumps in to the lane / area very closer to host vehicle. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle

If a part of the body of the pedestrian is a covered or standing pedestrian:

In the case of pedestrians whose body part is obscured by umbrellas, bags, special clothes, etc., detection may not be accurate & system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle

Difficult to distinguish pedestrians/cows due to low illumination:

If the illumination is low / poor visibility, system may not function as intended. Driver shall be alert and take control of vehicle.

Fast moving pedestrians:

System may not function as intended with fast moving pedestrians due to sensing limitations.

Pedestrians with lower height:

System may not function as intended with pedestrians with lower height

Risk of collision in proximity cut-in:

There is a close-sensing blind spot, and there is a risk of collision at close cut-in of adjacent lane vehicles.

Intersection situation:

The control target of the radar is selected as the control target only for the rear surface of the vehicle driving in the AEBS vehicle driving direction.

Therefore, there is a risk of collision for vehicles moving at right angles to the direction of intersection or for vehicles turning right

The condition is that target is not detected at the road inclination change point:

Due to the vertical angle limit of the radar, it is impossible to detect the front target (vehicle, pedestrian) in uphill and downhill hill.

The situation where the load is protruding from the rear of the vehicle:

When a specific type of load is loaded or a special vehicle, it can collide if it is not selected as the control target due to the sensor detection limit

When target can not be detected due to sensor contamination:

In case of Sensor (Radar, Camera) contamination, blockage can occur and collision of the front preceding vehicle and pedestrians is possible

When driving on a large curve road:

When driving on a large curve road, due to the sensor limit, the front preceding vehicle and the pedestrian can collide.

When it is impossible to obtain the driver's field of vision:

If the driver uses the AEBS in the unconfined (snow, rain, fog, etc.), the sensor limit may cause a collision between the vehicle and pedestrians ahead.

Detection problems due to complicated structures around roads:

If a construction section, railroad track, or other metallic object is on the road (eg, tollgate, subway construction site, tunnel, lane-proximity guard rail, etc.) AEBS/FCW will not work.

Collision Mitigation System does not react for pot-holes:

The Collision mitigation system does not recognize or react to potholes, road irregularities, or small surface hazards.

As a result, the system will not engage in braking or evasive actions for potholes.

Therefore, drivers must remain attentive to road conditions and actively avoid such obstacles to ensure safety.

Collision Mitigation System does not function for Speed Breakers:

The Collision Mitigation System does not activate for speed breakers. Drivers must remain vigilant and manage these obstacles to ensure safety.

Collision Mitigation System may not always function for barricades/cone/barrels:

The Collision Mitigation System may not always activate for barricades, cones, or barrels. Drivers must stay alert and navigate these obstacles to ensure safety.

Collision Mitigation System does not function for oncoming vehicles:

The Collision Mitigation System does not activate for oncoming vehicles. Drivers must remain vigilant and take necessary actions to avoid collisions.

Collision Mitigation System does not function for small animals:

The Collision Mitigation System does not activate for small animals. Drivers must stay alert and take necessary actions to avoid collisions.

8.2.10 Rear Collision Warning

Rear Collision Warning is an Advanced Driver Assistance System (ADAS) feature designed to help prevent rear-end collisions with approaching vehicles. The system continuously monitors the area behind the vehicle and provides timely alerts to the driver in case of a potential collision.

Steps to Enable Rear Collision Warning:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Collision warning / Rear Collision Warning (Enable/Disable)

Whenever the vehicle is restarted, the Rear Collision Warning function automatically retains the last used setting.

System Operation

The Rear Collision Warning function operates only when the following conditions are met:

•

The vehicle must be in forward gear.

•

The vehicle’s speed must be above 60 km/h.

•

The vehicle must be going on a straight road.

When a vehicle is detected in the rear collision zone of the host vehicle, the Rear Collision Warning function activates and provides the following alerts:

•

Visual Warning: A pop-up message is displayed in the Driver Information Display.

•

Audio Warning: An alert chime to notify the driver.

•

Haptic Warning: Steering wheel vibration to enhance driver awareness.

•

Hazard Lamp Indication The hazard lamps blink to signal a potential collision to the rear vehicles.

The Rear Collision Warning function activates upon detecting fast moving closing vehicles within the rear collision zone of the host vehicle.

•

The Rear Collision Warning function does not operate when the vehicle is in park mode or reverse gear.

•

The system is not designed to detect or warn about pedestrians approaching the host vehicle from behind.

RCW System Troubleshooting

If the corner radar malfunction indicator is ON or any of below mentioned messages is displayed in DID, it means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off.

Refer Front/Corner Radar Maintenance section for remedial action.

Limitations

The Rear Collision Warning function is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or partially available under the following conditions. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these limitations could result in serious injury or death:

•

The system may not operate properly in conditions such as snow, rain, or other severe weather events.

•

If any of the rear corner Radars are covered with snow, rain, dirt, or other debris, the system may not function correctly.

•

Driving on steep downhill slopes or roads with sharp curves may hinder the system’s ability to detect vehicles in the rear zone.

•

Interference from other radar sources could disrupt the system's performance.

Additionally, when a trailer is fixed to the vehicle, the Rear Collision Warning function will become unavailable.

8.2.11 Blind Spot Detection (If equipped)

The Blind Spot Detection (BSD) feature enhances driver safety by monitoring the vehicle's blind spots on both sides. When a vehicle enters the blind spot area or a fast-approaching vehicle is detected in adjacent lanes, the system provides visual and audible alerts to warn the driver. This helps prevent potential collisions during lane changes by alerting the driver to unseen vehicles, contributing to safer and more informed driving decisions.

Visual warnings are displayed on the Outside Rearview Mirror (ORVM), Dynamic Visualization screen and VisionX Display.

Driver can turn ON or OFF BSD from the Centre Information Display Drive Assist Settings

Steps to Activate Blind Spot Detection:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Collision Warning / Blind Spot Detection (Warning / OFF)

Blind Spot Detection (BSD) enabling conditions (BSD Warning will illuminate ON if the following conditions are met):

The Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system is set to 'Warning' in the user menu

The Blind spot detection will work for speeds above 20 kmph

For the Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system to activate and provide a warning, the target vehicle's speed must be within a range of 10 kmph to 100 kmph and the vehicle must be in a forward gear position.

When the Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system detects a vehicle in the blind spot zone, it illuminates a telltale indicator in the corresponding side's Outside Rear View Mirror (ORVM). This visual alert in the ORVM helps the driver quickly recognize the presence of a vehicle in the blind spot without taking their eyes off the road, enhancing safety and reducing the risk of lane-change collisions.

If the turn indicator is activated while there is a vehicle detected in the left/right blind zone, the Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system responds with multiple alerts to increase driver awareness:

The blind spot LED on the left/right Outside Rear View Mirror (ORVM) illuminates to signal the presence of a vehicle in the left/right blind spot.

An audible alert is triggered to warn the driver of the potential hazard.

A visual warning appears on the Driver Information Display (DID) to further emphasize the risk.

User selection will be retained across Battery or ignition cycles. This means that any preferences set by the user, such as enabling or disabling the BSD alerts, will persist even after the vehicle is turned off and restarted. The system will automatically restore the last selected settings, ensuring consistency in the driver's chosen configuration without requiring reconfiguration each time the vehicle is used.

Driver Assistance App > Collision Warning > Blind Spot Detection (Warning / OFF)

Left Blind Spot Audible Warning Display	Right Blind Spot Audible Warning Display

Driver can choose to mute the audible warning by following below steps.

Go to DRIVER ASSIST settings.

Select Response

Disable

BSD system considers vehicles, motorcycles and bicycles as blindspot targets.

Blind spot warning will not be provided when your vehicle is faster than the blindspot vehicle by more than 5 kmph

BSD may not provide the warning when there is actually a vehicle in the blindspot and the relative speed between your vehicle and the blindspot vehicle is too high.

Do not completely rely on the system while performing a lane change manoeuvre. Driver is always responsible to check if there is any vehicle in the blindspot before planning to change the lanes

If driver activates the turn signal to change the lane (right or left), and if the BSD is active then it will detect the objects(moving) in the blind spot area of that side and alert the driver.

BSD System Troubleshooting:

If any of below mentioned messages is displayed in the DID means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off.

However message will not be displayed in all situations in which the corner radar sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the bumper in front of each corner radar sensor is always kept clean.

In case of temporarily abnormal conditions due to radar sensor blockage, corner radar malfunction lamp will be ON along with the additional warnings which indicate the exact corner radar sensor which has got blocked.

The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions:

Cause	Action
If the bumper in front of the respective corner radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice,	It is important to clean or clear the bumper area in front of the corner radar
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals	No Action Possible, During heavy precipitation (such as rain, snow, or sleet), the functionality of the Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system’s radar sensors may be temporarily affected.
Swirling water or snow kicked up from the road surface can interfere with the radar signals	No Action Possible, On a very wet or snow-covered road surface, the Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system's radar may experience reduced functionality, as the radar signals can be affected by reflective surfaces like water or snow.
The bumper in front of the radar is clean, but the warning message remains displayed,	If the Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system displays a message indicating an obstruction, even though the radar area has been cleared, you may simply need to drive the vehicle straight above 45 kmph for few minutes for the radar to recalibrate and recognize that it is no longer obstructed.

If the BSD malfunction lamp remains illuminated after performing the above actions and restarting the vehicle, please have the system inspected by an authorized Mahindra dealer for further service.

In the event of a system malfunction caused by a corner radar sensor failure, the corner radar malfunction telltale will remain illuminated. A pop-up message will also appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) stating the specific sensor that has failed. Contact an Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately in this case.

System Limitations

The Blind Spot Detection System is subject to certain limitations and may be unavailable or only partially functional in the following situations.

Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

•

The system may occasionally issue false warnings even when no vehicles are present in the blind spot, particularly in the presence of continuous guardrails, poles, trees, or similar roadside objects.

•

The system may not detect pedestrians or cyclists.

•

Blind-Spot detection may not operate properly in following conditions:

a. When there is inclement weather, such as heavy snow, heavy rain, or similar adverse conditions.

b. Any of the rear corner radar is covered with snow, rain, dirt etc.

c. Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

d. Driving on roads with lanes at different heights, such as underpasses, grade-separated intersections, or other uneven lane surfaces, may impact the functionality of the Blind Spot Detection System.

e. Interference by other radar sources.

•

If the front or rear bumper is damaged, or if there is a full or partial blockage of the rear corner radars, disable the feature and have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible at a Mahindra authorised service centre.

•

The Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system will be disabled when a trailer is connected.

•

The driver should remain in active control of the vehicle/ take action in case the system fails and is responsible for the vehicle. The BDS system is not a replacement for the driver. The driver must remain attentive at all times.

8.2.12 Automatic Emergency Steering (AES)

Automatic Emergency Steering hereafter referred as AES System will prevent collision with pedestrians, two wheelers and cars when there is space to avoid collision within the driving lane.

Steps to Activate AES System:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Collision Warning / Auto Emergency Steering

AES System Operation:

•

AES activates when a Level 1 alert from the Forward Collision Warning system is triggered.

•

AES operates when the vehicle’s speed is between 70 km/h and 90 km/h.

•

AES will cancel if the steering wheel is operated in the opposite direction or if the driver accelerates or brakes

•

AES activates when no driver steering, braking, or acceleration input detected.

•

AES will be cancelled if collisions with other objects on the road are possible.

•

AES will not operate if space to avoid collision in the driving lane is insufficient.

The AES function is disabled when the turn indicators or hazard lights are activated.

The AES/ESA system prioritizes targets for safe maneuvering, including vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists, & motor-bikes in the next lane and avoids intervention if there's a risk of a secondary collision.

AES will work only if there is sufficient lateral space within lane for safe avoidance of the target and the overlap between target and your vehicle is above 25%.

AES System Limitations

•

AES remains inactive unless clear lane markings are detected on both sides of the vehicle.

•

AES will not operate if turn indicators/hazard lamps are activated.

•

AES will cancel if the steering wheel is operated in the opposite direction or if the driver accelerates or brakes

•

AES will be cancelled if collisions with other objects on the road are possible.

•

AES will not operate if space to avoid collision in the driving lane is insufficient.

•

AES will not engage if the road is not straight.

•

AES will not work if trailer is connected

•

All system limitations of Camera and Front/Corner Radar are applicable to AES system's operation.

Emergency Steering Assist (ESA)

ESA function provides additional steering assistance to support the driver's steering input when avoiding a potential collision with an object (Car, pedestrian, motor-cycle, cyclist) ahead.

Steps to activate Emergency Steering Assist

The ESA and AES systems share a common settings menu in the CID.

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Collision Warning / Auto Emergency Steering

ESA System Operation:

•

ESA activates during a Level 1 alert from the Forward Collision Warning system.

•

ESA operates when the vehicle’s speed is between 50 km/h and 90 km/h

•

ESA system operates when the driver initiates a steering correction to avoid collision with object (Car, pedestrian, motor-cycle, cyclist) ahead.

The ESA system will work only if it determines the driver’s intension to avoid the collision by steering for which steering angle speed of above 45 deg/s is required from driver’s side.

ESA System Limitations

•

ESA will not operate if turn indicators or hazard is activated.

•

ESA will cancel if the driver accelerates or brakes

•

ESA will not engage if the road is not straight.

•

ESA will not work if trailer is connected

•

All system limitations of Camera and Front/Corner Radar are applicable to ESA system's operation.

Automatic Emergency Steering (AES)/Emergency Steering Assist (ESA) Warnings

For Automatic Emergency Steering (AES) & Emergency Steering Assist (ESA) systems, the warning pop-up and sound configurations are crucial for ensuring driver awareness and prompt reaction.

•

In the event of an emergency steering intervention to the left, the system will activate a visual warning and an audio alert from the left speakers to notify the driver.

•

If the system initiates a right steering correction, the driver will receive both a visual alert and an audio alert from the right speakers to ensure prompt awareness.

Left

Right

The AES/ESA system is designed to assist drivers, not replace their skill. Always monitor the road and surrounding conditions, maintain active control of the vehicle, and be prepared to intervene if necessary, especially if the system's alerts or actions seems unnecessary. Driver's awareness and judgment is essential for safe driving.

AES/ESA System Troubleshooting

When there is any failure in the AES/ESA system, the below pop-up messages appear on DID screen and AES/ESA indicator illuminate in Amber color. Refer Camera or Front/Corner Radar Maintanance & troubleshooting section for more details.

8.2.13 High Beam Assist

High Beam assist function is intended to reduce the glare produced by the High Beam lamp which in turn aids the drivers of Oncoming vehicles to maneuver safely.

High Beam assist feature automatically turns high beam ON or OFF depending on the vehicle speed, intensity of the light, source of preceding and oncoming vehicles and the surrounding light condition

Steps to Activate HBA System:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / My Vehicle / Exterior/ High Beam Assist/ (Enable Disable)

HBA enabling conditions:

•

High beam Assist is enabled in CID

•

Head Lamp “Auto mode” is selected in the Combination Switch

•

Head Lamp switch should be in “High Beam” position

•

Night condition is detected, and Low beam is already turned ON through the Light Sensor

•

Vehicle speed is above 20 kmph

When HBA feature is activated, “Head Lamp Auto” Telltale will be ON in Driver Information Display (DID).

Once HBA is activated:

HBA feature will Turn OFF High Beam when any of the light sources from oncoming / Preceding vehicle is detected in front of vehicle.

HBA feature will Turn ON High Beam when No light source is detected by the camera from Oncoming/Preceding vehicle or from other light sources(depends on intensity) for few seconds.

High Beam Assist is only intended to assist the driver. The driver is still responsible for controlling the headlights through manual ON/OFF depending on visibility requirements.

The High Beam Assist system changes Low Beam to High Beam after Switch Delay Time (1sec)

HBA System Limitations

The High Beam Assist (HBA) system is subject to certain limitations, which may prevent the high beam from activating or deactivating under specific conditions:

•

When the light from an oncoming or preceding vehicle is not detected due to damaged or obscured lamps.

•

When the headlights or taillights of other vehicles have non-standard color, brightness, or shape.

•

When the lamps of oncoming or preceding vehicles are covered by dust, mud, snow, or water.

•

During poor visibility caused by fog, heavy rain, or snow.

•

When the headlamp alignment is improperly adjusted.

•

While driving on narrow, curved, or rough roads.

•

When driving uphill or downhill.

•

When near bright streetlights, reflective signs, mirrors, or flashing signs.

•

When the vehicle is tilted, such as due to a flat tire or being towed.

•

When a bicycle’s light is weak or far away.

•

When the light from oncoming or preceding vehicles is too small, weak, too low, or too high.

•

When the windshield is dirty, or something blocks the camera sensor.

•

In construction areas with temporary reflectors.

•

Near traffic lights, building signs, lightning rods, reflective center line markers, variable speed signs, or when vehicle lights reflect off buildings or road surfaces.

8.3 Cruise Control

8.3.1 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is designed to detect vehicles ahead, helping to maintain a preset speed and a safe following distance automatically.

The different Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) modes are as below:

•

Speed Control Mode - If no target vehicle is detected, the ACC maintains the speed set by the driver.

•

Follow Mode - When a target vehicle is identified, ACC switches to follow mode and follows the target vehicle.

•

Stop Mode - If the target vehicle stops, ACC switches from follow to stop mode, and the host vehicle also stops. If the target vehicle starts within configured time the host vehicle also starts following the target vehicle.

•

Stop-Hold Mode - After the configured time in Stop mode, ACC switches to stop-hold mode. The driver needs to issue a command (Resume button or accelerator pedal input) to switch back to Follow mode.

ACC Switches

The ACC (Adaptive Cruise Control) switches on the steering wheel has the following functions for operating the ACC system:

These switches enable the driver to control ACC mode, set the cruising speed, resume previous settings, adjust following distance, and cancel the system as needed.

ON/OFF Switch - This switch activates or deactivates the ACC system. When turned on, the system begins monitoring for target vehicles.

Set (Set +/-) - This switch when toggled (upward/downward) sets the current speed as the desired cruising speed. Toggle upwards (set +), or holding it towards upward direction, increases the set speed. Toggle downwards (set -), or holding it towards downward direction, decreases the set speed.

Resume - Press the switch to resume the ACC previously set speed in the same driving cycle.

Do not use RESUME button to Set Speed immediate after ACC ON. Do use only SET+/SET-

Target Distance Level (Time Gap) - This allows the driver to adjust the following distance from the target vehicle from Level 1 – Level 4

In an Adaptive Control (ACC) system, the brake and accelerator pedals influencing the ACC as follows:

Brake Pressed – ACC is Disengaged (Standby Mode): When the driver presses the brake pedal, it overrides the ACC system disengages and goes into standby mode. This allows the driver to have full control over the vehicle's speed and braking. To resume ACC, the driver can use the Resume button on the steering wheel.

Accelerator Pedal Pressed – ACC is Overridden by the Driver: When the driver presses the accelerator pedal, ACC control is overridden and ACC allows the vehicle to accelerate. The ACC system continues to monitor the target vehicle but does not actively control speed until the accelerator pedal is released, at which point it will resume following the target vehicle at the set following distance and speed. However, if the accelerator is pressed for more than 60 seconds it will turn off ACC

This interaction between the brake, accelerator, and ACC system allows for smooth transitions between manual and adaptive control, giving the driver flexibility when needed.

ACC Telltales

Below are the telltales which will be displayed in DID and VisionX related to ACC functions.

Image	Display
	ACC Indicator
	Set Speed
	Time Gap
	Front preceding vehicle Indicator

Front preceding vehicle Indicator shows an icon of a Car always even though the front preceding vehicle may be a car/truck/two wheeler or any other type of vehicle.

ACC Tell Tale Color:

•

Red- Permanent Failure

•

Amber- Temporary Failure

•

Grey- ACC Standby

•

Green- ACC Active

•

Green Blink- ACC Override

Target Color:

•

No display- No target is present

•

Green- Target is present/ Following the target

•

Green Blink- ACC Override

Driver Set Speed Color:

•

White- ACC standby

•

Green- ACC Active

•

Green Blink- ACC Override

Driver Set Distance Level:

•

Grey - ACC Standby

•

White - ACC Active

When ACC is engaged, it allows the vehicle to cruise at the desired ‘set speed’. In traffic conditions if a vehicle is detected in the front of your vehicle, then ACC reduces the vehicle speed to match the front preceding vehicle speed. The distance from the front preceding vehicle is maintained as per the Distance level set by the driver.

•

It is the driver’s responsibility to stay alert and to be in active control of the vehicle at all times.

•

ACC is an aid to assist the driver. It is not a collision avoidance system.

•

ACC is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for observing all traffic and safety rules, including maintenance of safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead

•

Always drive carefully and attentively when using the ACC system. Read and understand the Owner’s Manual thoroughly before using the system.

•

ACC has limited braking capability and may not stop the vehicle in time to avoid a collision, if the front preceding vehicle decelerates quickly or a new vehicle cuts-in front always be prepared to apply brake.

•

Improper use of ACC can lead to a crash or an accident. In the event of such crash / accident, please take the vehicle to the nearest Mahindra authorised service center.

•

Failure to follow the alerts and instructions for proper use of system can result in serious injury.

•

Always observe the posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

•

Use ACC in appropriate roads with proper lane marking and sign boards.

•

When two-wheeler cuts out, ACC may not be able to identify the vehicle in front of two-wheeler.

•

Do not use ACC in busy areas where multiple road users cross the vehicles intended path.

•

ACC may not be able to stop behind stopped vehicles.

•

ACC may not be able to identify a two-wheeler, not to follow two wheeler.

ACC may not detect all types of vehicles and driver has to be vigilant to take over control at all times.

How to turn ACC ON/OFF

Press CRUISE switch to activate ACC feature. This turns ACC to Standby Mode.

Standby Mode

When CRUISE switch is pressed and desired speed by using SET +/– is not set.

During Standby mode

ACC indicator will illuminate in white color.

•

“Adaptive Control Standby” pop-up message will be displayed in cluster.

•

Set speed will be displayed as “—”.

•

The vehicle will not maintain previous set speed or previous time gap to the vehicle ahead.

•

Press the ON/OFF switch again to deactivate ACC feature.

•

If ACC indicator illuminates in red , there could be a problem with ACC system. Visit nearby Mahindra service center.

Pressing the ON/OFF switch when ACC in Standby/Active will deactivate the ACC feature.

How to set Desired Speed

Drive the vehicle to the desired speed (minimum 5 kmph) and Press Set+/Set- switch

•

“Adaptive Control Active” pop-up message will be displayed in the cluster.

•

ACC will maintain the vehicle speed as set by the driver. Once set, it will be confirmed by the ACC indicator. After that no accelerator pedal input from driver need to be given.

ACC indicator will be displayed in green.

•

Set speed will be displayed as set by driver.

•

Time interval bars will be displayed.

ACC has four modes:

1. Speed Control Mode: During Speed Control Mode, time gap indicator will be displayed

ACC operation When No Front Preceding vehicle detected ahead: When there is no front preceding vehicle detected ahead, ACC maintains the speed set by the driver.

2. Follow Control Mode: During Follow Mode, front preceding vehicle Indicator will be displayed if a front preceding vehicle is detected.

ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle detected ahead: When there is a preceding vehicle, ACC tries to maintain a safe gap to the front preceding vehicle by reducing the speed accordingly within comfortable deceleration limits.

ACC operation When Front Preceding Vehicle moved out from its lane: When the front preceding vehicle has moved out from your lane of travel, ACC accelerates and maintains vehicle speed to the set speed.

3. Stop Mode - If the target vehicle stops, ACC switches from follow to stop mode, and the host vehicle also stops. If the target vehicle starts within configured time the host vehicle also starts following the target vehicle.

4. Stop-Hold Mode - After the configured time in Stop mode, ACC switches to stop-hold mode. The driver needs to issue a command (Resume button or accelerator pedal input) to switch back to Follow mode.

Whenever driver steers and system find a new target ie., front preceding vehicle, ACC takes time to pick the new target and react.

Whenever preceding vehicle cuts out and system finds a new target, ACC takes time to pick the new target and react.

•

If Set+/Set- switch is pressed when vehicle speed is below 5 kmph then ACC Set Speed will be initialized to 5 kmph.

•

When there is a front preceding vehicle, user can set desired speed by pressing SET+/- switch below 5 kmph as there is no minimum desired speed requirement

•

When front preceding vehicle and your vehicle are in stopped condition, apply brake and press SET+/SET-. Note that ACC will remain in standstill until the front preceding vehicle moves.

When the SET +/SET– switch is pressed under the following conditions, ACC cannot be activated. Visual and audio alert will be provided to driver to inform the same.

Condition	Alert
When traveling below 5 kmph and a vehicle ahead is not Detected
When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) Position When the brakes are operated by the driver
When braking system unavailable
When driving above maximum ACC operational speed limit
When Collision Mitigation System is unavailable
When driver seat belt is not buckled
When front preceding vehicle is very close to host vehicle
When park brake is engaged
When driver /co driver door is open
When vehicle is driven in Terrain mode
When ESC is disabled
ACC interacts with other systems, such as braking, steering, ACC Switch etc. If any of these systems are not functioning properly, ACC cannot be activated.

How to increase Set Speed

Use one of the following methods to increase set speed:

•

Press and quickly release the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 1 kmph

•

Press and hold the SET+ switch to increase the set speed by 10 kmph. The set speed will be increased to the next nearest multiple of 10. Continuous hold / stuck of SET +/- button for 60 sec will turn OFF ACC.

•

Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.

How to decrease Set Speed

Use one of the following methods to decrease set speed:

•

Press and quickly release the SET- switch to decrease the set speed by 1 kmph

•

Press and hold the SET- switch to decrease the set speed.by 10 kmph. The set speed will be decreased to the next nearest multiple of 10. Continuous hold / stuck of SET +/- button for 60 sec will turn OFF ACC.

•

Release the switch when the desired set speed reached.

How to resume ACC to last set speed value

Press the RESUME switch

ACC will resume back to the last set speed for the current driving cycle, provided the conditions to engage ACC are satisfied.

How to change the Time Gap Level to the front preceding vehicle

Each time the distance level switch is pressed, the time gap will keep rolling between the time gap levels as per the below sequence

Time Gap Level 4->Time Gap Level 3 -> Time Gap Level 2->

Time Gap Level 1-> Time Gap Level 4

•

The set time gap value of the current ignition/driving cycle will be used for the next ignition/driving cycle.

•

When the system is used for the first time , the time gap value is set to the maximum value (Level 4).

How To Adjust ACC SENSITIVITY

The sensitivity of vehicle acceleration/deceleration can be adjusted vehicle drive mode /driving style which can be selected from user settings menu as shown below.

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Speed control

User Settings

ACC allows user to change the Acceleration & Response time from the settings

User can also link Acceleration & Response time to Vehicle drive modes - Range, Everyday & Race

ACC STOP & GO

ACC operation When front preceding vehicle is detected

When a front preceding vehicle is detected, the front preceding vehicle indicator along with time interval bars will be displayed in DID and VisionX

In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, if the front preceding vehicle comes to stop, ACC also decelerates your vehicle to bring it to stop within the limitations of the system. Your vehicle movement will resume automatically if the front preceding vehicle starts within 3 seconds.

If it takes more than 3 seconds for the front preceding vehicle to begin moving again, ACC will be set to Standby and the stop-hold mode will activate. A pop-up alert message “Adaptive Cruise Control available Press Resume - Hold - Press Resume Switch or Pedal to Accelerate” will be displayed for driver to resume.

ACC can be engaged by any of the following methods when in stop-hold mode if front preceding vehicle is present at distance more than 2 meters and less than 40 meters:

Press RESUME button

Slightly tap the accelerator pedal

Increase the speed above 5 kmph and press the RESUME button

When in ACC stopped condition, if driver is trying to unbuckle seat belt/open doors etc, then ACC may get disengaged and vehicle may crawl. Driver has to apply brake and control the vehicle.

ACC decelerates when there is too much of lateral acceleration due to maneuvering curves.

When following the front preceding vehicle, if the front preceding vehicle disappears due to a cut-out maneuver, a pop-up message will be displayed as “Object Disappeared Pay Attention”

Please pay attention to the driving operation to maintain control of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set speed.

If ACC changes targets from a moving front preceding vehicle to a stationary front preceding vehicle at speeds above 30 kmph, the system may not react to the stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the previously set speed. The driver must actively apply the brake to slow/stop the vehicle.

ACC operation when Accelerator pedal is pressed

Even when ACC is engaged, driver can press the accelerator pedal if he wishes to accelerate the vehicle rapidly. When driver presses accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed.

•

ACC is overridden hence Set Speed and Distance is not followed

•

ACC override pop-up will be displayed.

•

Set speed display will blink.

•

Set distance display will blink.

•

The front preceding vehicle indicator will turn off when the area ahead of the vehicle is open.

When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will exit from the override mode and ACC operation will be resumed

Automatic cancellation of ACC

Under the following conditions ACC control will be cancelled automatically with an audio alert.

•

When the shift lever is not in D (Drive) position.

•

When the parking brake is applied

•

When Brake pedal is pressed.

•

When ESC is turned off

•

When the radar signal is temporarily interrupted.

•

When radar sensor area of the front bumper covered with dirt or is obstructed in case the radar sensor is affected by vibration or collision, please contact Mahindra authorised dealer or service provider.

•

When accelerator pedal is depressed for more than 60 seconds continuously.

•

When collision warning is in action.

•

When ESP operates

•

When driver door is open

•

When vehicle speed exceeds maximum ACC operating speed.

•

When driver seat belt is unbuckled

•

When ACC is engaged, and your vehicle stopped, and after 3 seconds the front preceding vehicle moves and disappears and when the driver tries to resume ACC without the front preceding vehicle.

•

When Auto Park is engaged

•

When drive mode is changed to Terrain mode

•

When driver tries to resume ACC when front preceding vehicle (moving/stopped) is not in detection range.

•

When Trailer is connected

In above scenarios, the driver may be alerted by an audio alert and a message in the DID that ACC function is released/disengaged.

The driver is responsible for adapting to vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle ahead.

ACC disengages whenever there is an ESP intervention. For example-: pot holes on a bumpy road

In some situations where ACC braking is not enough to follow the front preceding vehicle, an audio alert along with pop-up message will be given in the DID "Collision Possible Take Control".

The driver has to apply brake to keep a safe distance.

In case of temporary abnormal conditions, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in Yellow color and ACC function will be disabled temporarily by showing up a pop-up

The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions

Causes	Action
The bumper in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice.	Clean/Clear the bumper in front of the radar.
Rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.	No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar. Do not use ACC during rain or snow.
Clogged water or snow from the surface of the road may interface with the radar signals.	No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar. Do not use ACC during these situations.
The bumper area in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display.	Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed.
External modification of the radar area where metal part blocks the radar area for longer duration	Do not use ACC with such external modifications in front of Radar.

In case of permanent failure, ACC Status telltale will illuminate in red color also and ACC function will be disabled permanently by showing any of the below pop ups

In both cases, Visit Mahindra Authorised Dealer immediately.

In case of collision in front bumper, the radar position may change which results in degraded ACC performance. Visit nearest service center for radar calibration.

ACC System Limitations

•

Adaptive Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions

•

Adaptive Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver shall always remain in active control of the vehicle and is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect front preceding vehicle

•

ACC may not assist in close cut-in scenarios

•

Adaptive Control may not react to people, cyclists or animals. It also may not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects

•

In case of a hit in bumper / full or partial blockage to RADAR, turn off ACC and get the vehicle serviced as early as possible at a Mahindra authorised service center

•

ACC will be disabled when trailer is connected to the rear of the vehicle

•

ACC does not slow down for crossing vehicles

When using a trailer, make sure the trailer electrical connector is connected to the vehicle.

Avoid using ACC under the following conditions

•

On roads where the traffic is heavy or there are sharp curves

•

On slippery road surfaces

•

During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) and poor visibility.

•

When rain drops, snow or dirt stick on to the bumper around the sensor

•

On steep downhill roads (the vehicle may go beyond the set speed and in trying to maintain set speed, may result in overheating the brakes)

•

On repeated uphill and downhill roads

•

When traffic conditions make it difficult to keep a proper distance between vehicles because of frequent acceleration or deceleration

•

Interference by other radar sources installed in nearby protected areas like military, airports etc.

•

Do not use Adaptive Control in demanding driving conditions, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on or off ramps.

•

Do not rely on ACC for slowing down to stationary or slow-moving vehicles while approaching toll gate.

ACC Limitation Scenarios

ACC may not function in below scenarios, driver shall take active control of the vehicle without relying on ACC..

•

Close cut-in situation

Sudden entry of other road vehicle in to host vehicle's lane may not be detected.

•

Situation of stopped vehicles

Sudden vicinity of stationary object in host vehicle's lane may not be detected.

When the preceding vehicle that follows is cutting out, it detects the preceding vehicle (Vehicle-B) as a new preceding vehicle because of an irregular radar reflection occurred in particular.

As Vehicle-B stops, the host vehicle stops on Vehicle-B.

At this time, since there is no collision with Vehicle-A, the driver may misunderstand that it is under normal control of Vehicle-A.
When Vehicle-B starts, host vehicle may start without considering the new stationary Vehicle-A because of irregular radar reflection.

•

Curve entry / exit situation

In the curve entry / exit situation, based on the curvature of road on which the host vehicle is moving differs from the curvature of the predicted road, so the adjacent lane can be selected as the control target and the preceding vehicle in the host lane may be missed

•

Curves with larger curvature

If the radius of curvature is very small, an inadequate or excessive acceleration/ deceleration may occur due to the limitation

•

Poor visibility: In case of poor visibility, Driver must take the control of vehicle

•

When a preceding vehicle enters an intersection

In an road intersection, target preceding vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.

•

When the road gradient changes

In case of road gradient variation, preceding target vehicle may be lost and ACC may not function as intended. Driver must take the control of vehicle.

•

Sensor blockage

Any blockage to sensors, detection will degrade and Drive Assist features may not function as intended

•

Long cargo loading vehicle

If the height of the preceding target vehicle is very high, the sensor may not detect it and Drive Assist functionality may vary. Driver should take control of vehicle.

•

Inability to recognize pedestrians

In case of Stop & Go situation, the host vehicle may not detect pedestrian. Driver should take control of vehicle.

•

Excessive braking of the preceding vehicle

ACC might not slow down your vehicle sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC only has only 30% of total brake force available in vehicle

If the preceding vehicle brakes beyond the ACC maximum deceleration limit, AEBS may engage. However, driver shall be alert and take control vehicle.

•

Detection performance deterioration due to road side structures

If the front radar is exposed to the surrounding road structures (steel laminates, tunnels, construction sections, etc.) that may affect the detection performance, the front preceding vehicle may not be detected normally.

Any metal road structures / bridges, tunnels or toll plazas may vary the system functionality, Driver shall be alert and take control of the vehicle.

•

False deceleration or no deceleration

If radar misaligned vertically or horizontally, ACC may produce frequent false deceleration or no deceleration for front preceding vehicle. Visit nearest service center for radar alignment

•

ACC may not slowdown the vehicle for pot-holes/Speed breakers

•

ACC may not slow down for cyclists

•

ACC may not slow down sufficiently for road curves

•

ACC may not slow down for barriers/blockades

•

ACC does not slowdown for oncoming/reversing front vehicles

•

ACC does not slow down for crossing or merging vehicles at angles more than 30 degree

ACC might not slow down your vehicle sufficiently if target starts to decelerate too fast as ACC has only 30% of total brakeforce available in vehicle

•

ACC may not sufficiently slowdown for animals

•

Adaptive Control may not react to special/modified vehicles such as Harvester, Tractor Trailor, Motorized Ice Cream Cart, construction vehicle, animals etc.

•

ACC may not reliably follow bicycle

•

ACC may not completely slow down for stationary vehicle

•

If a very slow-moving target cutting in between your vehicle and stationary target then there is a chance that ACC system does not pick-up the slow moving target since ACC is not able to discriminate between slow moving target and stationary target.

•

If a target in front takes a sharp turn and goes out of Field of view, then your vehicle can start to accelerate fast.

•

ACC might not pick-up target at sharp curve

•

ACC might not detect a target vehicle and slow down when driving along a sharp curve.

•

ACC may not completely slow down for stationary vehicle while following a two wheeler

•

When your vehicle follows two wheeler and two wheeler overtakes stationary target ahead, your vehicle may not slow down due to stationary target detection limitation.

•

Do not use ACC with an offset to the target vehicle.

•

Do not use ACC to follow motorbikes where there is no space for your vehicle to navigate.

•

Do not use ACC while there are two wheelers overtaking your vehicle while in Stop & Go mode

8.4 Speed Limit

8.4.1 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

Traffic Sign Recognition feature assists the driver by displaying speed limit signs and general traffic signs in the DID display.

TSR system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera sensor. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle as per the road regulations.

Traffic sign recognition can detect standard speed limit signs & traffic signs which are within the camera's visual field.

TSR function can detect only standard traffic signs. Any deviation from standard sign board could lead to misdetection or wrong detection by camera sensor.

Steps to Activate TSR System

TSR function can be turned ON/OFF through Center Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer/ Vehicle apps/Driver Assist/ Assistants/Speed Limit/ Traffic sign recognition

Traffic sign display in CID

Speed limit signs

When the system recognizes a speed limit sign, it displays on DID. After a pre-defined time, the display will be greyed out to indicate that the sign is of past value.

Speed limit sign will be displayed in right side of Driver information display.

If no new Speed Limit Sign detected for some time, the icon changes to 'No Recognition’ as shown in the image.

Supplementary traffic signs:

Once camera detects below listed signs, it will be displayed in left hand side of DID. After a pre-defined time, supplementary sign will be turned off.

Pedestrian Crossing		Give Way
Speed bump ahead		Men at Work
Stop Sign		Narrow Bridge ahead
No Entry		Slippery road
One Way		Overtake Not Allowed
No Parking		Overtake Allowed
School Zone

Accurate detection of above supplementary sign is subject to camera’s ability to detect and classify the signs which could get affected by multiple internal and external factors.

Traffic Sign Recognition System Limitations

The Traffic Sign Recognition is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

•

The traffic sign is located on a sharp curve.

•

The traffic sign is improperly positioned (i.e. being turned over, blocked by an object, or damaged).

•

Another vehicle blocks the traffic sign.

•

The LED light of the traffic sign is broken.

•

The visibility is poor due to heavy rain, snow, fog or poor light around the sign.

•

The traffic sign does not conform to the standards.

•

The traffic sign cannot be distinguished due to shadow caused by overpass or trees.

•

There is bright light around the traffic sign.

•

The vehicle speed is too low or too high.

•

There is dirt, ice or frost on the front windshield, where the camera is installed.

•

The camera lens is blocked by an object, such as sticker, paper, or fallen leaf.

•

Host vehicle driven right after preceding vehicle.

•

The bus or truck, on which the speed sticker is attached, passes by your vehicle.

–

TSR function may not detect electronic sign boards.

–

TSR function may not detect conditional sign boards.

–

TSR function may not detect rectangular sign boards

8.4.2 Speed Limit Assist (SLA)

SLA allows the user to adjust the ACC set speed based on the speed indicated by traffic signs.

If SLA is active and there is a difference between the set speed and the speed sign, an up or down arrow will be displayed in DID.

When the up arrow is displayed, the user can press the SET + button, and when the down arrow is displayed SET – button, the user can press the SET - button to adjust the ACC set speed.

When the opposite button is pressed, ACC will only increase or decrease the SET speed by 1 Kmph

How to Turn ON/OFF SLA System:

SLA can work when Adaptive Control is ON, Speed limit assist is set to Warning or Assist mode and Traffic Sign Recognition is enabled under Drive assist settings. To enable SLA, go to Vehicle apps/ Driver Assist /Speed Limit / Speed Limit. SLA can work in two modes :

Warning Mode :

If the vehicle's actual speed exceeds the detected speed limit sign, a visual warning is triggered by blinking ACC set speed display in the DID and VisionX to select this mode.

Assist Mode :

If the vehicle's actual speed is above or below the set tolerance based on speed limit sign, ACC can adjust the set speed once driver confirms by pressing Set +/Set - buttons.

Driver can set a speed limit tolerance between -10 kmph and +10 kmph to adjust the vehicle's speed relative to the speed limit sign. For example, if TSR displays 40 kmph and the tolerance is set to -10, then 30 kmph will be set as ACC Set speed. For compliance with speed limits, it is recommended to use a tolerance setting of 0, -5, or -10 kmph.

To adjust the tolerance settings, Go to Vehicle apps>> Driver Assist > Speed Limit > Speed Limit tolerance

SLA works only if ACC has a set speed and there is no target in front. If there is target in front it will follow the target.

SLA works for speed limit signs above 30 kmph

SLA system is limited to the detection capabilities of Camera sensor. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle as per the road regulations and shall remain in active control of the vehicle. SLA can detect standard speed limit signs that are within the camera sensor field of view.

8.5 Lane Assist

8.5.1 Lane Centering Function (LCF)

Lane centering function is intended to help the driver to keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane's side marker lines by providing the required steering assist.

LCF can be turned ON by pressing the lateral control button on the right-hand side of the steering wheel switch bank.

When LCF is ON, the LCF telltale will be displayed in the DID.

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury or death.

Lane centering function is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.

Lane centering function is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive driver.

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time. The driver is always responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic situations.

Lane centering function must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system

System Operation

•

Lane Centering can operate at the host vehicle’s speed from 0 kmph to 180 kmph.

•

Lane centering can be enabled only if driver wears seat belt and all doors are closed.

•

If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, Lane centering function will be in STANDBY mode and Lane centering function indicator light will illuminate in white.

•

If both lane markers are detected and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, system performs lane centering and indicator light will illuminate in green.

•

When system performs lane centering, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green.

If system was assisting and changing to Standby due to any reasons, then Lane Centering Function will stop providing assist and indicator light will blink in green for few seconds.

Green lane marking will appear in drive assist screen of the DID, when Lane centering function is in active state.

If lane centering was active and road is straight, Lane centering function may be provided for some more time even though lane markings are not available.

Lane centering will not work if turn indicators or hazard switch is activated

Lane centering may not work on too narrow or very wide roads.

Lane centering function may not keep the vehicle centered in the lane in highly curved roads and in medium curved roads at higher speeds.

Sometimes at roads where there is a merge/split or when the vehicle approaches a lane marked road or leaves a lane marked road, Lane centering function may pull the vehicle to either of the sides. The driver is always expected to be available to take over control in such extreme situations.

Hands-off Warning for Lane Centering Function

When driver does not hold the steering wheel with adequate torque, Lane Centering Function triggers hands off warning and it is continued until the driver holds back the steering wheel.

The first-stage warning is triggered a few seconds after hands-off is detected.

The second-stage warning, accompanied by an audio alert, will be activated if the driver continues not to hold the steering wheel after the first-stage warning.

The third-stage warning, accompanied by an audio alert, is activated if the driver continues to neglect holding the steering wheel after the second-stage warning.

•

Do not wait for the system to provide Visual/audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. The driver is always responsible for having control of the vehicle.

•

In some rare situations when the system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.

The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and must intervene, if necessary, even if Lane centering function is being used.

The system will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. The system may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and bringing the vehicle back to lane

Lane centering function may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. A driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and should provide additional torque to override Lane centering function in such situations.

There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by Lane Centering Function may not be sufficient to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. Users must take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crashes.

Lane centering function Automatic Cancellation

Under the following conditions LCF will get automatically cancelled

•

The maximum speed that LCF supports is exceeded

•

When driver shifts out of Drive gear

•

An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs

•

When turn indicator or hazard is activated

•

When interface systems are not available

•

When driver steers manually

•

When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable for Lane centering Operation

•

When any of the higher priority features such as Auto Park Assist, Auto Forward Assist, Auto Reverse Assist Automatic Emergency Steering or Emergency Lane Keep Assist gets activated

When there is any failure in the system, the below pop-up messages appear on DID screen and Lane centering function indicator illuminate in Amber color. Refer Camera Maintenance & Troubleshooting section for more details.

Lane Centering function Limitations

Lane centering function is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

•

When there is poor visibility due to rain, snow, fog etc or when the camera sensor is obstructed, covered or damaged

•

When driving on hills.

•

When the road has sharp curves or is excessively rough.

•

When bright light (such as direct sunlight/high beam from oncoming vehicles) interferes with the camera's view.

•

When driving on winding or uneven roads.

•

When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.

•

When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.

•

When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

•

On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; nonstandard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

•

On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

•

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

•

When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.

•

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

•

Lane centering function will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.

•

Lane centering function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white or yellow on both sides of the road.

•

When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Lane centering function cannot do lane centering.

•

When lane markings are available on only one side or not available at all.

Lane centering function can activate Lane centering from deactivated state only if both lanes available on the road. Lane centering function cannot activate Lane centering from deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides.

8.5.2 Smart Pilot Assist System

Smart Pilot Assist system is intended to help the driver to keep the vehicle in center of a traffic lane's side marker lines by providing steering assist as well as maintaining a set time gap with front vehicle.

Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of system could result in serious injury or death.

•

Smart Pilot Assist System is not a self-driving system. Within the limits of its capabilities, as described in this manual, it helps the driver with certain driving activities.

•

Smart Pilot Assist system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to correct careless, inattentive of driver.

•

Always observe posted speed limits and do not set the speed over them.

•

Driver must always stay vigilant to take control of the vehicle throughout the drive

•

Always keep your hands on the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time and remain in active control of the vehicle. The driver is always responsible for staying in a lane and for assessing traffic situations.

•

Smart Pilot Assist must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system.

How to activate Smart Pilot Assist

Smart Pilot Assist will activate when Adaptive Control & Lane Centering Function are turned ON individually by the driver.

System Operation

Smart Pilot Assist system is combination of Adaptive Control and Lane Centering.

If speed/road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, Smart Pilot Assist will be in STANDBY mode and Smart Pilot Assist telltale will illuminate in white.

If both lanes are detected and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, system performs lane centering and Smart Pilot Assist telltale will illuminate in green.

When Smart Pilot Assist is activated, it will also provide gentle steering corrections to offset and move away from close vehicles in the adjacent lanes

The vehicle will only offset on straight roads when both the lane markings are clear, and vehicle speed is greater than 40 kmph.

When Smart Pilot system provide steering assist, steering wheel telltale will illuminate in green in the driver information display.

If system was assisting and transiting to Standby due to any reasons, then Smart Pilot Assist will stop providing assist and indicator light will blink for few seconds

If a slower moving vehicle is detected ahead during smart pilot, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front as per the set time gap.

Always use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. System will be deactivated/off when ACC system or Lane Centering is turned off or when third stage hands-off warning displays.
When ACC is disengaged by pressing brake pedal, Smart Pilot Assist also gets into standby.

If lane centering was active and road is straight, Smart Pilot Assist may be provided for some more time even though lane markings are not available.

Hands-off Detection & Warning : When driver does not hold the steering wheel with adequate force, Smart Pilot Assist triggers hands off warning and it is continued until the driver holds back the steering wheel.

First stage warning will be provided immediately once hands off is detected
Second stage warning with audio alert will be provided if driver is not holding the steering wheel even after the first stage warning.
Third stage warning with audio alert will be provided when driver does not hold the steering wheel even after second stage warning. Here after Lane Centering will go to Standby.

The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and must intervene if necessary, even if Smart Pilot Assist is being used.

The ADAS functionality may be reduced or impaired in adverse weather conditions such as heavy rain or fog). Detection capabilities may also be affected by dirty, obstructed, or damaged sensors or cameras.

Objects outside the camera or sensor field of view, such as small obstacles, pedestrians, or fast-moving vehicles, may not always be detected by the ADAS system.

Sudden road condition changes (construction zones, potholes, uneven surfaces) may not be accurately recognized by the system, requiring driver intervention

Due to the limitations of the camera and radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in your vehicle suddenly or not at all.

System will provide only a mild steering torque within the operating limits. This torque may not be sufficient during sharper curves. System may stop providing assist if it determines the torque provided is not sufficient to pull back to the lane. Driver is always responsible to steer the vehicle and bring vehicle back to lane.

•

Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.

•

In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.

Smart Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's speed and the brakes. Please be aware that there may be a faint sound from the brakes when the system is using them.

Smart Pilot Assist may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override Smart Pilot Assist in such situations.

There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by Smart Pilot Assist system may not be sufficient to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User has to take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.

Smart Pilot Assist Automatic Cancellation

Smart Pilot Assist cancels and goes to standby when:

•

ACC system cancels.

•

When lane markings are not available on the road.

•

The maximum speed that Smart Pilot Assist supports is exceeded.

•

When driver shifts out of Drive gear.

•

An Automatic Emergency Braking event occurs.

•

When turn indicator or hazard is activated.

•

When interface systems are not available.

•

When driver steers manually.

•

When vehicle dynamics/road conditions are not suitable for Smart Pilot Assist Operation.

When Smart Pilot Assist cancels, the Smart Pilot Assist indicator changes to White color to indicate that system is no longer active.

When there is any failure in the system , below pop-up message appears on DID screen and Smart Pilot Assist indicator illuminate in Amber color. Refer Camera Maintanence & Troubleshooting or Front / Corner Radar Maintanence & Troubleshooting section for more details. Do not use the system in case of failure. Get the vehicle immediately inspected at a Mahindra authorised service centre. Continuing the use of the system upon failure could lead to a collision or severe injuries

Smart Pilot Assist System Limitations

Smart Pilot Assist is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

All the limitations of ACC & LCF also apply for Smart Pilot Assist.

•

Smart Pilot Assist is unable to accurately determine lane markings due to poor visibility (rain, snow, fog, etc.), or an obstructed, covered, or damaged camera or sensor.

•

When driving on hills.

•

The road has sharp curves or is excessively rough.

•

Bright light (such as direct sunlight) is interfering with the camera's view.

•

The sensors are affected by other electrical equipment or devices that generate ultrasonic waves.

•

When driving on winding or uneven roads.

•

When there is a lane closure due to road repairs.

•

When driving in a makeshift or temporary lane.

•

When driving on roads where the lane width is too narrow.

•

On roads where there are multiple parallel lane markers; lane markers that are faded or not painted clearly; non-standard lane markers; or lane markers covered with water, dirt, snow, etc.

•

On roads where the discontinued lane markers are still detectable.

•

On roads where the traveling lane merges or separates.

•

When the vehicle’s traveling direction does not align with the lane marker.

•

When the headlights are not bright due to dirt on the lens or if the aiming is not adjusted properly.

•

Smart Pilot Assist function will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.

•

Smart Pilot Assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white or yellow on both the sides of the road.

•

When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Smart Pilot Assist function cannot do lane centering.

•

When lane markings are available on only one side or not available at all, Smart Pilot Assist will not function

Smart Pilot Assist system can activate Lane centering from deactivated state only if lanes are available on both sides. Smart Pilot Assist cannot activate Lane centering from deactivated state if lanes are not available on both sides or if lane is available only on one side.

– When the visibility of lane is blocked by a vehicle in front, Smart Pilot Assist cannot do lane centering

8.5.3 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Keep Assist (LKA)

The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system provides visual, audio and haptic alerts to the driver once the system detects that the vehicle is crossing the lane boundary unintentionally which is determined based on whether the turn signal towards the direction of departure is turned ON or not.

The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) system provides corrective steering to prevent the vehicle from departing the lane if the system judges that the departure is unintentional from driver's side.

•

The user can choose to have either Warning or Assist feature.

•

Driver can choose to mute the audible warning by following below steps

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps /Drive Assist / Response/ Advance Warning Volume

It is important to know that the Lane keep Assist system shall work only if the lane markings on the road are clearly visible.

The Lane Keep Assist function is meant to provide assist to the driver and cannot take full control of the steering system.

It is driver’s responsibility to stay alert and be in active control of the vehicle throughout the drive.

Steps to Enable Lane Keep Assist System

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Lane Assist /Lane Keeping Assist

Select Assist to enable both Lane Keep Assist as well as Lane Departure Warning

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) automatically provides steering assistance when it detects unintentional lane departure, helping to keep the vehicle within its lane and prevent unintended lane changes.

Select Warning to enable Lane Departure Warning alone.

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) provides an audible alert and steering wheel vibration when it detects unintentional lane departure. The driver remains responsible for steering the vehicle back into the lane.

Select OFF to disable both Lane departure warning and Lane keep assist

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) will turn off and no warning or assistance will be provided. Telltale will illuminate on the DID.

When Lane Keep Assist is disabled, LKAS OFF indicator will be displayed in DID

System Operation

When the system can detect the lanes and LDW/LKA feature is active the lane marking in DID will be highlighted in green.

When system cannot detect lanes or if system is unavailable due to speed being less than 60 kmph, the marker lines will be gray or white respectively.

LDW Operation in "Warning " mode

If both side lanes are not detected or the speed or road conditions are not satisfied, LDW feature will be in STANDBY mode and LDW indicator light will illuminate in white.

If any of the lane markers are detected and vehicle speed is above 60 kmph and all the other road parameter values are satisfied, LDW feature is ready for operation and LDW indicator light will illuminate in green.

When vehicle approaches either the left or the right lane boundary, the LDW indicator on the DID will blink and lane marking color of respective side will change to orange. Haptic and audio alert will also be provided to warn the driver about lane departure.

The warning will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle returns back to original lane.

Lane Departure Warning will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn signal or hazard switch is turned ON

Lane departure warning shall be resumed in approximately 4 seconds after turning OFF the turn signal.

Lane Departure Warning may be provided for road edges or road marks which looks like lane boundaries.

The maximum warning time is limited to 2.2 sec. To provide re-warning, vehicle should have been out of warning region atleast once. i.e. Vehicle has to be in or near to center of the lane.

LKA Operation in "Assist" mode

If both side lanes are not detected or the speed /road/vehicle dynamic conditions are not satisfied, LKA feature will be in STANDBY mode and LKA indicator light will illuminate in white.

If both lane markers are detected, vehicle speed is above 60 kmph and all the road and vehicle related activation conditions are satisfied, LKA system is ready to provide assist and LKA indicator light will illuminate in green.

When the system detects an unintentional departure of the vehicle from its lane, a slight counter steering torque is provided to prevent the departure and the driver is notified by blinking the LKA indicator on the DID in green color. Also visual and audible alerts are provided if vehicle is about to cross the lane boundary.

The warning and assist will be stopped either when vehicle changes the lane completely or if the vehicle is returned back to original lane

When LKA system provides steering assist, steering wheel indicator will illuminate in green in DID and VisionX.

•

Lane Keep Assist will not be provided or stopped if already being provided, if in case either turn indicator signal or hazard switch is turned ON.

•

Lane Keep Assist shall be resumed again only once vehicle has returned back to lane and 4 seconds is completed after turning OFF the turn indicator signal.

•

LKA may be provided for road markings if those are looking for like lane boundaries. LKA may be provided for road edges/vertical road edges (cones/curbs/medians/guard rails) if the system detects them accurately, but not always guaranteed.

•

LKA will not be provided if the vehicle approaches the lane boundary with a higher heading angle.

•

LKA won’t be provided in the types of roads if road edge/vertical road edge is present on one side and neither road edge/vertical road edge nor lane marking is present on the other side.

•

The audible alert can be disabled through settings in the cluster if the driver wishes to do so.

•

LKA and LDW shall be activated above 60 kmph and gets deactivated below 55 kmph.

•

If the vehicle dynamics conditions are not safe for the operation of LKA, then LKA may not be provided at all or may get cancelled if it is already being provided.

•

Similarly, when Left turn /Right turn/Hazard is activated LKA will not be provided or will be cancelled if already being provided.

•

The Lane Keep Assist torque will be adjusted according to the driver applied torque to reduce discomfort and to provide precedence to driver control.

•

If the driver intentionally tries to cross the lane boundary by applying more torque, then assist will be cancelled. In such conditions warning alone will be provided once the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.

•

If the driver is constantly holding the steering wheel very lightly while the LKA intervention is being provided, system may assume that the driver is not attentive enough and will provide visual alert to the driver as in image below:

•

If the driver continues to hold the steering wheel lightly for a next intervention occurring within 3 minutes, then in addition to the visual alert, audio alert will also be provided until the system makes sure that driver is in full control.

•

If lane marking is suddenly not available or if lane widens suddenly , then for a short duration virtual lanes may get created and assist/warning may be provided once the vehicle approaches/crosses the virtual lane boundary .

•

The preference for steering control and alerts will be given to Smart Pilot Assist over Lane Keep Assist if Smart Pilot Assist is equipped and enabled by driver. Please go through Smart Pilot chapter for more details.

•

Do not wait for system to provide Visual /audio alerts to hold the steering wheel. Driver is always responsible to have control of the vehicle.

•

In some rare situations when system is unable to do proper judgement, system may generate visual / audio alerts even when the driver holds the steering wheel as a precautionary measure.

•

LKA/LDW will not be provided for parked vehicles, barricades and barrels on the side of road.

If system malfunctions in Warning mode, LDW indicator light will illuminate in Amber color. Please refer Camera Maintenance and Trouble shooting section for rectification method.

In case of system malfunctions, do not attempt repair/ replacement on your own. Please get the vehicle inspected from a Mahindra authorised service provider.

If in system malfunctions in Assist mode, LKA indicator light will illuminate in Amber color. Please refer Camera Maintenance and Trouble shooting section for rectification method.

LKA may not detect obstacles at the side of the vehicle and may try to pull back the vehicle laterally to the center of lane even though another vehicle may be occupying the lane at the side. This could lead to a possible collision. Driver should always be in control of the steering wheel and shall provide additional torque to override LKA in such situations.

There could be vertical structures like curbs, medians etc. at the end of lane marking and assist provided by LKA system may not be sufficient to pull back the vehicle before the vehicle leaves the lane. User must take control of steering always and provide necessary steering to avoid lane deviations or crash.

Lane Keep Assist Sensitivity

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) Sensitivity refers to the intensity of lane assist torque experienced by the driver in the event of lane departure.

LKA sensitivity can be adjusted via App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Lane Assist /Lane Keeping Assist sensitivity

The LKA options for the levels of sensitivity include the following:

Low Sensitivity:

Minimal assist torque is provided by the system when there is a lane departure, where driver can easily override the system with minimal effort, allowing greater control flexibility. This is ideal for drivers who prefer subtle guidance and minimal intervention.

Medium Sensitivity:

Balanced level of assist torque is provided by the system when there is a lane departure, where driver can override the system with moderate effort. This is ideal for drivers who prefer to have a balance between system provided assist and manual control.

High Sensitivity:

Higher level of assist torque is provided by the system when there is a lane departure, where driver override also happens with slightly higher effort.

Lane Keep Assist System Limitations

LKA and LDW System is intended to assist the driver and cannot function as intended in all kinds of driving, weather, traffic and road conditions as mentioned below.

•

Road under construction

•

Reduced visibility due to bad weather on account of rain, fog, snow etc

•

Roads with indistinct/faded lane markings

•

Road sections with sharp curves

•

Narrow roads

•

High speed driving especially in sharp curves

•

Road sections where there are turn lanes or when the original lane merges or separates

•

Passing through tunnels when brightness changes suddenly.

•

Horizontal or vertical slope

•

Preceding vehicle obstructing lane visibility

•

Improper headlight aiming/headlight covered with dirt

•

Any other environmental conditions affecting camera vision

•

Poor visibility due to sun glare or blockage in lens

•

Lane Keep assist function will be disabled when the trailer is attached.

•

Lane Keep assist functions will not work properly when there is a heavy cross wind.

•

Lane Keep assist function may not work when the lane marking color is other than white and yellow.

In such situations, it may be advisable to turn the function OFF or driver shall take complete control of vehicle.

8.5.4 Emergency Lane Keep Assist - Oncoming, Side & Overtaking (if equipped)

Emergency Lane Keep Assist will help to avoid a collision with an oncoming/side/overtaking vehicle when changing lanes by assisting with the driver’s steering. ELK will activate even when the turn indicator is ON.

ELK assist takes the input from the front radar, corner radars, and front camera for its operation.

ELK - Oncoming operation

ELK - Side Operation

ELK Overtaking operation

Steps to Activate Emergency Lane Keep Assist:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants /Lane Assists/Emergency Lane Keep Assist (Enable/Disable)

ELK system provides audio and visual warnings when there is a warning or intervention provided by the ELK system.

ELK oncoming steering intervention to the left
ELK oncoming steering intervention to the right
ELK oncoming warning to the left due to possibility of secondary collision
ELK oncoming warning to the right due to possibility of secondary collision
ELK Side steering intervention to the left
ELK Side steering intervention to the right
ELK Side warning to the left due to possibility of secondary collision
ELK Side warning to the right due to possibility of secondary collision
ELK Overtaking steering intervention to the left
ELK Overtaking steering intervention to the right
ELK Overtaking warning to the left due to possibility of secondary collision
ELK Overtaking warning to the right due to possibility of secondary collision

Emergency Lane Keep Assist System Operation:

•

ELK operates at speeds between 40 km/h and 145 km/h

•

ELK activates only when host vehicle starts to leave the lane.

•

ELK will activate only when there is a possibility of collision with an oncoming vehicle.

•

ELK will activate only when both lane markings are clearly visible.

•

ELK will perform a steering correction if there is no chance of collision with other objects on the road. If a secondary collision is possible ELK Assist - Oncoming will only provide a Warning

ELK system prioritizes targets for safe maneuvering, including vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists, & motorbikes in the next lane and avoids intervention if there's a risk of a secondary collision. In such situations, system will limit itself to audio & visual warnings.

ELK System Limitations

•

ELK remains inactive unless clear lane markings are detected on both sides of the vehicle.

•

ELK will cancel if the steering wheel is operated in the opposite direction or if the driver accelerates or brakes

•

ELK steering assist will be cancelled if collisions with other objects on the road are possible.

•

ELK will not engage if the road is curved.

•

ELK will not work if trailer is connected

•

All system limitations of Camera and Front/Corner Radar are applicable to ELK system's operation

The ELK system is designed to assist drivers, not to replace them. Always monitor the road and surrounding conditions, maintain active control of the vehicle, and be prepared to intervene if necessary, especially if the system's alerts or actions seems unnecessary. Driver’s awareness and judgment is essential for safe driving.

ELK System Troubleshooting

When there is any failure in the ELK system, the below pop-up messages appear on DID screen and ELK indicator illuminate in Amber color. Refer Camera or Front/Corner Radar Maintenance & troubleshooting section for more details.

8.5.5 Highway Assist System (HWA) (If equipped)

Highway Assist (HWA) enables your vehicle to assist in changing lanes upon activation of the turn indicators by the driver when Smart Pilot Assist feature is in operation

This feature is intended for use on highways with a physical divider or median separating ongoing and oncoming traffic.

The Highway Assist function may attempt to change lanes under certain conditions, even if there is a potential risk of collision. The driver must remain alert and always maintain full control of the vehicle at all times during the drive.

•

The system may not detect an oncoming vehicle/oncoming lane vehicle during a lane change and may proceed with the lane change. Therefore, driver should be vigilant to take over steering control through out the drive

•

After moving to the next lane, if lane markings of the adjacent lane are obscured by mud or debris, system will not perform lane centering.

•

The system may not detect a stopped or slow-moving vehicle in the adjacent lane while initiating the lane change and ACC may not be able to completely slow down for the stopped/slow moving vehicle. Driver should be always available to take control in such situations.

Steps to enable Highway Assist System

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps /Drive Assist / Assistants / Highway Assist

System Operation

Highway Assist Function gets activated when the following conditions are satisfied.

•

The vehicle speed shall be between 40 kmph and 150 kmph

•

Both ACC and Lane Centering Function shall be operating (Smart Pilot Assist)

•

The Vehicle shall be driven on a road with at least two driving lanes with dashed lane marking in the center.

If the above-mentioned conditions are satisfied, the Highway Assist becomes ready to provide lane change assistance, and the Highway Assist indicator illuminates in green .

In case of not meeting any of the above-mentioned conditions, Highway Assist function remains stand-by, and the Highway Assist indicator illuminates in white representing that the system will not provide lane change assistance.

The driver can initiate lane change by either one touch or full latch of turn indicator

Driver initiated Lane Change

If the driver initiates a left lane change by activating the left turn indicator, then system performs the left lane change and is indicated by left arrow blinking in green in DID and VisionX.

If the driver initiates a right lane change by activating the right turn indicator, then the system performs the right lane change and is indicated by right arrow blinking in green in DID and VisionX.

If the system detects any unfavorable road conditions when the lane change is in progress, system cancels the process and notifies the driver by blinking the corresponding arrow (left or right) of lane widget in amber color in DID and VisionX.

If the system detects any unfavorable road conditions once the lane change is completed, lane centering will get deactivated. Driver needs to pay attention and take control of the vehicle in such situations.

System recommended Lane Change

When the vehicle is in ACC Follow mode and actual speed is less than the ACC set speed, HWA system will automatically recommend for a lane change by prompting the driver with a pop-up & indicator for initiating the lane change in the recommended direction. Such recommendation is limited to maximum twice for a particular front vehicle.

Even though system recommends for a lane change, driver should actively monitor the traffic and road conditions before activating the turn indicator.

If lane change which is in progress need to be cancelled, activate the turn indicator in opposite direction through one touch or full latch

If the driver wants to perform lane change (either based on the system’s recommendation or on his own will), the corresponding turn indicator signal must be activated to make the system perform lane change automatically.

When the driver initiates the lane change by activating the turn indicator, a pop-up is displayed to alert the driver to focus on the surroundings and hold the steering wheel for safety.

Once the system completes the lane change successfully, an alert pop-up is shown in DID as below.

In addition to activating the turn indicator, the driver is expected to give a slight steering nudge as second confirmation for lane change in the desired direction.

Highway Assist cannot detect intersections, merges, round about, cross walk, tollgate etc and lane change recommendations may be provided without taking into consideration of above factors. Driver shall take full responsibility to decide whether to proceed or not with the lane change depending on the road situations.

If the Lane change is cancelled due to any of the following unfavorable conditions, the corresponding pop-up is shown.

When the driver’s hands-on the steering wheel is not detected by the system

When road condition is unfavorable due to unavailability of dashed lane marking

When system detects the risk for collision with the vehicles/bicyclists/pedestrian/animals in the adjacent lane

When the driver overrides the steering

If the driver changed turn indicator to the opposite direction or some unfavorable conditions occurred for lane change to get completed.

The driver must be always ready to take over steering control in case lane change gets cancelled in between.

Highway Assist System trouble shooting

When there is malfunction with respect to Highway Assist system the HWA indicator in the DID will illuminate in Amber color and HWA feature will be disabled along with any of the below alerts

Alert	Action
	Refer Camera troubleshooting section
	Refer Front/Corner radar troubleshooting section

Alert	Action
	Refer Front/Corner radar troubleshooting section

Alert	Action
	Refer Camera troubleshooting section for more details
	Refer Front radar troubleshooting section for more details
	Refer Front/Corner radar troubleshooting section for more details

Highway Assist System Limitations

Highway Assist is subjected to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with below system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

All the system limitations of ACC, LCF & SPA also applies for Highway Assist.

Highway Assist may not work when lane change is attempted while being very close to the lane marking.

If the lane marking disappears/it's detection confidence drops after initiating the lane change, lane change maneuver may get aborted. Driver needs to take control in such situations

The system may not assist in the following road conditions:

•

Lanes are separated by botts dots and unclear lane markings.

•

At curved roads or tight bends.

•

Lane markings covered by sand, roadside plants.

•

Road with varying widths or narrow lanes.

•

Insufficient lighting or road illumination

2. The system may not assist in the following traffic situations:

•

If front vehicle distance is too close, the lane markings may not be detected properly, and system will not perform lane change.

•

When animals, pedestrians, cyclists or general objects are present on the roadway, system will not perform lane change.

3. The system may not assist in the adverse weather conditions, such as rain, fog, or snow.

4. Increased risk of collision due to insufficient gap when changing lanes in a merge/split section. Driver needs to take control of vehicle in such situations

5. Increased risk of collision when changing lanes at a junction or while entering a roundabout. Driver needs to take control of vehicle in such situations

8.6 Parking

8.6.1 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA - If equipped)

RCTA is a rear corner radar-based feature which warns and brakes the vehicle if there is a risk of collision with a left/right rear approaching vehicle when reversing from a perpendicular/angular parking slot.

Steps to Enable RCTA:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Parking / Rear Cross Traffic Alert (Enable/Disable)

RCTA System Operation

The RCTA feature operates only when the following conditions are met:

•

The vehicle must be in reverse gear.

•

The vehicle’s speed must be less than 8 kmph.

•

The approaching vehicle speed should be greater than 5 kmph

When above conditions are met and an approaching vehicle is detected in the rear collision zone of your vehicle, RCTA provides audio, visual and haptic warnings to the driver and if a collision is still imminent, system will apply the brakes.

RCTA warning for vehicle approaching from right
RCTA warning for vehicle approaching from left
RCTA braking for vehicle approaching from right
RCTA braking for vehicle approaching from left

RCTA will not work if the driver applied acceleration is above 35 %

RCTA will not work when vehicle is reversing in Auto Park Assist mode.

The RCTA system is only a supplemental aid to the driver. It is driver's responsibility to monitor traffic conditions and drive the vehicle safely.

RCTA System Troubleshooting

If the corner radar malfunction indicator is ON or any of below mentioned messages is displayed in DID, it means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off.

Refer Front/Corner Radar Maintenance section for remedial action.

RCTA System Limitations

RCTA is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations.

•

The system may not detect pedestrians or cyclists in all the conditions

•

RCTA system may not operate properly in following conditions

a. When there is inclement weather, such as snow, rain, or similar adverse conditions.

b. Any of the rear corner radar is covered with snow, rain, dirt etc.

c. Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

d. Interference by other radar sources.

•

RCTA system will be disabled when trailer is connected.

•

RCTA will not react for stationary obstacles and slow moving vehicles or obstacles.

•

In rare scenarios, when there is reflection of radar signals from moving objects in the opposite side, system may issue false Alert.

•

If the front or rear bumper is damaged, or if there is a full or partial blockage of the rear corner radars, disable the feature and have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible at the Mahindra authorised service centre.

8.6.2 Door Open Alert (DOA - If equipped)

Door Open Alert (DOA) is a driver assistance feature that helps the driver and passengers to have safe exit from the vehicle. The system monitors the blind spot for approaching vehicles and provides an alert if there is a potential collision risk while a door is being opened.

Steps to Enable DOA:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Parking / Door Open Alert

System Operation

The Door Open Alert Function gets activated when the following conditions are met.

•

The vehicle shall be in neutral/park/Drive gear.

•

The speed of the vehicle less than 8 kmph.

•

The speed of the target vehicle shall be between 5 kmph and 80 kmph.

While above conditions are met, If a vehicle or bicycle or a pedestrian is in blind zone (left or right) of the host vehicle, DOA tell-tale appears in the corresponding side of outside rear-view mirror (ORVM).

In this situation, if any of the doors are opened, system provides a pop-up warning message in the cluster along with an audible alert.

Warning for target approaching from rear left side

Warning for target approaching from rear right side

•

The DOA Function does not work when the host vehicle is operated in Reverse Gear or at a speed more than 8 kmph.

•

The DOA Function provides only warning. It does not assist the driver by steering or braking.

Do not rely solely on the Door Open Alert (DOA) feature. Driver must remain vigilant and check for approaching vehicles in the blind spot before opening a door.

Door Open Alert System troubleshooting

If the corner radar malfunction indicator is ON or any of below mentioned messages is displayed in DID, it means that the system is not functioning properly and should be turned off. Refer Front/Corner Radar Maintenance section for remedial action.

The driver should not attempt to repair the system. The system must not be used in case of malfunction and the vehicle must be immediately inspected at a Mahindra authorised service provider.

System Limitations

Door Open Alert System is subject to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations.

•

The system may not detect pedestrians or cyclists in all the conditions

•

Door Open Alert system may not operate properly in following conditions:

a. When there is inclement weather, such as snow, rain, or similar adverse conditions.

b. Any of the rear corner radar is covered with snow, rain, dirt etc.

c. Driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.

d. Interference by other radar sources.

•

If the front or rear bumper is damaged, or if there is a full or partial blockage of the rear corner radars, disable the feature and have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.

•

Door Open Alert (DOA) system will be disabled when trailer is connected.

•

DOA will not react for stationary obstacles and slow moving vehicles or obstacles.

In rare scenarios, when there are reflection of radar signals from moving objects in the opposite side, system may issue false DOA warning.

8.7 Driver Attention

The Driver Attention Warning system you're describing is designed to enhance road safety by monitoring the driver's attention levels during a trip. It does this by analyzing various factors such as the driver's driving behavior, the length of time spent on the road, and potentially even signs of drowsiness or distraction.

1. Front Vehicle Start Alert

2. Driver Drowsiness Alert

3. Driver Occupant Monitoring system (DOMS) (If equipped)

8.7.1 Front Vehicle Start Alert (FVSA)

Front Vehicle Start Alert (FVSA) is a driver assistance feature that notifies the driver when the vehicle ahead begins to move. It is especially helpful at traffic signals when the driver may not notice the vehicle ahead starting. The system alerts the driver through audible, haptic, and visual warnings.

Steps to activate Front Vehicle Start Alert:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer / Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Driver Attention /Front vehicle start alert

Whenever the vehicle is restarted, the Front Vehicle Start Alert function retains the last setting made in the driver attention menu.

FVSA enabling conditions

Front Camera Module installed in the windshield of the vehicle helps in the detection of vehicles in front of host vehicle and provides warning to the driver about their movement ahead. Front Vehicle Start Alert gets activated when the following conditions are met.

•

Vehicle is stationary and should be in park/Drive/Neutral mode

•

The distance between the vehicle and target vehicle shall be within 5 meters.

•

The speed of target vehicle shall be above 2 kmph

On detecting the movement of preceding vehicle satisfying all the above conditions, a pop-up warning is given in the DID along with an audible warning and haptic steering vibration.

The Front Vehicle Start Alert function does not work when the vehicle is in reverse gear

Do not rely completely on this function to get notifications for the front vehicle movement. Driver shall be always careful and responsible to check whether the vehicle in the front is moving.

System Limitations

Front Vehicle Start Alert Function is subjected to certain system limitations and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations.

•

System may not operate properly when there is inclement weather, such as snow and rain that could block the visibility of the front camera.

8.7.2 Driver Drowsiness Alert (If equipped)

Steps to Activate Driver Drowsiness Alert System:

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer/ Vehicle Apps / Drive Assist / Assistants / Driver Attention/ Driver Drowsiness Alert

The Driver Drowsiness Detection system advises the driver to take a break from continuous long duration driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on the driver's steering behavior.

The system evaluates the steering behavior at speeds of 60 - 200 km/h.

Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system are as follows.

•

The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.

•

The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed, and the driver's door opened.

•

The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.

If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.

The Drowsiness alert should be enabled in the driver assistance screen.

Pause Recommendation

This alert comes in the display of DID when the system detects the driver is quite sleepy or very sleepy, along with audible signal.

•

When the vehicle is driven continuously for more than 2 hours and if the system detects driver as “Quite Sleepy”, an alert message along with audio signal appears in the DID. Cluster will display the alert message till the user presses the “OK” button from steering wheel switch.

•

After pressing the OK button, if break is not detected by the system for next 15 minutes, alert message will repeat again. If the drowsiness is continuously sensed and if the system detects driver as “Very Sleepy”, next level alert message & audio signal will be triggered along with steering wheel haptic feedback.

•

The driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if you feel tired.

•

The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.

•

Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.

•

There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.

•

In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behavior incorrectly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.

•

The system is designed primarily for use on highways.

8.8 Driver Occupant Monitoring System (DOMS) (If equipped)

Eyedentity is the Driver and Occupant monitoring system (DOMS) powered by a 5 Megapixel RGB – Infrared (IR) Camera inside the cabin.

The System is capable to do the below,

Driver Drowsiness detection.

Driver Distraction detection.

Driver Gadget usage detection.

Driver Unresponsiveness

Driver Face Identification

Selfie

Video Call

The DID displays all alerts & visual warnings related to Driver and Occupant monitoring system (DOMS).

8.8.1 Driver Drowsiness Detection

Drowsy

If the driver feels drowsy and fights sleep without closing their eyes completely, but blinks their eyes slower than usual, a 'Drowsy' alert will appear with an indication on the DID to take a break, along with a chime as an audio alert.

Microsleep

If the driver continues to be in the drowsy state, the alert will repeat for 5 seconds every minute. When the driver is in a drowsy state and closes their eyes for 4 seconds, a 'Microsleep' alert will appear with an indication on the DID to take a break, along with a chime as an audio alert.

Sleep

If the driver continues to close their eyes for 3 more seconds, a 'Sleep' alert will appear with an indication on the DID to pull over and take a break, along with a continuous chime as an audio alert (Press OK to discontinue) and a stronger haptic (vibration) on the steering wheel.

8.8.2 Driver Distraction Detection

Distraction alerts will appear in the DID for,

Short distraction:

If the driver continuously switches their head between the windshield and away from the windshield for 1 second and 2 seconds, respectively, for a cumulative total of 10 seconds, a short distraction alert will appear with an indication on the DID to focus on the road, along with a chime as an audio alert. (Example activity: Frequently checking messages or maps on a mobile phone while driving with the phone beside the driver.)

Long distraction:

If the driver continuously turns their head away from the windshield for more than 6 seconds, a long distraction alert will appear with an indication on the DID to focus on the road, along with a chime as an audio alert and a mild haptic (vibration) on the steering wheel.

Gadget distraction:

If the driver holds the phone near their ear, a 'Gadget Distraction' alert will be displayed on the DID for 5 seconds until the driver becomes alert again and no longer holds the phone.

8.8.3 Driver Unresponsiveness Detection

If the driver continues to be in a distracted state after the long distraction alert, an 'Unresponsive' alert will appear 6 seconds after the long distraction alert, with an indication on the DID signalling unresponsiveness, a continuous chime as an audio alert (Press OK to discontinue), and a stronger haptic (vibration) on the steering wheel.

Face Identification:

Identifying the driver and personalizing their preferences. Driver must register their face once in the preferred user profile in User profile app in the app drawer or Click on the profile name in CID and add new profile.

Face Registration:

There are 3 user profiles apart form Guest and Valet. User can register the face by following the below steps.

Go to app Drawer and click on “User Profile” and “Add new Profile”

On the Welcome page, Click on “start setup” to initiate the Registration process

Then click on the plus icon to add the face to the profile

Read and confirm the Privacy warning.

Face scan will begin.

Click on “Cancel” at any time to cancel the registration process.

Follow the instruction on the screen by looking towards the Center Display and then turn the head towards Left and then Right.

The Scanning progress will be indicated with percentage completion.

Correct the below images —there is no 25%,50% and 75% or ed>(MK: OK)

On Success, the below Face registration success screen will displayed.

Click on the edit button to add the driver name for the registered face and Driver’s picture (optional)

Enter the master PIN while prompt (Default pin is 1234)

Create a new PIN for the profile.

Confirm the new PIN

Once after registration completed, “Welcome (Driver Name)” will display and the new profile will load.

8.8.4 Face Registration Failures

Skipping Instructions:

Spoofing

When a driver displays an image instead of their real face.

Registration while vehicle on move

If trying to register while vehicle is moving condition.

Duplicate Face

If try to register the same face for the second time

Timeout

Driver fails/ delayed following the instructions.

Obstacle

Driver trying to register the face wearing glasses or camera lens blocked by some object or dirt.

Driver Expressions

Driver tries with angry, sadness and excited face.

Invalid Head

Driver fails to follow the instructions for turning the head while scanning.

No Driver

Driver is not seated properly in the driver seat.

Occlusion

The driver face is occluded with mask/ accessories etc.

Poor Light

Insufficient lighting or the driver being too close to the camera may cause issues. Please sit properly in the driver's seat, ensure the surroundings are well-lit, or turn on the cabin light.

Recognition

After turning the IGN ON, each time the driver enters the vehicle (if registered), the vehicle will greet them and switch to their profile with stored preferences.

8.8.5 Telltale indicator

In-cabin camera telltales will be displayed at the top left corner of DID

Green Camera Icon:

Green camera icon indicates, In-cabin Camera is ON and Driver Occupant monitoring system is active.

Red Camera icon:

The red camera icon indicates that the in-cabin camera is OFF, blocked, or there is a fault in the Eyedentity system. In the event of a fault in the system, get it checked by the nearest Mahindra authorised service centre.

Amber Camera Icon: The amber camera icon indicates that the Driver Occupant Monitoring System is not functioning due to poor image quality, which may be caused by over-illumination or a blocked camera. Cleaning the camera lens with a soft cloth can resolve this issue.

Note: Amber camera icon during ignition ON is normal, which will turn into green within a minute.

Selfie: Eyedentity camera also supports a selfie feature, offering full cabin coverage with options to capture photos and short videos (3 seconds). Additionally, occupants can apply various AI filters that fit on faces or create frames around the image. These images and videos are stored in the gallery. Selfie app is available in app drawer with a blue camera icon.

Tap on selfie to preview the entire cabin in CID display with “Filters” button on the left, “shutter” button on the right and option to switch between image (Camera) and Video at the top.

“Filters” button will load all filters. “Gallery” button will redirect to Gallery app

Various filters can be selected and photo/video(restricted for 3 sec) can be captured and have a look in Gallery page.

Video Call: User can make Video calls from the vehicle using Zoom or Google Meet from Fun& Work app The in-cabin camera will provide the video view.

Take short breaks during long trips.

While driving, try to avoid using a mobile phone by holding it in your hand.

Refrain from using your mobile phone while driving. If necessary, use hands-free options.

Always Keep your attention on the road and avoid engaging in distracting activities like eating, drinking, or adjusting the radio.

Risk Mitigation System (If equipped):

Risk Mitigation System (RMS) is a safety assist feature which slows down the vehicle to complete stop if the driver is found to be unresponsive or not in seat when he is driving in Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON mode.

Once vehicle slow down has started, below popup will be displayed in DID and hazard lamps will be activated.

Once vehicle has come to complete stop, doors will be unlocked and siren would get activated.

Once RMS activates, it gets deactivated only if driver becomes responsive again which is confirmed by the presence of his hands on steering wheel and the accelerator input which he provides to take back the control of vehicle.

8.8.6 DOMS Limitations

•

Overexposed camera due to bright light or glare (eg. Mobile IR blasters).

•

If the in-cabin camera lens is dirty or obstructed, DOMS may fail to detect the driver’s face accurately.

•

Some drivers may find these systems annoying or intrusive, leading to resistance in using them. Kindly don't ignore the alerts.

The conditions listed above do not represent every possible scenario that may interfere with DOMS. Additional factors may prevent it from operating as intended. Always remain vigilant and keep your attention on the road so you can anticipate and respond quickly to potential hazards.

DOMS (In car camera) is always ON to detect driver behavior and detecting user profile.

9 VisionX (If equipped)

VisionX is a projection device used in vehicles to display real-time data on the windshield, enhancing the driver's experience by integrating digital information with the physical environment. it helps drivers maintain their focus on the road. By projecting important information directly onto the windshield.

The images in this manual are representative and may vary depending on the vehicle model, software version and specifications

VisionX displays a set of information that is designed to enhance the driving experience, safety, and convenience.

A	Static Area
B	Augmented Reality Area

Static Area

S.No	Static Features
1	Navigation or compass
2	ACC with lanes indicator
3	Speed
4	ACC Set Speed
5	Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)
6	Messages (Call, Media, Hands off warning, Thermal Warning, Emergency Braking, Blind Spot Warning, Cross traffic alert, EV specific warning)

Augmented Reality Area

S.No	Augmented Features
1	Left Blind Spot Warning (AR)
2	Left Forward Cross Traffic Alert (AR)
3	Navigation (AR)
4	Lane Change Assist (AR)
5	Right Blind Spot Warning (AR)
6	Right Forward Cross Traffic Alert (AR)
7	Right Lane Departure Warning (AR)
8	ACC (AR)
9	Left Lane Departure Warning Detected(AR)

The driver is fully responsible for road safety. VisionX is an assistive tool, not a substitute for driver awareness. The driver remains fully responsible for safe operation. The company is not liable for accidents, injuries, or damages caused by reliance on VisionX projections or malfunctions. Always stay attentive to the road, even when VisionX is active.

The white line detected on the front vehicle may not always be accurate and could be incorrect in certain situations. Always focus on the actual driving scenario.

VisionX Enable and Disable Procedure

VisionX can be enabled and disabled either by using a button from driver side switch bank or from Center Information display (CID).

Option 1 - With Center Information Display (CID)

(a) Go To App Drawer ->Vehicle Apps -> My Vehicle -> Interior -> VisionX

(b) Go To App Drawer ->Vehicle Apps -> VisionX

Option 2 - With Driver Side Switch Bank Button

Once VisionX disabled, It has to be manually enabled again using one of the two option.

9.1 Welcome Animation

Welcome Animation function in VisionX is a feature that provides a visually engaging introduction after every ignition cycle when the VisionX system is enabled.

9.2 Speed

Vehicle Speed shows the current speed value directly on the windshield.

9.3 Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR)

VisionX system displays information related to TSR system. Refer Traffic Sign Recognition (TSR) section in ADAS chapter for more details.

9.4 Navigation or Compass

VisionX system displays information related to Navigation system. Refer Navigation section in CID/DID chapter for more details.

The Navigation display in augmented reality mode is an auxiliary feature. Always refer to the CID/DID navigation screen for complete guidance.

To Enable/Disable, AR or Static feature, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.5 Navigation Estimated Time Arrival (ETA) and Distance to Destination (DTD)

VisionX system displays information related to ETA and DTD system. Refer Navigation Estimated Time Arrival (ETA) and Distance to Destination (DTD) section in CID/DID chapter for more details.

ETA: This feature displays the estimated time to reach the set destination.

DTD: This feature displays the remaining distance to the destination.

ETA and DTD display in augmented reality mode is an auxiliary feature. Always refer to the CID/DID navigation screen for complete guidance.

9.6 Compass

VisionX system displays information related to Compass system. Refer Navigation compass section in CID/DID chapter for more details.

Compass is the function, which provides real-time information about the cardinal directions.

Compass display in augmented reality mode is an auxiliary feature. Always refer to the CID/DID navigation screen for complete guidance.

VisionX does not replace direct visual assessment of lane positions. The system may not function correctly in adverse weather, low visibility, or if road markings are unclear. The company is not responsible for incorrect lane detection or related incidents.

9.7 Lane Departure Warning

VisionX system displays information on Lane Departure Warning system. Refer Lane Departure Warning section in ADAS chapter for more details.

Lane Departure Warning is the function which alert the driver, if the vehicle unintentionally drifts out of its lane without using turn signals.

To Enable/Disable, AR or Static feature, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.8 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

VisionX system displays information on ACC system. Refer Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) section in ADAS chapter for more details.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is the function which can help the driver to maintain a set speed, combined with a preselected time gap to the vehicle ahead.

To Enable/Disable, AR or Static feature, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.9 Blind Spot

Left Side Blind Spot	Right Side Blind Spot

VisionX system displays information on Blind Spot system. Refer Blind Spot Detection section in ADAS chapter for more details.
This feature alerts the driver about the potential presence of other vehicles in the driver's left and right side blind spots, enhancing safety during lane changes and maneuvers.

The Blind-Spot Safety information displayed on the Head-Up Display is supplemental. Do not rely solely on it when changing lanes. Always check your surroundings and ensure it is safe to proceed.

To Enable/Disable, AR or Static feature, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.10 Hands off warning

VisionX system displays information on Hands Off Warning system. Refer “Keep Hands on Steering wheel” related section in ADAS chapter for more details.

If the driver takes off the hand from the steering, the system will detect and alert the driver to correct the situation.

To Enable/Disable, AR or Static feature, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.11 Cross Traffic Alert

VisionX system displays information on Cross Traffic Alert system. Refer Cross Traffic Alert section in ADAS chapter for more details.

Forward Cross Traffic Alert is a safety feature that warns the driver of approaching vehicles or obstacles in the forward blind spot area when the vehicle is moving or about to move forward.

To Enable/Disable, AR or Static feature, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.12 VisionX Thermal Warning

In the event of an unexpected situation with the VisionX system, a warning will be triggered. If this warning appears, the system's performance may be compromised. The system is designed to recover automatically, but if it does not, please visit the nearest dealership for assistance.

9.13 Call and Media

Call	Media

VisionX system displays information on Call and Media related details.

Call feature keeps the driver updated on all call types, allowing them to stay focused on the road.

Media feature keeps the driver updated on media information, allowing them to stay focused on the road.

Refer Call and Media section in CID chapter for more details.

To enable or Disable, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.14 Highway Assist (HWA)

VisionX system displays information on HWA system. Refer Highway Assist (HWA) section in ADAS chapter for more details.

To Enable/Disable, AR or Static feature, Refer Customization of VisionX Features section.

9.15 Battery Low warning

If the vehicle battery is low, The battery low warning alert displayed to alert the driver.

9.16 Point of Interest (POI)

The Point of Interest (POI) function highlights various locations such as landmarks, road names, parking areas, stations, and more.

9.17 Customization of VisionX Features

VisionX system allows user to select or customize the features that can be displayed in AR and Static vision.
The below are the list of features in VisionX that can be customized,

Navigation (AR and Static)	Call Info
POI	Media
Driver Assistant (AR and Static)

9.18 Brightness Control

Brightness of VisionX can be controlled by settings.

If the Auto Brightness is enabled, Illumination is adjusted on its own based on the light sensor values.

If the Auto Brightness is disabled, manually we can control the brightness level using brightness control.

9.19 Position Adjustment

The VisionX can be adjusted both vertically (up and down) and angled (Tilt right and left) using dedicated controls, allowing users to set their preferred viewing position for optimal visibility.

9.20 System Limitations

Visibility of VisionX display is influenced by the below factors:

Driver Seat Position

Objects, Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's protective glass.

Windshield dirts both inside and outside

Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.

Wet road.

Unfavorable light conditions.

If the vision of VisionX is unclear, please get it checked by the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Centre.

The driver is fully responsible for road safety. Always stay attentive to the road, even when VisionX is active.

The white line detected the front of the vehicle may not be accurate in certain situations. Always focus on the actual driving scenario.

Precautions

•

To reduce the risk of scratches on the glass covering the head-up display, do not place any objects on top of VisionX display.

•

A special windshield is needed for the head up display function.

•

If the temperature of the front windshield keep rises, VisionX display will be deactivated temporarily to protect Head-up display from the high temperature. When the temperature drops, VisionX display will be reactivated.

•

Installation of additional layers in the windshield shall deteriorate the performance

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

10 Parking Assist System

This chapter outlines the driver-assist features related to parking, including Auto Park Assist, Parking Assistance System (PAS), and Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS). While these features enhance convenience and safety, drivers must remain attentive and adhere to the guidelines in this chapter.

These features cannot detect or prevent all hazards. Mahindra does not guarantee flawless operation under all conditions and assumes no liability for system malfunctions, whether partial or complete. For detailed information on feature-specific constraints and driver responsibilities, refer to the Limitations sections throughout this manual.

Periodic software updates may be required to maintain or enhance the reliability of parking-assist features. By using these systems, the owner acknowledges having read and accepted all disclaimers and agrees to operate the vehicle responsibly while ensuring compliance with recommended updates.

Parking assist system with both key fob and phone is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

10.1 Auto Park Assist (If equipped)

Parking is one of the most basic driving tasks, yet for many drivers, it can also be one of the most challenging. Accurately gauging the vehicle's dimensions and proximity to obstacles can be difficult.

This technology uses 12 ultrasonic sensors and 4 cameras to assist the driver in parking the vehicle.

Informations:

•

Before using the system, familiarize with the limitations of Auto Park and the situations in which it may not work as expected. Please refer to the Limitations section for more details.

•

Auto Park assist system is a driver assist system which aids in assisting the user in certain defined tasks within the system limitations and not a replacement for driver.

•

The driver is responsible for continuously monitoring the surroundings around the vehicle during any park assist operation in progress and take necessary steps to stop the vehicle (by applying brake pedal, by performing steering control, by releasing the remote key-fob during remote parking or the releasing the finger on phone touch interface during phone parking) to avoid any possible collision with other objects. Do not solely rely on the system to perform the driving or parking operations.

•

This system is supplemental and does not replace driver’s attention & judgement towards all traffic situations, weather, road conditions, or any surrounding environment, etc.

•

The driver must follow traffic rules and ensure the safety of their vehicle and everything around it, including other vehicles, people, animals, and obstacles.

•

All cameras and sensors shall be error-free & in a fully functional state. In case the cameras and sensors are not operational or are faulty, it is recommended to not use them and get them immediately inspected at a Mahindra authorised service provider.

•

The Auto Parking assist system images in this section are representative only.

•

Auto Park's performance depends on the ability of the cameras and sensors to determine the vehicle's proximity to kerbs, objects, and other vehicles. Be aware of the following warnings before and while using Auto Park:

–

Do not use Auto Park if anything, such as a ball hitch, bike rack, or trailer, is attached to the tow hitch. Auto Park may not stop for hitches when parking between or in front of other vehicles.

–

Do not depend on Auto Park to find a parking space that is legal, suitable, and safe. Auto Park may not always detect objects in the parking space. Always perform visual checks to confirm that a parking space is appropriate and safe.

–

When Auto Park is active, monitor the CID to ensure that you are aware of the instructions that Auto Park is providing.

–

Hazard lamps will be ON during the auto parking process for safety reasons.

–

Once the system completes park assist operation, parking brake will get engaged automatically.

–

Drive at lower speeds for better search of parking space.

10.1.1 Entry to Auto Park Application

The user can enter auto park application using any of the following methods:

Method 1:

Selecting the “Auto Park” application from the CID.

Method 2:

By pressing the “Auto Park switch” located at the roof console switch, the user can directly go into the auto park page.

Method 3:

The user can enter into Auto Park directly from “360° camera” screen by pressing the “Auto Park Icon”

10.1.2 Auto Park Application and Features

	Park-In	To initiate parking space search and perform auto park in with the driver either inside or outside (using keyfob or phone) the vehicle.
	Park-out	To initiate vehicle park out from a parking space.
	Virtual Park-in	To initiate driver selected parking space and perform auto park in with driver inside or outside (using keyfob or phone) the vehicle.
	360° Camera	To enter the 360° camera application.
	More Options	To enter reverse assist and settings.
	Reverse Assist	To initiate auto reverse motion for the last 50 meters the vehicle has traveled.
	Settings	To enter the settings menu.

10.1.3 Park Assist Settings

Phone parking	This feature is enabled by default. The driver can disable/enable the feature as per convenience.
Keyfob parking	This feature is enabled by default. The driver can disable/enable the feature as per convenience.
Reverse assist	This feature is enabled by default. The driver can disable/enable the feature as per convenience.
Park Assist Emergency Braking (PAEB)	This feature is disabled by default. The driver can disable/enable the feature as per convenience.

10.1.4 Exiting Auto Park Application

The user can exit auto park application using any of the following methods:

Method 1: Pressing the “Auto Park Switch” again

Method 2: Pressing the close button

10.1.5 Park-In

The park-in function helps the driver in searching and finding a parking space (perpendicular, parallel, or angular) and park the vehicle in the selected space.

While the Park-In feature is available it is the driver’s responsibility to be vigilant about the surroundings while using the feature and stop the vehicle in case of need. Do not completely rely on the system.

Park-in is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

Pre-conditions:

All cameras and sensors should be error-free & in a fully functional state.

Vehicle is in standstill condition.

Ignition ON & drive enabled,

Auto Park application open,

All doors, hood and tail gate in closed condition,

Driver seat belt fastened,

No error messages in APA screen,

ORVMs unfolded,

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees.

Steps to initiate Parking Space Search:

1. Driver can select the park-in icon and the screen changes to parking space searching animation.

2. “Please drive to search for a parking space” message displays on the screen.

3. Driver should drive the vehicle in forward direction at speed less than 20 kph “Searching for a parking space” message displays on the screen.

•

Parking space detection won’t happen if the vehicle is driven in reverse direction.

•

Parking space detection won’t happen if the vehicle is driven at a speed > 20 kph.

•

Parking space detection won't happen if the distance of vehicle to row of parked vehicles or slot markings is greater than 1.5 meters.

•

Parking space detection won't happen if the distance of vehicle to row of parked vehicles or slot markings is less than 0.7 meters.

It is driver’s responsibility to be vigilant about the surroundings while using the feature and stop the vehicle in case of need. Do not completely rely on the system

•

Parking lines that are not marked in yellow or white may not be detected. Further parking lines that are blurred / obstructed / not clear may not be detected.

•

The driving pathway and parking space should meet the suitable dimension requirements. For more details refer to parking assist dimension section.

4. Once possible parking space (s) are displayed, “Press brake and select the available parking space” message displays on the screen. Now, the driver should press the brake, stop the vehicle and select the parking space of their choice.

When the vehicle stops, the most recently detected parking space will be selected by default automatically. The driver can choose their preferred parking space using the CID touch screen.

5. “Keep brake pressed and select parking mode” message displays on the screen. Driver should continue pressing the brake and select the desired parking mode using the CID touchscreen.

•

Start Parking or

•

Park with Phone or

•

Park with Key fob

10.1.5.1 Start parking

1. Driver should continue pressing the brake and then select the “Start parking” mode.

2. “Please release the brake and steering wheel to start parking” message displays on the screen.

3. Driver must release the brake and steering wheel. System takes control of the vehicle and parks the vehicle in the selected parking space. “Automatic parking in progress, please pay attention to the surrounding, braking in X (distance) m” message displays on the screen.

4. After vehicle is parked successfully in the target parking space, “Parking completed!” pop-up displays on the screen.

Parking brake gets applied automatically once the park in is completed. It is advisable for the driver to manually check if the parking brake has been properly applied and not rely on the system entirely.

10.1.5.2 Park With Phone

This feature assists driver to perform Park-In using the phone.

Park-in with a phone is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

Pre–Conditions:

In settings “Phone Parking = enabled.

Me4U application installed and logged in.

Vehicle is connected to phone via bluetooth.

Android auto or Apple car play must not be paired.

Driver has selected the desired parking space.

No error messages in APA screen.

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees.

Driver stops the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal [Vehicle is in standstill condition]

Park with phone is possible only if the:

•

Vehicle application account is logged in with the KYC preferred number of the vehicle and the vehicle owner has subscribed to the connected car features package.

•

Phone must be present in the bluetooth paired list of the vehicle.

Steps to initiate Phone Parking:

1. “Keep brake pressed and select parking mode” message displays on the screen. Driver should continue pressing the brake and select "Park with phone" option using the CID touchscreen.

2. If the brake pedal is not released, “Parking is in progress, please release the brake” alert displays on the screen.

3. Driver must release the brake pedal and steering wheel then move out of the vehicle with phone and key fob ensuring vehicle is in P gear & all doors are closed.

4. Driver must open “Park assist” tab in the Me4U phone application.

•

To perform parking with phone, user must be operating the phone from outside the vehicle by staying in the detection range of the vehicle.

•

For parking with phone, Me4U app installed phone must be paired with vehicle to execute the parking.

5. Driver must select “Park In/ Manual” option. Then phone will get connected to the vehicle and it will enter auto park screen with option to “Park” and “Abort parking process”.

6. Then phone will get connected to the vehicle and it will enter auto park screen with option to “Park” and “Abort parking process”.

7. Driver must press and hold the “Park” button on the phone application continuously being present within a 4 meter radius of the vehicle and monitor the vehicle and surroundings until the vehicle is parked safely in the parking space (if the driver goes out of range the process will be paused). “Parking is in progress, please continue using your phone” message displays on the CID.

8. If the driver presses and holds “Park” button on the Me4U screen, CID displays message Remote parking is in progress.

9. After vehicle is parked successfully in the target parking space, “Remote Parking completed!” pop-up displays on the screen.

•

During phone parking progress the driver must be vigilant about the surroundings of the vehicle and must immediately release the park button to stop the vehicle. It is the driver's responsibility to ensure the safety of their own vehicle and surrounding vehicles/obstacles. The driver must maintain an unobstructed line of vision to the vehicle at all times while parking through the Me4U app.

•

The driver must ensure obstacles or vehicles are not present in the path within 60 seconds and continue the parking using the park button in the phone application.

•

If the driver does not press park button in phone or goes out of the bluetooth range for more than 60 seconds, then parking will be aborted.

•

If the keyfob is present outside the vehicle then the vehicle will go to Ignition OFF condition, once the parking is completed or aborted. Despite this feature, it is ultimately the responsibility of the driver to ensure that the vehicle is in Ignition OFF mode.

•

If the keyfob is present inside the vehicle then it will be the driver's responsibility to do ignition OFF after the park-in is completed or aborted.

•

It is the responsibility of the driver to ensure that the doors are locked before leaving the vehicle.

•

The hazard lamps will be on when the phone park-in initiated until the parking completed or aborted.

•

Parking brake gets applied automatically once the park in is completed.

•

If the park button is not pressed in the phone application or driver is out of the bluetooth range, the hazard lamps will be on but the vehicle will stop and parking operation will be paused.

10.1.5.3 Park with Key Fob

This feature assists driver to perform Park-in using the keyfob.

Park-in with a key fob is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

Pre Conditions:

In settings (Keyfob Parking = enabled),

Driver has selected the desired parking space.

No error messages in APA screen

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees.

Driver stops the vehicle by pressing the brake pedal [Vehicle is in standstill condition]

Steps To Initiate Key Fob Parking:

1. “Keep brake pressed and select parking mode” message displays on the screen. Driver should continue pressing the brake and select "Park with keyfob" option.

2. If the brake pedal is not released, “Parking is in progress, please release the brake” alert displays on the screen.

3. Driver must release the brake pedal and the steering wheel, then move out of the vehicle with key fob ensuring vehicle is in “P” mode & all doors are closed.

Hazard lamp blinks along with 5 chirps, when the driver door is opened and closed. This is normal.

4. Driver should press and hold the forward/backward button on the keyfob continuously being present within a 3 meter radius of the vehicle and monitor the vehicle and surroundings until the vehicle is parked safely in the parking space (if the driver goes out of range the process will be paused). “Parking is in progress, please continue using the keyfob” message displays on the screen.

•

To perform parking with key fob, user must be operating the key fob from outside the vehicle by staying in the detection range of the vehicle.

5. After vehicle is parked successfully in the target parking space, “Remote Parking completed!” pop-up displays on the screen.

•

It is the responsibility of the driver to ensure that the doors are locked before leaving the vehicle.

•

During the keyfob parking progress driver must be vigilant about surroundings of the vehicle and must immediately release the forward/backward button press to stop the vehicle. It is driver's responsibility to ensure safety of their own vehicle and the surrounding vehicles/obstacles. The driver must maintain an unobstructed line of vision to the vehicle at all times while parking through the keyfob.

•

The driver must ensure obstacles or vehicles are not present in the path within 60 seconds and continue the parking using the forward/backward button in the keyfob.

•

If the driver does not press forward/backward button or goes out of the range (3 meter) for more than 60 seconds, then parking will be aborted and vehicle will go to Ignition OFF state.

•

The hazard lamps will be on when keyfob park-in initiated until parking completed or aborted.

•

If the forward/backward button is not pressed on the keyfob or driver is out of the range, the hazard lamps will be on but the vehicle will stop and parking operation will be paused.

10.1.6 Virtual park-in

Virtual parking offers driver to park the vehicle in three orientations- perpendicular, parallel, and angular. Driver can select any one of the parking space type and must drag and drop it in a safe surrounding to park the vehicle.

Virtual Park in is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

•

This system is supplemental and does not replace driver’s attention & judgement towards all traffic situations, weather, road conditions, or any surrounding environment, etc.

•

Virtual parking is an optional assistance system for the driver. It is fully the driver’s responsibility as soon as the feature is operational.

•

Never place the parking space on any object/other vehicle/human/animal, etc.

•

When the parking space color changes from orange to red, it indicates that parking is not feasible.

Pre-conditions:

•

Ignition ON & drive enabled,

•

Auto Park application open,

•

All doors, hood and tail gate in closed condition,

•

Driver seat belt fastened,

•

No error messages in APA screen,

•

ORVMs unfolded,

•

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees,

•

Vehicle is in standstill condition.

Steps to initiate Virtual Parking:

1. Driver must find a suitable parking space to park the vehicle.

2. The driver must press the brake pedal and select virtual icon. Parking space type (parallel, perpendicular and angular) will be displayed on the screen with message “Keep brake pressed and select parking space type” If the brake pedal is released, “Please press brake” message displays on the screen. The driver has to press and hold the brake pedal for selecting the desired parking space type.

3. Once the driver selects parking space type, by default parking space will be displayed on the right side of the car model image displayed in top view. The driver can drag and drop the parking space while continue pressing the brake.

4. "Please confirm the parking space" message displays on the screen. Once the parking space is positioned, the driver can confirm the selection by pressing the confirm button on the CID touchscreen.

It is driver's responsibility to make sure the surrounding is safe and no obstacles are present in the parking space.

5. The driver should continue pressing the brake and select the desired parking mode using the CID touchscreen.

•

Start Parking

•

Park with Phone or

•

Park with Keyfob

•

To perform parking with key fob and phone, user must be operating the key fob and phone respectively from outside the vehicle by staying in the detection range of the vehicle.

•

For parking with phone, Me4U app installed phone must be paired with vehicle to execute the parking.

10.1.7 Park Out — (From Inside The Vehicle)

Assists the driver to park out the vehicle from a parking space if vehicle has been previously parked-in using Park-in/Virtual Parking option.

Park out (from inside the vehicle) is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

Park out directions will be displayed based on the parking space type.

•

Perpendicular park out: If the vehicle is parked in a perpendicular parking space using park-in/virtual parking option, then front left and front right perpendicular direction will be displayed based on the space availability.

•

Parallel park out: If the vehicle is parked in a parallel parking space using park-in/virtual parking option, then parallel direction will be displayed based on the direction of park-in and space availability.

•

Angular park out: If the vehicle is parked in an angular parking space using park-in/virtual parking option, then:

–

In case of nose-out parking, straight forward direction will be displayed based on the space availability.

–

In case of nose-in parking, straight backward direction will be displayed based on the space availability.

Pre-conditions:

•

Vehicle parked using Park-in/virtual parking,

•

Ignition ON & drive enabled,

•

Auto Park application open,

•

All doors, hood and tail gate in closed condition

•

Driver seat belt fastened,

•

No error messages in APA screen,

•

ORVMs unfolded,

•

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees,

•

Vehicle is in standstill condition.

Steps to initiate park-out:

1. The driver should press the brake and select "Park-out" icon.

2. Driver should continue pressing the brake and select park out direction from the options displayed on the screen

If only one direction is displayed on the screen then it will be selected by default.

3. “Keep brake pressed and select start park out” message displays on the screen. Driver should continue pressing the brake and select "Start park out" option.

4. “Please release the brake and steering wheel to start park out” message displays on the screen.

5. The driver must release the brake pedal and steering wheel, the system takes control of the vehicle and park out the vehicle from a parking space. “Automatic park out in progress, please pay attention to the surroundings, braking in X (distance) m” message displays on the screen.

6. After vehicle is parked out of the parking space successfully, “Park out completed!” pop-up displays on the screen.

10.1.8 Park-Out Using Key Fob

Assists the driver to park out the vehicle from a parking space using keyfob irrespective the park-in was performed manually by the driver or using auto park assist.

Park-out using key fob is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

Preconditions :

•

In settings (Keyfob parking = enabled),

•

Vehicle is ignition OFF and locked,

•

All doors, hood and tail gate in closed condition,

•

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees,

•

Driver must be outside the vehicle with keyfob.

Steps to initiate park-out using the key fob:

1. To turn ON the ignition: Perform RKE LOCK followed by Remote cooling button hold for 5 seconds Approx (within 10 seconds from RKE LOCK) with Key fob outside the vehicle and within 1 meter range around vehicle zone.

ORVMs will open automatically indicating that the ignition is turned ON

Lock Button

Remote Cooling

To make Drive enable, Press the forward button or backward button for 3 seconds approx.

•

If the forward/backward button is released within 2 seconds, the vehicle will go into ignition OFF state.

•

If driver presses forward/backward button in accordance vehicle will move in straight forward/backward direction.

3. Once Vehicle in Drive enable, Upon pressing Forward / backward button with in range of 3 meters around vehicle zone, will cause the vehicle movement with Hazard feedback

4. If the driver continuously press and hold the forward/backward button on the keyfob being within a range of 3 meters, the vehicle will move up to 7 meters and stop.

5. The driver can press and hold the forward/backward button again to move further 7 meters.

•

During keyfob park out progress driver must be vigilant about surroundings of the vehicle and must immediately release the forward/backward button press to stop the vehicle. It is driver's responsibility to ensure safety of their own vehicle and surrounding vehicles/obstacles. The driver must maintain an unobstructed line of vision to the vehicle at all times while parking through the keyfob.

•

The driver must ensure obstacles or vehicles are not present in the path within 60 seconds and continue the park out using the forward/backward button in the keyfob.

•

If the driver does not press forward/backward button or goes out of the range (3 meter) for more than 60 seconds, then park out will be aborted and vehicle will go to Ignition OFF state.

•

The hazard lamps will be on when keyfob park-out initiated until the park-out is completed or aborted.

•

Driver can abort park out operation by pressing lock button in the keyfob.

•

Parking brake gets applied automatically once the park out is completed.

•

If the forward/backward button is not pressed on the keyfob or driver is out of the range, the hazard lamps will be on but the vehicle will stop and parking operation will be paused.

10.1.9 Park-Out Using Phone

Assists the driver to park out the vehicle from a parking space using phone application Me4U irrespective the park-in was performed manually by the driver or using auto park assist.

Park-out using phone is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

Pre-conditions :

In settings “Phone Parking = enabled.

Me4U application installed and logged in

Vehicle is Ignition OFF and locked.

All doors, hood and tail gate in closed condition

Vehicle is connected to phone via Bluetooth (The phone must be already paired with the vehicle).

Android auto or Apple car play must not be paired.

Phone must be connected with Internet.

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees &

Driver should be outside the vehicle with phone and keyfob.

Park-out with phone is possible only if the vehicle application account is logged in with the KYC preferred number of the vehicle.

Steps to initiate park-out using the phone:

1. Launch Me4U application and ensure that the vehicle is online. If the vehicle is not connected, then refresh the home page and ensure that the vehicle is online.

•

Vehicle online status in “White colour” means the vehicle is offline.

•

Vehicle online status in “Green colour” means the vehicle is online.

2. The driver need to be outside the vehicle and open “Park assist” tab in phone application Me4U

3. The driver must select the “Park out” option being within a range of 4m to the vehicle and enter “Security PIN” to make vehicle ignition ON and drive enable.

4. Driver should select the park - out direction from the options displayed in the phone application based on the park-in space type (if the vehicle was parked using auto park in) and space availability in forward and backward direction.

5. The driver must continuously press and hold the drive button in phone application being present in a 4 meter radius of the vehicle.

6. After vehicle is parked out of the parking space successfully, “Park out completed!” page will be displayed in phone application.

•

During phone park out progress, the driver must be vigilant about the surroundings of the vehicle and must immediately release the drive button to stop the vehicle. It is the driver's responsibility to ensure the safety of their vehicle and surrounding vehicles/obstacles. The driver must maintain an unobstructed line of vision to the vehicle at all times while parking through the Me4U app

•

The driver must ensure obstacles or vehicles are not present in the path within 60 seconds and continue the park out using the drive button in the phone application.

•

If the driver does not press the drive button in phone or goes out of the bluetooth range (4 meter) for more than 60 seconds, then parking will be aborted and if the Keyfob is present outside the vehicle then the vehicle will go to ignition OFF state. Despite this feature, it is ultimately the responsibility of the driver to ensure that the vehicle is in Ignition OFF mode.

•

The hazard lamps will be on when the phone park out initiated until the park out completed or aborted.

•

If the drive button is not pressed on the phone or driver is out of the range, the hazard lamps will be on but the vehicle will stop and parking operation will be paused.

•

Driver can abort the park out operation using abort parking process button displayed in the phone application

10.1.10 Reverse Assist

Assists the driver in auto reverse motion for the last 50 meters the vehicle has traveled in forward direction.

Reverse assist is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

Preconditions:

In settings (Reverse assist = enabled).

Ignition ON and drive enabled.

Vehicle driven in forward direction at a speed < 10 kmph and with steering movement between +450° to –450°.

No error messages in APA screen.

Road/surface gradient should be less than 15 degrees.

All doors, hood, tailgate should be closed.

The driver’s seat belt should be buckled.

ORVMs unfolded.

•

If the vehicle is driven at a speed greater than 10 kmph in forward direction, then the path will not be memorized. The vehicle has to be driven at speed less than 10 kmph for memorizing the path.

•

If the vehicle has taken a sharp turn, where the steering angle is greater than +/- 450 degrees, then the path will not be memorized.

•

The system will only memorize the last 50 meters path.

Steps to initiate Reverse Assist:

1. Driver should press the brake, stop the vehicle and open the auto park application.

2. Select more options icon.

3. Driver must select the “Reverse Assist” icon to activate the feature.

4. “Please release the brake and steering wheel to start reverse assist” message displays on the screen.

5. Driver must release the brake and steering wheel. System takes control of the vehicle and start reverse motion and "Reverse assist in progress, please pay attentions to the surroundings, braking in “x” m” message displays on the screen.

•

It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure that the system has taken control before hands-off steering and release brake. Despite this, the driver must remain in active control of the vehicle and ready to take control of the steering wheel as and when required. When driving in reverse, observe the vehicle's surroundings.

6. After vehicle has covered the memorized path “Reverse assist completed!” pop-up displays on the screen.

10.1.11 Park Assist Emergency Braking (PAEB)

This feature can prevent collisions with obstacle when the vehicle is reversing at slow speeds.

PAEB is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

Preconditions:

In settings (Park assist emergency braking = enabled).

Vehicle is driven in reverse at speed >1 kph and < 8 kph.

No error related to auto park present.

•

If the park assist emergency braking is triggered, "Emergency brake applied" message will be displayed on the top of DID screen.

•

If the system is in fault state, "Emergency braking failed" message will be displayed on the top of DID screen.

•

For popup priority please refer the section

•

The park assist emergency braking feature is only an aid. It is not a substitute for driver's attention to the surroundings.

10.1.12 Auto Park Assist Recoverable Interruptions

Auto Park assist feature will be interrupted in the below mentioned conditions and the interruption should be recovered within 60 seconds to continue further.

Driver press brake

Hood is open

Trunk is open

Cabin door is open

Driver seat belt is not fastened

Outside rear view mirror is folded

Obstacle is detected in the path by system

Driver does not press forward/backward button on keyfob (applicable for keyfob park-in and park-out)

Driver does not press drive button in phone application ME4U (applicable for phone park-in and park-out)

10.1.13 Auto Park Assist Non-Recoverable Interruptions

Auto Park assist feature will be aborted in the below mentioned conditions.

Vehicle over-speed

Vehicle is on steeper slope

Gear intervene

Steering wheel intervene

Accelerator pedal intervene

Number of parking maneuvers exceeded

Park assist time limit exceeded

Electronic park brake intervene

Vehicle is blocked

10.

Space is insufficient

11.

Function conflict

12.

Number of interruption limit exceeded

13.

No operation by driver for 60 seconds

14.

Driver abort the operation using stop button/close button/ 360 degree camera button on display

15.

Driver press lock button on keyfob (applicable for keyfob park-in and park-out)

16.

Driver select abort parking button in phone application Me4U (applicable for phone park-in and park-out)

17.

System failure

*In case of system failure, get the vehicle inspected at a Mahindra authorised service provider.

10.1.14 Dimensions For Parking Slots

10.1.15 Auto Park Limitations

Detection Limitations of Auto Park Assistance System

The Auto Park Assistance system cannot detect and take action, If objects are fully or partially in cameras and sensors blind areas

For moving or approaching vehicles or objects or pedestrians or animals, etc.

Under scenarios of uneven road surface, broken road, bumpy road, under slope, over slopes, construction areas roads, garbage filled roads/areas roads with pits, construction sites, worn out & rough roads, over smooth glossy road surfaces, tiled road surfaces, cobble stone road surfaces, grassy areas & roads, snow filled roads, sandy roads, muddy roads, rocky roads, water filled roads, etc.

If curbs, stones, etc are under the vehicle or in immediate vicinity.

In external environment and weather conditions such as smoke & fumes, rain, snow, fog, extreme sunny high exposure, nighttime, low light areas, heavy storm & winds, etc

For potholes, trenches or drainages, excavations, pavement ends on roadside front or rear, ditches which are below the ground level.

For circular, conical, sharp edge, irregular shape (chains, ropes, etc) and narrow objects.

For objects that falls under the category of soft or porous materials like foam, fabric, and rubber, glossy, liquids, clothes, saree, etc which can absorb or deflect sound waves, results in poor detection of the object.

While parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels, speed bumps and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle.

10.

When the vehicle is overloaded, while parking/reversing by sensing, falsely detects road as obstacles.

11.

For thin posts, banners, or objects lower than the sensor, even if they have been detected once.

12.

For wire mesh, handrail, small objects (like bushes, boulders, flowerpot etc).

13.

For objects in hanging state or suspended in air and no reflected surface in the bottom in both dynamic and static condition

14.

For parts protruding out of vehicles, trucks, pick-ups, buses, etc.

15.

Obstacles (pillars, bikes, pedestrians, children, animals, cycles, tricycles, parking cones, parking lockers, wheel stoppers, cars placed deep inside parking space, etc) within the parking space.

16.

For the virtual parking space, if the driver selects onto an object, vehicle, bicycle, pedestrian, animals, child, bike, etc.

17.

In complex parking spaces, parking spaces with many pillars around it, in congested parking areas of markets, malls, airports, etc.

18.

For stair steps/steps

19.

If there's anything attached to the vehicle’s tow hitch, such as a ball hitch, bike rack, or trailer, etc.

20.

When the cameras or sensor surfaces are obstructed or covered by any means.

21.

When the cameras or sensor surfaces are pressurized, hit, broken or scratched with abrasive material.

22.

When the cameras or sensor assembly is disassembled

23.

If sound waves interfere from surrounding industrial areas, speakers, vehicles and other sources

24.

During Phone or Key fob Parking, when the driver release the button on Me4U app or key fob respectively to stop vehicle, as a slight delay might occur before the vehicle stops

25.

Different influences like steering movements, road characteristics etc can lead to deviations in the path followed by system.

26.

For the objects which are mentioned above as system limitations, the park-out direction might flicker or might display invalid direction

The driver is responsible to ensure safety of the vehicle and surroundings.

10.1.16 Parking Space Limitations

The system may release false slot (slot which may not be suitable for parking) or performance degrade. Due to presence any dividers, road cracks, or curbs of small height

For parking space with blur / dark / dirty / broken line / worn-out markings which might not be detected in some time

If pedestrians, animals, children, etc are inside the slot.

If some big obstacle is blocking the view of the slots.

In dark or low light intensity in open or underground parking spaces.

On the sidewalk (step above the road surface).

When driving towards bright lights or strong reflections, e.g., during noon, or setting sun.

When there are shadows in parking spaces creating illusion of parking spaces.

If there is presence of small objects, holes, ditches, road bumps curbs, raised pits, drains, etc within the parking space.

10.

Parking space without the line markings.

11.

Parking space in grassland and flower bed scene.

12.

If there is presence of Motor Bike, Bicycle within the parking space.

13.

When the vehicle is passing through the junction with curbs.

14.

When vehicles parked deep within the parking spaces.

15.

When the vehicles are of irregular shape like pickups, buses, trucks, etc.

16.

When the road pavement is cut in shape of the slot.

17.

If there is low contrast ratio of the parking space line markings wet ground surface.

18.

Parking space is with line markings of different colours other than yellow or white.

19.

If an obstacle placed in front of the parking space or parking space is at the end of the road obstructed by objects or wall, etc.

20.

When the adjacent parking space of the vehicle placement is irregular

21.

In garage with rods or walls as boundary and there is no parking space line or vehicles for parking spaces references.

22.

In no parking zone space or parking spaces with special markings.

23.

For parking spaces with irregular multiple marking (Eg: Angular and perpendicular) which may or may not be detected some time.

24.

Parking space filled with water, mud, garbage, leaves, snow & ice.

Driver is responsible to ensure safety of the vehicle and surroundings, for taking a decision to meet the parking and traffic law & regulations

10.2 Advance Parking Assist System (APAS) (If equipped)

Parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking. System will detect the obstacles in front or/and rear of the vehicle within the ultra sonic sensors range. The PAS will alert the driver with visual and audible warning.

Parking Assistance System Sensors

The vehicle is equipped with a total of 12 ultrasonic sensors, with 6 sensors integrated into the front bumper and 6 sensors in the rear bumper.

Front Sensors Location

Rear Sensors Location

RPAS and FPAS will give alerts at vehicle speed less than 10 kmph.

To ensure the proper functioning of the ultrasonic sensors, always keep them clean and free from ice formation, dust, water or any other foreign objects.

Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing as the sensors might be damaged.

Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurat.

•

PAS is an assistance system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

•

Any accessory addition on bumper will affect the performance of system.

•

System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level.

•

Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system.

Activation & De-activation of PAS

The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking Assistance System.

When the obstacles come in the sensing range, the system starts giving the indication based on the distance and direction of the obstacles as defined in the detecting zones. The closer the obstacle(s), the respective display bars get highlighted and beeps alert. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacle in its path.

Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle detected by sensor is closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacles is near the vehicle.

If the issue persists, visit an authorised dealer or service provider for inspection

Reverse Gear

RPAS & FPAS will be activated i.e. all 12 sensors will be active.

RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or vehicle speed is more than 10 kmph.

Drive or Neutral Gear

FPAS will be activated, ie., Front 6 sensors and rear side sensors will be active.

FPAS chimes can be enabled or disabled with the switch on the driver side switch bank.

FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than 10 kmph or Park gear is engaged or vehicle is in standstill condition.

The FPAS/RPAS are supplementary assistance features designed to support the driver. However, these systems do not replace the driver's vigilance or responsibility. Driver must always remain attentive and actively check the vehicle's surroundings to ensure safety. Mahindra will not be held responsible or liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from the use of these systems under any circumstances.

10.2.1 Pay Attention

1. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. Applicable for all sensors.

2. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind and in front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the PAS information updated in DID be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.

3. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A will not be detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.

4. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves reflected from the clothes.

5. The distance indication may vary with respective highlighted bars in different colors due to different size of the obstacles at different positions.

6. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.

7. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get reflected away.

10.2.2 Limitations of PAS

•

System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level.

•

System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by sensors.

•

System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle. Objects that fall under the category of soft or porous materials like foam, fabric, and rubber, liquids which can absorb or deflect sound waves, results in poor detection of the object. Sometimes system might not detect the object which fall in this category.

•

System may not detect any obstacle in hanging state, both static and dynamic.

•

System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels, speed breakers, or any bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle.

•

System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded.

•

System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain or vice versa.

•

System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions.

•

The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:

–

Sharply-angled objects

–

Curved kerb

–

Low obstacles

–

Obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle

•

If any object/obstacle has an irregular shape/size, etc and depending upon other environmental factors, the detection distance may vary.

•

Obstacles will not be detected if they are too close to the sensor(s).

•

Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once.

•

Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights, etc.

•

System may cause sensor(s) to give false alarms due to high-pitched vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noise producing ultrasonic waves within the vicinity of the vehicle.

The conditions listed above do not represent every possible scenario that may interfere with PAS. Additional factors may prevent it from operating as intended. Always remain vigilant and keep your attention on the road so you can anticipate and respond quickly to potential hazards.

10.3 Parking Assistance System (PAS) – RPAS & FPAS (If equipped)

Parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse and in front. While Parking, PAS will detect the obstacles at the rear and front side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors and windshield. The PAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle from the vehicle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.

Parking Assistance System Sensors

Front Sensor Location

Rear Sensor Location

Two PAS sensors are located in the rear bumper and two sensors are located in front Bumper to assist driver for hassle free parking

RPAS and FPAS will give proper alerts at vehicle speed less than 8 kmph.

Always keep the sensors clean and free from ice formation, dust, water etc. for proper working of the system.

Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could be damaged.

Magnetic devices present in the detection range could vastly affect the sensor performance and the distance displayed may not be accurat.

Driving and Operation

•

PAS is an aiding/ assistive system. Under no circumstances shall Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons accept any responsibility or be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

•

System will not sense pot holes, trenches or drainages which are below the ground level

•

Repainting of the sensor will affect the performance of the system

Activation & De-activation of PAS

•

The Vehicle should be in Ignition ON state to activate the Parking assistance system

•

RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear engaged and Park Brake is disengaged

•

RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Park brake is engaged

•

FPAS will be activated automatically in D mode and Park brake is disengaged when Vehicle speed is in between 1 to 8 kmph or vehicle is standstill.

•

FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than 8 kmph or Park brake is engaged or reverse gear is engaged.

•

10.3.1 PAS (RPAS & FPAS) Information on Center Information Display (CID) Screen

RPAS display on Center Information Display (CID) screen gives the following information:

•

Left zone indicates obstacle on left side

•

Right zone indicates obstacle on right side

•

If Obstacle is in center then left and Right both zone will get highlight.

3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 3rd bar alone indicate being distant.

FPAS display on Center Information Display (CID) screen gives the following information:

•

Left Corner zone indicates obstacle on left side

•

Right Corner Zone indicates obstacle on the right side

2 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle front bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and 2nd bar alone indicate being distant.

10.3.2 Operation of PAS

Activation & De-activation of PAS

•

The Vehicle should be in Ignition ON state to activate the Parking assistance system

•

RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear engaged and Park Brake is disengaged

•

RPAS will get deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Park brake is engaged

•

FPAS will be activated automatically in D mode and R mode when Park brake is disengaged and Vehicle speed is between 1 to 8 kmph or vehicle is standstill.

•

FPAS will get deactivated when vehicle speed is more than 8 kmph or Park brake is engaged reverse gear is disengaged.

•

•

Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.

The Beep sound can be heard from the front speaker. Frequency of the beep would increase if obstacle detected by sensor is closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is near the vehicle.

FPAS warning sound can be disabled using PAS Switch, available on driver side switch bank. PAS switch LED will not glow when FPAS sound is in active state and will be in ON state when PAS sound deactivated.

10.3.3 Pay Attention

1. If bars in any one of the sides are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on Center Information Display (CID), contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

2. If all bars are displayed with ‘?’ marks and “Park Assist Fail” is displayed on Driver Information Display/Center Information Display (DID/CID), contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

3. Obstacle in the blind zone cannot be sensed by the system. Applicable for all sensors.

4. Please check the condition of the obstacle behind and in front of your vehicle before moving. In some cases, the display may be not as same as reality due to the installed sensor level, obstacle shape and reflection condition.

5. Point B will be detected sooner or later, but A may not be detected at all. Applicable for all sensors.

6. Not all obstacles are detected from 120 cm. For instance, a person is detected from 75 cm because of the weak reflection or absorption of the waves of the clothes.

7. The distance indication may move up and down due to different sizes of the obstacle at different positions.

8. Though the obstacle is in the sensing zone, obstacle may not be detected since the ultrasonic waves are not reflected back to the sensor.

9. The obstacle of a conical shape may not be detected, since the ultrasonic waves get reflected away

10.3.4 Limitations of PAS

•

System may not sense obstacles like wire mesh, handrail, small objects which are below the bumper level

•

System may not sense obstacles with cotton or spongy surface, which will absorb ultrasonic waves emitted by PAS

•

System performance is dependent on the reflection angle of the obstacle

•

System may give false alert without obstacles while parking/reversing the vehicle on grasslands, gravels and bumpy roads considering it to be an obstacle

•

System may alert you by sensing the ground when the bumper is not fitted in its intended position or when the vehicle is overloaded

•

System may give false signal while the vehicle moves from plain ground to a slope terrain and vice versa

•

System may give false signal by sensing the ground when the bumper is tilted more from the normal position or when the vehicle is heavily overloaded

•

System may give false signal an alarm during heavy rain, snow and heavy wind conditions

•

The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Some obstacles for example as follows:

–

Sharply-angled objects

–

Tall or curved curb

–

Low obstacles (with height of 40 cm above ground level)

–

Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of the vehicle

•

Depending upon the shape of the obstacle and other environmental factors, the detection distance may shorten or detection may be impossible

•

Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor

•

Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached, even if they have been detected once

•

Because of other ultrasonic sources, sensor may give false alarm for e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners and neon lights

•

Due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves, the vicinity of the vehicle is noisy. It may cause sensor to give false alarm

10.3.5 Reverse Parking Assistance System (RPAS) (If equipped)

Reverse parking assistance system is provided to aid the driver while parking the vehicle in reverse at a speed of less than 8 kmph. While reversing, RPAS will detect the obstacles at the rear side of the vehicle within the sensing zone, which cannot be viewed through the internal rear-view mirror and the outside rear view mirrors. The RPAS will then alert the driver by a beep sound and display about the location of the detected obstacle. The alert sound level will vary proportional to the distance. Smaller the distance shorter the interval between the beeps.

Activation & de-activation of RPAS

•

The Vehicle should be in IGN ON state to activate the Parking assistance system

•

RPAS will be activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged and Park Brake is disengaged

•

RPAS will be deactivated when reverse gear is disengaged or Park brake is engaged.

•

RPAS display on Driver Information Display / Center Information Display (DID/CID) screen gives the following information:

•

Left zone indicates obstacle on left side

•

Right zone indicates obstacle on right side

•

If obstacle is in center then right and left both zone will get highlight

3 bars indicate how close the obstacle is from the vehicle rear bumper, with all bars highlighted being very close and bar 3rd bar alone being distant.

10.3.5.1 Operation of RPAS

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Change the gear from neutral to reverse and disengage the Park brake for RPAS information on Driver Information Display / Center Information Display (DID/CID) screen.

The RPAS will be displayed in the Driver Information Display / Center Information Display (DID/CID) screen during obstacle detection.

3. Start moving the vehicle in reverse direction

4. Display bars in the respective direction will glow according to obstacles in its path.

5. The Beep sound can be heard from the driver side speaker. Frequency of the beep will increase if obstacle comes closer (crossing each display bar) and the sound will be continuous if any of the obstacle is less than 50 cm.

Pay Attention: If Driver Information Display / Center Information Display (DID/CID) gives 3 sec continuous beep alert tone whenever reverse gear engaged, Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer.

RPAS is an aiding system. Under no circumstances will Mahindra accept any responsibility or can be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

10.4 Rear View Camera (RVC) (if equipped)

Rear View Camera is located near the tail gate of the vehicle.

Rear View Camera assists the driver while reversing & maneuvering the Car at lower speeds. It has the following features:

Normal Rear View

Wide Rear View

Zoomed in Rear View

Zoomed in Wide Rear View

Static & Dynamic Guidelines

1. Normal Rear View

By selecting RVC icon in CID home screen, Rear View camera will provide view of vehicle's rear surrounding.

It overcomes limitations of IRVM, where ground is visible only after longer distance from vehicle rear. Whereas in the RVC Normal view, the ground will be visible closer to the rear of vehicle along with PAS screen.

2. Wide Rear View

By selecting Wide view icon, Rear View camera will show panoramic surroundings view without PAS screen so that minimal of vehicle body gets visible.

3. Zoomed Rear View

By selecting Zoom Icon, Rear View camera will provide a closer view of the ground areas near to the rear of vehicle with PAS screen.

4. Zoomed Wide Rear View

By selecting Zoom icon in Wide view screen, Rear View camera will give both closer & panoramic surroundings view of the ground areas near to the rear of vehicle without PAS screen.

5. Static & Dynamic Guidelines

Guidelines shall assist the driver in understanding the position/placement of the vehicle with respect to the surroundings by displaying overlays with representation for the ego vehicle movement when driven straight and when driven in a path.

Dynamic Guidelines indicate path, the vehicle will traverse with current steering position.

This will help the driver in adjusting the steering, towards hitting any obstacles.

Color coding on the Static guideline helps in assessing the distance of obstacle from the vehicle’s rear. In the RVC Video, Red colored section of Static Line falls on an object, then the object is within 0.5 meter distance from the vehicle’s rear. Likewise, Amber indicates till 1 meter, Green indicates 1-3 mts.

Entry Conditions

Whenever you apply the reverse gear, the CID will enter into ‘Rear View Camera Mode’ and displays the video without closing button.

You can view reverse video with close button, by selecting Reverse View Camera Option present on CID Screen, irrespective of the gear position.

Below is the path: App drawer -> Reverse View Camera.

Rear view screen when enter through CID displays video with close button, then again when reverse gear is engaged rear view without close button will be displayed

You cannot enter RVC Mode, through the CID screen button, if the vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph.

Exit Conditions

•

CID has entered ‘RVC Mode’ due to reverse gear, then when driver disengages reverse gear then Rear-view mode will be closed and CID home screen will be opened

•

CID has entered ‘RVC Mode’, due to Reverse Camera selection present on the CID, then RVC mode can be exited, by selecting the Cancel button appearing on the screen

•

RVC Mode is exited, whenever vehicle is in forward gear and vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph

10.4.1 Camera Maintenance

Always keep the Camera lens clean from dust. Presence of dirt on lens may lead to poor image quality.

Always use clear water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.

Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the rear-view camera with a power washer.

•

In case of any RVC-related issues, the CID shall display Please ‘Contact Service Center’ and the vehicle needs to be taken to the Service Center. Avoid using the Rear-View Camera under these circumstances

•

If rear of your vehicle is damaged or if the Camera position is changed, please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorized Service Center, for recalibrating the Camera.

10.4.2 System Limitations

•

Reverse view camera may not operate normally, when you drive in the extremely high or low temperature area. (Operating temperature: -20°C ~ 65°C)

•

Under certain circumstances given below, the rear-view camera system will work with limitation or will not function fully:

•

–

In heavy rain, snow or fog.

–

At night or in very dark places.

–

If the camera is exposed to very bright light sources.

–

Display may flicker if the camera area is lit by LED or fluorescent lighting.

•

If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot areas

•

If the camera lens got dirty or obstructed

•

If the rear of your vehicle got damaged. And if the Camera position and the settings got changed. Please contact the nearest Mahindra Authorized Service Center

•

The camera image reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing. As the display is 2-dimensional, pointed and protruding obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognize. Please avoid reverse view camera in the above situation. It could otherwise injure others or damage objects and your vehicle

•

The performance gets affected sometimes due to deposition of ice, dust, heavy rain, heavy wind, heavy exhaust on the camera

•

In cases where the camera’s view is obstructed by an object. Do not hit hard on the camera to avoid damage to the sensors.

•

Images shown on the display are mirror-inverted manner, like the rearview mirror. Make sure that no people or animals and any objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the car. Driver is legally responsible for their car

•

The conditions listed above do not represent every possible scenario that may interfere with this system. Additional factors may prevent it from operating as intended. Always remain vigilant and keep your attention on the road so you can anticipate and respond quickly to potential hazards.

•

The reverse view camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective & inaccurately

•

Avoid using rear-view camera, if you are having eye color blindness or impaired color vision

•

Objects above the ground or hanging may appear to be far away than they are. But objects shall be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increase the risk of collision with your car

•

It is the driver’s responsibility to identify a suitable parking area to park his car safely

•

Rear view videos are shown whenever reverse gear is applied, but it cannot be used as a rear-view monitoring system, which cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors

Rear View Camera is only meant to aid the driver and to enhance convenience while parking. It does not in any way replace the driver’s abilities and driving skills while using this system. Under any circumstances, Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons do not accept any responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system.

10.5 360° Camera (If equipped)

The 360° Camera assists in parking and low speed maneuvering by displaying different views of the vehicle’s surroundings on the screen to the driver with the help of 4 Cameras located in the front grille, tailgate, and both exterior mirrors. Driver can activate 360° Camera through app drawer (soft button) or 360° Camera switch or on engaging reverse gear. The 360° Camera app exits automatically when the speed is exceeded.

Once activated, it delivers a detailed 360° surround view, helping the driver navigate tight spaces and obstacles with ease and confidence.

Before using the system, ensure that all camera lenses are clean and free from dust, dirt, or any obstructions that may impair the system. External mirrors shall be fully unfolded. Regularly inspect and clean the lenses to maintain optimal functionality. Ensure the camera lenses are not damaged and are fully functional/ operational.

Disclaimer

•

The 360° camera system provides a visual display of the surroundings but does not detect or alert the driver about obstacles. It is the driver's responsibility to carefully observe the environment and check for potential collisions with obstacles.

•

There is an approximate blind area based on the mounting where the cameras cannot see around the periphery of the vehicle. Driver must be careful to check manually these blind spots for potential obstacles to ensure safe maneuvering.

•

The 360° camera system creates a seamless view by stitching images from four cameras aligned to specific geometric orientations. If the position or installation angle of any camera is altered, such as following a collision, the stitching accuracy may be compromised. For safety reasons, avoid using the system until it has been inspected and recalibrated.

•

If the exterior mirror is folded or misaligned, the image stitching for the 360° camera system may become inaccurate.

•

Use the 360° camera only when all the doors, hood and the tailgate is closed.

•

The area around the vehicle is shown using camera stitched images and the car image is a standard graphic shown by the system. Hence the car image shown on the screen is not real and may not represent your actual vehicle.

•

Objects and obstacles above the camera height or out of the field of view of the cameras are not displayed.

•

Camera lenses provide a wide coverage of surroundings which results in objects appearing slightly different from the actual and may not be dimensionally same as real as on the screen.

10.5.1 360° Camera Activation and Deactivation

Use any of the following methods to activate 360° Camera

•

Select “360° camera” Icon from CID screen app drawer.

•

Engage reverse gear using shift lever

•

Select “360° camera” from the roof console.

360° camera deactivates when one of the following action is performed

•

Driver presses “Close button” in 360° camera app in CID screen.

•

360° camera switch is pressed again.

•

Vehicle speed exceeds 20 kmph while driving forward unless 360° camera activation was done above 20 kmph.

•

Vehicle gear is changed from non-park (N/D/R) to park gear (P) and no operation has been performed for 8 seconds.

When reverse gear is engaged, 360° camera cannot be deactivated by 360° camera switch or close button.

360° Camera is a supplementary driving assist function therefore under any circumstance it cannot replace vigilance or responsibility of driver. Always pay attention and check the vehicle's surroundings for safety. Do not solely rely on what is displayed on the screen. What you see on the screen may differ from the actual vehicle's location and surroundings.

Under any circumstances, Mahindra or its directors, officers and key managerial persons do not accept any responsibility and cannot be held liable for any direct or indirect, incidental or consequential damage caused by this system

10.5.2 360° Camera Views

360° Camera provides various features for assistance such as 2D front (panoramic view, normal view, top view), 2D rear (panoramic view, normal view, top view), corner views, 3D view, parking guidelines, transparent view, blind view monitor, video recording, etc. The system allows for enhanced interaction, enabling the driver to swipe, zoom in, and zoom out on 3D view. The respective 2D/3D view can be displayed on the left side of the top view for convenience. Additionally, the driver can seamlessly switch between the 360° Camera and the Auto Park application.

Refer to the following sections for detailed instructions on using each feature effectively.

How to select views

•

For the ease of the driver, names of all the views have been provided in the app along with the icon rib.

•

The small car icon on the top left corner of the top view panel is the transparent view icon.

•

When in 3D view touch the car model on top view screen to enable 8 oval touch points around the vehicle and by selecting each touch points 3D surrounding of the vehicle can be seen from 8 different angles.

•

3D View will not be available at vehicle speed above 20 kmph.

•

8 Oval touch points in top view will be automatically hidden if no operations is performed for 8 seconds.

•

Transparent view will not be available on speed above 20 kmph.

•

The video feed displayed beneath the vehicle in transparent view is not a real-time feed.

•

The front of the vehicle swings out more than the rear of the vehicle.

•

Maintain sufficient distance to the obstacles so that the exterior mirrors or the corners of the vehicle does not collide with any obstacles.

Sl. No	Icons	Description
1.		Front 2D View: Assists the driver to view front surrounding in 2D.
2.		Front Wide View: Assists the driver to view panoramic surroundings.
3.		Front Top View: Assists the driver to view zoomed-in front top of the vehicle.
4.		Rear 2D View: Assists the driver to view rear surroundings in 2D.
5.		Rear Wide View: Assists the driver to view panoramic surroundings.
6.		Rear Top View: Assists the driver to view zoomed-in rear top of the vehicle.
7.		All Corner View: Displays the view close to all four tyres i.e., front left, front right, rear left, and rear right.
8.		Front Corner View: Displays the view close to front two tyres ie., front left and front right.
9.		Rear Corner View: Displays the view close to rear two tyres ie., rear left and rear right.
10.		3D View: Assists the driver to view stitched 360° surroundings equipped with swipe, zoom-in, and zoom-out functionality.
11.		Transparent View: Assists the driver to view the road beneath the vehicle.

•

A pop-up message on the screen appears

When:

- The tailgate is open.

- The driver's door is open.

- The passenger's door is open.

360° camera displays the combined images from the four cameras. Therefore, the displayed image may be different from the actual vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Make sure that no persons or animals or any objects/materials are in the maneuvering area. Pay attention and ensure safety before maneuvering the vehicle.

10.5.3 Static & Dynamic Guidelines

Static and dynamic guidelines can be used as reference for parking and maneuvers only and may differ if camera orientation is altered due to passenger occupancy.

•

Static Guidelines provide indicative distance of the objects with reference to vehicle.

•

Color coding (Red=0.5m, Orange=1m, Green=3m) on the static lines help in assessing the distance of the obstacles [at the leveled ground] from the vehicle’s boundary.

•

Dynamic Guidelines (Blue) indicate the path the vehicle will traverse with reference to the current steering angle.

10.5.4 Swivel Mode

Feature assists by providing additional left or right view area along with dynamic guidelines (Blue colour) when driver rotates the steering wheel anti-clockwise or clockwise respectively.

Left Side

Right Side

10.5.5 Automatic Junction View for Cross Traffic Alert (if equipped)

It is an alert system provided to the user during maneuvers when any object passes by behind the vehicle suddenly. The system switches to panoramic view with 3 red arrows on screen in the direction of the passing vehicle.

10.5.6 Blind View Monitor (BVM)

Blind View Monitor provides left and right rear views which are usually in blind area and assists the driver during switching lanes or cutting in to another road. The view will be visible on driver display and by turning the indicator up or down, the view can be changed to left and right respectively.

Left Side

Right Side

Other warning messages on driver display take priority over BVM hence BVM may not be available always when you activate it.

BVM view may not be visible clearly during nighttime due to camera limitations.

BVM only provides view assistance and may not detect, alert or control any vehicles in blind area. Like all assistance functions, BVM has limitations. Sole reliance on the system may result in a collision. The driver must remain in active control of the vehicle at all times during use of this feature

Objects are closer than they appear. Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to change the lane before doing so may result in crash and serious injury or death.

Preconditions

•

For BVM to work, all doors, hood, and tailgate should be closed.

•

BVM should be enabled in vehicle settings on CID screen.

Steps to Activate/Deactivate:

•

BVM can be activated/deactivated in My Vehicles >> Exterior >> Blind View Monitor (Enable/Disable).

•

To turn off BVM, switch off turn indicator.

10.5.7 Dirt Detection on camera lens

If any foreign object/dirt/any other substance is on the camera lens, a pop up is displayed on the 360° camera screen notifying the driver to keep the cameras clean.

Before using the camera, such foreign object or dirt should be immediately cleaned to avoid interruption in detection capacity of the system.

10.5.8 Secure360 (If equipped)

Secure360 displays the live feed and captures video footage of the vehicle surroundings using 360° camera and vehicle interior using DOMS camera (if equipped for Secure360), which may be useful for fault diagnosis, accident evidence collection, and record special events.

Live Feed

Displays the exterior 360° camera and interior DOMS camera live video feed. Driver can tap on each of the Front/Rear/Left/Right view and switch to respective enlarged camera view and vice-versa.

Precondition:

Vehicle speed should be below 20 Kmph.

Live feed activation:

Use any of the following methods to activate live feed.

1. Select "Secure 360" icon from CID screen app drawer.

2. Select My Vehicles -> Exterior -> Security -> Live Feed -> Open

3. Select folder icon displayed in the top left corner in 360° camera and select live feed tab.

Secure360 Live Stream

Secure360 live stream allows the user to monitor vehicle surroundings. To use this feature, the user must enable Secure360 in settings.

Go to My Vehicles->Exterior->Security-> Secure360->Enable

Precondition:

Vehicle ignition should be OFF.

Secure360 Live Stream Activation:

Use any of the following methods:

1. Using Me4U App:

Steps: Open Me4U App --> Click on Secure360--> Click on Car Model--> Enter Pin--> View the Live Feed

2. In case of any vehicle theft attempt on door transition, 'Watch Live Now' notification will be displayed by Me4U App (If equipped).

Steps:

Click on 'Watch Live Now Notification--> Click on Car Model--> Enter Pin--> View the Live Feed

Live Feed can be accessed if there is no USB.

Recordings

Records the exterior 360° camera and interior DOMS camera (if equipped for Secure360). Recordings will start and will be saved based on the type of triggers as personal, emergency, and Secure360.

•

Emergency and Secure360 recorded videos shall be saved in My Drive when DVR USB is not connected or DVR USB memory is full (provided Space is Available in My Drive).

•

If USB is connected and Space is Available, personal, emergency, and Secure360, videos will get saved in the respective folders.

•

Personal, Emergency, and Secure360 videos cannot be overwritten and can be manually deleted by the driver.

Personal Recording

Activation of Personal Recording

Use any of the following methods:

1. Select the icon available in Secure360 app.

2. Select the icon available in 360Camera app.

Deactivation of Personal Recording

Use any of the following methods:

1. Click on stop icon in Secure360 .

2. Click on stop icon in 360° camera app

Emergency Recording

Activation of Emergency Recording: Emergency videos will get recorded during special events.

Emergency recording takes priority over Personal recording.

Emergency Recorded Videos cannot be overwritten and can be manually deleted by the driver.

Secure360 Recording

Activation of Secure360 Recording:

1. Vehicle IGN OFF state

2. Any vehicle theft attempt on door transition.

Secure360 recording allows the user to monitor suspicious activities around the vehicle in OFF state. To use this feature, the user must enable Secure360 in settings.

Go to My Vehicles ->Exterior -> Security -> Secure360 ->Enable

•

The user can view Secure360 and emergency recording videos in mobile app as well.

•

The recording icon and recording time appear on the “Live View” screen when a video is recorded.

Playback Video

•

Playback video of each type of recordings can be accessed in their respective folder names under Recordings tab in Secure360 app.

•

The saved video file name is as per date and time of recorded video. Video files are saved with AVI file extension.

Eg. File Name:

Video File Name Format Eg: VID_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS_XX; where XX corresponds to the Type of Recording as mentioned below:

1. Personal Recording: MYREC

2. Emergency: EMGY

3. Sentry (or) Car Shield: CAR_SHLD

01Mar23 - DDMMYYYY (D-Day, M-Month, Y-Year)

163028 - HHMMSS (H-Hour,M-Minute, S-Second)

Delete Files

Recorded files can be deleted by two ways:

1. Click on the three dots on right side of the respective folder -> Delete

2. By long pressing the respective folder, single/multiple files can be selected and deleted.

Format Drive

The user can format the drive if the USB storage is full as follows:

Go to My Vehicles->Exterior-> Security->Format Drive.

10.5.9 360° Camera Settings Menu

1. Default View: Driver can select default view for 360° camera as per convenience.

2. Brightness control: Driver can adjust brightness for 360° camera as per convenience.

3. Swivel Mode: Driver can enable/disable swivel mode for 360° camera & Auto Park as per convenience.

4. 3D:

a. 3D Surround Scan: Driver can enable/disable 3D surround scan for 360° camera as per convenience.

b. Automatic side view based on turn indicator: Driver can enable/disable automatic side view based on turn indicator for 360° camera as per convenience.

5. Overlays:

a. Parking Sensor: Driver can select the type of view in parking sensor for 360° camera & Auto Park as per convenience.

b. Static guidelines: Driver can select the type of view in static guidelines for 360° camera & Auto Park as per convenience.

c. Dynamic guidelines: Driver can select the type of view in dynamic guidelines for 360° camera & Auto Park as per convenience.

6. Automatic junction view for cross traffic alert: Driver can enable/disable the feature for 360° camera & Auto Park as per convenience.

7. Automatic top view based on parking sensor: Driver can enable/disable the feature for 360° camera & Auto Park as per convenience.

10.5.10 360° Camera Troubleshooting

•

When there is any error in system/camera lost connection, the corresponding camera view on screen shows green or blue color with pop up as “Please contact service center.” Visit the nearest Mahindra Service Center for assistance.

10.5.11 System Limitations

•

360° camera is subject to certain system limitation and may be unavailable or only partially available in the following situations:

- During bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

- At night or in very dark places.

- Display may flicker, if the area around cameras is lit by LED or any fluorescent lighting.

- If there is a sudden change in temperature, from cold to hot.

- If your vehicle is damaged or/and if any camera position or/and the settings is changed.

- When rain, snow, dirt or an object adheres in front of the camera lens.

- When strong light rays fall on the camera. (For example, the light directly shines on the front of the vehicle at sunrise or sunset).

- When a sudden change in brightness occurs. (For example, when the vehicle enters or exits a tunnel or under a bridge).

•

Video may get blur if camera is exposed to bright light and area around is dark/shadowed.

•

360° camera images are reproduced slightly delayed and not in real time due to processing and stitching.

•

Sometimes during 360° camera activation, you may not see stable video feed as some parameters update happens.

•

If video file is corrupted, you may observe black screen while replaying the video and system will reset to default view.

•

If the SD card is corrupted or disconnected, a pop-up does not appear on the HMI screen. Impact: In the Inglo app, secure 360 will show the text “Feed not available” continuously.

•

Secure360 may not record properly if the power is interrupted in between usage. e.g., during crash, low battery, removal of battery and other reasons.

•

If the pendrive is not connected, then DVR video file sharing will not happen.

•

360° camera is only a supplementary function and may display obstacles from a distorted perspective.

•

Avoid using 360° camera if you are having color blindness or impaired color vision.

•

Objects above the ground or hanging objects may appear to be farther away than they are. However, in reality, objects may be closer to your car. In such cases, avoid using guidelines to judge the distance. Since it leads to mis-adjustments and increases the risk of collision with your car.

•

360° camera video is shown based on driver activation, but it cannot be used to see a complete surrounding view. The feature cannot replace the driver for looking into exterior and interior view mirrors.

•

Some obstacles are hard to depict and thus very difficult to recognize due to stitched images, hence sole-reliance on the system may result in a collision.

System Maintenance

•

Always keep all camera lens clean. Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error and reduced visibility.

•

Always use clean water & soft nonabrasive cloth to clean the lens.

•

Don’t clean the camera lens and the area around the cameras with a power washer.

•

When 360° camera parts need to be replaced due to damage/ non-functioning / any other reason, the app will not open on clicking and give a pop up as “360° camera app not available.”

•

Always clean camera lens smoothly and don’t apply much pressure.

11 Climate Control System

Climate Control system provided in the vehicle enables occupants to automatically/manually adjust air flow distribution pattern, air flow rate, air intake mode and air temperature inside passenger compartment.
By appropriately selecting the options provided on the Center Information Display (CID) touchscreen, located on center console, occupant’s comfort can be ensured.
Climate control system also helps in defogging / de-misting the windshield and windows. Air flow direction can be further controlled by adjusting louvres of air vents. An air filter is provided at the inlet of blower.
PTC type electric cabin heater is used to heat the cabin air. For cooling the cabin air, an air conditioning circuit based on the vapor compression refrigeration cycle is used. The air conditioning system uses a refrigerant along with a suitable lubricating oil.
Although being non-ozone depleting, the refrigerant is a greenhouse gas, hence once allowed to escape in the atmosphere, it adversely affects the environment by contributing to global warming/climate change

Refrigerant used in system is a hazardous liquefied gas and is under high pressure.

The refrigerant is colorless and has ethereal or faint sweetish odor. Exposure of refrigerant to skin or eyes may cause irritation and frostbite.

They can also cause suffocation, dizziness and loss of concentration. When mixed with compressed air or certain other refrigerants, it may form flammable mixture. Never try to service Climate control system yourself which would involve refrigerant handling. Mahindra shall not be liable for any loss or damage result from such self-servicing. Further, such self-servicing will void the warranty.

If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all the windows closed, You may suffocate to death due to lack of ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ventilate frequently.

Multiple vents are provided for distributing the air, being force-circulated by blower, throughout the passenger compartment.

To ensure sufficient air flow and hence adequate Climate control system performance, air flow path should be kept free of obstructions. Keep system’s air intake, located near plenum appliqué, free of snow, leaves and other debris. Also keep the area in front of air vents free of any obstruction inside the cabin.

During charging of the vehicle with ignition OFF condition, sometimes it can be observed that the A/C touch control panel lights getting ON. This is a normal behavior and happens since the A/ C compressor is active for battery cooling. However, cabin A/C will not turn ON unless it is turned ON by user either through the ICC switch input or through the app.

11.1 Air Vents

A	Front Defogger
B	Side Defogger Vents
C	Front Vents
D	Front Foot Vents
E	Rear AC Center Vents
F	Rear AC Foot Vents

Front Vents: You can adjust the direction of the airflow by adjusting the louvers.

Rear AC Center Vents: Rear AC vents are located on the rear side of the center console. It can be closed when it is not required.

Rear AC Foot Vents: Rear AC Foot Vents are located on the rear side of the center console under driver and co-driver seats.

11.2 Climate Control Through Center Information Display (CID) Screen

•

Press App Drawer-> Vehicle Apps-> Select climate-> Classic/Smart

•

Press App Drawer-> All Apps-> Select climate-> Classic/Smart

Climate Controls – Classic

A	AQI Indicator	K	Foot Mode
B	Air Ionizer Indicator	L	Ventilated seat Controls - Co-Driver
C	Auto Modes	M	Sync
D	Rear Defogger	N	Driver Only
E	Front defogger	O	Ventilated seat Controls-Driver
F	Auto Defogger	P	Face Mode (Driver and Co-Driver)
G	Recirculation/Fresh Air mode	Q	SET Temperature — Co-driver
H	Rear A/C (ON/OFF)	R	Blower Speed
I	A/C (ON/OFF)	S	Blower Speed control
J	Power ON/OFF	T	SET Temperature — Driver

Sync Mode, driver only mode and individual temperature & mode controls for driver and co-driver is applicable only if vehicle is equipped with Dual Zone control (DATC)

Power ON/OFF: Touch to turn on/off climate control system

Auto: Touch to turn on/off auto mode. There are 3 auto modes - Auto 1 , Auto 2 and Auto 3. Each auto mode will have different blower speeds in the increasing order.
i.e, Auto mode 1 will have lower blower speeds, Auto mode 2 will have medium blower speeds and Auto mode 3 will have higher blower speeds.

In these auto modes, based on the user set temperature, other modes are automatically adjusted to attain desired comfort inside the vehicle.

In extreme high/low ambient conditions, Blower speed will be set higher even in Auto 1 mode, to meet the requirements. Once the set temperature is attained in the cabin, blower speed will be reduced.

AQI indicator : AQI indicator displays Air Quality Index value inside the cabin.

VR LED Indicatior: "Air filter ON" indicates the air VR LED is working to purify and remove the bad odor from the air

Rear Defogger: Touch to turn on/off rear defogger. The rear defogger heats the rear windshield clearing the fog / mist

Front Defogger: Touch to turn on/off windshield defogger. The windshield defogger heats the windshield clearing the fog / mist

Auto Defogger: Touch to turn on/off auto defogger. Auto defogger will heat the front windshield upon detecting mist/fog, it will turned off automatically once fog/mist is cleared

Recirculation: Touch to toggle between fresh air mode and recirculation mode. In recirculation mode air inside the vehicle will recirculate instead of the outside air, which will help the vehicle cool faster. In fresh air mode, fresh air from outside the vehicle is sucked by the blower and utilized further to cool/hear the cabin.

Air distribution modes: Touch on the desired mode of face/foot to direct airflow towards face/upper body or foot/lower body. This adjustment is available for both driver and co-driver shown on respective side in the climate control screen

Individual mode controls for driver and co-driver is applicable only if vehicle is equipped with Dual Zone control (DATC)

Rear A/C : Touch to turn on/off air conditioning system for second row seated passengers

A/C: Touch to turn on/off air conditioning. Turning it off will allow only the blower to run with the existing temperature.

Driver/Co-driver Ventilator Seat Controls: Touch to turn on/off the seat ventilation system. Once turned on air flow to the seats can be adjusted in three levels by repeatedly touching the button before turning off. This adjustment is available for both driver and co- passenger shown on respective side in the climate control screen

Sync: Touch to turn on/off sync mode. Turning it on will keep same set temperature settings on both driver and co-drive side.

Driver Only: Touch to turn on/off Driver only mode. In driver-only mode, the airflow and air conditioning will be directed only to the driver’s side vents.

Blower Speed Control: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase the blower speed between 1 to 8

Set Temperature: Touching -/+ will decrease/increase temperature. This option is available on both driver and co-driver side.

Climate Control - Smart

Touch on smart option available at the top of CID screen to enable smart mode. Touching it will enable Smart mode and screen will be displayed as follows

Clear View mode: Touch to turn on/off Clear view mode.

In this mode, air at maximum temperature and blower speed is directed towards the windshield with fresh air mode enabled. Clear view mode is deactivated by pressing any button on the climate control screen.

A/C Max mode: Touch to turn on/off A/C Max mode. Turning it on will set the cabin temperature to minimum with blower fan speed set to maximum, along with recirculation mode thereby cooling the cabin in a short period of time.

ECON mode: Touch to turn on/off Economy mode. Turning it on will limit the power consumed by Air conditioning system thereby helping to increase the range.

In ECON mode ON, Blower speed will be lower and cooling effect will be reduced

11.2.1 Auto Operation Mode

Press the AUTO icon.

Select the desired Auto mode based on the blower speed requirement (Auto1, Auto2 or Auto3)

Set the desired cabin temperature with the set temperature controls.

The temperature of the passenger compartment is automatically maintained according to the set temperature.

If the driver and co-driver require different temperatures in their respective zones, the same can be done by turning OFF the sync mode and subsequently, setting different temperatures using temperature control.

When you adjust blower speed or change any other modes, Climate control comes out of auto mode and the air conditioner system can be controlled manually.

Individual temperature controls for driver and co-driver is applicable only if vehicle is equipped with Dual Zone control (DATC)

11.3 Manual Operation Mode

Press AC ON icon

Set the desired cabin temperature with the set temperature controls

Adjust the blower speed by pressing the blower speed controls

Select the air flow by pressing the air distribution/mode icons

Select the air source mode by pressing recirculation mode icon

In manual mode, you can manually adjust the climate conditions by controlling the temperature, blower speed and other mode buttons in the climate control screen.

To activate the auto operation mode, press AUTO icon.

11.3.1 Climate system controls - Floating bar

The climate system control floating bar can also be accessed through the following methods:

1. HVAC button in ICC switch	2. Blower Fan symbol

Floating bar

1. Expand icon: Pressing this icon will take you to the climate control screen.

2. Recirculation mode icon: you can toggle between fresh air mode and recirculation mode by pressing this icon.

3. Auto mode icon: You can turn ON auto mode and toggle between different auto modes by pressing this icon.

4. Rear defogger icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF rear defogger.

5. Front defogger icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF front defogger.

6. Blower controls: You can increase or decrease the blower speed by pressing +/- buttons.

7. Driver sear air ventilation: You can turn ON driver seat air ventilation and toggle between different fan speeds by pressing this icon.

8. Foot mode icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF foot mode.

9. Face mode icon: Pressing this button will turn ON/OFF face mode.

10. Set temperature controls: You can increase or decrease the set temperature by pressing +/- buttons.

11.4 Replacing Air Conditioner Filter

Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When

Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period.

Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.

•

Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10000 km of driving at an authorised service center only. However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened

•

When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heating capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors

AC filter replacement procedure:

To replace the AC filter, the frunk needs to be removed first. After that follow the steps below.

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

Remove the filter lid screw which is shown in the image

Slide and remove the filter lid and then pullout the HVAC filter from the blower housing.

Insert the new HVAC filter to the blower housing.

Ensure to Install the HVAC particulate filter as per Air flow direction (Air flow direction arrow engraved on the filter must be pointing downwards while installation)

Slide back the filter lid and refit the filter lid mounting screw to the blower housing.

11.5 Remote Cabin Cooling/Heating

Remote Cabin Cooling/Heating feature allows user to Turn ON and control air conditioning from outside the vehicle.

•

During remote cooling operation, cabin temperature settings will be changed to default 22 degC in Auto mode 1. User can decide whether to heat or cool the cabin by increasing or decreasing the set temperature from ME4U app.

•

The vehicle cabin will be cooled or heated before you enter, making it more comfortable when you get in after the car has been parked in the hot sun or in cold weather.

Activate Remote Cooling feature

Remote cooling starts by automatically once we press "ON/OFF" button in the ME4U mobile App

When using the mobile app, the user will have access to control the following cabin climate settings under "Climate" tab

Duration time : Users can select the time duration for which remote cooling will be active using the ME4U mobile app. The duration can be set from a minimum of 5 minutes to a maximum of 15 minutes.

Cabin Temperature settings: Users can change the temperature settings during remote cooling.

Front defrost: Users can activate or deactivate the front defrost during remote cooling by selecting the front defrost option in the ME4U mobile app.

Rear Defrost: Users can activate or deactivate the rear defrost during remote cooling by selecting the rear defrost option in the ME4U mobile app,

Auto defrost: Users can activate or deactivate the auto front defogger during remote cooling by selecting the auto defrost option in the ME4U mobile app.

Ventilated Seat Control: Users can turn on or off, and control both the driver and co-driver ventilated seats during remote cooling by selecting the driver and co-driver ventilated seat control option in the ME4U mobile app.

Remote cooling can be De-activated by using Mobile App. if vehicle is already in Remote cooling/heating condition by Pressing ON/OFF button, Remote cooling will be deactivated.

In Mobile App customer will get notification if Remote cooling is failed.

Remote cooling operation is suggested to be used while vehicle is parked in open sunny area for long duration.

11.6 Points to Remember

•

For quickly defogging/de-misting outside of front windshield, it is advisable to operate the windshield wiper/washer for few times intermittently

•

If snow has deposited on windshield, use ice scraper to remove ice deposited before using wiper

•

In freezing weather, warm the front windshield with the defogger before using the windshield washer. Also use a washer fluid having anti-freezing properties. These will help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on your windshield

•

Dirty/contaminated windshield would make misting / fogging-up worse. Always keep the inside and outside of windshield clean

•

Reduced air flow because of clogged AC filter or any other obstructions in air flow path may lead to inadequate defogging/ de-misting performance. If air flow seems to have considerably reduced, get the filter cleaned or replaced immediately at an authorised service center only. Air flow path should be kept free of obstructions

•

Reduced cooling performance from air conditioner may lead to inadequate defogging/de-misting. If cooling effect seems to have dropped considerably, get the air conditioning system checked by an Mahindra Authorised Service Center

Your vehicle is equipped with a AC filter. If the AC performance is considerably low, it is recommended to have the AC filter checked at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Service Center.

Keep in mind that a choked filter will also lead to poor cooling.

Never operate HVAC system with the filter removed. This may result in premature failure of system components.

12 Connectivity and Entertainment

12.1 Software Update

Mahindra determines how, when, and where to send updates to vehicles based on various factors unique to each release. In Controls > Software, you can choose how quickly you want to receive updates that are ready for your vehicle

Online system update:

With the online system update, you can update the software directly in the vehicle.

Requirement: the vehicle must be connected to the Internet.

Downloading updates:

Online system updates are downloaded automatically and without prior notice, and will resume if necessary once the ignition is turned on again. A message will be displayed in the center screen after the download is complete.

Installing updates:

Requirement: An online system update must be downloaded, and a notification must be shown in the center display.

•

Stop the vehicle safely

•

Switch the emergency flashers off, if necessary

•

Make sure that the high-voltage battery is not being charged and that no charging connector is connected to the charging port

•

Press on the notification, or

•

Open the notification in the notification center and press on the notification

•

Follow the system instructions

The MAIA will start the installation. When the update has ended, a notification will be displayed.

If the touchscreen displays a message indicating that a software update was not successfully completed, contact nearby authorized Mahindra service center.

Your vehicle comes with certain features as subscription and based on the user subscription the feature will be enabled as online software update. The necessary preconditions to be met for the updates and the feature will be enabled in the next drive cycle to the user. The feature applicability will vary according to the vehicle variants and the as per the user selects the package. Service will automatically stop at the end of your subscription.

To ensure the installation is completed successfully, the ignition must not be switched on during the installation.

The software update screen persists until you install the update. Install a software update as soon as possible. Any harm resulting from failure to install a software update is not covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Failure or refusal to install updates can cause some vehicle features to become inaccessible or digital media devices may become incompatible.

Mahindra may update or reinstall your vehicle's software as part of the normal diagnostic, repair, and maintenance process within Mahindra Service.

12.2 Me4U

The Me4U mobile app offers real-time information about your vehicle's location and status.

It enables you to control certain vehicle features and monitor battery health, all in a secure manner.

The app is available for both Android and iOS platforms, it provides a seamless connected car experience. For access to connected car features, please use the Me4U app.

All the connected car features can be accessed through the Me4U mobile app.

12.2.1 KYC ( Know Your Customer) Registration

To activate connected car features including access to Me4U mobile App, KYC process must be completed successfully.

•

Customer must produce valid mobile number, communication address & email ID for KYC registration.

•

Preferred mobile number entered during the KYC process will be the login for Me4U mobile app.

•

After successful KYC registration, customer must download the “Me4U” mobile application from Google Play store or iOS app store.

In the event the customer does not download and accept the terms of use of the Me4u app or revokes the consent during the use of the vehicle as a result of which Mahindra cannot access the vehicle data during the warranty period, the warranty shall lapse.

Subscription for the connected car is free for a specified period, depending on the model variant. Post expiry of the free subscription, the same can be renewed by the user for an extended period from the Me4U App.

12.2.2 Login & Registration

Follow the below steps for Login and Registration:

•

Select sign up option in the login page. It will redirect to sign up page

•

Then enter the registered Mobile number given in the KYC form, for connected services. Then click on the Next

•

OTP with a time validity will be sent to the registered mobile number

•

If OTP is not received, you can request the OTP again by clicking on "Resend OTP"

•

After entering valid OTP, click on “Verify My account”

•

On successful verification you will be notified with a message " Account Verified"

•

You will be directed to "Terms and Condition" with "I Agree" option on successful authentication

12.2.3 Forgot/Change Password and Change Pin

This Feature allows the existing user to change Password and change PIN.

In case user forgets the Password and PIN below flow helps to create PIN and password.

Forgot your password

In case you forget your password:

•

Tap on the Forgot Password? link from login page

•

In forgot password page, enter the registered mobile number for connected services and click on Generate OTP

•

Enter the OTP and click on Submit button

•

Enter New Password and Confirm Password and tap on Save button

Change your password

To Change your password on app if you are already logged in:

•

Tap on the top Left corner from home screen to go to hamburger menu

•

Click on profile and tap on the profile settings Change Password

•

Tap on the Access protection and select Change password

•

Page will open with Old password, New password and Confirm password fields

•

Fill all the required field and tap on save button

12.2.4 Me4U connect Features

– Subscription for the connected vehicle is free for a specified period, depending on the model variant. Post expiry of the free subscription, the same can be renewed by the user for an extended period from App store.

FEATURE	DESCRIPTION
Alerts
Over speed Alert	When your car exceeds the set speed limit.
Tyre Pressure Alert	Alerts on high/low tyre pressure. Please ,correct the tyre pressure
Personalised Safety Alert	When the vehicle crosses the set speed (Set in the mobile app). Then it gives a voice alert to the occupants
Vehicle Start/Stop Alert	Notifies when vehicle start /stop event is detected
Door Open Alert	It notifies when any of the doors is open while vehicle is moving. When you trigger for door lock and the door remains open unintentionally
Geo-Fence Alert	When the vehicle moves out of the defined boundary. Then it gives an alert. It helps to create a virtual boundary for any region. Each time the vehicle moves out of the boundary the app will get a notification
Unauthorised vehicle entry Alert	Alerts the user when any unauthorized entry in the vehicle is detected.
Route Deviation Alert	Alerts the user when the vehicle deviates from the pre-defined path.
Time Fencing Alert	Notifies you when any movement of vehicle is detected during set time period
Seat Belt Alert	Notifies in the app whenever any of the occupant in the car is not wearing the seat belt during vehicle movement.
Driver Drowsiness Alert	Alerts the user when the driver is detected to be drowsy or distraction while driving.
Insurance expiry Alert	Suggests in advance to renew the Insurance as expiry date of Insurance approaches. Notifies you in advance when the insurance is about to expire.
Service reminder	This feature alert’s the user for periodic service due
Key fob battery low alert	This feature alert’s the user when key fob battery is low
Brake pad wear alert	This feature alert’s the user when Front/Rear brake Pad is worn out. Visit to nearest Authorised Mahindra Dealer
LV Battery Drain Alert #	Alert the user in mobile app when LV battery is getting discharged continuously Contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance
Critical Malfunction alert	Alert the user in mobile app when any critical malfunction is detected in vehicle Park the vehicle and contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance
High Motor Temperature Alert	Alert the user via mobile app when motor temperature is high Park the vehicle and contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance
Low Charge Alert #	Notify the user through the mobile app when the charge is low. Charge at the earliest.
Battery charger Connection/Disconnection Alert	Notify the user when the battery charger is connected or disconnected.
Energy save mode alert	Notify when the energy saver mode is enabled.
De-rating alert	Notifies the user when power De-rating is activated.
Sentry mode Alert	An alert will be sent to your mobile if an intruder attempts to open your vehicle.
Critical Battery Concern Alert	Alerts the user when there is a critical concern observed in HV battery.
External Charger Malfunction Alert #	An alert will be sent to the mobile app if the external charger is faulty.
Battery high temperature alert	Alerts the user when there is high battery temperature Park the vehicle and contact Authorised Mahindra Dealer for assistance
Energy
Charge Assist	The battery charging assistant provides insights like wait times, charging speed, tariff-based charge recommendations, and nearby charge locations.
Battery Charge Reminder	Notifies the customer to charge the vehicle when SOC goes below a defined threshold
Set Charge Limit	Allows user to set the charging limit
Charging Insights	Allows user to view charging insights, including the charging rate, battery percentage, remaining time to full charge, and charging efficiency report.
Location Based Service
Live tracking	GPS based vehicle tracking system for tracking vehicle’s location anywhere and at any point of time. Helps to provide the real time vehicle location when vehicle is in movement. Helps in sharing the vehicle location for a set time to your family and friends
Save Place	Provision to save a place
Find my car	Helps to identify the vehicle’s location and directs you to locate your vehicle
Share my car location	Share your car location with friends and family
Push to car	Allows the user to push routes/location from the mobile app to the vehicle
Ecosense	Provides the details about the driving behavior for each trip
Trip History	Provides detailed information about the trips
Weekly Report	Provides details about Ecosense parameters for a defined time period
Pit Stop	Provides information and navigational access to nearby restaurant, ATM, Mahindra Dealership etc.,
Journey Planner	Plan your trip by entering destination.
Real time traffic update	Provides real time traffic information for the set destination in CID/DID
Locate my SUV	Enable user to navigate to vehicle parked location from mobile application
Follow My Car	Allows to follow the car by providing navigation of other user in CID
Travelogue	Enables user to create a story about places visited in the form of short video with option to add photos. The travelogue video shall be shared to social media application.
Last Mile Navigation	The navigation from CID shall be pushed by the user to mobile app to assist the user to smoothy navigate to the required destination.
ETA	Allows the user to know the Estimated Time of Arrival of your vehicle at your current mobile location.
APK Feature
Vehicle to home/Smart Home Control	Allows user to link home Alexa to the vehicle's Alexa and able to control the smart devices from vehicle automatically, by configuring a boundary location.
System Updates	Provides a notification about software updates.
Remote Features
Remote Climate control	Allows the user to remotely configure the in- vehicle temperature during remote start using mobile app
Remote Window Up/Down	Allows the user to remotely control the Driver window using mobile app
Remote Door Lock/Unlock	Provides access to the vehicle by remotely locking and unlocking the doors when vehicle is stationary
Remote Lamp On/Off	Allows the user to remotely turn on or off the lamps using mobile app
Remote tailgate control	Allows user to remotely control tailgate
Remote drive enable	Allows the user to remotely start or stop the vehicle using mobile app
Remote start and stop charging for EV	Enables the user to remotely start and stop battery charging.
Remote charger lock/unlock	The user can remotely lock/unlock the charger
Read Vehicle Status
Check door status	Allows the user to view the current status of the vehicle door
Check tyre pressure	Allows the user to view the current status of tyre pressure
Check lamp status	Allows the user to view the current status of the lamp
Check ODO	Allows the customer to check the odometer reading of the vehicle
My SUV info	Essential information about the vehicle like VIN, Variant etc.,
Check AC Status	Allows the user to view the current status of the AC
Seat Belt Status	Helps the user to check the seat belts are buckled or not
Read charging status	Allows user to check the charging status
Safety
Valet Mode	Allows the user to set the vehicle in a predefined state when giving the vehicle for valet parking. The default PIN to access the Valet mode will be 1234
SOS-E-Call #	By pressing the SOS icon or In case of accident, Emergency call will be triggered from vehicle to the 108 Emergency service, SMS will be sent to Me4U app & Emergency contacts along with the current vehicle location
Safety sense	Safety insights of all the ADAS events and report shall be pushed to cloud and mobile app
Personal Health Monitoring	Provide insights by monitoring the health vitals through the smart watch during the driving.
Speed limiter	User can set the vehicle speed limit using mobile app which shall restrict the vehicle speed below the user defined speed limit.
Sentry Mode	Sentry Mode is a security feature that once activated, monitors the surroundings of the vehicle and records footage.
Others
Park Assist	Allows the user to park–in and park-out the vehicle using a mobile app.
Do not disturb	Avoids distraction while driving by not pushing any notification when mobile is detected in the vehicle
Eco contribution	Provide data about the user’s contribution to sustainable future
Contact us	Any Query/Enquiry about the product, Get info on Mahindra. Send an Inquiry on any car model. Dealers will get back to the customer on details.
My Documents	Storage and retrieval of documents such as Driving license, Insurance etc.
Service booking	Allows the user to schedule a service.
Maintenance Alert	Help user to track the Maintenance of the component and provides alert.
Vehicle Digital Passport	Generates a vehicle passport after analyzing the vehicle's maintenance history.
App store	The user app offers various applications, allowing users to purchase SDV packages from the app store.
Service reminder	Users can set reminders to receive alerts for vehicle servicing.
Request App access	Allows the user to share the application access to two more users
Profile Manager	Allows the user to connect the mobile app profiles with the vehicle profile thereby providing sync between both
Smart Wearable	Me4U app for the watch allows the user to perform all the read and remote functions through the smart watch.(In Android and iOS)
Toll Dairy	This Feature helps to check the toll amount for the selected route & toll amount can be recharged via Me4U App as well. It also provides you alert whenever your toll balances goes low.
Personalized Greetings	Personalized welcome message, which are configurable by the user & when the vehicle is unlocked and driver door is opened, audio configured runs in the vehicle (Ex: Kids voice, Favorite music, Favorite hero dialogues)
Feature Auto Suggestion	This Feature analysis user last 3 months feature usage pattern & suggests user on the non utilised feature.
M Lens	Using this feature additional information about the telltale in the DID.
Ask Mahindra #	By pressing the ASK Mahindra icon, a call is triggered to the dedicated Mahindra support center. This feature helps the customer to connect with Mahindra executive for any queries/ support related to vehicle.
Road Side Assistance (RSA) #	By pressing the RSA icon, a call is triggered to the Roadside Assistance provider’s helpline.
In - Home Alexa	Allows the user to check the vehicle status and perform remote function using Alexa (voice commands)
Dynamic Screen saver	Allow to push a screen saver to vehicle from mobile app to CID
Share in vehicle moments via social media	Allows user for face time and taking selfies and share the same to social media and mobile app

# – This features are will work without subscribed.

Mahindra may, at its sole discretion, provide additional features and/ or restrict access to the aforesaid features, in the event customer does not renew the connected vehicle subscription

12.3 Power Outlet

Front Row USB Type C Port

A	LH - Charging USB Port (if equipped)
B	RH - USB Port

USB (A) can be used only for charging.

USB (B) as per the image provided can be used as an input to the music system. You can connect iPods, USB memory sticks, etc. as an input and listen to the music through the vehicle speakers.

It is recommended to connect an input device only when the vehicle is stationary. Trying to connect an input device while driving may distract your attention and lead to an ACCIDENT.

Rear row - 65W ‘C’ type charging ports	A 65W 'C' type charging port is available on both the rear of the front seats
12V Power Outlet	The 12V power outlet socket is located on the right-hand side of the boot area as shown in the image. It can be used to power electrical equipment and appliances such as mobile chargers and cigarette lighters.

The power sockets function only when the ignition is in ON positions.

The power socket and attached accessory can become hot.

Precautions while using Accessories trough 12V power socket

To avoid serious injury:

•

Close the power outlet cap when not in use

•

Do not allow children to use or play with the power outlet

•

When using electrical appliances, strictly follow the manufacturer's instruction manual

•

Never use the power outlet for electric heaters while sleeping

•

Never insert foreign objects into the power outlet

•

Never use malfunctioning electrical appliances

•

Never insert inappropriate or badly fitting plugs into the power outlet

Do not modify, disassemble or repair the power outlet in any way. Doing so may result in unexpected malfunction or fire, which could cause serious damage to equipment and/or personal injuries. Contact an Authorised Mahindra Dealer for any necessary repairs. Unauthorized modifications or improper use of the power outlet may result in electrical hazards, fire, or system malfunctions. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered your warranty

To prevent injuries and accidents, secure all electrical appliances before use. Do not use any appliance that may:

•

Distract the driver while driving, or hamper safe driving

•

Result in a fire or burn injuries due to the appliance rolling, falling or overheating

•

Emit steam, while the windows of the passenger compartment are closed

•

Do not use the power outlet to connect electric accessories or equipment that are not designed to operate on 12V

•

Do not exceed the maximum power of the sockets.

•

Do not hang any accessory from the socket. Always keep the power socket caps closed when not in use.

•

Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into the power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio noise and may interfere with other electronic systems or devices in your vehicle

12.4 Wireless Mobile Charging (If equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with two wireless mobile charging units positioned below the front USB port in the center console.

Please ensure that the phone is compatible to the charging standard “Qi”.

Wireless Mobile Charging Unit - Front

To access the front wireless mobile charging unit, Place the smart phone on the wireless charging pad as per the orientation recommended by manufacturer. Once charging is complete close the door.

Enable/Disable the Wireless Charging System

App Drawer->Vehicle Apps-> My Vehicle-> Interior->
Convenience-> Wireless Charging System (Enable/Disable)

Enable Wireless Charging: Enables wireless charging for compatible devices when placed on the charging pad.

Disable Wireless Charging: Disables wireless charging to support power-saving preferences, manage heat, or extend battery lifespan.

The wireless charging will work only when the ignition is ON. It will not work when the vehicle is in accessory mode or in ignition OFF condition.

Follow the below steps to charging mobile in wireless mobile charger.

To start wireless charging, place the smart-phone equipped with wireless charging function on the wireless charging pad and turn the ignition ON.

For best wireless charging results, place the smartphone in the center of the charging pad. Phone charging indication will appear on the CID screen.

The wireless charging system is designed for one smart device confirming to QI standard only. Please refer to your smartphone’s user manual or the website of the manufacturer to check whether your smartphone supports QI wireless charging.

Do’s and Dont’s

Do’s

Please ensure that the phone is compatible to the charging standard “Qi”.

Place the smart phone on the center of the charging pad for best results.

User shall clean charging pad/mat periodically to avoid dust accumulation.

In case of water/Liquid spillage on charging pad, dry out the pad surface area properly by removing Anti-skid mat. Do not charge the smart phone until surface is completely dry.

The smart phone may become hot while charging. Please be cautious about the high temperature while picking up the smart phone from the charging pad. Please do not force cool the phone by placing it before the AC vent. The forced cooling causes the phone charging to shut off as a protective measure by few phone manufacturers.

Wireless charger works on principle of magnetic induction, i.e. it converts electrical energy into magnetic energy to transfer energy from charging pad to phone. Please maintain safe distance from the charger most of the time as it may cause irritation to sensory organs or active implants if implemented in the body. Please consult medical specialist in case implant organ in the body of the user

Cooling fan will turn ON during wireless mobile charging to cool the mobile & support charging.

If the wireless charging does not work gently pick and place your smart phone towards the center of the charging pad until charging will start (specifically for small size phone) & charging pop up appears on head unit.

Dont’s

Do not use metallic smart phone covers as it would halt the wireless charging function. The wireless charging may not function properly when there is a heavy & thick accessory cover on the smart phone.

Do not use Magsafe covers with the phone while charging on wireless charger as the extra magnet in the covers interferes with the charging & does not allow the phone to charge.

Do not place smart phone up-side down on charging pad or do not miss aligned mobile phone on charging pad in such case smartphone charging will not happen.

Please remove any objects such as metallic objects like coins, smart keys, electronic cards e.g. credit card, debit card, smart card from the charging pad as it may disrupt the charging process and/or may damage the card in such case Foreign object detection alert shall be displayed in Driver Information Display DID.

Please do not put any liquid (e.g., water, cold drink, and sanitizer), dust particles or flammable object on antiskid mat.

Do not cover the wireless charger with a cloth or other object while charging. It may heat up the device and reduce the charging efficiency.

Do not disassemble, modify, or remove the wireless charger & do not apply force or impact to the wireless.

It is recommended to place the phone on the center of the charger’s pad to start charging

Before charging remove the phone cover/case to improve charging efficiency

When the ignition is off and a door is opened, if a mobile phone is left on the Wireless charging pad, a 'Mobile Left Over' alert will appear on the DID.

If any metallic object such as coins is placed between the wireless charger and the smartphone, the charging will be stopped & a warning “Foreign object detected’ will be displayed on the DID. Kindly remove the coin or the metallic object. This is done to stop heating of the metallic object which might hurt the driver or the passengers.

If the phone is misaligned in the charging pad It may not charge. It may give you a warning in DID.

Do not place any smart key on the charging pad.

Keep the charging pad clean and dry

Do not keep any Debit/Credit card between the phone & the charger. It may damage the card. A warning is displayed on the DID for the same in such case "Please remove NFC card" alert is displayed in DID.

12.5 Audio

To create the most incredible Sound Experience, premium speakers are arranged and packaged in such a way that everyone in the car will feel like they are in a recording studio or a movie theatre.

12.5.1 Sound Experience

Acoustics

Premium Sound - Studio

Studio mode gives a feel as if we are in a recording studio.

In this mode, the front high speakers will be disabled.

Premium Sound - 3D Immersive

Quantum Logic Immersion (QLI) delivers a 3D audio experience with added height and space, improving in-car sound.

It keeps the original recording intact, without adding artificial effects like reverb.

We can increase or decrease the intensity of the QLI using the slider ( - to +).

Virtual Venue (Live)

Virtual Venues Live can make you feel like you are in that place let it be stadium or an opera house when the particular location from the Venue Scapes is chosen.

Virtual Venues Live uses custom acoustic details to transport listeners to some of the world’s most renowned music venues like Wembley Stadium, Royal Opera House and Boston Symphony Hall.

Custom

Cabin focus - Driver

In Custom tab, we have cabin focus and equalizer.

In Driver mode, Audio will be more enhanced in the driver side.

Here, the sound from the rear speakers will be less as compared to the front speakers.

Cabin Focus - Full cabin

In Full cabin mode, we can customize the sound for any side (center, driver, co-driver, rear left, rear right & rear center).

It can be done by dragging the button to any side.

By adjusting the button to the center or, by choosing the center option, all the speakers can be enabled.

Equalizer

In Equalizer there are 4 frequency settings - Bass, mid, treble and subwoofer.

There are 7 levels (- & +) to adjust the frequency.

12.5.2 Sound And Volume

Volumes

In volume it consists of media, FM, alert, call, notifications, voice assist, navigation, Bluetooth & VNC.

From media to Bluetooth there is a - to + buttons where volume can be adjusted accordingly.

Vehicle noise compensation (VNC+)

Vehicle Noise Compensation (VNC) dynamically adjusts in-cabin audio based on real-time noise levels and vehicle parameters.

Using a psychoacoustic model, it ensures consistent sound quality, preserving frequency response and dynamic range while adapting to changing driving conditions.

VNC has 4 levels - off, low, mid and high that can be selected based on the given situation.

VNC can be adjusted in 3 levels namely low, mid, high.

12.5.3 Signature Sound (SonicSuite)

Interior

In this interior tab, by clicking the Sound ON, we can choose various inbuilt driving sounds inside the car.

Types of signature lamps in Interior:

Drive mode

Range

Everyday

Race

Technosynth

V8 Tribute

Chill

Interior - Drive mode

Characteristic sound emitted from the internal speakers based on the selected drive mode

Interior - Range

Characteristic sound of the ‘Range’ drive mode emitted from the internal speakers

Interior - Everyday

Characteristic sound of the ‘Everyday’ drive mode emitted from the internal speakers

Interior - Race

Characteristic sound of the ‘Race’ drive mode emitted from the internal speakers

Interior - Technosynth

A fusion of techno and synthwave, reimagined.

Interior - V8 Tribute

Iconic roar of a V8 engine from the internal speakers.

Interior - Chill

Soft, ambient sound for chill vibes.

12.5.4 Signature Sound (SonicSuite)

Exterior

All the modes, listed in the Interior tab is available in Exterior also, By clicking the Sound ON, We can hear the Driving sound outside the car.

Types of signature lamps in Exterior:

Drive mode

Range

Everyday

Race

Technosynth

V8 Tribute

Chill

Exterior - Drive mode

Characteristic sound emitted from the internal speakers based on the selected drive mode

Exterior - Range

Characteristic sound of the ‘Range’ drive mode emitted from the external speakers

Exterior - Everyday

Characteristic sound of the ‘Everyday’ drive mode emitted from the external speakers

Exterior - Race

Characteristic sound of the ‘Race’ drive mode emitted from the external speakers

Exterior - Technosynth

A fusion of techno and synthwave, reimagined.

Exterior - V8 Tribute

Iconic roar of a V8 engine from the external speakers.

Exterior - Chill

Soft, ambient sound for chill vibes.

12.5.5 Ambient Lighting System (If equipped)

Ambient lighting enhances the interior aesthetic of the vehicle by providing soft, customizable illumination. It creates a relaxing and premium atmosphere, especially during low light conditions or night time driving.

The ambient lighting system offers multiple color options for personalization, with lights seamlessly integrated into key areas such as the door panels and dashboard, enhancing the vehicle's interior ambiance.

Steps to Activate Ambient Lighting

Option 1

In Centre Information Display (CID) Goto App Drawer / Vehicle Apps /My Vehicle / Interior / Ambient Lights

Option 2

Goto App Drawer / Ambient Lights

The ambient light settings offer various themes under the "Mood" option, allowing users to select preset themes or customize colors based on their preferences for a personalized experience.

Mood

Custom

Under the "Mood" option, the following preset themes are available, allowing users to personalize the interior ambiance to match their mood or the season:

Drive Mode

Spring

Summer

Winter

Autumn

Monsoon

12.5.6 Frunk Lamp (If equipped)

The front frunk is designed as a storage space located at the front of the vehicle, often illuminated with a lamp that automatically turns on when the hood is opened and off when closed or after a set period to prevent unnecessary battery drain.

12.5.7 GrooveMe (If equipped)

GrooveMe utilizes the exterior lights and interior ambient lights to create an ambiance according to the song played in the media player.

GrooveMe can be initiated only when the vehicle is in Park Mode.

Steps to activate the Groove Me feature

In Centre Information Display (CID) Goto App Drawer / GrooveMe

When the user clicks on 'Start Show,' the exterior and interior light show begins, with preset music playing through the speakers.

The user can click on 'Stop Show' to manually stop the GrooveMe function before the stipulated time.

Starting GrooveMe function from Media player:

The user can directly start the GrooveMe function along with their customized song through the media player.

Click on the GrooveMe icon provided in the top right corner inside the media player.

The exterior and interior light show begins, with the speakers playing the customized music selected through the media player.

When the "Groove Me" feature is activated, the following lights are functional: Front and Rear DRLs, Turn Indicators, Ambient Lighting, Mars Roof Lighting, Carpet Lamps, ORVM (Open and close), Headlights (High Beam and Low Beam), Flush Door Handle Modules, Cornering Lamps, and Booster Lamps. The lights pulse and change dynamically in response to the beat, creating an immersive and entertaining atmosphere for passengers.

13 Charging and Energy Consumption

An electric vehicle operates using a battery and an electric motor. Unlike conventional vehicles, which rely on an internal combustion engine and gasoline as fuel, electric vehicles are powered by electrical energy stored in a high-voltage battery. As a result, electric vehicles are environmentally friendly, as they do not require fossil fuels and produce no exhaust emissions.

Electric vehicle characteristics:

•

EVs are powered by electrical energy stored in a high-voltage battery, eliminating the need for traditional fuels like gasoline. This method significantly reduces air pollution, as there are no exhaust emissions, making EVs a cleaner, more environmentally friendly transportation option.

•

EVs are equipped with high-performance motors that provide smooth, efficient power delivery. Unlike traditional ICE vehicles, EVs produce minimal engine noise and vibrations, offering a quieter and more comfortable driving experience. This contributes to a more serene ride, with less mechanical noise and less vibration felt inside the cabin

•

When decelerating or driving downhill, regenerative braking is utilized to charge the high voltage battery. This minimizes energy loss and increases the distance to empty

•

When the battery charge is low, there are several charging options available:

AC Charging: This is the most common method. It is slower but convenient for home charging or public charging stations.

DC Fast Charging: This method uses direct current (DC) to rapidly charge the battery at high power levels, often found at fast-charging stations. DC fast charging is ideal for long trips or quick recharges.

Battery Information:

•

The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltage battery that powers the motor and systems like the air conditioning, while a separate 12V auxiliary battery powers components such as the lights, wipers, and audio system.

•

The auxiliary battery is automatically charged when the vehicle is in the "Ready to Drive" mode or when the high-voltage battery is being charged

13.1 Charging System

A: Normal Charging Port-AC

B: Charging Indications

C: Fast Charging Port-DC

The below chargers are comes with selected variants of your vehicle.

13.2 Combined Charge System 2 (CCS2) - Charge Port

Charge Port is located on the below the tail lamp LH side.

Unlock the vehicle and gently press on the charging port to open the charging lid.

Normal Charging and Fast Charging are integrated in single port.

Normal Charging Port	Fast Charging Port

Time to charge the battery pack varies based on the state of charge (SOC), ambient & battery temperature. Hence charging time specified is an estimate and may vary.

13.3 Charge Port LED indication

The Charging port LED will indicate the charging status based on the charging condition.

Indication	Condition
White (Continues ON)	Battery Status
White (Blinking )	System Verification
Blue (Blinking )	Scheduled for charging
Red (Continues ON)	Low Battery SOC< 10%
Red (Blinking)	Charge Error
Amber (Blinking)	Gun Stuck
Green (Animation)	Charging in Progress

13.4 Normal charging

Power coming from Electric grid is in AC, whereas electric power in battery is in DC. Thus, for charging the electric vehicle, power must be converted from AC to DC. Hence, an on-board charger is used for converting AC to DC. AC charging is mostly recommended for usual charging of the vehicle.

The Electric vehicle can be charged by using household electricity with the help of an EVSE (Electric vehicle supply equipment). The electrical outlet at your home must comply with regulations and must safely accommodate the Voltage/ Current (Amps)/Power (Watts) ratings specified on the portable charger.

13.5 Wall Mounted Charger — 11kW / 7.2 kW (if equipped)

11kW / 7.2kW AC wall mounted charger comes along with selected variants only.

Charger Specifications
Tentative Time (h) to charge 20 — 100% SOC
Charging speed	59 kwh Battery	79 kwh Battery
7.2 kw	5.5	9
11 kw	4	5.5

Below are the different color LED’s provided for indicating the status of charging – 7.2 kW

Condition	LED Glow Strategy (X Pattern)
Power OFF	Smoke White
Mode 1: Power ON	Blue solid
Mode 2: Connected/ charging not started	Blue blink
Mode 3: Charging	Blue running pattern
Mode 4: Faults	Solid red
Wi-Fi/ Bluetooth connected	White blink 3 times and go to intended mode
RFID logo
RFID logo/ Power OFF	White background unit
RFID logo/ Power ON	White solid
RFID connected	White blink 3 times
Detection fail	Red blink 3 times
Infinity logo
Infinity logo/ Power OFF	White background unit
Infinity logo/ Power ON	White solid

13.6 Charging Procedure:

•

Ensure the charging cable is correctly and securely connected to both the charger and the vehicle

•

Never plug in or unplug the charger in wet or damp conditions. Moisture can cause electrical shorts or even shock hazards.

•

In case of any malfunction or signs of short circuit / spark switch off the grid - supply to the charger and then remove the gun.

•

Do not try to unplug the while charging.

•

In case you use any medical electric devices like implantable cardiac pacemaker or cardiovascular defibrillator, do check with electric medical device supplier / manufacturer on concerns of effects that EV charging or discharging system may have on implanted devices prior to their operation.

Park the vehicle near the charging area.

Engage ‘P’ mode and Turn-Off the ignition.

Ensure Main supply MCB turn on. First Infinity logo will glow then X pattern LED will glow for Booting.

Press the charging flap located at the Rear side of the vehicle, to open the charging lid.

Remove the dust cap in vehicle charging port. Ensure white color LED should glow at unplugged condition.

After plugging the Gun to Charger White LED remains ON

Prepare for charging, Blue LED on charger (X pattern) continuously glowing until start charging.

Tap valid unique RFID tag on the card reader to initiate charging.

After 3 time of RFID LED blinking, charger will initiate charging & X Pattern Blue LED glowing in running pattern until reach 100% SOC.

10. After RFID authentication, charging gets initiated and blue color LED running pattern glowing in charger & White LED on vehicle charging port starts blinking one time then Green LED is glowing like tidal until reach target SOC (100%).

Wall Mounted charger	charging port

Charging in Progress, Blue color LED running pattern glowing on the charger once the charging initiates.

11. Once the charging process gets initiated, the following indications happens.

Telltale

Current battery level

Charging message

Charging alert comes in the DID for few seconds and charging indication telltale lamp will blink until complete charging. DID during the charging process. Refer "Driver Information Display chapter for more details

•

The LED indicator light present at the vehicle charging port will starts glowing in green color tidal moment till reach target SOC 100%.

12. Once the SOC reaches 100%.

•

The green color LED at the vehicle charging port will remains ON

•

Blue color LED X pattern on charger will remains ON

Charge indication telltale lamp - OFF

Charge finish alert will come in DID after 100% SOC. Green LED indicator of Charge indication telltale lamp in the DID will turn OFF after remove gun from charge port.

•

Vehicle to be monitored periodically when kept for charging in unattended places for long duration.

13.7 How to Disconnect Normal Charging

Tap RFID tag on card reader to stop charging & disconnect the charger from vehicle.

Charger gets disconnected and blue X pattern LED starts glowing.

Gently pull-out the charging gun once the charging session is over & fix it on the charger.

Close the charging port dust cap and charging port lid.

If the Gun Lock is not released, Please don’t pull-out the charging Gun forcefully out of the vehicle charging port, It may damage the Charging port.

As a first step press the “Charge port disconnect switch” in the driver side switch bank to unlock the gun.

If the gun still not able to release, follow the manual over ride procedure for releasing it .

During charging of the vehicle with ignition OFF condition, Sometimes it can be observed that the A/C control panel lights getting ON. This is a normal behavior and happens since the A/C compressor may be active for battery cooling. However, Cabin A/C will not turn ON unless it is turned ON by user either through the switch input.

Battery Pack	Charger Capacity	Charge Timing (Approximate)
59 kwh	11 kw (16 A)	6 hrs
59 kwh	7.2 kw (32 A)	8.7 hrs
79 kwh	11 kw (16 A)	8 hrs
79 kwh	7.2 kw (32 A)	11.7 hrs

Normal Charging: Always charge vehicle to 100% state of charge. Time to charge the battery pack varies based on the state of charge, ambient & battery temperature. Hence charging time specified is an estimate and may vary.

13.7.1 Wall Mounted Charger Installation-
7.2W/11kW

Simple 3 steps of installation for free*

Wall Mounted charger Support to customer

Inhouse dedicated Charge_IN team for Installation, Free Consultation, Free home visit.

Dedicated support centre: 18002679900

Mail: Chargein@mahindra.com

Mandatory DISCOM Approval:

•

Ensure you have capacity approval from the DISCOM (Distribution Company) for installing a 7.2 / 11 kW charger.

•

Using more load than sanctioned may attract penalties from DISCOM and is unsafe.

Check Existing Electrical Infrastructure:

•

Verify if your current electrical wiring size, MCB and EB meter can support the 7.2 / 11 kW charger.

•

Upgrades may be necessary if not as per the recommendation.

Green Meter Installation:

•

Installing a green meter with DISCOM approval can help in reducing the cost per unit of electricity consumption.

•

Applicable for selected cities, Please connect with DISCOM to check.

Society Approval:

•

It is Mandatory to get the NOC (No Objection Certificate) from the Society/ Concerned Authority If Charger needs to be installed in Housing Society/ Government Premises/ Commercial Premises.

•

Not applicable for individual houses.

Safe Mounting Location:

•

Choose an accessible and safe (Preferably Covered) place for mounting the charger.

•

Finalize the location early to avoid extra visits.

Effective Earthing:

•

Ensure healthy and effective Earthing.

•

Voltage between neutral and earth should be less than 5V.

Standard Free Installation:

Includes Installation of Charger, Distribution Box with Cable Laying- Max Up to 15 Metres Any additional materials/ Services over and above 15 Metres will incur extra costs.

13.7.2 Advantages of Home Charging

•

Convenience: Overnight charging, plug-schedule-forget

•

Cost: Charges for the units consumed in home charging will be less, since it is subsidized. Please note State-wise Per Unit Cost may vary depending on EV meter or residential slab category.

•

No dependency: No peak surcharge, no que/ booking, use it with any EV

It highly recommended to use the Mahindra Charger which comes with the vehicle to enjoy its’ features, high charging speed and to keep your battery healthy.

Note: The charger is high power equipment, almost equivalent to 7 ACs, when equipment is designed with highest standards of safety and we also ensure highest standard of safety while installing it which follows below process.

Process

•

Expect a call from us after booking to take an appointment site survey of the installation site.

•

During site survey our engineer checks electrical load requirement, cabling route/length from meter to installation place, proper earthing to ensure safe installation of charger.

•

Post survey, survey report will be submitted with the activities to make the site fit for charger installation.

Electrical Load Enhancement

Earthing

Approval from Housing Society

Additional paid works for site preparedness

If excess needed

If not proper

If you live in RWA

If needed or requested by you

Application to DISCOM for 3 phase connection with enhance load or to install an EV meter

To arrange to make a earthing pit.

An approval letter from Society for the cable routing, installation permission.

•

Additional Cable

•

Changing any electrical item

•

Civil work like drilling, foundation

•

Metallic stand, enclosure box etc

Will guide you how to do

Services available with us with nominal charges

Will accompany you if need support to convince

Except cable all are optional, can take from us or arrange yourself.

To avoid any short circuit leading to fire hazard, fine from DISCOM, safe guard you home appliances

To avoid body current (shock), safe guard the charger

To avoid any conflict, cable cut, hassle free installation

Safe to avoid joint in cable, Safe to replace sub-par electrical item, To make the site stable for long term usage and aesthetic

•

Will be in touch till you site is ready for installation and extend any support if needed.

•

Post vehicle retail engineer will visit before delivery to complete cabling work and DB installation

•

Post vehicle delivery engineer visits for charger installation, Online activation & usage demo

Charger comes along with charger: Charger Unit, Distribution BOX, 15mts cable, Installation

13.8 Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE) –3 kW Charger

Charging Point Requirements

1. Power requirement: 3 kW, single phase AC

2. Plug Point requirements: 230V AC, 16A, Single Phase, Normal electrical socket

Make sure only use high-quality socket.

3. Socket wiring should be a multi-stranded copper wire with a minimum cross-section of 2.5 sq. mm

Ensure your domestic electrical system is in compliance with the applicable standards.

Always ensure, that the Power socket (16A) used for charging your vehicle has proper earthing, protected by a circuit breaker and a surge protection device.

Do not open, tamper or modify the internal components of the charger.

Do not use worn, damaged, or uncertified charging equipment, as this could result in fire, electrical shock, or damage to your vehicle.

Before charging, always inspect the cable, plug, and socket for any signs of wear or damage.

Do not store any combustible materials near the charger vicinity

Mahindra 3kW EVSE (Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment) cable should not be used on 5A socket or Extension cords taken from 5A socket.

Charging coupler receptacle must have proper grounding, electrical connection and should equipped with protective device (Residual current circuit breaker with over current protection and Surge protection device).

Domestic plug point must be approved/ certified by a qualified electrical before using the charging gun.

A portable 3 kW 13A AC charger is provided along with the vehicle.

13.9 LED indication Status:

Below is the different color LEDs provided for indicating the status of charging – 3 kW

Mode Description	Use Case	Power(Blue)	Charge(Green)	Fault(Red)
Turn Off Mode		OFF	OFF	OFF
Start-Up Mode (Self-Test)		ON	ON	ON
State A, only connected to mains		ON	OFF	OFF
State B, connected to mains and to vehicle		ON	OFF	OFF
State C, charging		ON	BLINKING	OFF
State change C -> B, charging finish		ON	ON	OFF
Mains failures	Over current error	ON	ON	ON
	RCD leakage detection	BLINKING	ON	BLINKING
	Over temp in ICCB	BLINKING	OFF	BLINKING
	Over-voltage	BLINKING	OFF	ON
	Under-voltage	BLINKING	OFF	ON
	PE of AC Supply is not connected with Earth	ON	OFF	BLINKING
	Relays welding failure	BLINKING	OFF	OFF
	Vehicle Diode error	OFF	ON	ON
Additional Faults	Communication error	ON	OFF	OFF

13.10 Charging Procedure:

Park the vehicle near the charging area.

Engage ‘P’ mode and Turn-Off the ignition.

Press the charge flap located at LH Rear side of the Vehicle to open the charging lid.

Take out the charge cable from vehicle. Remove the dust cap from the vehicle charging port & ensure Charger port LED remains ON (white).

Check for no dust or foreign particle present at the charging connector inlet.

Plug in one side of charge cable to vehicle charging port & white LED going to OFF.

Check and ensure that plug is pushed in completely.

Plug the other end of the charger into main supply power socket and turn the supply ON.

Once the supply is turned ON, all the LED’s will glow together for few seconds indicating self-check and once the charger is ready, only the blue LED indicator will glow (other 2 LED will remain OFF. Also, the indicator light present at the vehicle charging port will starts blinking in white color one time then start glowing Green Indication like tidal once initiate charging.

Charger	Charge Port

Once the charging process gets initiated, the following indications happens:

•

Blue LED indicator present at the EVSE will remain ON & Green LED indicator present in EVSE will start blinking.

Telltale	Current battery level	Charging message

•

Charging alert comes in the DID for few seconds and charging indication telltale lamp will remains ON in DID during the charging process. Refer “Driver Information Display for more details.

•

The LED indicator light present at the vehicle charging port will starts blinking in green color till 100% SOC and changes to green color solid once reached 100%.

Telltale	Charge Port

9. Allow sufficient time for the vehicle to fully charge

10. Once the vehicle is fully charged;

•

LED Indicator light present remains ON in Solid green color.

•

Green LED Indicator in EVSE remains ON.

•

Charging finished alert will come in once 100% SOC. Green LED indicator of Charge indication telltale lamp in the DID will turn OFF after remove gun from charge port.

13.11 How to Disconnect Normal Charging

The charging session will automatically stop once vehicle SOC reaches 100%

Turn the mains OFF

Unlock the doors to unlock the charger gun

Gently pull-out the charging gun once the session is over, don’t pull the charging gun during the charging session

Close the charging port lid

13.12 Normal Charge Timing

Battery Pack	Charger Capacity	Charge Timing (Approximate)
59 kwh	3 kw (13 A)	23 hrs
79 kwh	3 kw (13 A)	31 hrs

Charge timings approximately for 100 % charging at normal operating condition of the components

The time for full charging may vary based upon the ambient temperature and durability of the high voltage battery and on the operating conditions.

13.13 Fast Charging

Fast charging uses high-power chargers (DC chargers) to rapidly deliver energy to your EV's battery.

The indicated charging time of 20 minutes (20% to 80% State of Charge - SOC) applies under optimal conditions depends on the battery pack variant and DC charger (175 kW)

Charging duration may vary based on factors such as charger capacity, ambient temperature, battery condition, and power supply fluctuations. Charging with lower-rated DC or AC chargers will result in increased charging times.

Use CCS type 2 fast chargers only for charging your vehicle

Fast Charging in a vehicle can be achieved using same charging port. Fast charging can be availed at places where ‘DC charging’ stations are available.

Fast charging Procedure:

Park the vehicle near to CCS type 2 Fast charging station.

Engage ‘P’ mode and Turn-Off the ignition.

Perform the Authorization using Phone app / EVSE RFID.

Press the unlock button on the Key fob/Mobile App/Central Door Lock (CDL) to unlock the vehicle. Then gently press the charging lid once to release and open it.

Remove both the rubber cap from the vehicle charging port.

Check for no dust or foreign particle present at the charging connector inlet.

Hold the Charging Gun and push it inside the vehicle charging port gently & lock the vehicle

Start the charging session using the screen provided in the station, RFID, or Mobile Application. The charge port LED will start blinking in a White color.

Preset charging time and press start button on fast charger.

Turning ON the fast charger locks the charger gun into the charger port in the vehicle

10. Once the charging session starts, the charge port LED will blink in BLUE or GREEN color (depending on the level of vehicle SOC).

11. Check Charging Indicator Light on the DID glows once the gun is connected and charging initiated.

12. When Vehicle SOC reach 100%, the charging session automatically stops and the continuous GREEN LED will glow on the charge port.

13. In case of failure, the color of the charging port LED changes to RED. The user needs to remove the charge gun and retry the charging session.

14. If charging gets interrupted, Charge Fault Alert will come.

Allow Normal charging and charge upto 100 % once after 4 fast charge cycles. This will ensure optimal battery performance.

Use of fast charging should be minimized in order to help prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

If the vehicle is driven less, then it is recommended to charge the vehicle to 100% and keep it overnight connected, once a week on slow charging

Disconnect the Fast Charging

•

Charging session will automatically stops once the vehicle SOC reach 100%.

•

Whenever the charging session need a stop in between, perform the same through charger Screen, Charge Stop button from vehicle/DID, RFID, or Mobile Application.

•

Use the “Emergency Button” on the EVSE in case of any emergency and unable to stop from any of the interface given above.

•

Gently pull-out and remove the charging connector from vehicle once the charging session is over and the machine is stopped, don’t pull the charging gun during the charging session.

If the Gun Lock is not released, Please don’t pull-out the charging Gun forcefully out of the vehicle charging port, It may damage the Charging port.

As a first step press the “Charge port disconnect switch” in the driver side switch bank to unlock the gun.

If the gun still not able to release, follow the manual over ride procedure for releasing it.

•

Close the charging port lid.

•

Wait for 60 secs if you want to start the charging again.

•

Charging time will vary based on environmental conditions.

•

In sub-zero condition and high ambient conditions, the heater/chiller will turn on to cool/ heat the battery and then only the charging will initiate.

•

It is also advised not to stay in vehicle or access the vehicle during charging as it may affect function of electric medical devices and could result in personal fatal injury.

•

Make sure that there are no foreign particles or water traces in charge plug or port as any of these can result in electric short circuit or shock causing serious injury or death. Hence do not touch metal contacts on cable or plug. Ensure to close the charging lid whenever vehicle is not in charging state.

•

Do not drag or keep charge cable close to any heat source.

•

Ensure that power socket is switched off before connecting the charge cable.

•

Do not handle charger cable or port with wet hands as it may cause electric shock resulting in injury.

•

Do not pull or twist cable, always remove it by holding charger port handle after switching off plug point.

•

Do not modify port or cable as it may cause fire hazard.

•

In case you observe an unusual odor or smoke coming from vehicle, do immediately stop charging process.

•

Always make sure that the charger cable is disconnected from the charge port prior to drive.

•

Charging may affect operation of worn or implanted electric medical devices and could result in serious injury or death.

•

Do not touch the charge port at vehicle side without any proper gloves.

•

Make sure you fully uncoil the charging cord to limit its heating.

•

Make sure to use the designated charger for charging the electric vehicle. Using any other charger may cause failure. (Refer Charging procedure section for more details)

•

Be careful not to drop the charging connector. The charging connector can be damaged.

HV Battery cell Balancing: The system does cell balancing and charges the LV system based on the LV battery voltage. So even if the vehicle is fully charged and left for sometime, the SOC may drop slightly. This is normal behavior and not a cause of concern.

Do not wash the vehicle while charging.

Ensure charging port lid is closed before attempting exterior body wash.

13.14 Gun Locking Feature

Charging Gun is locked to the vehicle when vehicle is in charging condition for safety

Ensure the below procedure before unlocking the charging gun.

•

Switch off the AC power supply or fast charging machine

•

Unplug the charging gun from the vehicle.

If the Gun Lock is not released, Please don’t pull-out the charging Gun forcefully out of the vehicle charging port, It may damage the Charging port.

As a first step press the “Charge port disconnect switch” in the driver side switch bank to unlock the gun.

If the gun still not able to release, follow the manual over ride procedure for releasing it.

13.14.1 Manual Plug Override

Manual Plug override is a feature, that allows the user to disconnect the charging gun from the vehicle when the automatic locking mechanism fails.

This feature ensures that users can safely remove the charger in situations such as system malfunctions, power outages, or emergency scenarios.

Manual override cable is located in left-hand side of the rear luggage compartment.

If you are unable to remove the charging gun, follow these steps to manually release it using the release cable:

•

Open the trunk and locate the trim cover on the LH side Quarter trim

•

Remove the safety cover

•

To release the charger plug in case the electrical actuator is not functioning, pull the black handled release cable as shown in the image

•

After pulling the release cable, gently remove the charger plug

•

After removing the plug, make sure to close the lid.

Do Not Force the Connector: Pulling forcibly without using the override can damage the port or the connector.

Ensure Safety: Confirm that charging has stopped before attempting manual removal

Do not pull the release cable with high force or pull excessively as it may damage the locking mechanism.

Do Not Touch The Connectors: Never touch the metal connectors during the manual override process, as doing so may result in burns, electrical shock, or serious injury.

13.15 Charging Recommendations

Always use charge cable provided with your vehicle for charging.

Refer Charging section for more details

Do not charge your vehicle, if Power Socket and / or charge port are exposed to rain or water.

Do not plug-in with wet hands.

It is recommended not to charge your vehicle in direct sunlight.

Make sure that children are kept away from both on-board and external charge ports, while charging.

Vehicle should be disconnected from power source before getting any services being carried out.

Always carry charger cable provided by the manufacturer. It helps to charge your vehicle at off sites and in public charging locations when required.

Remote charging option is only applicable for Normal charging

•

Never allow the vehicle to be discharged to 0 % SOC in storage

•

If the vehicle is kept idle for longer duration with low SOC level, it may not be possible to charge or use the vehicle without jump starting or charging the low voltage battery. If you are not able to charge the vehicle even with a booster battery connected, then contact Mahindra authorised dealership for assistance.

•

Always charge to greater than 50% before leaving the vehicle for long resting period . Ensure to charge to 100 % SOC after the resting period is over using Normal Charger

•

If the resting period is greater than 30 days , disconnect the negative terminal of the low voltage battery . This reduces the loss of charge for both low voltage and high voltage batteries

•

Allow Normal charging up to 100 % SOC once after 4 fast charge cycles. This will ensure optimal battery performance

•

Use of Fast Charging should be minimized in order to help prolong the life of high voltage battery pack.

•

Frequent fast charging can accelerate battery degradation. If the high-voltage battery deteriorates due to excessive fast charging beyond recommended usage, warranty coverage may be affected.

•

If the vehicle is driven less, then it is recommended to charge the vehicle to 100% and keep it overnight connected, once a week on slow charging

•

Under certain conditions, the thermal system may produce moisture in the air from the front of your vehicle while charging. This is normal and not to be concerned about.

•

In certain conditions, you may see water droplets below the front end of the vehicle during charging, this is normal.

•

It is normal to hear sounds during charging. The refrigerant compressor and fan operate as needed to maintain the battery temperature.

•

At some circumstances, there will be slighter performance drop in cabin cooling. Air conditioning performance is generally not affected by charging. However, in some circumstances (for example, charging at high currents during a particularly warm day), the air coming from the vents may not be as cool as expected. This is normal and ensures that the Battery stays within an optimum temperature range while charging to support longevity and optimum performance.

•

Once in 4 charging session should be normal AC charging, Failing to do so may lead to battery deteriorated.

13.16 Charging Troubleshooting

SI No	Problem	Possible Cause	Remedy
1	Temperature Light is on while charging.	High battery temperature (or) charger temperature (or) ambient temperature. Effect: Charging time of vehicle may increase	Check for radiator fan operation. Check whether enough coolant is available or not and charge in shade/cooler temperature or during night when ambient temperature is low. If the issue persists, Contact Mahindra Authorised dealer for more assistance
2	Vehicle does not charge with ‘Charging System Malfunction’ message on DID.	This alert comes when a fault is found during the charging process, in OBC or FC-related functions, or when a battery issue prevents charging.	Contact dealer for assistance.
3	Turn ON the Main Switch for Charging	This alert comes, when charging gun is connected to vehicle and the main power is not turned ON	Check if power supply is OK and EVSE LED is ON.

13.17 Ideal Time to Charge

Vehicle can be charged anytime with availability of charging facility; however charging can be done at suitable time that has following advantages:

Normally most of requirements for city mobility are during day, hence charging at night will not interfere in daily travel plans.

At night, ambient temperature is less which is ideal for battery charging.

13.18 Brake/Coasting Regeneration

This vehicle is equipped with regenerative braking. The regenerative braking system's main objective is to use unused energy available at wheels during deceleration/braking to charge the battery to help increase the driving range and replenish the high voltage battery

The electric motor converts kinetic energy into electrical energy during deceleration and braking of the vehicle. This energy is used to charge the high-voltage battery.

A secondary benefit is an effect similar to “engine braking” seen in IC engine vehicles. Based on HV battery SOC status, regeneration intensity will vary.

When the accelerator pedal is released while driving, the regenerative brake system provides some deceleration and generates power for charging the high voltage battery.

When you apply the brake and take your foot off the accelerator pedal, more regenerative brake is applied and deceleration is maximum.

During high-speed driving you may feel that regenerative brake provides less deceleration than the engine braking in an regular ICE vehicle.

In order to prevent battery damage, regenerative brake is also automatically reduced when the battery temperature is high or low.

Regeneration will be maximum when vehicle is driven in L3 regen mode.

Regeneration function won’t happen above 95% SOC

13.19 Do’s and Don’ts

Do’s

•

Engage parking brake for charging

•

Inspect the charging cable periodically for any damage like crack, cuts, exposed wire and burnt marks on pins in the handle & plug etc. Replace if required.

•

Always charge the vehicle to 100% SOC

•

Always do normal charging after 4 fast charging

Don’ts

•

Do not charge the vehicle if the power source or the charge port is exposed to rain or water

•

Do not carry out charging procedure with wet hands

•

Avoid charging in extreme hot ambient temperature

•

Do not wash while the vehicle in charging

•

Do not use the damaged charging cable, wire, socket & pins

•

Never do fast charging more than 4 times consecutively

•

Immediately stop charging when you find abnormal symptoms (odor, smoke)

•

Do not use the battery as a stationary power source, as this may lead to premature battery degradation and affect your warranty coverage.

13.20 Battery life and performance

Due to battery characteristics, the performance of the BE 6 battery pack will decrease with usage, surrounding environment, actual usage pattern and ageing resulting in a reduced estimated drive range. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction / defect in the vehicle system or the battery power pack.

The charge storage capacity can also be affected by usage/charging pattern, vehicle storage conditions, battery operating temperature.

For details on battery performance expectations and warranty coverage, including state of health thresholds and eligibility for repair or replacement, refer to the vehicle warranty section.

13.21 Points to remember during Fast Charging

Points to check before/ during charging session

Identify the correct charging station which supports the vehicle protocol (CCS Type 2).

•

Check the vehicle DID before starting the charging session - there should not be any fault indicator.

•

Never try to charge the vehicle on a faulty fast charging station.

•

Properly park the vehicle, therefore there will be no stress on the charge port of the vehicle.

•

Take the charging gun from the charger holder and insert it in the vehicle properly (In case of partial gun insertion, it can cause a gap and might lead to lock failure).

•

Never pull out the charging gun during the ongoing charging session.

•

Once the charging session is done, STOP the charger and remove the charging gun once it is unlocked.

•

Remove the Charge gun from the vehicle and place it back in the charger slot.

•

Continued charging after a fault warning may result in fire, electric shock, or battery damage. The company is not liable for any injury, vehicle damage, or property loss resulting from failure to follow proper troubleshooting procedures. Contact an authorized service center before attempting to charge again.

Points to check in case of Failure: In case of any charging session failure, the user has to check and note down the "Error Code" displayed in the fast charging station display/ mobile application.

•

Retry the charging session.

•

In case of failure again, the user shall report the issue to the Help line number provided on the charging station / mobile application.

DIN and ISO Protocol: Public DC fast-charging machine manufacturers follow DIN or ISO protocols.

BEV is capable of charging with DIN and ISO standards

DIN	ISO
User must do the Authorization through RFID/Mobile application before connecting the charging gun.	Authorisation through RFID/Mobile application to be done after connecting the charge gun with the vehicle.
Authorisation through RFID/Mobile application to be complete in 60 sec. If the user fails to do the same, it will lead to session failure.	Waiting time between charge gun connect and Authorisation is 60 sec. If the user fails to do the same, it will lead to session failure.
ABB (all models), DELTA (25kW wall box charger) etc. follows DIN protocol.	Exicom (all models), DELTA (charger above 25kW output power), OKAYA etc.. follows ISO protocol.

Importance of network connectivity: Public charging uses the mobile application for the “Authorization” of the charging session. If the user is in a weak network area, there will be a delay in completing the authorization process, which may lead to session failure. In this case, the user needs to restart the charging procedure after doing a plug-out and plug-in of the charge gun in the vehicle.

Fault on EVSE : Before starting any charging session, kindly check there is no fault with the charging station. In case of any fault with the charging station there will be a RED fault LED glowing on the charging station. The user is advised NOT to attempt any charging session with a faulty charging station.

In Case of session stop

•

The users are advised to retry the charging session in case of the session is not getting initiated or the session stopped in between.

•

User can re-initiate the charging session by following the steps.

Remove the charging gun from the vehicle.

Reconnect the charging gun to the vehicle.

In case the charging session fails again and again, do report the concern with proper error codes displayed on the charger screen on the help line provided by the charging service provider.

Time To Charge (TTC) Vehicle

•

TTC (Total time to charge) is visible to the user on the vehicle cluster. It provides the information about the time remaining to full charge of the vehicle. User pay attention that this time may vary depending on the charging current/ current demand.

•

The Current demand of the vehicle depends on multiple factors such as temperature of battery pack, charging gun terminal temperature, fast charging machine temperature etc, therefore in case of higher temperature the TTC may increase for safety reasons.

14 Emergency Situations

14.1 Hazard Warning Lamp

The Hazard Warning Lamp is activated to alert other drivers during emergencies or when the vehicle is stationery for any reason.

The hazard warning lamp switch is located on the Roof console switch.

To activate the Hazard Warning Lamp, press the switch. All Turn Signal Lamps and the DID turn indicator lamps will start flashing. To deactivate, press the switch again.

The Hazard Light should be used when the vehicle's operation is compromised and creates a hazard to other road users. It is not intended to be used as a parking lamp.

The turn lamps will work when the hazard warning lamps are operational.

Auto Hazard Warning Lamp

Hazard lamps are turned ON automatically during bonnet open in vehicle stationary condition.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically for 10 seconds during panic braking condition to indicate following traffic.

Hazard lamps are turned on automatically in case of an unfortunate event of an accident where Airbags are deployed. In such a scenario, the hazard lamps will be on for 30 minutes or it can be turned off by operating Hazard switch (OFF to ON) or Ignition reset (Ignition OFF and ON)

If Incase the vehicle stalls while driving

•

Shift the mode to N.

•

Press the Hazard button

•

Manoeuvre the vehicle to side.

14.2 Tiretronics (If equipped)

The tiretronics system checks the pressure and temperature of the air inside the pneumatic tyres of the vehicle. System alerts the driver during driving if any of the tyre parameters are not in acceptable limits due to any reason.

The system will continue to alert until the warning condition is resolved to the actual tyre pressure values.

Appropriate tyre pressure and tyre temperature is required for;

•

Adequate braking

•

Road grip

•

Vehicle handling

•

Vehicle maneuvering

•

Reduced tyre wear and tear

•

Reduced tyre strain and safety

•

Good range of the vehicle

The DID(Driver Information Display) screen displays all alerts related to Tiretronics on the DID screen and indicates the visual warnings for all Tiretronics alerts.

Whenever low pressure or high pressure or Pressure leakage observed, corresponding tyre shall highlight and Low Pressure/High Pressure/Pressure Leakage message displayed in the DID screen.

14.2.1 Operation of Tiretronics

Tiretronics uses wireless sensor technology that is mounted on the wheel rim to checks the tyre pressure levels. They transmit the data to the receiver inside the vehicle which is in turn is communicated and displayed on the CID (center Information Display) screen.

In the CID screen all four tyre locations will display the status as pressure and temperature except spare tyre.

The Tiretronics has been customized only for the manufacturer’s genuine tyres and wheels. Tiretronics pressure limits and warning messages have been established and calibrated for the tyre size equipped on your vehicle. Replacement of manufacturer’s parts with a different size, type or style of components may damage the sensor and lead to incorrect readings.

Do not use aftermarket tyre sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with Tiretronics. Failure to comply may lead to sensor damage.

The Tiretronics is not intended to replace normal tyre care and maintenance or to warn of any tyre failure condition. The system should not be used as a replacement for a pressure measuring gauge to adjust the vehicle tyre pressure.

Driving with under-inflated tyres cause the tyres to overheat and may lead to tyre failure. Under-inflated tyres reduce the vehicle range, tyre tread life and may affect the vehicle's maneuverability and braking ability.

It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure using an accurate pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tiretronics warning indicator.

Tiretronics Warning Lamp

The Tiretronics warning lamp in the DID illuminates for any alert condition and also for low/high tire pressure alerts and malfunction.

14.2.2 Functionalities of Tiretronics System

Key Functionalities and Benefits of the system:

•

Low Pressure Alert

•

High Pressure Alert

•

High Temperature

•

Pressure Leakage Alert

•

Sensor Signal Missing

•

Tyre Auto Learn

•

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)

•

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

Low Pressure Alert

Low pressure monitoring is to indicate low tyre pressure. Please note the following points.

•

Low pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes below threshold also low pressure will be set based on the temperature value (Refer “Recommended tyre pressure Value” section for more details)

•

Low pressure alert in the DID will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition.

•

If low pressure is observed, respective tyre should be rectified with cause of low pressure and then fill air

•

Once low pressure alert is set with tyre pressure below threshold the alert shall not be cleared until the pressure is filled to the tyre pressure value

High Pressure Alert

High pressure monitoring is to indicate high pressure alert. Please note the following points.

•

High pressure alert will be set only when the tyre pressure value goes to certain values (>44 PSI)

•

High pressure alert in the DID will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen

•

If high pressure value is observed, air has to be released from the respective tyre until the pressure reduces to the tyre pressure value

•

The vehicle should be driven above 40 kmph for the new pressure value to be updated and the alert to be cleared

•

Once the high pressure alert is triggered the alert shall not get cleared until the respective tyre pressure is reaches to the certain value

High Temperature Alert

High Temperature monitoring is to indicate high Temperature alert. Please note the following points.

•

High Temperature alert will be set only when the tyre Temperature value goes to certain values (>90 deg)

•

High Temperature alert in the DID will pop up once for driver notification when the alert is set and the vehicle is in running condition. Otherwise the alert will remain in the tiretronics screen

•

If a high tire temperature is detected, Stop the vehicle and allow the tires to cool down to below 85°C before continuing to drive.

•

Ensure that the tire pressure matches the recommended value on the tyre pressure. Do not exceed the load capacity specified in the owner's manual.

Pressure Leakage Alert: Pressure leakage monitoring is to indicate any pressure leakage in any of the vehicle tyres. Please note the following points.

•

The pressure leakage alert will be set only when the tyre pressure is leaking at a high rate (>3 PSI per minute)

•

In the pressure leakage condition if the tyre pressure goes too low beyond the certain value then the low pressure alert will also be set

•

The pressure leakage alert in the DID will pop up once when the alert is set for driver notification and will be shown in CID (center information display) when the vehicle is in running condition/ignition ON condition

•

Once pressure leakage is observed the respective tyre should be observed for air leakages and the puncture condition has to be rectified. Proper tyre pressure value should be filled after puncture rectification

Sensor Signal Missing Alert: When the vehicle is running in speeds between 40 kmph and 120 kmph then the Tiretronics system should always keep receiving the signals from all of the running tyres.

•

On account of any issue in signal reception or Tiretronics sensor damage or tyres changed with out performing manual learning then the signal will not be received

•

Under such condition if the vehicle was driven for more than certain value without signal being received at least once, then ‘Signal missing’ will be set for respective tyre position on the CID screen. The Tiretronics DID telltale is also illuminated to indicate the same.

•

When the Tiretronics signal missing is set then perform manual learning once. If manual learning is not done successfully then the corresponding position tyres sensor needs to be checked by carefully opening the tyre

•

If the sensor is found to be damaged then it should be replaced with a new one and manual learning should be done

Tyre Fill Assist (TFA)

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer/ Vehicle Apps /My Vehicle / Exteriors / Tyres / Tyre fill Assist (Enable/Disable)

During Air Filling in tyre, Hazard lamps shall blink until tyre pressure value reaches. During air filling If tyre Pressure has reached the tyre pressure Value, then Horn shall activate one time During Air filling If tyre Pressure exceeds tyre pressure Value, then Hazard lamps shall blink at faster rate.

Tyre Pressure Imbalance

During driving if the system identifies tyre Pressure imbalance on front two tyres / Rear two tyres then DID shall popup Tyre Pressure imbalance warning.

14.2.3 Tiretronics Sensor Installation and Removal

Installation:
Sensor	A

First apply lubricant (paste) or soapy water to rim hole or valve nozzle bar, as shown in the above image A (the diagram is for reference only, and it is operated according to the degree of automation of the customer's production line)

Line the sensor up with the rim hole and attach the TPMS fitment tool to the end of the valve ready for pull in

Ensure the TPMS fitment tool insertion tool is positioned to the correct notch and that the sensor is pulled through in a direction parallel to the valve whole axis and NOT at an angle to it

The picture below shows a correctly fitted sensor. Note the rubber bulb of the valve resting against the rim and the front face of the enclosure is NOT touching the rim. Apply tyre soap solution to the rubber portion of the valve stem and the top of the enclosure

Place the inner tyre bead over the rim

Place the outer tyre bead over the rim

Inflate all four tyres to the prescribed pressure, check the valve area for leakage and re-balance the wheels prior to installing back on the vehicle

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. The fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

If the sensor is not properly installed as per the given procedure there is a possibility of improper reading and signal missing error will pop up CID

Removal

Remove the tyre from the rim

Remove the valve core to deflate the tire.

Remove the tread and ensure that the extractor forceps is inserted into the tire at the yellow position shown below and turn the rim clockwise.

To remove the sensor, remove the screw using a T6 TORX screwdriver.

Carefully and firmly pull the enclosure straight back off the valve

Cut the rubber bulb and attach the TPMS fitment tool to the valve. Remove the valve from the rim by pulling through the rim, or simply pull through without cutting the bulb

Lift the outer tyre bead over the rim using a tyre tool

The valve must be positioned just left of the start position to avoid sensor damage. Do not touch the sensor with the tyre tool.

Lift the inner tyre bead over the rim using the tyre tool

Remove existing valve stem

Starting to mount the tyre from the valve location is a wrong fitment. Fixing tool/stem may hit the sensor and damage it. Start from the opposite direction.

14.2.4 Tiretronics Learning

A - Auto Learning - Auto learning will be done if it is enabled in CID.

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to App Drawer/ Vehicle Apps /My Vehicle / Exteriors / Tyres / Auto Learn (Enable/Disable)

In case of tyres location changed from its original location, Automatically tyre swap location shall be identified and pressure and temperature value for respective tyre shall be updated within 10 min of vehicle driving based on environmental condition & vehicle drive condition auto location shall take one or more drive cycle to auto learn.

In case of a new TPMS replaced in the tyre, automatically system shall identify the tyre swapped location and update the warnings and alert for new location.

B - Manual learning - Manual learning has to be if Auto learn is not enabled in CID

After a tyre rotation or tiretronics sensor replacement, the receiver must be learnt, else the tiretronics warning lamp indicates a malfunction.

Recommended practice.

Manual learning is the process by which the identities of 4 sensors installed inside the tyres are learnt and programmed in to the memory of the receiver module.

Manual learning should be compulsorily performed on any of the following conditions or operations done

•

Any sensors replaced.

•

If it is observed that the alert indications in the tiretronics in DID are not co-relating with respect to their actual position in the vehicle

Once manual learning is initiated, the sensors inside the tyres need to be triggered by leaking the air from each tyre one at a time and should be completed within certain value post to each event for learning all 4 tyres

Do not perform Manual learning process at the same time on two vehicles with in the radius of 20 meters

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre.

It is required to ensure the tyres have pressure < 36 psi before initiating the manual learning process

Post manual learning, all four tyres should be filled to the tyre pressure pressure value

It is mandatory that manual learning of tyres should follow the sequence of ‘front left tyre position, front right tyre, rear right tyre and rear left tyre .

Tiretronics Learning Procedure (Manual)

•

Please ensure that the tyre pressure for all four tyres is set to 36 psi before proceeding with the process.

•

Turn the ignition ON

•

In Centre Information Display (CID) Go to Menu / Vehicle Apps /My Vehicle / Exteriors / Tyres / TPMS Manual Learning (Enable/Disable)

•

After enabling the TPMS manual learning, wait until the icon changes to the 'Disable' form.

•

Then, observe the DID for the Tiretronics telltale blinking, the vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flashing twice along with horn 2 times and the CID screen displaying ' TPMS MANUAL LEARNING.'

•

The sequence for TPMS manual learning is as follows: Front Left (FL), Front Right (FR), Rear Right (RR), and Rear Left (RL). After all tyres have been learned, perform an ignition reset.

•

If problem still persist, contact an Authorized Mahindra Dealer for further assistance.

Starting from Front Left Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the front left for 10 to 15 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt

If the front left tyre is learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flash once along with horn 1time and the FL tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

Learning the Front Right Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the front right for 10 to 15sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the front right tyre is learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flash once along with horn 1 time and the FR tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

Learning the Rear Right Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the rear right for 10 to 15sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear right tyre is learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flash once along with horn 1 time and the RR tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

Completing the Learning with Rear Left Tyre:

Start leaking the air from the rear left tyre for 10 to 15 sec and stop for 5 sec. Repeat until the tyre gets learnt.

If the rear left tyre is learned, vehicle hazard lamps flash once and the RL tyre shows learned in the CID screen.

If rear left tyre is also learned, vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flashing one time along with horn 1 time and ALL tyres show learned at respective tyre positions and ‘TPMS manual learning successful” in the CID screen.

If learning is not successful at any point of time, or at any point of time during the learning process if the learning takes more than 90 secs of time for each tyre position then the system shall exit the learning mode and show the ‘TPMS Manual Learning unsuccessful’ screen.

Also the vehicle position lamp blink one time and hazard lamps flashing in four times along with horn 4 times.

Limitations

•

The Tiretronics monitors only tyre pressure and temperature. It does not monitor conditions such as tyre wear

•

The Tiretronics will not be able to detect an instant tyre burst and inform the driver in advance

•

There may be the possibility of getting all the tyre location indicators on the Tiretronics display blinking along with the Tiretronics telltale, on passing environment area prone to heavy power lines and RF signal. It will come back to normal condition whenever interference gets cleared

14.2.5 Tiretronics — Points to Remember

•

It is recommended to fill the pressure to 36 psi at a digital gauge station only

•

Every 15 days, inflate all the tyres up to 36 psi and inflation should be done at cold condition/ambient temperature

•

Pressure deviation between the Tiretronics display and gauge will depend upon the following factors:

–

Atmospheric pressure

–

Error in pressure filling gauge (not calibrated)

–

Air leakage during inflation/deflation

•

Tiretronics measures the absolute pressure of the tyre, not relative pressure (gauge pressure)

•

Pressure deviation is defined for 0.5 psi (min) and 3 psi (max)

•

If the vehicle battery/fuse is disconnected and reconnected, it will update the pressure after the vehicle is driven or sensor is activated

•

It is mandatory that manual learning should be performed if the vehicle tyres are rotated or any of the tyres sensors are replaced, else the system will give a false alert with respect to false location

•

If more than one tyre needs to be learned, learn all 4 tyres as per manual learning procedure

•

Tiretronics is only a warning or indicating device. Pressure and temperature values displayed by the system is for indication prior to alert purposes only. The Tiretronics system should not be used as a measuring device to correlate or calibrate against other systems

•

During winter or in cold conditions, there may be chances of getting a pressure alert with the corresponding tyre location indicator in the display, if the tyre pressure is near the thresholds level. i.e. between 28 psi to 24 psi. However, this alert will get cleared after driving a few kilometers depending upon the climatic condition

14.3 Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) (If equipped)

The Indirect Tyre Monitoring System (ITPMS) is a safety feature designed to help you maintain proper pressure and ensure optimal vehicle performance. Unlike direct Tyre pressure monitoring systems, which use sensors in each Tyre, the ITPMS estimates Tyre pressure by monitoring wheel speed and other vehicle dynamics.

14.3.1 Working process

Wheel Speed Monitoring

•

The ITPMS uses the vehicle’s anti-lock braking system (ABS) sensors to monitor the rotational speed of each wheel. If a Tyre’s pressure drops significantly, it will affect the wheel’s rotation compared to the others.

•

The system calculates the difference in wheel speeds to determine if one or more Tyres are under-inflated.

Alert Notifications

•

If the system detects a significant difference in wheel speeds that may indicate low Tyre pressure, a warning light will illuminate on the dashboard. You will also receive a notification indicating that one or more Tyres may require attention.

•

It is essential to respond promptly to these alerts by checking the Tyre pressures and inflating them to the recommended levels.

System Calibration

•

The ITPMS requires periodic calibration, especially after Tyre rotations, replacements, or changes in Tyre size.

•

Calibration helps ensure accurate monitoring and alert functionality.

•

Refer Authorised Mahindra Service center for assistance.

Regular Tyre Maintenance

•

The ITPMS is a supplementary system and should not replace regular Tyre inspections. Check Tyre pressure regularly, especially before long trips or during changes in temperature

Temperature Effects

•

Tyre pressure can fluctuate with changes in temperature. It’s advisable to check Tyre pressures when the Tyres are cold (after being parked for a few hours) for the most accurate readings.

Limitations

•

The ITPMS may not detect slow leaks or small changes in Tyre pressure. Always maintain routine Tyre maintenance and visually inspect Tyres for any visible damage or wear.

•

If the warning light remains illuminated after checking and inflating your Tyres to the recommended pressure, there may be a system fault. Consult the vehicle display for additional messages or alerts.

•

For persistent issues or if you suspect a malfunction in the ITPMS, consult the vehicle’s service manual or contact your authorized dealership for assistance

The Indirect Tyre Monitoring System is a driver assistance feature designed to enhance safety and vehicle performance. However, it does not replace the need for regular Tyre maintenance and inspections. Always drive responsibly and adhere to safety guidelines

Important Note:

ITPMS

Only the pressure will be intimated to the driver by measuring the speed when the wheels are rotating.

TPMS

Direct TPMS will measure the Tyre pressure using hardware sensors located in each Tyre with a warning in the DID if there is pressure difference.

14.4 Tyre Care and Maintenance

14.4.1 Tyre Pressure

Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper Tyre pressure:

•

Safety

•

Economy

•

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Proper Tyre inflation contributes to a comfortable and safe ride. Overinflating produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Unequal Tyre pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response or may cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle tyre pressure), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.

14.4.2 Recommended Tyre Pressure Value

14.5 Towing

The tow hook is a screw-on type and is included in the toolkit. To use, carefully remove or pry off the tow hook cover on the front or rear bumper using a screwdriver. Screw the tow hook into place and tighten it by turning clockwise. Attach a cable or chain designed specifically for towing vehicles securely to the tow hook.

Towing has to be done only to move the vehicle from the stationary location to the towing vehicle

Front Tow Hook

Rear Tow Hook

•

Only Flat bed towing is recommended in this vehicle.

•

In emergency situation, the vehicle can be moved forward (approximate 10 feet) minimal distance with Ignition ON in Neutral (N) position.

•

You have to “PUSH — RELEASE — PUSH”. Excessive pushing will not move the vehicle.

•

This is to avoid damage to internal components of the motor.

Any damage arising from improper towing, unauthorized roadside repairs, or disassembly of high-voltage components may not be covered under your warranty. Always follow the towing procedures in this manual and use Mahindra-authorized service centers for any post-accident inspection or repairs. Failure to do so may void warranty coverage for affected vehicle systems, including the high-voltage battery pack and motor component

14.5.1 Towing Equipment

Only flat bed towing is allowed for BE 6. This is the safest and best way of towing .

Any other type of towing process may cause irreversible damage to high value components related to Electric Vehicle

Procedure to push the vehicle when immobilized

Incase the vehicle gets breakdown in middle of the road, then the vehicle can be pushed minimal distance only (not more than 10 feet) incase of emergency. This is to avoid damage to internal components.

Vehicle should be in neutral with ignition ON condition (Drive not enabled)

Continuous pushing of the vehicle is not possible. The vehicle can be smoothly moved in a "PUSH — RELEASE — PUSH" manner.

Regen lamp may glow in DID while pushing the vehicle

Compared to conventional diesel/petrol engine vehicle, the force required to push this vehicle would be high and vehicle movement would be very slow.

14.5.2 Emergency Assistance

In case of emergencies, driver/customer can follow the below steps to connect with our Emergency assistance service either from the vehicle or through mobile APP.

Emergency Assistance from Vehicle

e-Call# :

e-Call is initiated when a valid crash event is registered. Airbags may or may not be deployed based on the severity and direction of the event. For more details on airbags, refer to the safety section.

In an unfortunate event of your vehicle meeting with an accident, triggering the airbags, your vehicle will initiate the following actions -

Call will be triggered automatically from your vehicle to 108* Ambulance Service for medical assistance

* [108] number is the default option. This number can be changed based on your preference/location.. Contact a Mahindra Authorised Dealer

SOS call from vehicle

For SOS call, the driver can either operate the switch located in the overhead console near the interior rear-view mirror or through CID.

Precautions in the Event of a Fire

If your vehicle is on fire while driving on the road, then follow the below points:

•

Immediately bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road and turn off the ignition.

•

As soon as you can, exit the vehicle. You should also help the other passengers to exit the vehicle securely. In addition, you can unlock all the windows and doors before turning off the Ignition.

•

Move yourself away from the flaming vehicle. A vehicle could explode because it carries High Voltage Battery Pack. Keep distance from the flaming vehicle accordingly. Additionally, if at all possible, warn approaching vehicles of the hazard.

•

If the fire is small and slow, use a fire extinguisher ABC, or BC. If it is impossible to extinguish the fire in the early stage, keep a safe distance from the vehicle and immediately call the fire service. Also, inform them that an electric vehicle is involved.

•

Never open the hood or boot of a burning vehicle to try and put out the fire. If you attempt to open the boot or bonnet when there is a fire in the motor compartment or underneath the vehicle, the flames may flare up and cause burns. Immediately contact the fire service department.

•

Never approach a burning vehicle to collect personal items. If you don't keep a safe distance from a burning vehicle, an explosion could hurt you since toxic vapours from the burning vehicle are harmful.

•

You can call the Mahindra Authorised Dealer once the fire has been extinguished. To help you move the damaged vehicle, describe the situation and extent of the damage to the service centre or Me4U.

Precautions in the Event of an Accident

•

Make sure the vehicle is in park position "P", the parking brake is engaged, and the Ignition is off

•

Do not attempt to restart or move the vehicle if there is visible damage, smoke, or an unusual smell.

•

If any orange-colored cables (High voltage Cables) on the vehicle are visible, in order to prevent electric shock or even death, do not make any contact with any cable.

•

Mahindra is not responsible for any damage, injuries, or liabilities resulting from failure to follow these safety precautions.

•

If you notice any coolant leaks and damage in refrigerant lines, do not drive the vehicle and contact Me4U

•

If your vehicle is being recovered by a Road Side Assistance (RSA), please contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for further guidance

•

If water enters inside the vehicle or fully submerged in water, do not drive the vehicle. Contact RSA / Authorised Dealer immediately. Never touch the orange-colored cables because an electric shock may occur, causing injury or death.

If your vehicle becomes submerged underwater, avoid trying to open the doors immediately due to the water pressure.

Be mindful of potential electric shock risks. Avoid touching any exposed electrical components or wiring while exiting the vehicle. Contact emergency services for assistance as soon as possible.

Precautions while driving the vehicle in water-logged and/ or flooded area

Never attempt to start the vehicle

•

Never drive through water when it flows above the bottom portion of the bumper or above the tyre center line

•

The water surface should not be higher than the lower edge of the underbody

•

High voltage battery and electrical/electronics components will get damaged internally if attempts are made to cross through deep water

•

Wet brake discs have a lower coefficient of friction resulting in reduced braking efficiency. Tap the brake pedal while driving to remove the moisture in brake disc surface

•

14.5.3 Contacting Mahindra Road Side Assistance

MAHINDRA Assistance (RSA) program is a 24 x 7, 365 days, emergency support service provided in the event your vehicle is immobilized due to mechanical/ electrical fault or collision, the vehicle may not be in a safely operable/ drivable condition. In such a scenario the RSA will provide towing services. The RSA service is complimentary during the warranty period and subscription based post warranty.

The Roadside Assistance services are provided by a third party business partner. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number will be answered by trained RSA service representatives.

The Roadside assistance is covered initially for 3 years from the date of sale.

Contact No. : 18002667070

Based on the information provided, the RSA service representative will determine the type of help required

1. Dealer Locator Service - RSA will provide the address and contact details of the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer/Service Centre.

2. Dispatch Service - A service provider will be dispatched to the location of your vehicle for assistance.

3. On-site Assistance including Towing - On-site assistance such as flat tyre change, dead battery will be provided at the location. Customer need to pay for tyre repair charges. If on-site assistance is unable to make the vehicle operable, towing services will be called in.

4. Towing Services -In the event of a mechanical breakdown or an accident, RSA will organize to tow the vehicle to the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer/Service Centre.

5. Key Lost/Key Lock-out - The RSA will deliver a duplicate key from the residence of the user from the same city.

6. Alternate transportation/accommodation - In the event of trip interruption, RSA will assist in organizing for Taxi/ alternate transportation/Ticket and/or accommodation. Taxi /transport is free up to 50 Kms from the breakdown site, beyond which the user/customer need to pay to the provider.

RSA can be accessed via the ME4U app, mobile phone, RSA toll-free number, and the Center Information Display (CID).

14.6 Changing a Flat Tyre

In case of a flat tyre during driving, reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place well away from traffic. Park on a level spot with firm ground. Stop the vehicle and turn ON your hazard warning flashers.

Firmly apply the parking brake. Have everyone come out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.

A flat tire significantly reduces traction and stability, increasing the risk of losing control of the vehicle and causing an accident.

Driving on a flat tire can pose serious safety risks to you and other road users, as it increases the likelihood of accidents and breakdowns.

The tire can become completely shredded, making it impossible to repair and requiring a full replacement and the rim to make direct contact with the road, leading to costly damage.

Never stop your vehicle in a traffic lane to change a tyre. You could be hit by an oncoming vehicle. Keep driving until you reach a safe location. If you cannot reach a safe area, turn on the hazard lights, remain inside the vehicle with seatbelts fastened, and call roadside assistance

Lifting a vehicle to change a tyre or perform maintenance is very dangerous if you do not have the requisite tools, safety equipment and training. The jack provided along with the vehicle is to be used only for changing a spare tyre. It is never to be used to perform any other maintenance or repair on the vehicle.

Using a vehicle jack safely during an emergency requires careful attention to several precautionary measures. Here are some important steps to follow:

Ensure the vehicle is on a flat, stable surface to prevent it from rolling or shifting. Avoid soft or uneven ground.

Engage the Parking Brake

Turn on Hazard Lights

Place wheel chocks or large rocks behind and in front of the wheels

Place the jack under the designated jack points

Carefully raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle slowly and steadily. Ensure the vehicle remains stable throughout the process.

Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack.

Never place any part of your body under any portion of the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack. You could be crushed by the vehicle if it falls off a jack. Keep bystanders away from the vehicle.

Find level, solid ground that is clear of oncoming traffic. If you cannot find a safe place to stop, it is better to drive on a flat tyre and damage the rim than it is to risk being hit by oncoming traffic. After changing a flat Tyre, never store the tyre or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle. This loose equipment could strike an occupant in the event of a sudden stop or collision. Store all of these items in the proper place.

The spare wheel is only for emergency situations, speed limit of 80 kmph. Never use it for normal driving. After installing the spare wheel, take your vehicle to a Mahindra Authorised Service Centre or a tyre - specialised shop to repair/replace with specified tyre for the vehicle.

With a temporary tire installed, a vehicle’s handling may be different, requiring careful driving until a full-sized tire is installed.

The following sections outline the procedure for changing a flat tyre;

14.6.1 Spare wheel and Tool Kit location

The spare wheel, toolkit organizer, warning triangle, and charger are located beneath the trunk lid.

Unlock the latch provided in the Luggage compartment lid to lift the lid.

Lift the Luggage floor Lid as shown in the illustration

Afterwards, the spare wheel, toolkit organizer, warning triangle, and charger can be taken out from their storage location, and use them as needed.

14.6.2 Tool Kit removal

Refer to the 'Spare Wheel and Tool Kit Location' section for the procedure to remove the trunk lid.

Lift and take out the tool kit organiser from the spare wheel

The following tools are available in the toolkit organizer:

A	Jack
B	Jack Operating Lever
C	Spanner
D	Tow Bar
E	Stud
F	Screwdriver (+ and -)
G	Wheel Spanner

14.6.3 Spare Wheel Removal

Refer to the 'Spare Wheel and Tool Kit Location' section for the procedure to remove the trunk lid.

The spare wheel is mounted below the trunk lid at the rear end of the vehicle

•

Take out the tool kit (A) from the tool kit organiser (Refer Tool kit removal procedure)

•

Loosen the Lock nut from the Spare wheel (B)

•

Lift the spare wheel upwards from inner side to vertical position and take it out

•

Place the punctured wheel in the luggage compartment using the vinyl cover and straps as shown in the image. Due to its larger size, the flat tire cannot be mounted in the spare wheel location.

The spare wheel is only for emergency situations, speed limit of 80 kmph. Never use it for normal driving. After installing the spare wheel, take your vehicle to a Mahindra Authorised Service Centre to repair/replace with specified tyre for the vehicle.

Repair or replacement from a non-authorised workshop shall be undertaken at sole risk of the customer and Mahindra, its directors, KMPs and officers shall not be liable for any defect or damage due to such repair or replacement by a non-authorised workshop

•

When reinstalling the spare tyre, be sure to securely lock it with lock nut.

•

While your vehicle is being raised up with a jack, avoid any impact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured

•

When taking out the spare tyre, be careful not to damage the body of your vehicle

Trunk Lid to be fitted always at the lower position when removes and refits again.

14.6.4 Warning Triangle

•

The warning triangle is a necessary device for your safety.

•

It is placed in the luggage compartment below the luggage floor lid.

•

When you pull over your breaking down vehicle to a safe place, set up a warning triangle behind your vehicle. (Daytime: 100 Metres behind, Night: 200 Metres behind)

When the Vehicle has a Serious Problem during Driving

•

Turn on the hazard flasher and move the vehicle out of traffic to a safe place. Set up the warning triangle behind your vehicle (Daytime: 100 Metres, Night: 200 Metres) to warn other vehicles

•

Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay away from the traffic. When your safety is secured, contact your Authorised Mahindra dealer for your emergency service

14.6.5 Jack Points

Refer to the 'Spare Wheel and Tool Kit Location' section for the procedure to remove the floor mat.

•

The jack is located in the toolkit organizer above the spare wheel

•

Take the jack from the organizer and use it as needed

Front jack up point - On the side sill in-between the groove available on the sill cladding just behind the front wheels.

Rear jack up point - On the side sill in-between the groove available on the sill cladding just in front of the rear wheels.

•

Risks associated with incorrectly jacking the vehicle include potential damage to the vehicle's underbody components.

•

Incorrect jacking can also cause the vehicle to become unstable, increasing the risk of it falling off the jack, which poses serious safety hazards to anyone working around or under the vehicle.

•

Additionally, improper jacking can compromise the vehicle's alignment and suspension systems, affecting its overall performance and safety.

Make sure to instal the jack so that its upper plate is correctly seated under the vehicle’s positions marked in the figure for the flat tyre side.

Do not place the jack under the Battery box area .

14.6.6 Jacking Usage

Position the jack at the correct jacking point. Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid ground. Ensure no one is in the vehicle.

Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tyre to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up. When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.

A : Flat Tyre

B : Chock Blocks

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle end along with the wheel spanner into the jack and turn it clockwise with the jack handle. As the jack touches the vehicle and begins to lift, check that it is properly positioned. Raise it high enough so that the spare tyre can be installed. Remember, you will need more ground clearance when putting on the spare tyre than when removing the flat tyre.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jacking point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the underbody of the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause personal injury.

•

Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during wheel changing

•

Do not raise the jack with someone in the vehicle

•

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top or underneath the jack

•

Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove and change the wheel

•

Usable extended height of jack is up to the yellow line/mark provided in the jack. Do not raise the jack above the yellow line

•

Follow jacking instructions

•

Do not start or run the vehicle while your vehicle is supported by the jack

Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is supported by the jack alone.

Always place the jack on the designated jacking positions on the vehicle and Never on the HV battery area, bumpers or any other part of the vehicle for jacking support.

If there is any damages happen in underbody (HV Battery) area, Contact mahindra authorised dealer immediately

14.6.7 Wheel Bolt Loosening

Wheel cap Removal (if equipped) : Please insert the screw driver given in the tool kit near the lugs of the wheel cap and pry the cap away from the wheel.

Do not try to pry off the wheel cap by hand alone. Take due care in handling the wheel cap to avoid unexpected personal injury.

Wheel Removal

•

Always loosen the wheel bolts before raising the vehicle. Turn the wheel bolts counter clockwise to loosen as per the sequence shown. To get maximum leverage, fit the spanner to the bolt, so that the handle is on the left side.

Wheel Fixing

•

Vehicle has to be lifted

•

Once the bolts are loosened, remove all bolts completely from the wheel assembly to allow for easier removal of the wheel.

•

The stud needs to be installed in the designated hole.

•

The stud is available in the toolkit.

•

The stud acts as a guide to locate the wheel. This practice simplifies alignment, it also reduces the load/efforts while fitment.

•

Once the tyre is positioned, assemble the remaining bolts, leaving the stud hole empty. Hand-tighten all the bolts without using a spanner.

•

As the final step, remove the stud, replace it with a bolt, and securely tighten all bolts.

•

In the jacked up condition, do not torque tighten the wheel bolts.

•

The vehicle can now be lowered to the ground from its jacked-up position and tighten the diagonally opposite wheel bolts using the wheel spanner.

•

Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts, but loosen them by one or two turns.

Do not apply force with your legs (or stand) on the wheel spanner while loosening/tightening the wheel bolts.

Grab the spanner near the end of the handle and push down on the handle. Be careful that the spanner does not slip off the bolt. Do not remove the bolts, but loosen them by one or two turns.

Do not lift alloy rims with aero bezels during handling. Lifting by the bezels may cause damage to the aero components and compromise the integrity of the wheel..

Never use oil or grease on the bolts . Doing so may lead to over tightening of the bolts, wheel spanner slip, damage the bolts and also may cause personal injuries. Also, bolts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt, clean before installing.

Improperly or loosely tightened wheel bolts are dangerous. The wheel could wobble or come off. This could result in loss of vehicle control and cause a serious accident. Always make sure all the wheel bolts are properly/securely tightened to the specified torque.

When lowering the vehicle, make sure all portions of your body are clear off the vehicle as it is lowered to the ground. Have the wheel bolts tightened with the torque spanner to140 Nm , as soon as possible after changing wheels.

If you have rotated, repaired, changed your tyres or changed the wheel rims, check the wheel bolts are still tight after driving about 1,000 km (Torque 140 Nm).

Put the wheel cap (if equipped) into position aligning the nozzle on the wheel to the nozzle clearance on the wheel cover. Tap it firmly on the sides with your hand to snap it into place.

Check the air pressure of the replaced tyre. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tyre pressure. If the cap is not replaced, dirt and moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and instal it as soon as possible.

14.6.8 Restore the Tools, Jack and Flat Tyre Securely

Mount the flat tyre to the luggage compartment using the vinyl cover and straps as shown in the image.

Restore the tools and jack back to their respective locations.

Wheel balancing is recommended after tyre puncture rework.

15 Maintenance

15.1 General Owner's Information

Your vehicle is designed for minimal maintenance with extended service intervals, saving you time and money. However, regular maintenance and daily care remain essential to ensure smooth, safe, and economical operation. It is the owner's responsibility to ensure all specified maintenance, including general service, is completed. The new vehicle limited warranty requires proper maintenance and care must be performed. Refer Warranty and Service Information Guide for complete warranty information.

Where to go for service?

Mahindra technicians are highly trained specialists who stay updated with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips, and dealership training programs. They gain expertise on Mahindra vehicles through extensive training before servicing your vehicle, ensuring professional care and precision.

You can trust that your Mahindra Authorized Dealer's service department is dedicated to meeting your vehicle's maintenance needs with reliability, efficiency, and cost-effectiveness. Any servicing, maintenance, or repairs related to the high-voltage battery, motor, or electrical components must be conducted exclusively at a Mahindra Authorized Service Center. Unauthorized repairs or service by non-Mahindra technicians will void the vehicle’s warranty.

Get the most from your vehicle with routine maintenance: Routine maintenance is key to ensuring your vehicle delivers the performance, reliability, longevity, and resale value you expect. That’s why we’ve created this Maintenance Section—to guide you on the necessary services and their recommended intervals. By keeping your vehicle in top condition, you can avoid major repairs and expenses down the road.

Here are a few tips to help you get started with routine maintenance:

•

Familiarize Yourself: Take time to read your Owner's Manual to understand your vehicle better.

•

Review the Maintenance Section: Go through this section to learn about the required services and schedules.

•

Keep Records: Use this manual to log scheduled maintenance in the Warranty and Service Information Guide.

•

Consult Experts: Rely on your Mahindra Authorized Dealer for all your vehicle’s maintenance and service needs.

Suggestions for Obtaining Service for your Vehicle

Prepare for the Appointment: If you need warranty work done, ensure you have the necessary documents with you. Keep in mind that not all services may be covered under the warranty. Discuss any additional charges with the service manager beforehand. It’s also a good idea to maintain a log of your vehicle’s service history for future reference.

Prepare a List: Prepare a written list of any problems with your vehicle or specific work you want done. If your vehicle has been involved in an accident or has had work done that isn’t recorded in your maintenance log, inform the Service Adviser or Relationship Manager about it.

Be Reasonable with Requests: If your list includes several items and you need your vehicle back by the end of the day, discuss your priorities with the Service Adviser or Relationship Manager. Organize the list by importance to ensure the most critical issues are addressed first.

Need Assistance? : It is recommended to first discuss any concerns with the Service Manager at your Mahindra Authorized Dealer. Most issues can be resolved through this process. If you are still not satisfied, escalate the matter to the General Manager or the dealership owner.

If an Mahindra Authorised Dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact any Mahindra Customer Care Executive. They would need the following information:

Owner's name and address, owner's telephone number (home and office), Mahindra Authorised Dealer name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), vehicle delivery date and mileage.

Warranty Information: Read the Warranty Information provided in the "Warranty and Service Information Guide" to understand the terms and provisions of Mahindra warranties for your vehicle. Mahindra genuine parts, fluids, lubricants, and accessories are available at any Mahindra Authorized Dealer, and they will help ensure your vehicle continues to perform at its best.

Protect your Warranty: Routine maintenance is essential not only for keeping your vehicle performing as intended but also for protecting your warranty. Failure to follow the scheduled maintenance outlined in the Warranty and Service Information Guide may void warranty coverage for parts affected by insufficient upkeep. It is crucial to keep detailed records of all maintenance performed. Please note that damage or failures resulting from neglect or improper maintenance are not covered under warranty.

Keeping maintenance records is easy with the ‘Warranty and Service Information Guide’

Keeping a record of your vehicle’s maintenance is essential. To make this easier, scheduled maintenance coupons are provided in the service coupon booklet. Each time your vehicle undergoes scheduled maintenance, present this booklet to have the work certified. Be sure to record the service date and mileage at the time of service. This simplifies record-keeping and ensures that, if your vehicle requires warranty coverage, you have the necessary documentation to demonstrate proper maintenance.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing: In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic by itself, and does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of overheating and/or foreign material contamination should be inspected immediately by a qualified expert such as the factory trained technicians at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Your vehicle's oils and fluids should be changed at the specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Contaminated brake fluid can severely compromise braking performance, leading to increased stopping distances or brake failure. If the brake fluid appears cloudy, contains particles, or has an unusual odor, do not drive the vehicle. Have the brake system inspected and serviced by a Mahindra Authorized Dealer immediately.

Chemicals and Additives: Non-Mahindra approved chemicals or additives are not necessary for factory-recommended maintenance. In fact, Mahindra advises against using such products unless they are specifically recommended by Mahindra for a particular application.

Your vehicle is a highly sophisticated machine equipped with complex performance systems, each designed to meet specific manufacturer specifications and features. For accurate diagnosis and proper repairs, it’s essential to rely on your Mahindra Authorized Dealer, who is trained to handle your vehicle's unique requirements. All software updates must be conducted using Mahindra-authorized updates only. Installation of third-party software or unauthorized modifications to the vehicle’s control units may cause malfunctions and will void the warranty.

When planning your maintenance services, consider your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for all your vehicle's needs.

Get the most from your Service and Maintenance visits: Servicing your vehicle at a Mahindra Authorized Dealer offers numerous benefits, ensuring quality maintenance and adding value to your vehicle. Therefore, it is strongly recommended to have your vehicle serviced exclusively at a Mahindra Authorized Dealer.

Maintenance Interval: Mahindra's recommended maintenance intervals are based on thorough engineering tests to determine the optimal mileage for performing various services, ensuring your vehicle's protection at the lowest overall cost. It is strongly advised not to deviate from the maintenance schedules outlined in this Maintenance Schedule.

Vehicle Self Maintenance - General Precautions

•

Refer to relevant sections of the manual before starting

•

Engage the parking brake

•

Block the wheels to prevent unexpected vehicle movement

•

Turn OFF the ignition

•

Stay clear of hot vehicle parts

•

Avoid repeated contact with fluids

•

Prevent coolant and other fluids from spilling onto electrical or hot vehicle parts.

•

Keep open flames and burning material, such as cigarettes away from the battery and all electrical components.

15.2 Motor Compartment

A	Electric Power Train Cooling Degassing Tank*	B	Brake Fluid Reservoir	C	High Voltage Battery Cooling System Degassing Tank*
D	Auxiliary / Low voltage (LV) Battery (12V)*	E	Motor Compartment Fuse Box*	F	Windshield Washer Filler Neck
G	Frunk		* - Frunk to be removed for accessing

15.3 General Maintenance

The following general maintenance items should be checked frequently. Additionally, if you notice any unusual noises, fluid leaks, odors, or vibrations, it is essential to investigate the cause or take your vehicle to a Mahindra Authorized Dealer or a qualified service center immediately.

In the Motor Compartment

•

Front windshield washer fluid level

•

Auxiliary / LV Battery condition

•

Brake fluid level

•

Fluid leaks

•

Hoses, joints and pipes for any abnormalities

•

Wiring Harness

Inside the Vehicle

•

Lights

•

Warning lamps

•

Windshield wiper and wash

•

Steering wheel

•

Seats/Seat belts

•

Accelerator pedal/Brake pedal

•

Brakes

•

Parking brake

•

Gear lever shift Functionality

Outside the Vehicle

•

Lamps

•

Fluid leaks

•

Doors and hood latches

•

Tyre inflation pressure

•

Tyre surface/thread and wheel bolts

15.4 In the Motor Compartment

Fluid Leaks: Inspect the motor compartment and the underbody of your vehicle for any leaks. If you detect a leak, have the cause identified and corrected immediately.

For any inspections to be carried out in motor compartment, Frunk and its accessories has to be removed.

Follow the below procedure for removal of the Frunk from vehicle.

15.4.1 Frunk Removal

Pull and lift the beauty cover from the snap locks by hand.

Using the star screw driver remove the screws from the front trim and remove it. star screw driver is available in the tool kit.

Using 10 mm socket spanner remove the bolts from the frunk.

Lift the frunk and disconnect the electrical connector from frunk light.

Take out the frunk from the vehicle.

15.4.2 Checking/Topping Coolant Level

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

The coolant level should be between “MIN” and “MAX” marking provided on the degassing tank

If the coolant level is below the “MIN” mark, Immediately contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer for assistance.

Refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Coolant capacity and grade.

Draining of electric power train/ HVAC & Battery coolant should always be done by an Mahindra Authorized Dealer.

If the coolant level is found below MIN mark in EPT/ Battery or HVAC degassing tank, contact Mahindra authorised service center. Never top-up the coolant.

Never open any of the degassing tank pressure cap. Hot coolant may splash resulting in serious personal injury or severe burns by the erupting liquid.

15.4.3 Checking/Topping Brake Fluid

The brake fluid level will gradually decrease as the brake components wear and will rise when the components are replaced.

As long as the fluid level is between the "MIN" and "MAX" lines, it is within the normal operating range, and there is no need to add fluid.

If the fluid levels are below the "MIN" mark, the performance of the systems could be compromised. In this case, Top-up the recommended brake fluid till the ‘Max’ mark or contact a Mahindra Authorized Dealer immediately for assistance.

To check the brake fluid level, remove the beauty cover on the left-hand side

Carefully clean the cap on the reservoir before removing it to ensure no debris falls into the reservoir. Avoid keeping the reservoir open for longer than necessary when adding brake fluid.

Use only brake fluid that meets Mahindra specifications.

Refer the Warranty and Service Information Guide for Brake Fluid capacity and grade.

Draining or changing of brake fluid should always be done by Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

15.4.4 Windshield Washer Fluid Top-up

Top-up the windshield washer reservoir as and when required. Refer the above image for the windshield washer cap location.

In very cold weather conditions, fill the reservoir with washer fluid premixed with anti-freeze.

If you operate your vehicle in very low temperatures, use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection. Failure to use washer fluid with anti-freeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.

15.5 Maintenance - Inside the Vehicle

Lights: Ensure that all lights, including the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights, are functioning properly. Additionally, check the alignment of the headlights.

Warning Messages and Lamps: Check all warning lamps that appear in the Driver information Display (DID). Refer to the relevant sections in this manual for further details.

Seats: Check that all seat controls, such as seat adjusters and seat back recliners, operate smoothly. Ensure that all latches lock securely in any position. Also, verify that the head restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold securely in any latched position.

Seat Belts: Check that the seat belt system, including buckles, retractors, and anchors, operates properly and smoothly. Ensure that the belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn, or damaged.

Accelerator Pedal: Check the pedals for smooth operation, ensuring there is no uneven pedal effort or stickiness. Also, inspect the footwell and remove any obstructions that may interfere with pedal movement.

Brake Pedal: Check the pedals for smooth operation and ensure proper clearance. Also, inspect the footwell and remove any obstructions if present.

15.6 Maintenance - Outside the Vehicle

The following checks should be carried out periodically, unless otherwise specified.

Lamps: Check and ensure the proper functioning of all exterior lamps.

Fluid Leaks: Check the motor compartment and the underbody of the vehicle for any leaks. If you notice any leak, have the cause identified and corrected immediately.

Doors and Hood: Check all doors and latches including the tailgate and hood for proper functioning.

Tyre Inflation Pressure: Check the tyre pressure with a pressure gauge every week to ensure it is within the recommended range.

15.7 LV Battery

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

Your vehicle is equipped with a genuine Mahindra auxiliary battery. To ensure long-lasting and trouble-free performance, keep the battery top clean and dry, and always ensure the cables are securely fastened to the terminals.

If you notice corrosion on the battery or terminals, disconnect the cables and clean the terminals using a wire brush. To prevent future corrosion, apply a thin layer of petroleum jelly to the terminals. Ensure the terminals and hold-down clamp nuts are tightened just enough to keep the battery securely in place, as over-tightening can damage the terminals.

For Best Battery Service

•

Keep the battery securely mounted

•

Keep the battery top clean and dry

•

Keep terminals and connections clean, tight, and protected with petroleum jelly or terminal grease to prevent corrosion and ensure reliable performance.

•

Immediately rinse any spilled electrolyte with a solution of water and baking soda to neutralize acid and prevent damage.

Do not disconnect the auxiliary battery terminals while the drive enable condition. This will adversely affect all electronic controllers.

While removing the auxiliary battery, always disconnect the negative terminal first and while installing the battery, ensure the negative terminal is connected last.

Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery acid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don't lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in the eyes or on the skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities of water.

The auxiliary battery system contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not attempt to open, disassemble, or modify high-voltage components, including cables and connectors. Any attempt to tamper with the system may cause electric shock, fire, or severe injury. If you suspect a battery issue, contact a Mahindra Authorized Dealer immediately

A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep any flame or spark away from the vent holes.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling batteries.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed, the clock (if equipped) and the preset radio (if equipped) stations must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
The replacement battery must meet the specification of the originally fitted battery.

The company shall not be liable/responsible for any damages/ injuries, including consequential damages/ injuries, resulting due to fitment of non OEM approved batteries

Checking the Electrolyte Level: Check the electrolyte level and specific gravity every three months. Inspect all six cells, and if the level is below the lower marker, add distilled water up to the upper marker.

Adding distilled water:

•

Remove the vent plugs

•

Add distilled water to all the cells that require the fluid and secure the plugs properly

15.8 Windshield Wiper Blades and Jets

15.8.1 Changing the Wiper Blade

Switch off the ignition and lift wiper switch upwards within 3secs of ignition off

Wiper will go to service position (at out-wipe/a-pillar)

From service position, wipers blades can be lifted off from the windshield.

Press the lock with finger slide and remove the wiper blade from the arm

Refit the wiper blade as shown the image.

Wiper Arm and Blade Refitting Procedure

Install the wiper arm inside the wiper blade

Pull from the wiper arm , holding the wiper blade to get wiper arm engage in wiper blade locking

Close the clip

Return the wiper arm on the windshield

Don’ts

•

While wiper assembly loading on vehicle hold one hand with arm head and other with retainer

•

Never lift the Wiper Assembly in parking condition ,otherwise hood paint peel off /hood & wiper may get damaged

•

Don’t use harsh detergent, oil etc. to clean the windshield wiper blade.

•

Avoid excessive dry run of the wiper.

•

Don’t apply unnecessary force, jerks etc. to check fitment or position.

Do’s

•

Switch on the ignition and one wipe operation from combination switch for going wiper motor to depressed park position

•

Wiper Arm & Blade Assembly Installation will be done in depressed park condition by ensuring parking position(i.e. 3 dots marks on windshield glass (wiper motor power on condition)

•

Check wiping operation

To prevent damage to the windshield, don’t let the wiper arm slap down on to it.

15.8.2 Windshield Washer Jet

There are two nozzles washer jets in the hood inner panel

Check the washer jet to ensure proper operation

15.8.3 Do it Yourself Maintenance

Learn how to perform simple Do It Yourself procedures, such as replacing wiper blades and cabin filters, or installing the paint protection film kit.

Note: Due to market region or vehicle configuration specifics, some parts and procedures may not be available for your vehicle. When navigating to, select your region and language to see an updated list of parts and accessories available for your region.

Perform each procedure in a dry and well-lit area. For your safety, only perform a procedure if you feel comfortable doing so, and always follow provided instructions.

15.9 Appearance Care and Protection

15.9.1 Washing the Exterior

•

Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH soap

•

Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces

•

Never wash a vehicle that is ‘hot to the touch’ or during exposure to strong, direct sunlight

•

Always use a clean sponge or vehicle wash mitt with plenty of water for best results

•

Dry the vehicle with a chamois cloth or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting

•

It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle

•

Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings and insect deposits; they can cause damage to the vehicle's paint work and trim over time

15.9.2 Vehicle Wash

Water washing in the High volt motor compartment and underbody is not recommended. High pressure or low pressure water washing may cause the failure of HV and LV electrical circuits located in the motor compartment. There is a risk that the high pressure water can enter the HV battery pack from the joint and cause concern

Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them

15.9.3 Exterior Chrome

•

Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo

•

Use the custom bright metal cleaners, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Apply the product as you would wax to clean chrome parts; allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes, and then wipe off the haze with a clean, dry rag

•

Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can leave scratches on the chrome surface

•

After polishing the chrome parts, you can also apply a coating of Premium Liquid Wax, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer, or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects

15.9.4 Matt Finish Colours Do’s and Dont’s

•

Vehicle should be washed using a car shampoo that has a mild neutral (Zero) pH with a clean sponge or microfiber cloth to avoid scratching the vehicle’s surface.

•

Do not use detergent or hard shampoos when washing the vehicle, as they can damage the paint or finish. Instead, only use a mild, neutral pH car shampoo.

•

External contaminants such as bird droppings, adhesives, insects, and tree sap should be removed promptly and gently from the painted surface before pre-washing. Avoid applying excessive pressure to prevent damage to the paint.

•

Dry dust should not be wiped off, it may lead to permanent scratch marks, which are especially noticeable on matte colours compared to glossy colours. If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash the vehicle with only water to remove excess dirt before proceeding with a full wash.

•

Avoid using automatic car washers with high-pressure brushes, as they can damage the vehicle's surface. It's advisable to use automatic car washers without high-pressure brushes for a gentler cleaning process.

•

Do not apply paint protectors such as wax polish, ceramic coating, or any other surface treatments on matte painted surfaces, as they can cause permanent damage to the paint film.

•

Avoid using paper towels, dirty, or rough cloths to clean or wipe the car, as they can cause scratches. It’s recommended to use only microfiber cloths or sponges for a safe and effective clean.

•

It's recommended not to apply anything to the painted surface, such as stickers, foils, magnetic labels, or masking tapes, as they can cause adhesive transfer, potentially leaving permanent stains.

•

It is advisable to protect vehicle from Greasy, Oily products which may leave stains on paint film, difficult to remove.

•

Recommended to visit an Authorized Mahindra workshops for any paint related repairs.

15.9.5 Paint Chips

•

Mahindra dealers have the exact touch-up paint to match your vehicle's color

•

Take your vehicle to an Mahindra Authorised Dealer for paint touch-up or paint repairs

•

Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips

•

Always read the instructions before using the products

15.9.6 Alloy Wheels and Wheel Caps (if equipped)

Alloy wheels and wheel caps are coated with a clear coat of paint finish. In order to maintain their shine:

•

Clean weekly with wheel and Tyre cleaner, which is available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water

•

Never apply any cleaning chemicals to hot or warm wheel rims or covers

•

Do not use hydro fluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergents

15.9.7 Plastic (Non-painted) Exterior Parts

Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are available with your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. You can use these cleaners:

For routine cleaning of plastic parts

For tar or grease spots

For plastic head lamp lenses

15.9.8 Windows and Wiper Blades

The front/rear windshield, side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle's glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial vehicle washes, water repellent coatings, tree sap, or other organic contamination; these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield.

To clean these items, follow the below tips:

•

The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer

•

The wiper blades can be cleaned with alcohol or Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate, available at your Mahindra Authorised Dealer. This washer fluid contains a special solution in addition to alcohol which helps remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly

•

Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches

•

Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any glass parts

If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water.

Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to remove decals, as it may cause damage to the glass or rear windshield heater grid lines (if equipped).

15.9.9 Interior Maintenance

For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats:

•

Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner

•

Remove light stains and soil with carpet and upholstery cleaner

•

If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first with a stain remover

•

Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame- retardant abilities of the seat materials

•

Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.

15.9.10 Display Maintenance & Cleaning

Display Maintenance (DID/CID):

Display is a precise electrical product and the surface is covered with soft optical film/coating. Therefore user should take necessary precaution and care for cleaning the display visible surface.

Abuse loads should not be applied to the top or sides of the display for holding or any other purpose.

Cleaning the display area:

•

It is recommended to use soft and micro-fiber lint free cloth to clean the display visible surface.

•

Wipe gently. Do not rub, as the optical film is sensitive to scratch formation.

•

Be careful for scratch by hard matter like finger nail or steel wool.

•

Do not try to peel off the optical film or coating on the screen, since it is attached strongly.

•

Do not add another commercial optical film on to the display visible area.

•

Do not touch the screen with oily/dirty/wet moisturized fingers as the optical film is very sensitive to stains. Incase of such an event please clean with soft cloth immediately.

•

The display visible surface must not come in contact with sharp objects or regular day to day ornaments like finger rings, watches, bracelets, bangles, vehicle keys etc…

•

When you find a scratch on the screen, do not wipe it strongly. Otherwise it will worsen.

•

Antiseptic solution must not be used for cleaning, since it is not pure alcohol. This may cause stains and/ or discoloration.

Display care: Your BE 6 has an exquisite display integrated with high-end technology. To keep the display looking new and pristine, wipe the display with a clean soft cloth.

Continued usage of display with dust or dirt can create micro-scratches do not wipe dust or dirt with dry rough cloth or by hand

15.9.11 Instrument Panel/Interior Trim

Use only soft micro fiber, dry cloth to clean Instrument Panel/Interior Trim.

Clean the instrument panel/Interior trim areas with neutral PH soap and water using soft micro fiber / cotton cloth / sponge, then with a clean and dry white cotton cloth; you may also use Dash and Vinyl Cleaner on the instrument panel and interior trim areas.

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the glass of the upper portion of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection

•

Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument pane and interior trim

If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on the interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:

•

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth

•

Apply vinyl cleaner to the wiped area and spread around evenly

•

Apply cleaner to a clean white cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled area and allow this to set in at room temperature for 30 minutes

•

Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean the area with a rubbing motion for 60 seconds

•

Following this, wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth

Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel.

15.9.12 Leather Seats (where applicable)

Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the leather:

•

To clean, use a soft micro fiber / cotton / sponge cloth with a leather and vinyl with approved cleaners. Dry the area with a soft cloth

•

To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the leather care kit, available from an Mahindra Authorised Dealer

•

Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of the clear, protective coating

In some instances, a color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing meets leather upholstery. If this occurs, clean the leather immediately to avoid permanent staining.

15.9.13 Air Conditioning System Maintenance

Your vehicle's air-conditioning is a sealed system. Any major maintenance, such as refrigerant recharging should be done by a qualified technician. However, you can do a few things by yourself to make sure the air conditioning works efficiently.

Run the air-conditioning system at least once a week, even during the cold weather months. Run it for at least ten minutes at normal operating temperature. This circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.

Whenever you get the air-conditioning system serviced, make sure the service facility uses a refrigerant recycling system. This system captures the refrigerant for re-use. Releasing the refrigerant into the atmosphere may cause damage to the environment.

15.9.14 Vehicle Storage

If the resting period is greater than 30 days, disconnect the negative terminal of the low voltage battery. This reduces the loss of charge for both low voltage and high voltage batteries. For battery cable disconnect frunk need to be removed.

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air mode and high blower speed setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

It is recommended storing the vehicle in a covered, clean, dry, well levelled, ventilated and closed place. Avoid parking or storing the vehicle in extremely hot or freezing conditions for extended periods, as this can lead to battery degradation. High-voltage components are sensitive to extreme environmental conditions.

When your vehicle is idle and unplugged, it uses energy from the battery to recharge the low voltage battery as needed.

Avoid parking for extended periods in unsuitable environments, such as areas with high heat reflection, to prevent vehicle damage caused by overheating.

15.9.15 Service Reminder Alert

The service reminder alert is to notify the driver/user when the next scheduled service is approaching. This alert is displayed on the CID and become active when the ignition is turned ON.

It will start showing up 500 kilometers before the service is due, providing a timely reminder to ensure the vehicle is serviced on schedule.

Alert will be reset by Mahindra Authorised Service Dealer after completion of every service (or)

Follow the below procedure to reset the service reminder alert by user.

Navigate to alert history page in CID Home screen

Ensure Service reminder alert is visible in the CID notification center

Press and hold OK button in the steering wheel switch

Turn ignition OFF and turn ON, Release OK button <= 5 seconds after ignition ON

Check and ensure service reminder alert is not visible in the CID Home Screen Notification Center

15.10 Wheels and Tyres

15.10.1 Tyre Information

RADIAL TYRES OR BIAS-PLY TYRE

“TUBELESS” OR “TUBE TYPE”

TYRE SIZE

MAX. LOAD LIMIT

TREAD WEAR

15.10.2 Tyre Rating

Your vehicle is originally equipped with tyres supplied by a reputable manufacturer. If you ever have any questions regarding your tyres, please refer to literature supplied by the tyre manufacturer, or to the separate tyre warranty provided by the tyre manufacturer. You may also contact Mahindra Authorised Dealer directly, or the tyre manufacturer.

The tyre rating of BE 6 is:

•

245/60 R18 Opt: 245/55 R19 and 245/50 R20 XL

•

Temporary Spare Tyre T135/80 R18

Tyre rating is explained as below:

Tyre size (Example: 245/55 R19 103 V)

Callout (A): 245 (Three-digit number): This number gives the width in millimeters of the tyre from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. This is called as “Section Width”.

Callout (B): 55 (Two-digit number): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tyres ratio of height to section width.

Callout (C): R: This is the Tyre Construction Code. The “R” stands for Radial.

Callout (D): 19 (Two-digit number): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

Callout (E) : 103 (Two or three-digit number) : This number is the tyres load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tyre can support.

Callout (F): V: Tyre speed rating or speed symbol. Never drive the vehicle faster than the tyre speed rating. The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tyre is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure.

15.10.3 Speed Rating

SPEED SYMBOL	MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY	SPEED SYMBOL	MAX. SPEED CAPABILITY
SPEED SYMBOL	KM/HR	SPEED SYMBOL	KM/HR
L	120	T	190
M	130	U	200
N	140	H	210
P	150	V	240
Q	160	W	270
R	170	Y	300
S	180	Z	240+

15.10.4 Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard)

Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard) is located on the driver side inner B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about tyre size designed for your vehicle, and the tyre inflation pressures for the front & rear tyres.

Never overload your vehicle. Overloading can cause tyre failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Improper inflated tyres can adversely affect vehicle handling or can fail unexpectedly, resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

15.10.5 Tyre Pressure

Proper Tyre inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper Tyre pressure:

•

Safety

•

Economy

•

Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Tyre tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier Tyre replacement. Under inflation also increases Tyre rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

The proper cold Tyre inflation pressure is listed in the Tyre Label (Vehicle Placard), located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar.

15.10.6 Inspection and Adjustment Procedure

The Tyre pressure should be checked and adjusted, as well as inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pressure gauge to check Tyre pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial Tyres may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated. At the same time, each Tyre should be inspected for signs of Tyre wear or visible damage.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold Tyre inflation pressures. Cold Tyre inflation pressure is defined as the Tyre pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 km after a three-hour period. Check Tyre pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as Tyre pressures vary with temperature changes. Tyre pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 7°C of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking Tyre pressure inside a garage, especially in the winter.

When it was new, the spare Tyre in your vehicle was fully inflated. However, a spare Tyre can lose pressure over time. In order to avoid being stranded, check the spare Tyre air pressure frequently.

15.10.7 Inflating Your Tyres

Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your Tyres are properly inflated. Remember that a Tyre can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat.

At least once a month or before long trips, inspect each Tyre and check the Tyre pressure with a Tyre gauge (including spare Tyre). Inflate all Tyres to the recommended inflation pressure.

Under-inflation is the most common cause of Tyre failures and may result in severe Tyre cracking, tread separation or “blowout,” with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the Tyre. It also may result in unnecessary Tyre stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control and accidents.

Always inflate your Tyres to the recommended pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the Tyre. The recommended Tyre inflation pressure is found on the Tyre Label which is located on the front passenger side inner B-pillar. Failure to follow the Tyre pressure recommendations can cause uneven tread wear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.

If you overfill the Tyre, release air by pushing the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure.

After inspecting or adjusting the Tyre pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the stem, resulting in an unexpected loss of Tyre pressure, an accident and/or personal injury.

15.10.8 Radial Ply Tyres

Combining radial ply Tyres with other types of Tyres on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury. Always use radial Tyres in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of Tyres.

Cuts and punctures in radial Tyres are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your Mahindra Authorised Dealer for radial Tyre repairs.

15.10.9 Asymmetrical Tyres

Asymmetrical tyres are designed with different tread patterns on the inner and outer edges to optimize performance. The outer section is often stiffer, providing better grip during cornering, while the inner section helps with water dispersion and stability.

Ensure the sidewall labeled "Outside" faces outward when the tyre is mounted. This is crucial for proper performance. Incorrect positioning can compromise tyre performance and safety, so always double-check.

15.10.10 Foam Tyres

Foam-filled tires, helps significantly reduce the cabin noise by absorbing vibrations and road sounds. This technology, particularly beneficial for electric vehicles (EVs), enhances the overall driving experience by creating a quieter and more comfortable ride. As EVs are naturally quieter than traditional vehicles, foam tires further minimize tire noise, offering a smoother, more serene journey.

Follow the below procedure to repair the punctured foam tyre (Less than 4mm)

1. Removing Nail from tyre

•

Locate and Mark the area from outside where the injury found.

•

Remove the nail using an appropriate tool.

•

Remove the Debris from tyre tread using suitable tool such us Pari of Pliers.

•

Apply lubricant to the spiral shaft of the reamer tool. This will help to probe the hold and temporarily separate the steel belts without damage.

2. Cleaning the punctured hole

•

Insert the reamer into the Puncture hole and push in rotating the handle to clean the hole.

•

Reinflate tyre to help with insertion of cord.

•

Thread the Repair cord through the eye of the insertion tool until equal parts are either side of the tool. Lubricant may be added to the tip to make insertion easier.

3. Thread insertion in punctured hole

•

Firmly push the insertion tool and cord into the tyre until the sleeve is fully home against the tyre.A small amount of the card should still be visible.

•

Reinflate the tyre to check the leakage.

•

Check the repair regularly.

Follow the below procedure to repair the punctured foam tyre (More than 4mm)

1. Removing Nail from tyre

•

Dismantle the Tyre & Wheel Assembly

•

Locate and Mark the area from outside and inside where the injury found.

•

Remove the nail using an appropriate tool.

2. Removing Foam from Damaged location

•

Identity the damage area precisely in the foam and mark a 10X10 cm2 Square in the Foam

•

Distance can be changed according to severity of damage or tool which is using. Try to minimalize the cutting area of Foam

•

Cut the Foam in the Marked area with knife

Tyre inner liner should not get damaged

3. Tyre Inside (removed Foam)

•

Remove the cut foam and prepare the puncture hole by Pneumatic drilling using steel cutter with appropriate grid rating. This will remove contaminations in puncture hole and also provide better adhesion to mushroom patch

4. Inner Liner marking

•

Measure the size of Damage and select appropriate patch (preferably Mushroom Patch for Nails) & Mark the damage on inner liner according to patch size.

5. Buffing Damaged Area

•

Buff the area for good texture for better adhesion using spherical buffing tool. Recommended texture standard – RMA 1 or 2

6. Application of Vulcanizers

•

Clean the Area and coat the buffed area with a chemical vulcanizing solution with a clean brush. Apply it evenly and completely

•

Allow it to dry (Recommended time 5min)

7. Mushroom Patch

•

Mean time take the selected patch of Mushroom and remove the film without touching the surface Apply the vulcanizing solution to the patch stem and bottom side also. Allow it to dry (recommended time 5 min)

•

Insert the stem head from inside

8. Inserting Mushroom Patch

•

Insert the stem head from inside and push gently until the head appear in the other side

9. Pulling the stem

•

Once it is outside pull the head with a nose player smoothly that the stem bottom is sticking firmly inside tyre

10. Stitching Mushroom patch

•

Stitch the bottom of the patch from center to sidewise using a hand stitcher

11. Finishing

•

Cut the excess stem in level of tyre surface using knife without pulling it or stretching it

Checking Point: Mount the repaired tire on Rim , inflate and check repaired portion for leak from outside using Soap solution After Puncture repair or New tyre replacement, TPMS configuration to be done.

15.10.11 Tread Wear Assessment

Tyre wear can be assessed by looking the tyre wear indicator (TWI). The TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread when the tyre wears out to the minimum allowed tread depth of 1.6 mm

Tyre Wear Indicator (TWI)

A mark of triangle in the Tyre side wall indicates the position of the Tyre wear indicators at 6 to 9 locations around the circumference of the tyre.

The TWI appear as raised portions inside the tread in a new or partially worn tyre (A).

As the tyre wears out to its minimum allowable tread depth, the TWI will appear as a band across the tyre tread (B).

The tyre should be replaced at this stage or before this stage.

New Tread (A)	Worn Tread (B)

It is extremely dangerous to drive with worn out tyres on wet roads/rainy seasons. The vehicle can skid and aquaplane on wet surfaces, if the tyre tread depth is insufficient.

Replace the tyre before the tyre tread depth reached the minimum acceptable limit.

15.10.12 Life of Tyre

The service life of a Tyre is dependent upon various factors including but not limited to:

•

Driving style

•

Tyre pressure

•

Distance driven

Tyres and the spare Tyre should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden and unexpected Tyre failure, leading to an accident and/or personal injury.

Keep dismounted Tyres in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect Tyres from contact with oil, grease and fuels.

Do not use a Tyre, wheel size or speed rating other than that specified for your vehicle on the Tyre placard. Combinations of unapproved Tyres and wheels may change suspension geometric and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling, stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control of the vehicle or the Tyre can unexpectedly fail, resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

Replacing original Tyres with Tyres of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

15.10.13 Snow Chains

Snow chains cannot be used on these Tyres.

In case of harsh winter driving conditions, it is recommended using winter Tyres with the same specifications for better stability, safety and performance.

15.10.14 Tyre Rotation Recommendations

Applicable for 4 Alloy/Steel wheels :It is recommended rotating the Tyres as per the “Maintenance Schedule”.

The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the diagram. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-road type Tyres.

Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Follow the recommended Tyre rotation frequency for your type of driving. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

It is not recommended to use the temporary spare tyre for routine tyre rotation.

15.10.15 Temporary Spare Wheel

Regular Tyre	Temporary Tyre

The spare wheel provided on your vehicle is for temporary purpose only. Do not use the spare wheel for continuous running. Extended use or high-speed driving with the temporary wheel may compromise vehicle stability and increase the risk if tyre failure.

When Using the Temporary Spare Wheel

•

Temporary Spare Wheel provided specifically designed for your vehicle.

•

Drive the shortest possible distance with Temporary Spare Wheel.

•

While using Temporary spare wheel reduce speed, Avoid sharp cornering, Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations that cause sudden braking.

When Temporary Spare Wheel is fitted in the vehicle

The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may not operate correctly:

ABS, Cruise control (If equipped) EPS, Rear View monitor system (If equipped), Navigation system (If equipped)

Speed Limit when using Temporary Spare tyre

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 80 km/h when a Temporary Spare Wheel is installed on the vehicle.

The temporary Spare Wheel is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failure to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

•

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the Temporary Spare tyre compared to when driving with standard tyres. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

•

Inflate the tyres as per manufacturers recommendation, refer Tyre pressure label on the door panel

•

Do not fit tyre chains to the Temporary spare tyre.
Tyre chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

•

Tyre to be loaded within the max allowable load limit specified by the load rating index marked on the tyre.

•

Tyre to be operated with in the speed limit specified by the speed rating index marked on the tyre

•

The tread depth of temporary tyre is lesser compared to regular tyre. Hence do not use the temporary tyre for longer distance than recommended. Repair & refit the regular tyre as soon as possible.

•

Recommended to drive Max 50 km in a stretch or reach nearest Mahindra authorised dealer

15.10.16 Changing a Flat Tyre

Refer “Changing a Flat Tyre” section in the Emergency Situations chapter for more details.

15.10.17 Wheel Tightness

When you change a wheel, remove all rust and dirt at all locations where the wheel contacts the wheel hub. Use a scraper or wire brush to be sure that you remove all rust and dirt. A loose wheel could have damaged or elongated the holes in the rim, or damaged the rim/hub assembly. If any of the wheel bolts are damaged, contact the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer.

Always tighten the bolts in a crisscross sequence. Never use oil or grease on your wheel bolts.

Never overtighten the bolts on the wheel. You could damage the bolt.

Torque tighten the wheel bolts to the specified value at the nearest Mahindra Authorised Dealer .

Do not use a nut runner to tighten the wheel bolt

The tyres and wheel rims fitted in this vehicle meet the requirements of BIS and they comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicles Rules (CMVR) 1989.

15.11 Fuses & Relays

A fuse is the most common electric protection device. A fuse is placed in an electrical circuit, so that when current flow exceeds the rating of the fuse, it blows off.

The element in the fuse melts, opening the circuit and preventing other components of the circuit from being damaged by the over current. The size of the metal fuse element determines the rating. Once a fuse blows off, it must be replaced with a new one.

You can identify a blown fuse by a break in the filament. All fuses except high current fuses are push fit. A fuse puller should be used to remove the fuse from its position.

Before handling any fuses, always switch off the ignition, lights, and all electrical equipment to prevent the risk of electrical shock or short circuits

Never replace a fuse with one of a different rating, as this may cause electrical damage or create a fire hazard.

Fuse replacements or electrical repairs should only be performed by a Mahindra Authorized Service Center or a qualified workshop. Improper handling may result in serious damage to the vehicle’s electrical system

Fuse puller is available at the motor compartment fuse box.

15.11.1 Motor Compartment Fuse Box

Motor compartment fuse box is located adjacent to vehicle LV battery.

For Frunk removal, Refer “Frunk removal section” for more details.

To open the fuse box cover, press the lock and push the cover back and lift it.

Spare fuses are provided in the fuse box for replacement of blown fuses. Ensure the correct rating fuse is replaced with the blown fuse.

Fuse Layout :

FUSE NO.	Circuit	FUSE RATING
F1	Spare	20A
F2	Rear Power Window Mid Zonal ECU Bat 2 & 3 (Batt Saver)	30A
F3	Power Window RH (Batt Saver)	30A
F4	Spare	15A
F5	Tail Lamp BSO LH, TSO (Batt Saver)	15A
F6	Power Window LH (Batt Saver)	30A
F7	Front Wlc, Rear Wlc, Power Seat Vent,Batt Saver EC (Batt Saver)	10A
F8	Spare	5A
F9	Tail Bso Rh (Batt Saver)	5A
F10	Ambient Light,Mars Roof, Ahd Camera (Rall-E) (Batt Saver)	15A
F11	Roof Lamp (Batt Saver)	5A
F12	Spare	10A
F13	Spare	10A
F14	Hpc-C,Cid,Did (B+)	20A
F15	Mid Zonal Batt 1 (B+)	25A
F16	Front Zonal Batt 1 (B+)	25A
F17	Lv-Msd (B+)	10A
F18	Airbag (B+)	10A
F19	Kick Sensor , Ssb Capsense,Vess Sw (B+) Sbw&Icc (B+)	10A
F20	Spare	5A
F21	Hpc-C, Hvac (Ign 1)	5A
F22	Gateway Controller, Driver Side Switch, Ign Relay 1 F/B(Ign 1)	5A
F23	Front Zonal Batt 3 (B+)	20A
F24	Front Zonal Batt 2 (B+)	30A
F25	Gateway Controller (B+)	5A
F26	Spare	7.5A
F27	Steering Wheel Switch (B+)	10A
F28	Obd 16p, Power Seat Sw, Nfc, Pwr Win Lin, Hvac (B+)	7.5A
F29	Adas 5r1v & 1r1v , Rls & Ohc (B+)	5A
F30	Rear Blower(B+) (Not Applicable)	10A
F31	Accessory	15A
F32	Spare	20A
F33	Spare	10A
F34	Hud & Escl(B+)	7.5A
F35	EC IGN (VCU, BMS, MCU, ABS, HL, IEB, Cooling Fan) (Ign 1)	10A
F36	Airbag (Ign 1)	5A
F37	Rvc (Ign 1)	5A
F38	Spare	5A
F39	SBW (Ign 1)	5A
F40	Spare	7.5A
F41	Spare	5A
F42	Mid Zonal, ICC, VESS SW (IGN 1)	5A
F43	Rear Fog (Export) (Ign 1)	10A
F44	HUD, APAS, FRONT WLC, REAR WLC, ADAS 5R1V, 1R1V (IGN 2)	7.5A
F45	Spare	25A
F46	Front, Rear Power Usb (Ign 2)	20A
F47	Spare	15A
F48	Power Win Lin & Sub Sw (Batt Saver)	5A
F49	Ign Relay 2 F/B (Ign 2)	5A
F50	Spare	5A
F51	Front Zonal Batt 4 (B+)	25A
F52	Spare	30A
F53	Mid Zonal Batt 4 (B+)	15A
F54	Amplifier (B+)	30A
*– Based on Applicability

15.11.2 Instrument Panel Fuse Box Opening Procedure

Wide open the driver door and slide the driver seat backwards. This fuse box as located below the Instrument Panel on the driver side

Follow the below procedure to access the IP fuse box,

•

Partially detach the front RHS side door static panel seal.

•

Pull & remove the IP RH side cover.

•

Using a star screw driver, loosen and remove the IP driver lower trim bottom mounting star screws.

•

Partially detach the IP driver lower trim assembly.

•

Remove all the electrical connectors from IP driver lower trim and outward the panel to access the Instrument Panel fuse box.

Fuses
Fuse No.	Circuit	Fuse Rating
F1	Spare	_
F2	IP Batt 1	60A
F3	Spare	_
F4	VCU Main Relay	30A
F5	Ieb Motor	40A
F6	IP Batt 2	60A
F7	IP Batt 3	60A
F8	IEB ECU & Solenoid	40A
F9	Spare	_
F10	Front Blower	40A
F11	Spare	_
F12	IP Batt 4	60A
F13	Front Wiper	20A
F14*	Adas 5r1v Apas	10A
F15	Horn Batt	20A
F16	Bms Batt	_
F17	Spare	_
F18	Vcu Permbatt	10A
F19	Spare	_
F20	Hl Batt Saver	30A
F21	Spare	_
F22	Spare	_
F23	LV Compressor	5A
F24	Spare	_
F25*	Rear Wiper	15A
F26	Solenoid Valve Front	5A
F27	Spare	_
F28	LV Bms Sensor Batt (Ibs)	5A
F29	Ocdc Batt & Mcu	10A
F30	Spare	_
F31	Batt Heater & Charge Port Lamp Chiller & Solenoid Valve Coil	10A
F32	Hl Ign	5A
F33	BMS, MCU, EPS Cooling Fan (Ign)	5A
F34	IEB Ecu (Ign)	5A
F35	VCU Wake Up (Ign)	5A
F36	EPT Cooling Pump	5A
F37	4 Way Coolant Valve, 3 Way Coolant Valve & Ags	10A
F38	Spare	_
F39	Battery Cooling Pump	20A
F40	Brake Sw	10A
F41	Head Lamp Lh/ Signature Lamp/ Carpet Lamp Lh	20A
F42	VCU Batt (Main O/P)	30A
F43	Head Lamp Rh/Carpet Lamp Rh	20A
F44	EPS Motor	125A
F45	Radiator Fan	80A
F46	Spare	_
* - If equipped

Relays
Relay No.	Relay Type	Application Detail
R1	12V 20A MICRO RLY 4P	Front Solenoid Valve Relay
R2	12V 35A MICRO RLY 4P	Batt Saver Relay
R3	12V 20A MICRO RLY 4P	Horn Relay
R4*	12V 20A MICRO RLY 5P	Rear Wiper Relay
R5	12V 40A MINI RLY 4P	Vcu Main Relay
* - If equipped